FCR2XX7 Service Manual C

MARINE RADAR/ARPA
FCR-2107/2807 series
FCR-2117/2127
FCR-2817/2827
FCR-2827W
FCR-2137S/2837S
FCR-2837SW
The paper used in this manual
is elemental chlorine free.
・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN
Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax : +81-(0)798-65-4200
All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : JAN . 2009

B : AUG . 18, 2010
Pub. No. SME-35590-B
(NAYO ) FCR-2107/2807 SER. *00017007610*
*00017007610*
* 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 7 6 1 0 *
2/3
11) Two detailed AIS target data are displayed in the data area, instead of four
target data. The new standard requires more detailed AIS target data.
Function (Italic font: Related page in OM)

1) Reference point is selectable to either CCRP (Consistent Common Reference
Point) or ANT position. – Range and bearing are always measured from the
reference point.
2) The trail operates in the same presentation mode as the past position display
of AIS and TT.
3) The delay time is added in Static Trial Maneuvering mode.
4) The true scale of AIS symbol is turned on and off.
5) The filter function (AIS DISP, Lost target, and CPA auto activate) is added to
display AIS and TT targets.
6) Serial communication of alarm data (ALR and ACK sentences) is added.
7) DROP MARK function is added.
8) The operation of the interswitch function is changed; The interswitch is set in
the similar method to RJ-7.
9) The AIS memory is increased from 1000 points to 1500 points.
10) Chart Priority and Coast Line Only functions are added. P2-49
11) “Symbol Display” menu is added. Items related to the symbol are moved from
the chart menu to the symbol display menu.
12) Assigning alert priority is added. P20-4
13) Speed selection menu is added. The selected speed is used for true trial and
ture vector indications. P2-9
Others (Not requested by new standard)

1) Anchor watch function is added. P2-46
2) Low Level Echo option for deleting the weak echo from the screen is added in
Picture menu.
3) Displaying Navtex messages is added. P17-1
Documents for V06.03 software are;
Name Type Code number Remarks

Installation manual IME-35590-C 00015804312 FCR-2xx7/21x7-BB
Installation manual IME-35610-B 00015805811 FCR-2x37S/2137S-BB
Installation manual IME-35640-B 00015805911 FCR-2827W/2837SW
Operator’s manual OME-35590-C 00015804112
Operator’s Guide OSE-35590-B 00015804511
3/3
New IMO modification kit, FCR-21x7/28x7 is supplied with the following code number.
Parts Name: New IMO modification kit

Type: FCR-21x7/28x7
Code No.: 00108776000
The kit includes a CD-ROM, manuals, a label, and documents as below.
Parts name Type Code Number

Operator’s manual OME-35590-C 00015804112
Operator’s Guide OSE-35590-B 00015804511
CD-ROM (06.**) 0359233 00102026001
CAT label 03-173-9012-0 10034949010
Old software V05.xx CD-ROM is supplied with the following code number.
Parts name Type Code Number

CD-ROM (05.**) 0359233 00102026000
How to update software from V05.xx to V06.03
1. Update the software referring to the attachment.

2. Peel off the USCG label.
3. Place the CAT label as shown in Fig.1.
4. Supply the operator’s manual and operator’s guide compliance with V06.03.
USCG label
Fig.1 CAT label on EC-1000C

(12/2009)
FCR-2xx7 Update Procedure

Following describes how to update FCR-2xx7 from V05.xx to V06.xx.
Unit to be updated
Unit Type Software Version (previous/current)

1) ECDIS Processor Unit EC-1000C 0.5.xx/0.6.03
2) LAN Adapter Unit EC-1010 0.5.xx/0.6.03
3) Radar Processor Unit RPU-016 0359204-02.xx/03.09
Necessary Tools
Followings are necessary to update the chart radar.
(1) USB or PS/2 mouse and keyboard for updating ECDIS processor, EC-1000C
(2) Serial cross cable for updating LAN adapter, EC-1010
(3) DVI monitor, Radar control head (RCU-014 or –015), and Master (Program) card
for updating radar processor unit, RPU-016
The radar processor unit can also be updated by replacing the SPU board with new
software, V03.09, available with the following code number.
Parts Name Type Code Number Remarks
SPU board 03P9337A(LF) 00856736000 V03.09
Note: If you need V02.41 SPU board, downgrade the SPU board. The V02.41 SPU
board is no longer available.
Software Update Procedure
Notes
(1) Delete old files, or parameters and initial settings because the V06.xx file format
differs from the V05.xx format.
(2) Perform SENC conversion after updating.
(3) Update the radar with other radars being turned off to prevent duplicate IP
addresses. Set the radar number by using the following steps after updating.
1. Select Menu > Initial Settings > Radar Initialize > Page2.
2. Change the Radar Number from 1 to 2 for example.
3. Turn off the radar and turn it on again.
1/11
(12/2009)
Step
1. Copy following data onto a floppy disk or

the virus-scanned USB memory.
(a) Route
(b) User chart
(c) Pilot data (Notes)
(d) Installation parameters
2. Photograph following settings.
(a) Picture settings

MENU > Picture1 to 4, NEAR FAR,
NEAR BOUY, FAR BOUY, ROUGH
SEA, SHIP, HARBOUR, COAST,
total 12 items
(b) Radar Initialization
1 MENU > Initial Settings > Radar
Initialize, pages 1 to 3
(c) Ship parameters
Menu > Initial Settings > Navigation
parameter > Ship and Route
Parameters
(d) Forwarding distances

Menu > Initial Settings > Navigation
parameter > Forwarding distances
(GO TO TRACK and GO TO WPT)
(e) Planning parameters
Menu > Initial Settings >
Optimization parameters > Planning
parameters
Updating Radar Processor Unit, RPU-016
1. Turn off the radar processor unit, RPU-

016.
2. Connect the DVI monitor and radar control
head to the unit.
3. Insert the Master card (V03.09).
2 4. Turn on the unit. The unit is updated
automatically.
5. Turn off the unit.
6. Remove the Master card and turn on the
unit.
7. Perform FACTORY DEFAULT.
8. Turn off the unit and on it again.

2/11
(12/2009)
Step
9. Carry out Factory Test and verify the

software version.
10. Turn off the unit and disconnect the DVI
monitor and radar control head.
Updating ECDIS Processor Unit, EC-1000C
1. Turn off the ECDIS processor unit, EC-

1000C.
2. Connect the mouse and keyboard.
3. Terminate the chart radar program.
3 (Select ECAWATCH by using Alt and
Tab keys. Click Shutdown the Chart
Radar.)
4. Terminate other programs by using Alt
and F4 keys.
5. Terminate Control Head.exe by clicking
X button.
1. Insert the chart radar program CD-ROM

into the DVD-ROM drive.
2. Select Start > RUN.
3. Enter D:\install\setup and press Enter.
Click Yes.
3/11
(12/2009)
Step
Click Next.
If you have the display right, click No and

follow the instructions.
6 After changing the settings, take step 4.
Setup Type
Select CHART RADAR and click Next.

7
User Info
Confirm that Password is ecdis, and then

8 click Next.
Choose Destination Location
Confirm that Destination Folder is

9
C:\ants_system, and then click Next.
Select Components
Tick following boxes.

10
1) S57 Sencs
2) Control Head
3) Disable WindowsXP Task Scheduler
4/11
(12/2009)
Step
C-Map ed3 Settings
Tick this box, and then click Next.

11
Hasp Info
Hasp Pin number is 2371.

12
If XXXX is displayed, enter 2371.
Then, click Next.
Share Info
Leave these settings unchanged.

13 AntsSystem: ANTS_SYSTEM
CD-ROM: cd_drive
Click Next.
Set Control Head parameters
Default settings are;

COM Port: COM2
14 Brilliance: 255
Alarm Tone: 4
Alarm Volume: 7
Leave these settings unchanged.
Click Next.
Monitor Parameters
This page selects the monitor type.
Monitor Port is set to COM1.

15
Click Next.
5/11
(12/2009)
Step
Set IP addresses and parameters
When two chart radars are installed, one is set

to First and the other is Second.
16
When two LAN adapters are installed, check
both Install 1 and Install 2.
Click Next.
System Cleanup
When updating the system from V05.xx to

V06.XX, tick all boxes.
In other cases, tick only Log files.

17
If the file does not exist, the line does not
appear.
NOTE: Ticked file is deleted after updating.
Click Next.
InstallShield Wizard Complete
Select Yes, I want to restart computer now,

18 and then click Finish.
The system reboots automatically. Wait until

the chart radar program boots up.
Confirm that the indicated software version is

06.03 at the lower right hand of the screen.
20
Restore the backup data. (This step may be

carried out later.)
Enter radar parameters.
1) Picture settings
MENU > Picture1 to 4, NEAR FAR,
NEAR BOUY, FAR BOUY, ROUGH
SEA, SHIP, HARBOUR, COAST, total 12
21 items
2) Radar Initialization
MENU > Initial Settings > Radar
Initialize, pages 1 and 2 and Ant Select
in page 3
Leave other settings in page 3 unchanged.
6/11
(12/2009)
Step
If the “SHIP.PRM corrupted” message

appears, check that the following settings are
in range.
1) Menu > Initial Settings > Navigation

parameters
22 - Ship and Route Parameters
- Forwarding distances (GO TO TRACK
and GO TO WPT)
2) Menu > Initial Settings > Optimization
parameters
- Planning parameters
If the “SHIP.PRM corrupted” message is like

right, reenter (delete and enter the same
value) all parameters because the data is
corrupted or the system does not read the set
data.
1) Menu > Initial Settings > Navigation

23 parameters
- Ship and Route Parameters
- Forwarding distances
(GO TO TRACK and GO TO WPT)
2) Menu > Initial Settings > Optimization

parameters
- Planning parameters
Select Initial Settings > Installation parameters

> AIS transponder.
Verify that the page includes ETA display

24 option.
ETA display: Type Approved (default)

> Alarm Inputs + Outputs / AMWSS.
Verify that the page includes Relay outputs

option.
25
Relay outputs: Relays energized when no
alarm (default)
7/11
(12/2009)
Step

> Dual Axis Log.
Verify that Sign Positive is set to “for Ahead”

26 as default.
This default setting of V05.41 is for Astern.

> Engine Control.
Verify that “Propulsion Control Position

Available” is added to this page.
27
Propulsion Control Position Available: YES
(default)

> Radar Processor Alarm Relays.
Verify that Anchor Watch option is added in

this page.
28

> Alarm Inputs/External.
(New feature)
Yet this feature is not tested for all equipment,

except for FA-150, leave all boxes unchecked.
29
With FA-150 connected, the alarm ACK signal
is sent from the ECDIS to AIS.
If this box is checked and the system does not

work properly, the yellow sensor message
appears.
8/11
(12/2009)
Step

> Central Alarm Output.
(New feature)
30 This software can receive the ALR signal from

and transmit the ACK signal to the central
alarm system.

> NAVTEX Receiver.
(New feature)
31
This software can receive the Navtex
message.
Select the type of Navtex messages and areas
to be received.

> Chart Radar Target Output.
32
Shut down the Chart radar program and get

into Windows.
Select Control Panel > Power Options >

Power Schemes.
33 Confirm following settings.

Turn off monitor: Never
Turn off hard disks: Never
System standby: Never (Some sets does
not display this line.)
9/11
(12/2009)
Step
Select Control Panel > Power Options >

Advanced.
Ensure that ”When I press the sleep button on

my computer” is set to ”Do nothing” (NOT
34 “Stand-by”). Does not always appear
Do nothing
Select Control Panel > Administrative tools >

Services > Task Scheduler > General
Confirm the following settings.

Startup type: Disabled
35
Service Status: Stopped
Move the cursor over the time indication at

the lower left corner of the screen and then
right-click.
36 Select Adjust Date/Time > Internet Time.
Ensure that ”Automatically synchronize

with…” is NOT checked.
Carry out SENC conversion.
1. Select Chart Catalogue in Chart menu.

2. Click Edit Group, and then New.
3. Type a group name and click OK.
4. Select all cells except for 7C, AA and Z in
“Outside” box.
37
5. Click << to move selected cells from Outside
box to Inside box.
6. Click Done and close Chart Catalogue
window.
7. Select SENC Conversion in Chart menu.
8. Select the group made in above steps.
9. Click Convert.
10/11
(12/2009)
Step
Update the LAN adapter.

38 (779 LAN adapter 1 version error should not
appear.)
39 Carry out Tune initialization if necessary.
11/11
2/2
The replacement of CPU fan differs between two CPU coolers as below.
(a) When changing fan of AVC cooler
The fan is replaced with the NMB fan assembly. The cover used for old fan is
not used.
(b) When changing fan of Cooljag cooler
Disassemble the supplied NMB fan assembly. Replace the old fan with the
new fan (2806KL-04W-B69 -B50). The plate, screws and nuts removed from
the NMB fan assembly are not used.
Note
The CPU fan replacement is carried out with the CPU board placed on the flat
surface to keep the heat sink as still as possible. If the heat sink moves, the thermal
contact resistance of the CPU/heat sink increases, because the heat sink compound
hardens.
Necessary Parts
Parts name: NMB fan assembly
Type: EC-1000C for PCG820GV
C/N: 00110241000
Fan mounting plate

(24-005-5033-0)
Fan motor (DC)

(2806KL-04W-B69-B50)
Fig. 3 NMB fan assembly
Factory-modification
From June 2010
EC-1000C
How to Replace AVC Fan with NMB Fan
The following describes the procedure to replace the AVC CPU fan and Cooljag
CPU fan on the CPU board, PCG820GV with the NMB (Minebea) CPU fan.
Applicable models: FCR-2117/2117-BB/2127/2127-BB/2137S/2137S-BB/2817/

2827/2827W/2837S/2837SW and FEA-2107/2107-BB/2807
Serial number of EC-1000C: Excepting 4381-xxxx
CAUTION
Observe the following general precautions when working with
the CPU board.
1) Static-sensitive device
Electric static discharge can damage electronic components. To
prevent damage to the CPU board, use a grounded wrist strap
designed to prevent static discharge.
2) Short circuit damage

The CPU board contains a backup battery and will be damaged
if you cause a short circuit.
Necessary parts and tool
1) 1 x NMB CPU fan assembly

(Type: EC1000C for PCG820GC; C/N: 00110241000)
2) 1 x Phillips Screwdriver (#2)
3) 1 x Cushioned, insulating material
2) Phillips screwdriver (#2)
1) NMB CPU fan assembly
3) Cushioned, insulating material
Fig.1 Necessary parts and tool
1/5
Changing AVC to NMB
1. Remove the CPU board from the processor unit, EC-1000C. (Refer to
Appendix.)
2. Place the board parts side up on the cushioned, insulating material.
Insulating
material
CPU board
Fig.2 CPU board with AVC fan on insulating material
3. Unplug the fan connector.

4. Loosen four screws securing the CPU fan to the heatsink and remove the
CPU fan.
Fan connector Screws securing fan
Before After
Fig.3 Removing AVC fan
5. Remove clips that secure the cover and heatsink to the processor: Press down
the tab of clip for unhooking.
Clip
Clip is hooked Clip

here.
Cover
A Heatsink
View from “A”
Fig.4 Clips securing cover and heatsink
2/5
6. Remove the cover.
Heatsink fin
Cover Clip
Fig.5 Heatsink with fan and cover removed
7. Clean out the heatsink fins (all sides and top) by blowing air.
Do not remove the heatsink from the board because the heat sink grease
gets hard and the thermal resistance increases if moved.
8. Place the NMB fan assembly on top of the heat sink with the cable exit side
upward. (The cover removed in step 6 is not used.)
Cable exit
Fig.6 Placing NMB fan assembly on top of heatsink
9. Secure the fan and heatsink to the processor with clips.
10. Plug the CPU fan connector.
Fan connector Clip

Note: When the fan is (Oppositely-
connected to the Mother oriented)
Clip
board, connect the fan to
Mother board.
Fig.7 Fan connector connected

to CPU board
3/5
Fig.8 CPU board with NMB fan
Changing Cooljag to NMB

Change the fan only: remove NMB fan from the supplied NMB CPU fan
assembly and put it onto the heat sink.
Discard plate, screws,
washers, and nuts.
NMB CPU fan assembly
Fig.9 Cooljag CPU Cooler
Notices on putting CPU board back

Reverse the steps to install the CPU board into the Processor unit, taking into
the following notes into account. Omit 1) to 3) for Cooljag.
1) Before installing the CPU board, loosening two screws, remove the CPU fan
support bracket. Otherwise it interferes with the CPU fan bolt.
CPU fan support bracket

interfering with CPU fan bolt
CPU fan support bracket
Fig.10 CPU fan support bracket
4/5
2) The CPU fan cable is routed as shown in Fig.11.
Note: When the fan is connected to the Mother board, connect the fan
to Mother board. FQ4-2008-009
Avoid pinch.
CPU fan cable
Fig.11 Route of CPU fan cable
3) When placing the CPU fan support bracket and retaining plate, do not pinch
cables.
4) Apply silicone sealant, KE-348T or 348W to COM2 and Keyboard (KBMS)

connectors to prevent it from loosening.
Silicone sealant, KR-348T or W
Fig.12 COM2 connector with silicone sealant
Silicone sealant, KR-348T or W
Fig.13 KBMS connector with silicone sealant
5/5
Appendix Removing CPU board from Processor Unit
The CPU board is removed from the processor unit, EC-1000C by taking the
following steps.
1. Remove the cover.

2. Remove the four screws securing the retaining plates.
3. Remove the screw on the bracket of the CPU board that holds the board in
place.
Retaining plates
CPU board
Bracket
Fig.1 EC-1000C with cover removed Fig.2 Bracket of CPU board
4. Unplug all cables on the CPU board. See the next page.
5. Unplug the CPU board from the socket on the Mother board, and lift it gently.
Note that there is a hidden connector under the CPU fan.
6. Disconnect the power cable under the CPU fan.
CPU fan
Power cable
CPU board
Fig.4 CPU board with power

Fig.3 EC-1000C with retaining cable connected
plates removed
1/2
KBMS
IDE1 from Front Keyboard
IDE2 FDC
from Hard Disk from Floppy Drive For parallel Port
from CD Drive
Fan LPT1 (Dongle)
connector
COM1
J2
2/2
From power supply unit
J3
DVI USB2 from [Power ON] COM2
USB1 from Control
from Front
Panel from Rear Panel Head Cable
Note: The board and cables are
original one requiring some
modifications.
Fig.5 Connectors on CPU board

2/2
In addition to the above table, following changes are also made.
1) Dual Display mode, or connection of both RGB and DVI monitors is enabled.
(Eliminating the inconvenience in FQ4-2010-005)
2) The new board uses the BIOS battery, CR2450 of which the lifetime is 8 years. The
old board uses the CR2032 (C/N: 000-159-662-10), lifetime of 3 years.
3) To make a secure connection, the connector on the board is made of the same
material as the connector plug.
4) The connector for –5V/-12V is removed.
Replacing old CPU board with new CPU board

It is recommended to replace old CPU board with new CPU board for quality
improvement. The board is replaced with the following kit, referring to the attachment.
Kit name: CPU Board Replacement Kit
Type: EC-1000C
Code Number: 00110903000
Note 1) The CPU board, Kontron PCG820GV in the old chassis, or 4320-xxxx and
4331-xxxx, CANNOT be replaced with new CPU board, 24P0100.
(Related Furuno Information: FQ4-2007-023)
2) When the CPU board is changed, the HDD is also replaced with one with the
preinstalled device drive software. It is difficult to reinstall the device driver for
new CPU board onto the old HDD.
Factory-modified sets
The EC-1000C of which serial number is 4381-0001 uses new CPU board, 24P0100.
BIOS Setting for New CPU board

Just select “Load Optimized Defaults” in the CMOS BIOS setup utility.
EC-1000C
How to Replace CPU Board
Following describes the procedure to replace the CPU board of old type (PCG820GV/
PCI-951) with the new type, 24P0100 in the EC-1000C processor unit of ECDIS and
Chart Radar (4349-xxxx).
This document is NOT applicable to the EC-1000C with the serial number of 4320-xxxx
and 4331-xxxx, or old chassis. The processor unit of the old chassis uses only Kontron
CPU board, PCG820GV.
1.1 Necessary Parts

Following parts are necessary to replace the old type of CPU board with new CPU
board, 24P0100.
1) 1 x CPU Board Replacement Kit, EC-1000C (C/N: 00110903000)

2) 1 x USB2.0/1.1 compatible External Hard Disk Drive, 100 GB or more
3) 1 x PS/2 or USB mouse and keyboard
4) 1 x ECDIS installation software (CD-ROM)
5) 1 x Silicone sealant (KE-348)
1.2 Outline
The CPU board replacement is carried out in the following steps briefly.
1. Preparation (Backup necessary data such as IP Address, Computer Name, ECDIS

software version, and registry.)
2. CPU Board Replacement (Replace CPU board, Cables, and HDD.)
3. Restore data including ECDIS software
4. Being sure that the system works normally
1.3 Kit Contents
The replacement kit includes the following parts.
Parts Name Outline Q’ty Remarks

CPU board Celeron 550 2.0GHz,
Intel 3010 + ICH7R,
ASYG-FU-PICMG
VGA 2300E(S3)
(24P0100) 1 Memory 1GB
001-102-390-00
Used in step 13
1/18
EC-1000C CPU Replacement Procedure
Power Cable Cable to connect the
Extension power supply unit to
Backplane and CPU
ASYG-HRNS-FU- 1 board
POWER
000-173-405-10 Used in step 15
COM1+LPT+Slot Slot cover with

COM1and LPT
Cover connectors
1
ASYG-FU-LPTCOM
000-173-403-10 Used in step 15
FDD Cable Cable between FDD

and CPU board
ASYG-CABLE-FU-
1
FDD
000-173-404-10 Used in step 15
PS/2 Y Cable Used to connect PS/2

keyboard and mouse
ASYG-CABLE-FU-
1 to CPU board.
PS2
000-173-402-10 Used in step
HDD with new driver MHW2040AC with

Windows XP and
2450061-01.01
Device driver pre-
installed
1 ECDIS/Chart radar
software is NOT
installed.
Used in step 27
CD-ROM with Batch The CD-ROM also
contains Device driver
file software.
2450062-01.01 1
Used step 1 and for
restoring data
LAN Cable Assy. For EMI prevention,
2m
MOD-Z072-020+
000-167-175-10 2 Used in step 24
EMI Core For EMI prevention

RFC-10
1
000-141-085-10 Used in step 25
MB Supporting Adhering to Frame 2

for supporting
Rubber backplane
1
24-005-5034-0
100-359-970-10 Used in step 10
2/18
CPU Fixing Plate CPU Fixing Plate
Assembly (24-005-5036-0) with
CPU Fixing Rubber
1 (24-005- 5035-0)
001-109-040-00
Used in step 20
Frame 3 1 Used in steps 22 and
Card Fixer
(24-005-5023-2) 23
100-360-012-10
Board Fixation stand
3
(Card Fixer)
(UEGR-19-0)
000-167-167-10 Frame 3
Cable Clamp Clamping power

cables
CKS-10-L
000-1063-50-10 1 Used in step 21
Cable Tie For fixing EMI core

CV-150N 2 Used in step 26
00016218610
1.4 Connectors on CPU Board
The layout of the connectors on the new CPU board is almost the same as the old one.
15
14
12, 13
16
1 2 11
3 8
4 6 9
5 10
Fig.1 PCG820GV/PCI-951 (Old CPU board)
3/18
14 3 15
12, 13
1 2 1
3 8
4 6 9
5 10 11 2 4
Fig.2 24P0100 (New CPU board)
Table below shows the connector name and the device to be connected.
No. Name CN Connected to

1 KBMS 23 Keyboard connector in the front panel
2 COM2 22 Control unit (head) connector in the rear panel
3 COM1 21 COM1 connector in the rear panel
4 LPT 20 LPT connector in the rear panel
5 FDD 19 Floppy Disk Drive
6 Chassis FAN 17 Fan in the rear panel
7 EXT ATX 16 Power Supply Unit with Power Cable Extension
8 P ON 13 PWR_ON board
9 IDE2 15 DVD drive
10 IDE1 14 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
11 AUX ATX 10 Power Supply Unit with Power Cable Extension
12 USB3-4 12 USB connector in the rear panel
13 USB1-2 11 USB connector in the rear panel
14 DVI 7 DVI connector in the rear panel
15 ATX+12V 4 Power Supply Unit with Power Cable Extension
16 Peripheral New board: Not used; Old board: Power Supply Unit
Connectors with a red number on the new CPU board are not used.
No. Name CN Remarks

1 SATA1 9 Connected to Serial ATA device, Not used
2 SATA2 8 Connected to Serial ATA device, Not used
3 Heater monitor 6 Output of “Heater ON” signal, Not used
4 HEATER1 1 Not used
4/18
1.5 Replacement
1.5.1 Preparation
Before replacing the CPU board, find following information about the system with the old
CPU board, if possible.
Note: ECDIS/Chart Radar software is installed after setting up Windows parameters.
1) System data
Write down the following information.
(a) ECDIS/Chart Radar program revision level (ex. V05.52)

(b) Computer name (ex. EC1000C-xxxx, System > Computer Name)
(c) IP address for LAN ports
(d) Option board name (ex. ROV board for radar overlay and VGA board for
conning display)
2) Registry information
Backup registry files by taking the following steps.
1. Insert the CD-ROM containing “Batch file” supplied in the kit into the DVD-ROM
drive.
2. Double click Registry_Backup.bat icon in the CD-ROM.
3. Ensure that the “SOURCE.REG file is in the drive C (C:¥). See Fig.3.
4. Connect the External Hard Disk to the EC-1000C.
5. Copy “SOUECE.REG file onto the external hard disk.
6. Copy “Ants_System” folder onto the external hard disk.
5/18
Fig.3 SOURCE.REG file in Drive C
1.5.2 CPU Board Replacement
To replace the CPU board;

1. Turn off the EC-1000C.
2. Remove Frame 3, or “Board fixing plate” which holds the p. c. boards.
3. Remove CPU Fan retaining plate.
4. Unplug all connectors except for USB (#12and #13 in Fig.1), DVI (#14), and
ATX+12V (#15) from the CPU board.
5. Loosen the screws in the slot cover of the CPU board.
6. Carefully slide the board out of the chassis halfway.
7. Unplug USB, DVI, and ATX+12V connectors.
8. Remove the ROV and No.2 VGA boards, if used.
9. Remove Backplane (sometimes, called mother board).
6/18
10. Put the MB Supporting Rubber, 24-005-5034-0 on the bottom plate of Frame 2
as shown in Fig.4. This rubber supports the Backplane.
Frame 2
Frame 2
MB supporting rubber,
24-005-5034-0
30 mm
Fig.4 MB supporting rubber in Frame 2.
11. Put the Backplane back onto the Frame 2.
12. Position the optional boards (if used) in the slot on the Backplane.
13. Connect USB, DVI, and ATX+12V connectors to the new CPU board.
14. Insert the CPU board into the socket on the Backplane.
15. Replace the following cables with ones supplied in the kit and connect these
cables to the CPU board. The connectors on the new cables are made of the
same material as the one on the CPU board to enhance a secure connection.
(a) Power cable extension, ASYG-HRNS-FU-POWER

(b) COM1+LPT+Slot Cover, ASYG-FU-LPTCOM
(c) FDD Cable, ASYG-CABLE-FU-FDD
16. Connect the rest connectors to the CPU board.
17. Apply silicone sealant, KE-348 to the COM2 and KBMS connectors to prevent
a loose connection.
7/18
18. Ensure that the LAN cables are not connected. The LAN cable is connected
after the IP address setting.
19. Using a cable tie, fix the unused 4P connector with 2 x black, 1 x white, and 1
x blue wires in the power cable to the adjacent cable bundle.
This connector
is not used.
Fig.5 Power Cable Extension
20. Fix the supplied CPU Fixing Plate Assembly with three screws.
CPU fixing
plate assembly
Frame 3 (Fix in
step 23.)
Fig.6 CPU fixing plate assemble
21. Clamp the nine power cables with the supplied cable clamp, CKS-10-L as
shown in Fig.7.
Power
Cable Clamp Connector
CKS-10-L (Large) Power Connector
(Small)
Ratched
stopper
Fig.7 Power Connectors on CPU board
8/18
22. Push the cable clamp in the hole in the supplied Frame 3.
Card fixer
Fig.8 Frame 3
23. Fix the Frame 3 to the chassis. Ensure that the printed circuit board(s) is fixed
with the card fixer(s) on the Frame 3 in position.
Fig.9
24. Replace the 2-m LAN cable(s) with the supplied one. If the LAN cable in use is
longer than 2 m, leave the cable unchanged.
25. Attach the EMI core (supplied) to the LAN cable(s) about 10 cm from the
connector.
26. Use cable ties at the both sides of the core to prevent the core from moving.
See Fig.10.
27. Replace the HDD with one supplied in the kit.
9/18
10 cm
Fig.10 EMI core on LAN
10/18
1.5.3 Restore data including ECDIS program
1. Turn on the EC-1000C.
2. Enter the password, ecdis and then click OK.
Fig. 11 Entering password
3. Right-click on “My Computer” icon, and select Properties > Computer Name tab.
Fig.12 Computer name
4. Click Change and enter the computer name.
5. Enter IP addresses.
6. Connect the External Hard Disk to the EC-1000C.
11/18
7. Double-click SOURCE.REG file in the External Hard Disk to restore the registry.
Fig.13 SOURCE.REG file
Fig.14
12/18
8. Install ECDIS software.
9. Install Device Driver in “Matrox G450” folder when the conning display is
connected.
10. Shutdown ECDIS/Chart radar software and Control Head.exe.
11. Copy “ants_system” from the External Hard Disk to the new hard disk in
EC-1000C. The file is in the same path.
Fig.15 Copy of “ants_system”
12. Disconnect the External Hard Disk from the EC-1000C.
13. Delete C:¥ants_system¥C-Map and restart the EC-1000C.
14. Ensure that the ENC charts are displayed normally. If not, perform “Refresh
chart after backup”: Menu > Chart Menu > System > Refresh chart after backup
15. Shutdown the ECDIS software.
16. Open C:¥C-Map install and double-click “RTE.msi” to install the eToken driver.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
17. Ensure that the red LED on the eToken lights. If not, install the eToken driver
again.
18. If the C-Map chart is used, install eToken (Refer to Section 3.6 Activation of
CM-93/3.), load the C-Map CD-ROM or DVD-ROM), and then the license.
13/18
19. Change SID by taking following steps.
1. Shutdown ECDIS/Chart radar program.
2. Open “Set SID” folder and double-click init.vbs.
3. Type EC1000C-xxxx and click OK. “xxxx” is the four digits after hyphen in
the serial number. The system asks “Type Organization ECDIS and click
OK.”
Fig.16
4. Type ECDIS and click OK. The system asks “Type Product ID without
hyphen and click OK.”
Fig.17
5. Type Product ID (14-digit number, ex. 00045617246170) in the Windows

license label on the front panel of the EC-1000C without hyphens and click
OK.
Product ID
Fig.18 Windows license label
14/18
Fig.19 Entering Product ID
6. “Type computer name and serial number EC1000C-xxxx and click OK.”
Fig.20 Entering Computer name
7. Wait for about 3 minutes until the system restarts.
8. Open System Properties and ensure that the Product ID is correct. If not,
repeat steps from 2).
Fig.21 Product ID check
15/18
20. Select Control Panel > Display Properties > Settings > Advance.
21. Click Troubleshoot tab.
22. In the Hardware acceleration area, move the Hardware acceleration slider to
None to increase the drawing speed, and click OK.
Everytime the ECDIS/Chart Radar software is installed, Hardware acceleration

slider is reset to the middle.
(Troubleshoot tab reopened)
Fig.22 (a) Hardware acceleration Fig.22 (b) Hardware acceleration
23. When the system is used in multi workstation mode, setup the system as below.
Share Permissions
1. Select Start > Programs > Accessories > Windows Explore.

2. Right-click the “ants_system” folder in drive C.
4. In the menu that appears, select Sharing and Security...
5. Select Sharing tab.
6. Click on Permissions.
7. Tick “Allow” box of Full Control in Folder Permission window. See Fig.23.
16/18
Fig.23 Permissions for Everyone
Mapping Network Drive
8. Select Start > Programs > Accessories > Windows Explore.

9. Click the Tools menu, and then click Map Network Drive.
10. In the Map Network Drive dialog box, select “F:” from the drop-down in the
Drive box.
11. Click Browse…
12. Click the folder of the other ECDIS’s “ANTS_SYSTEM” (ex. EC-
1000C-xxxx¥ANTS_SYSTEM) and then OK.
13. Click Finish.
F:
EC1000C-xxxx
Fig.24 Mapping Network Drive
17/18
14. Click the Tools menu, and then click Map Network Drive again.
15. Select “G:” in the Drive box.
16. Click Browse…
17. Click the folder of the other ECDIS’s “CD Drive” (ex. EC-1000C-xxxx¥CD
Drive) and then OK.
18. Click Finish.
Setting IP Addresses
19. Ensure that the IP address is set as shown in the table below.
Table 1 IP addresses on ECDIS

EC-1000C LAN1 Port LAN2 Port
No.1 ECDIS 172.31.3.29 10.0.0.180
No.2 ECDIS 172.31.3.30 10.0.0.181
Table 1 IP addresses on Chart Radar

EC-1000C LAN1 Port LAN2 Port
No.1 FCR 172.31.3.33 10.0.0.184
No.2 FCR 172.31.3.34 10.0.0.185
Now is the time to install ECDIS/Chart radar software.
18/18
2/2
How to setup BIOS on EC-1000C

(CPU board: PCG-820/PCI-951)
Following describes how to setup CMOS BIOS for CPU boards, PCG-820 and PCI-951.
1. Connect the service keyboard to the EC-1000C.

2. Turn on the EC-1000C.
3. Press Delete key. (Press F1 key when C-MOS Checksum Error is displayed.)
4. After entering CMOS Setup Utility, load “Optimized Defaults” and make following
changes.
(a) Standard CMOS Features Tab: Halt on = All, But keyboard

(b) Advanced BIOS Features: First Boot Device = HDD-0
Second Boot Device = Floppy
Third Boot Device = CDROM
(c) Advanced Chipset Features: Boot Display = Auto
(d) Integrated Peripherals: USB Keyboard Support = Enabled
(e) Power Management Setup: Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN = Delay 4 Sec.
2/2
To setup the radar processor unit, the control unit and the monitor are connected to the
radar processor unit, RPU-016 as shown in Fig.2(B).
Monitor
(MU-2X1CE)
Control unit DVI

D-sub 9P
(RCU-020) Processor unit
(EC-1000C)
J602 Radar Processor

XH10P
unit (RPU-016)
Fig.2 (A) Connections for normal operation
Monitor
(MU-2X1CE)
Control unit
(RCU-020) Processor unit DVI cable
(EC-1000C)
Control unit J602 Radar Processor

(RCU-014, or unit (RPU-016)
RCU-016)
The control unit is connected to J602
on the TB board.
D-sub to XH connector converter cable
Fig.2 (B) Temporary connections to setup radar processor unit

FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
Installing Windows XP using “EC-1000C Recovery Disc”
Following describes the step-by-step procedure to install/reinstall Windows XP software onto the
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) for EC-1000C. The jumpers on the HDD are set for “Master.”
Note: The HDD with Windows XP and ECDIS software is available with the following code
number.
Parts Name 2.5-inch HDD 3.5-inch HDD
Type See below. ST3402111A
Code Number 001-017-030
1) MHV2040AC (06.**)-FEA 001008110 for old CPU board V6.xx, ECDIS

2) MHV2040AC (05.**)-FEA 001086780 for old CPU board V5.xx, ECDIS
3) HDD-FEA-V6-Toshiba 001112680 for new CPU board V6.xx, ECDIS
4) HDD-FEA-V5-Toshiba 001110190 for new CPU board V5.xx, ECDIS
5) MHV2040AC (6.**)-FCR 001098450 for old CPU board V6.xx, FCR
6) HDD-FEA-V6-Toshiba 001117610 for new CPU board V6.xx, FCR
(Necessary time: about 2 hours)

Steps PROCEDURE
1. Preparing 1. Prepare FEA-2107/2807 Service manual, EC-1000C Recovery Disc, and
ECDIS (FCR) installation software.
Parts name Type Code number

Recovery disc 2450036 001007880
ECDIS Installation software CDROM 2450023-(05.**) 001008690
ECDIS Installation software CDROM 2450023-(06.**) 001091940
FCR Installation software CDROM 0359233-(05.**) 001020260
FCR Installation software CDROM 0359233-(06.**) 001087780
2. Connect the “Keyboard” to EC-1000C.

3. Connect the “mouse” using the “Y” connector cable to EC-1000C rear panel.
2. Changing 1. Turn on the unit while holding down DEL key.

BIOS 2. Select “Load Optimized Defaults in CMOS Setup Utility and Click Enter.
3. Make changes as below.
Use Enter key to change setting and arrow keys to select an item and option.
'Advanced BIOS Features'
First Boot Device: “CD-ROM” or “PATA-CDROM”
Second Boot Device: “HDD-0”
'Standard CMOS Features'
Halt on: “All, But Keyboard”
4. Click ESC to step back to the menu.

5. Select “Save & Exit Setup.”
102010 1/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
3. Loading 1. Insert “EC1000C Recovery Disc” (Type: 2450036, C/N: 00100788000) into the
Windows XP CD-ROM drive and Click Enter.
software 2. Wait until “Welcome to Setup” message appears.
4. Formatting 1. Click [Enter] to Install windows-XP.
HDD 2. Click [F8] to agree to the license conditions.
(Partitioning) 3. Click Enter to “Set up Windows-XP on the selected item.”
4. Select “Format the partition “NTFS file system (Quick)” with an arrow key and
Click Enter.
5. Wait until copying files is complete.
Windows XP reboots automatically.
5. Windows-XP 1. Wait until the right-hand side screen below appears.

Setup Regional and Language Options
You can customize Windows XP for different regions and Languages.
2. Click Customize and set language to English (United State) and Location to
United State and Click OK and Next.
3. In Personalize Your Software dialog, type ecdis in Name box, and leave
Organization box blank and Click Next.
4. Type EC1000C-XXXX.in “Computer Name” box. (XXXX is the last four numbers
of the serial number located on the front of the EC-1000C.) For example, the
computer name is EC1000C-0123 when the serial number is 4349-0123.
5. Type Administrator in “Administrator Password” box.
6. Type Administrator in “Confirm Password” box.
7. Click Next.
8. Select “Time Zone” to GMT with “Automatically adjust for daylight savings” being
ticked.
9. Click Next.
Windows XP reboots automatically.
6. Welcome to 1. Wait until the screen becomes as right.

Microsoft The display does not fit within the screen,
Windows requiring horizontal shift.
2. Click Next at the lower right-hand corner.

3. Choose Not right NOW and Click Next.
4. Type ecdis in “Your name” box, and Click Next.
7. “Windows-XP desktop” appears in VGA size.

Close all messages including “Windows-XP Activation” message” appearing at lower
right-hand side by pressing X button.
102010 2/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
8. Customizing 1. Select Start > Control panel > User account.

user as 2. Click on ECDIS icon lower left-hand side.
ECDIS. 3. Select Create a password. (Do NOT click ECDIS icon !)
4. Type ecdis in both “Type a new password” and “Type the new password
again to confirm” boxes.
5. Select Create Password and Yes, Make Private.
6. Close the dialog by clicking X button at the upper right-hand corner.
9. >>> Change the CD-ROM to “ECDIS Installation Software CD-ROM.”

10. Loading
System Drivers Following is the procedure to load hardware driver for old CPU board
(PCG820GV). To install the driver for new CPU board (24P0100), refer to the
attached sheet.
1. Select Start > Run.
2. Installing Chipset driver

2.1 Type D:¥support¥pci-951¥chipset¥infinst_autol.exe, and Click Enter.
2.2 Follow on-screen instructions.
2.3 The system restarts automatically.
3. Installing VGA driver
3.1 Type D:¥support¥pci-951¥video¥win2k_xpm1141.exe, and Click Enter.
3.2 Follow on-screen instructions.
3.3 The system restarts automatically.
4. Installing Network (LAN) driver

4.1 Type D:¥support¥pci-951¥ethernet ¥pro2kxpm.exe, and Click Enter.
4.2 Follow on-screen instructions. (Yes to All/Install Now/Finish)
4.3 Select Start > Setting Control Panel > System (double-click).
4.4 Select Device Manager in Hardware tab.
4.5 Click “?” icon (yellow, upper one) and follow on-screen instructions.
(No, not this time/Search suitable driver for my device) > Next > Yes
5. Installing Audio driver
5.1 Type D:¥support¥pci-951¥audio¥setup.exe, and Click Enter.
5.2 Follow on-screen instructions. (Continue anyway/Finish)
6. Select [Restart the computer].
11. >>> Windows XP restarts.
102010 3/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
12. Windows 1. Select Start > Control panel.

Security 2. Select Security Center and setup Windows Firewall, Automatic Updates and
Center Virus Protection as below.
Windows Firewall (Off)

1. Click Windows Firewall icon in the bottom line.
2. Select Off (not recommended).
3. Click OK.
Automatic Updates (Off)

1. Click Automatic Update icon in the bottom line.
2. Select Turn off Automatic Updates.
3. Click OK.
Virus Protection
1. Click Recommendations in Virus Protection.
2. Select I have an antivirus program that ….
3. Click OK.
3. Click "X" on the upper right side of the window to close the window.
102010 4/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
13. Computer 1. Select Start > Settings > Control panel > System.
name, Work 2. Select “Computer Name” tab > Change.
group, and 3. Confirm computer name and enter Work group.
Virtual Memory Computer Name: EC1000C –XXXX (XXXX: last four digits of the serial number)
setting Work group: ECDIS
4. Select Advanced tab > Settings in Performances box > Visual Effects tab.
5. Select Custom > Apply > OK.
6. Untick all items.
7. Select Performance tab.
8. Select Advanced tab in Performance Options dialog.
9. Click Change in Virtual Memory box.
10. Select No Paging File.
11. Click Set and then OK.
102010 5/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
14. Customizing 1. Select Start > Control Panel.

Start menu 2. Click “Switch to Classic View.”
and Control
Panel
Switch to Classic View
Before change After change
3. Select Taskbar and Start Menu in Control Panel.

4. Select Classic Start menu in Start Menu tab.
5. Click Apply and then OK.
102010 6/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
15. Customizing 1. Select Display in Control Panel.

Display 2. Make settings as below in each tab.
Properties
(1) “Themes” tab
Pull-down menu: Windows Classic > Apply > OK
(2) “Screen Saver” tab
Screen saver: None > Apply > OK
1. Click Power… in Screen Saver tab to show Power Options Properties.
2. Confirm following settings in Power schemes tab.
Power schemes: Home/Office Desk
Turn off monitor: Never
Turn off hard disks: Never
System stand-by: Never
(3) “Appearance” tab

1. Confirm that following settings.
Windows and buttons: Windows Classic style
Color scheme: Windows Classic
Font size: Normal
2. Click Apply and then Advanced to show Advanced Appearance.
3. Select the following items and set all to Arial Narrow, size 12.
- Active Title Bar - Message Box - Inactive Title Bar
- Selected Items - Menu
(Cont’d)
102010 7/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
Active Title Bar
Arial Narrow 12
(4) “Settings” tab

1. Select Advanced > Adapter tab > List all Modes….
2. Select 1280 by 1024, 256 colors, and 60 Hertz.
3. Click OK and then Apply.
4. Click Troubleshoot tab and set “Hardware acceleration” level bar as

below and Click Apply and OK.
Old CPU board: Scale 3 (See figure below)

New CPU board (24P0100): None
102010 8/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
16. Customizing 1. Press “Windows” logo key and “E” key together to open “Windows-XP Explorer”.
Windows 2. Highlight “Local disk [C:].”
Explorer
3. Select Properties in File menu.

4. Remove a tick from “Allow Indexing
Service to index this disk for fast file
searching” in “General” tab.
6. Select “Choose Details.” in View menu.
If Choose Details is not found, close the
dialog and double-click My computer icon.
7. Select 5 items in Details box as below.
- Name - Date Modified
- Size - Attributes
- Type
8. Click OK.
9. Select “Folder Options” in “Tools” menu.
10. In “General” tab, select “Use Windows classic folders” in Tasks box.
(Cont’d)
102010 9/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
12. Select “View” tab in Folder Options.

13. Set Advanced settings box as below and click Apply.
14. Select Apply to All Folders > Yes > OK.
17. Deleting 1. Right-click Start.

unnecessary 2. Select Explore.
shortcuts 3. Double-click Programs folder to open.
4. Delete following shortcuts;
1) Outlook Express Shortcut
2) Remote Assistance Shortcut
3) Windows Media Player Shortcut
4) Internet Explorer Shortcut
5. Double-click Accessories folder to open.
6. Delete Tour Windows XP shortcut.
7. Double-click Entertainment folder to open.
8. Delete Windows Media Player shortcut.
9. Click X on the upper right to close the window.
10. Right-click Start.
11. Select Explore All Users.
12. Double-click Programs folder to open.
13. Delete following shortcuts.
1) MSN shortcut
2) Windows Messenger Shortcut
3) Windows Movie Maker Shortcut
14. Click Game icon to delete.
15. Click X to close the window.
16. Right-click Recycle Bin icon.

17. Select Empty Recycle Bin.
18. Click Yes in Confirm Multiple File Delete.
102010 10/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
18. Setting LAN 1 1. Select Start > Setting > Network Connection.
network 2. Highlight Local Area connection.
(LAN radar) 3. Remove ticks from “Client for Microsoft Networks” and
”File and Printer sharing.”
4. Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
5. Click Properties.
6. Enter IP address and Subnet Mask.
IP address: 172.31.3.29 (first ECDIS), 172.31.3.30 (second ECDIS)
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
7. Click Advanced.. .
“Net-BIOS” setting in WINS tab: Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
8. Click OK.
19. Setting LAN 2 1. Select Start > Setting > Network Connection.
network 2. Highlight Local Area connection2.
(LAN adapter) *: If the second LAN port is not found, the driver is not installed correctly in step 10.
3. Ensure that all boxes are ticked.
4. Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
5. Click Properties.
6. Enter IP address and Subnet Mask.
IP address: 10.0.0.180 (first ECDIS), 10.0.0.181 (second ECDIS)
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
7. Click Advanced.. .
“Net-BIOS” setting in WINS tab: Default.
8. Click OK.
20. Matrox G450 When the conning display unit is installed, or optional Matrox G450 graphic card is
display driver installed in the EC-1000C, install MGA 450 display adapter software. See FEA2x07
installation service manual.
(Optional)
21. >>> Install the latest ECDIS software using “ECDIS Installation software” CD-ROM.
Refer to FEA-2107/2807 Service Manual for the procedure.
IMPORTANT!
During installation, make sure that Hasp Pin number is 2371.
22. >>> Remove the CDROM from the drive.

23. Changing 1. Turn off the system and on it again while holding down DEL key.
BIOS 2. Change First Boot Device from “CD-ROM” to HDD-0 and Second Boot Device
from HDD-0 to Floppy in Advanced BIOS Features.
3. Select “Save & Exit Setup.”
24. >>> Restart the ECDIS.
102010 11/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
25. Setting Open Windows Explorer. (Program > Accessory)

Permissions 1. Choose “C:¥ants_system¥” > Properties > Security > Add.
for Everyone 2. Select Advanced in “Select Users or Groups“ > Find Now.
3. Select Everyone > OK.
4. Remove tick from Full Control, first item. Five items are selected as below to
allow Permission for Everyone.
- Modify - Read
- Read & Execute - Write
- List Folders Contents
26. >>> Restart ECDIS.
102010 12/13
FEA/FCR-2xx7
201012
Automatically Log On Setting

If the system asks you to enter the password “ecdis” at every power-on, set “Automatically Log On” as
below.
STEP PROCEDURE DISPLAY

1. Log in 1. Select Start > Run > Type “cmd” >
as ”ecdis” OK.
2. In “cmd.exe” window, type “control
userpasswords2” and Click Enter
2. Edit User [User Accounts]

Accounts
In User Accounts dialog;
1. Select User Name as ecdis.

2. Remove the check from “Users must
enter a user name and password to
use this computer.”
3. Click Apply and OK.
3. Password [Automatically Log On]
Enter as below and Click OK.
1) User name: ecdis

2) Password: ecdis
3) Confirm Password: ecdis
4. Ensure that “Request Password” does

not appear after restart.
102010 13/13
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
How to Load Hardware Drivers for 24P0100 CPU board

Following describes how to install the hardware drivers for new CPU board (24P0100).
The driver software is included in the Support folder on the ECDIS installation
CD-ROM (V05/55/V06.06 and above). The software is also posted onto the Technet.
1. Remove “Recovery Disc for EC-1000C” CD-ROM and insert “ECDIS Installation
Software CD-ROM containing
Fg.1 ECDIS Installation Software CD-ROM
A window pops up and asks "What do you want Windows to do?".
2. Click Open folder to view files and open the 24P0100 folder.
If the Windows explorer opens, access to D:¥Support¥24P0100.
Fig.2 Selecting “Open folder to view files”
1/11
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
1. Installing Intel Chipset Driver
1. Select Chipset Driver > XP > infinst_autol, and then double-click Setup.exe.
Setup.exe
Fig.3 Setup.exe in “infinst_autol” folder
2. Click Next at the "Welcome to the Setup Program” window in the Intel Chipset
Device Software Utility.
Next
Fig.4 Welcome to the Setup Program
3. Click Yes at the "License Agreement" dialog.
Yes
Fig.5 License Agreement

2/11
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
4. Click Next at the "Readme File Information" screen.
Next
Fig.6 Readme File Information
5. Click Cancel at the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard.

(Note: This page does not appear sometimes.)
Cancel
Fig.7 Found New Hardware Wizard
3/11
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
6. Wait until the setup operation is complete, and then click Next.
Next
Fig.8 Setup Progress
7. At the "Intel Chipset Software Installation Utility is complete" window, select "Yes, I
want to restart my computer now", then click "Finish".
Finish
Fig.9 Setup Is Complete
4/11
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
2. Installing S3 VGA Driver
To install the S3 VGA driver;
1. Open the WinXPdriver_20090325 folder and double-click Setup.exe. The “S3

Graphics PCIe Chrome WinXP/2K Display Driver Setup” wizard appears.
Setup.exe
Fig.10 Setup.exe in WinXPdriver_20090325 folder
2. Click Next on the “Welcome” window.
Next
Fig.11 Welcome page
5/11
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
3. Click Next at the Start Copying Files.
Next
Fig.12 Start Copying Files
4. Click Continue Anyway at The software you are installing for this hardware.
Continue Anyway
Fig.13 The software you are installing for this hardware
5. Click Finish at the InstallShield Wizard Complete.
Finish
Fig.14 InstallShield Wizard Complete
6/11
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
3. Installing Intel LAN Driver
To install the Intel LAN driver;

1. Open Intel LAN driver folder and then double-click PRO2KXP.exe.
PRO2KXP.exe
Fig.15 PRO2KXP.exe
2. Click Next at the Welcome window of Intel(R) PRO Network Connections wizard.
Fig.16 Welcome window
7/11
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
3. Select I accept the terms… and click Next at the License Agreement.
Fig.17 License Agreement
4. Click Next at the Setup Options.
Fig.18 Setup Options
8/11
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
5. Click Install at Ready to Install the Program.
Fig.19 Ready to Install the Program
6. Click Finish at InstallShield Wizard Completed.
Fig.20 InstallShield Wizard Completed
9/11
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
4. Installing VIA LAN Driver
To install the VIA LAN driver;
1. Open VIA LAN folder and double-click WinSetup.exe.
Fig.21 WinSetup.exe
2. Click OK.
Fig.21 The installation is completed, WinSetup
10/11
FCR/FEA-2xx7
201012
5. Changing Hardware Accelerator Settings
To change hardware accelerator settings;
1. Open “tool” folder and double-click AccelerationalLevel.exe.

2. Click OK.
3. Check the settings in the Troubleshoot tab/Display Property.
4. Restart the system and check that the settings in the Troubleshoot tab are not
changed.
Fig.22 AccelerationLevel.exe
Fig.23 Troubleshoot Tab/Display Properties
11/11
Contents
Contents
Introduction
Chapter 1. General
1.1 General ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1
1.1.1 List of FCR-2xx7-series Models with Main Functions ･･････････････････････ 1-1
1.1.2 Precautions･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-2
1.1.3 Unit Configuration ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-5
1. Radar Antenna Unit ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-5
2. Radar Processor Unit： RPU-016････････････････････････････････････････ 1-7
3. Chart Processor Unit: EC-1000C ････････････････････････････････････････ 1-7
4. Display Unit：MU-201CE/231CE ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 1-8
5. Control Units: RCU-020, RCU-015FEA, and RCU-016 ･･･････････････････ 1-9
6. LAN Adapter: EC-1010 ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-9
7. B-Adapter: EC-1020 ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-9
8. Hub: HUB-100 ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-9
1.2 Connections ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-10
Chapter 2. Operation Overview

2.1 Finishing and Starting Chart Radar････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-1
2.1.1 Finishing Chart Radar ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-1
2.1.2 Starting Chart Radar Screen from Windows Screen ･････････････････････････ 2-2
2.2 Screen ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-3
2.2.1 Chart Radar Screen･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-3
2.2.2 Radar Screen ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-4
2.2.3 ECDIS Screen ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-5
2.3 Basic Operations ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-6
2.3.1 Menu Control･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-6
2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode･････････････････････････････････････ 2-14

2.4.1 Icon Box on Upper Left-hand Side････････････････････････････････････････ 2-14
2.4.2 Icon Box on Lower Left-hand Side ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 2-19
2.4.3 Icon Box on Upper Right-hand Side ･･････････････････････････････････････ 2-21
2.4.4 Icon Box on Lower Right-hand Side ･･････････････････････････････････････ 2-26
i
Contents
2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-31

2.5.1 NorthUp TM(RM) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-31
2.5.2 ECDIS ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-31
2.5.3 Route ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-32
1. Procedure for Creating New Routes ･････････････････････････････････････ 2-33
2. Selecting and Monitoring Created Routes ････････････････････････････････ 2-34
3. Deleting Created Routes････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-36
4. Alarms Page ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-36
5. Check Page ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-37
6. Parameters Page ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-37
7. Prepare Page ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-38
8. List of > MONITOR ROUT... menu items displayed on the data display box･ 2-38
2.5.4 UChart･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-39
1. Types of User Charts ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-41
2. Procedure for Creating New UChart ･････････････････････････････････････ 2-41
3. Selecting and Displaying Created UChart ････････････････････････････････ 2-44
4. Deleting Created User Chart ････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-45
2.5.5 Pilot Data ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-46
1. Description of Dialog Box ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-48
2. Procedure for Creating New Pilot Data･･･････････････････････････････････ 2-49
3. Selecting and Displaying Created Pilot Data･･････････････････････････････ 2-49
4. Deleting Created Pilot Data ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-50
2.5.6 Radar ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-50
2.5.7 Predictor (Predicted Position) ････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-51
2.5.8 Backing up Created Routes, UCharts, and Pilot Data････････････････････････ 2-52
1. Backup Control Procedure･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-53
2. File Reading Procedure･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-53
3. File Copying Procedure ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-53
4. File Name Change Procedure ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 2-53
Chapter 3. Menu Tree

3.1 Summary of Menu ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-1
3.1.1 ECDIS Menu ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-1
3.1.2 Radar and Chart Radar Menu･････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-4
3.2 Icon Box Menu on Radar and Chart Radar displays･････････････････････････････ 3-6
3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 3-10
3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-21
ii
Contents
Chapter 4. Radar Settings

4.1 RPU-016 Settings ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4-1
4.1.1 DIP Switch Setting for SPU Board ････････････････････････････････････････ 4-1
4.1.2 RPU-016 Menu Settings ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4-2
4.1.3 Execute Tune Initialize ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4-4
4.1.4 Execute Radar Initialize ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4-5
Chapter 5. Installation Parameter Settings

5.1 Before Making Installation Parameter Settings ･････････････････････････････････ 5-1
5.1.1 Installation Parameter Menu ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-1
5.1.2 Selecting Sensors ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-3
5.1.3 Sensor Input ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-4
5.2 Installation Parameter Backup ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-5
5.2.1 Overview ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-5
5.2.2 Handling Installation Parameter Backup Data ･･････････････････････････････ 5-6
5.3 LAN Adapter ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-7

5.3.1 Connection Ports of LAN Adapter ････････････････････････････････････････ 5-7
5.3.2 Port Allocations and Specifications of LAN Adapter ････････････････････････ 5-9
5.3.3 Restrictions on Connection Channels of LAN Adapter ･･････････････････････ 5-9
5.3.4 Relay Output of LAN Adapter････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-10
5.4 B-Adapter ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-11
5.4.1 Connection Port of B-Adapter ････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-11
5.4.2 B-Adapter Connections ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-12
5.4.3 STO Signals 1 through 8 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-13
5.4.4 STI Signals 1 through 16 ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-14
5.4.5 Analog Signals ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-15
5.4.6 Gyro Connections･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-16
5.4.7 LOG Signal Connections ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-16
5.4.8 System Failure･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-16
5.5 Installation Parameter Settings ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-17
5.5.1 General ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-17
5.5.2 Positioning Equipment 1 through 6 ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 5-20
5.5.3 Gyro1 (2) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-23
5.5.4 Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication (LAN) ････････････････････････ 5-26
5.5.5 AIS transponder ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-32
5.5.6 Dual Axis Log (DAX) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-34
5.5.7 Log････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-37
5.5.8 Echo Sounder and Weather･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-39
5.5.9 Wind Sensor････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-44
5.5.10 Rate of Turn Gyro ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-47
iii
Contents
5.5.11 ARPA Processor Alarm Relays ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 5-49

5.5.12 Alarm Inputs/AMWSS ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-50
5.5.13 Central Alarm Text･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-51
5.5.14 Conning Display･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-52
5.5.15 Electronic chart (Laserplot) ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-53
5.5.16 Engine Control ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-54
5.5.17 Fuel Consumption ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-55
5.5.18 Heel and Trim ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-56
5.5.19 Main Engine Start Air Pressure･･････････････････････････････････････････ 5-57
5.5.20 Propeller 1 - 4 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-58
5.5.21 RENC Connections ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-59
5.5.22 Rudders ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-60
5.5.23 SatCom/External Computer/Sindel Repeaters ･････････････････････････････ 5-61
5.5.24 Speedpilot ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-62
5.5.25 Thruster 1 to 4･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-63
5.5.26 Track Pilot ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-64
5.5.27 VDR ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-65
Chapter 6. Installation of Charts

6.1 Overview ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-1
6.1.1 ENC, SENC, and RENC ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-1
1. ENC ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-1
2. SENC ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-2
3. RENC ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-2
6.1.2 Permit ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-2
6.1.3 Outline of Chart Menu･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-5
6.1.4 Warning Display ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-6
1. Warning for Subscription License ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 6-6
2. Warning Display for Latest Charts･･･････････････････････････････････････ 6-6
6.2 Installation of Public key and Permit key ･･････････････････････････････････････ 6-8
6.2.1 Installation of Public Key ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-8
6.2.2 Installation of Permit Key････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-10
6.3 Installation of Charts ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-12
6.3.1 Installation of Charts ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-12
Reference: Standard messages in S57 chart load ･････････････････････････････ 6-16
Reference: Checks on SENC Conversion History Log････････････････････････ 6-19
Reference: Automatic Conversion Settings･･････････････････････････････････ 6-21
6.3.2 Check on Installed Charts ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-23
Checks on Chart Information 1 ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 6-24
Checks on Chart Information 2 ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 6-25
6.3.3 Chart Deletion ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-26
6.3.4 Chart Manipulation ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-27
iv
Contents
6.3.5 Making Groups of Chart Cells････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-29

1. Creating Groups in “Load or Update Charts from CD ROM” Window ･･････ 6-29
2. Creation in Chart Catalogue Window ････････････････････････････････････ 6-30
3. Deleting S57 Chart Cell from Group･････････････････････････････････････ 6-30
Chapter 7. RPU-016 Program Updating

7.1 Outline of Updating ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-1
7.1.1 Program Files･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-1
7.1.2 Program Number Check ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-2
7.2 Updating through Serial Port ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-3
7.2.1 Connections between PC and Radar Processor unit ･････････････････････････ 7-3
7.2.2 Precautions for Updating ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-3
7.2.3 Procedure for Program Updating ･････････････････････････････････････････ 7-5
7.3 Program Updating with Mini-Program Card ･･･････････････････････････････････ 7-8
7.4 Updating through LAN Port･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-9
Chapter 8. EC-1000C Program Updating

8.1 Overview ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-1
8.1.1 Checking of Program Version ････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-1
8.1.2 Preparations ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-2
1. Precautions ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-2
2. Preparations･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-3
8.2 Updating Procedure ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-4
8.3 Registry File Check ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-13
8.3.1 Outline of Registry File･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-13
1. Registry ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-13
2. Contents of Registry File ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-13
8.3.2 Check Procedure for Registry File ････････････････････････････････････････ 8-15
8.4 Contents of Program CD ROM ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-20
v
Contents
Chapter 9. LAN Adapter Settings

9.1 LAN Adapter Settings ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-1
9.1.1 Overview ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-1
9.2 Preparations (IP Address/Parameter Settings for

LAN Adapter and Program Updating) ････････････････････････････････････････ 9-2
9.2.1 Connections ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-2
9.2.2 Jumper Settings for LAN Adapter･････････････････････････････････････････ 9-3
9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter ･･･････････････････ 9-4
9.3.1 Outline of Settings ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-4
9.3.2 Connecting LAN Adapter (Starting 7188XW Program) ･････････････････････ 9-5
9.3.3 Checking and Making IP address Settings for LAN Adapter ･････････････････ 9-7
9.3.4 Checking and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter ･････････････････････････ 9-9
1. Parameter Checks･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-9
2. Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter･････････････････････････････････････ 9-10
9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-12
9.4.1 Overview ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-12
9.4.2 Updating LAN Adapter Program ･････････････････････････････････････････ 9-13
9.5 Updating LAN Adapter OS ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-16
Chapter 10. Network Settings for EC-1000C

10.1 Outline of Network Settings ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 10-1
10.2 Network Settings ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 10-3

10.2.1 LAN-1 Settings (Communication with ARPA Radar) ･･･････････････････････ 10-3
10.2.2 LAN-2 Settings (Communication with LAN Adapter) ･･････････････････････ 10-6
Reference: Check the Config. of the LAN port･････････････････････････････ 10-8
Chapter 11. Location of Parts

11.1 EC-1000C ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-1
11.2 RCU-020 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-10
11.3 LAN Adapter (EC-1010) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-12
11.4 B Adapter (EC-1020) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-13
11.5 HUB (HUB-100) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-14
vi
Contents
11.6 Monitor (MU-201CE) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-15

11.7 RPU-016 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-16
11.8 Scanner Unit ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-23
11.8.1 X-Band (2 Unit type) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-23
11.8.2 S-Band (2 Unit type)････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-32
11.9 Radar Console･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-38
Chapter 12. Maintenance

12.1 Checking LAN Connections ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-1
12.1.1 Checking LEDs････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-2
1. LED for EC-1000C ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-2
2. LEDs on HUB-100 ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-2
3. LEDs on NET-100 of RPU-016 ･････････････････････････････････････････ 12-2
12.1.2 Ping Command ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-3
12.2 Checking LAN Adapter and B-Adapter ･･････････････････････････････････････ 12-7
12.2.1 LAN-Adapter (EC-1010) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-7
1. LEDs in LAN-Adapter ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-8
2. LEDs on LAN Module ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-8
3. Jumper setting･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-8
12.2.2 B Adapter (EC-1020) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-9
1. LEDs in B-Adapter ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-10
12.3 Checking LAN Signal･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-11
12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-15
Procedure for putting EC-1000C into Selftest mode･･････････････････････････ 12-15
1. Version Numbers ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-15
2. Analog ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-16
3. Alarm ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-16
4. CPU and Memory ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-18
5. Display ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-18
6. Drivers ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-20
7. Network ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-20
8. Control Head･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-21
9. Exit Test ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-21
vii
Contents
12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor Unit ････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-22

12.5.1 Normal Selftest ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-23
Selftest Items ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-24
Display of program numbers ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 12-24
ROM/RAM, DIP Switches････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-25
PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR ･･････････････････････････････････････ 12-26
RF UNIT MONITOR ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-26
Checking keys･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-28
Checking input sentences ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-28
12.5.2 Factory Test ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-29
Contents of Factory Test ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-30
FPGA Program Numbers and RFC Board Ver･･･････････････････････････ 12-30
Loop Back Tests ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-31
12.6 Replacing BIOS Battery on CPU Board of EC-1000C ･････････････････････････ 12-32
12.7 BIOS Setting ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-32
12.8 Replacing HDD of EC-1000C･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-33
Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Preparation ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-1
1. BIOS Setting ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-1
2. Loading Windows XP software ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-3
3. Formatting ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-4
4. Windows XP Setup･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-7
5. User Accounts Setting ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-11
6. Installing System Driver ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-13
7. Security Center Setting ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-18
8. Switching Windows XP to Classic ････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-19
9. Computer name, Work group, and Virtual memory Setting ･･････････････････････ 13-20
10. Display properties･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-23
11. Opening Windows Explorer to make C drive properties setting ･･････････････････ 13-29
12. Returning BIOS setting to its original state ････････････････････････････････････ 13-33
13. LAN setting ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-34
14. Installing Chart Radar software･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-34
15. Permissions setting･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-34
16. Automatically Log On setting ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-37
viii
Contents
Chapter 14. Q & A

Q1. Is the Chart radar available for the connection of Auto Pilot? ････････････････････ 14-1
Q2. Is the Chart radar available for the connection of Conning Display? ･･････････････ 14-1
Q3. Can the C Map be used? ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-1
Q4. Let me know the maximum cable length between units. ･････････････････････････ 14-1
Q5. Let me know how to connect the EG-3000. ････････････････････････････････････ 14-1
Q6. Let me know about HUB-100.････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-1
Q7. Why is the HUB-100 connected between the EC-1000C and the RPU-016? ･･･････ 14-1
Q8. The error massage [Permanent Warning : At least one of used charts has more than
1 week----] is displayed.･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-2
Q9. What menu can I use to change the background color of the window? ････････････ 14-2
Q10. The mode status bar on the ECDIS window does not display “Route”. ･･･････････ 14-2
Q11. Where can I make selection of the data box display? ･･････････････････････････ 14-2
Q12. Where can I find the menu to eliminate the MOB or the Event mark?････････････ 14-2
Q13. A big letter of “XX” is displayed on the screen. What does this mark indicate? ･･･ 14-2
Q14. The Inter-switch function does not work while in Chart Radar mode. ････････････ 14-2
Q15. What kind of functions do “Set Std Display” of [Main Menu] in ECDIS mode and
“Set Base Display” of [Main Menu] in Radar/Chart Radar mode have?･･････････ 14-2
Q16. What do the settings of Off, Std, and Oth in the Chart Display menu mean?･･････ 14-3
Q17. When I try to open the Installation parameter menu, “Cannot read disk” is
displayed.･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-3
Q18. “Unknown” is displayed in the Datum box under the position display box.･･･････ 14-3
Q19. Where can I set whether or not to make Gyro correction? I cannot set it by
selecting [Menu] -> Sensor -> Other to “Gyro corr”. ･･････････････････････････ 14-3
Q20. Can I save Route Plan data to a floppy disk and further edit the saved dada on my
PC? ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-3
Q21. Are Route, User Chart, and Pilot data displayed on Radar Mode window? ･･･････ 14-3
Q22. Position data is displayed in red. What do letters inside the parentheses by the
SOG and COG display represent? ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 14-3
ix
Contents
Q23. How does the system draw echoes? ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 14-3
Q24. Can I make the cursor motion faster? ････････････････････････････････････････ 14-4
Q25. What is the Kalman filter? ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-4
Q26. Please let me know about charts. ････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-5
Q27. The system freezes. What measures do I need to take when the system is slow in
motion?･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-6
Q28. Even if I turn ON the system power supply, the RPU-016 is not powered on.･････ 14-6
Q29. Let me know what measures I need to take when I have replaced HD. ･･･････････ 14-6
Q30. Let me know what measure I need to take when I have replaced the CPU board of
the EC-1000C. ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-6
Q31. Sensor data such as position data are not entered. ･････････････････････････････ 14-7
Q32. Please let me know the method for checking of B-Adapter.･････････････････････ 14-7
Q33. Navigation parameters cannot be saved.･･････････････････････････････････････ 14-7
Q34. The VRM and EBL do not smoothly move. Does this problem result from faulty
rotary encoder? Further, echoes do not smoothly switch when I make range setting
change. ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-8
Q35. How many hours of life the LCD of the display unit has? ･･････････････････････ 14-8
Q36. Let me know how I can make setting and connection of alarm output on the
RPU-016 side (ARPA).･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-8
Q37. Since sensitivity seems to have degraded, I want to check for magnetron current.
How can I check?･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-8
Q38. I replaced magnetron. Then, what shall I do? ･････････････････････････････････ 14-8
Q39. The Radar displays no image. Further, the error message “Connection Lost to
ARPA CPU” is displayed. ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-8
Q40. What are the differences between data on “Conning Position” setting made with
the General setting in the Installation Parameters menu, GPS position set with
Position Equipment, and Own Ship info shown on page 2 in the Radar Initialize
menu? ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-8
Q41. Can RPU-016 setting be made by selecting Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize
menu? ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-9
x
Contents
Q42. No setting can be made even by changing the Radar number with the Radar
Initialize menu. ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-9
Q43. Where can I make adjustment of echo trail level? ･････････････････････････････ 14-9
Q44. Do I need to connect GYRO data to the LAN Adapter? ････････････････････････ 14-9
Q45. Could the Chart, Installation Parameter, Route, UChart, and Pilot Data be deleted
by updating the program?･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-9
Q46. ARPA targets are lost. ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-9
Q47. Let me know the method for checking the input of serial data in the LAN Adapter. 14-9
Q48. Can I monitor Sensor data vs. Serial data?････････････････････････････････････ 14-10
Q49. Let me know the method for checking the B Adapter.･･････････････････････････ 14-10
Q50. I connected the monitor to the RPU-016 to verify position data, but no position data are
displayed. Is this normal? The Chart Radar displays echoes. ･････････････････････････ 14-10
Q51. I connected the monitor to the RPU-016 to verify AIS data, but no AIS targets are
displayed. Is this normal? The Chart Radar displays as the AIS targets. ･･････････ 14-10
Q52. Is there any method for verifying the Installation Parameter file on my PC?･･････ 14-10
Q53. When I turn ON the power supply, a keyboard error is caused. When I plug the
keyboard and press [F1] key, the system normally boots up. ････････････････････ 14-10
Q54. AIS targets are displayed, but I cannot transmit AIS message from the chart radar. 14-11
Q55. The key of the monitor unit does not work. ･･･････････････････････････････････ 14-11
Q56. Why is the RS232C port of the Monitor unit connected to the COM-1 port of the
EC-1000C? ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････14-11
Q57. When I turn ON the power supply and connect DVI cable, no data are
displayed. ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-11
Q58. Can I use both RGB signal and DVI signal? ･･････････････････････････････････ 14-11
Q59. Which do you recommend us to select DVI or RGB signal for the monitor
signal? ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-11
Q60. I registered the wrong Computer name. Let me know how to make registration
change. ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-11
Q61. How to communication between the RPU-016 and the EC-1000C? ･････････････ 14-12
xi
Contents
Appendix 1) List of Alarms

Description of the Alarm Priority System ･･････････････････････････････････････････ AP1-1
AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP1-2
AP1.2 Additional Navigation Alarms ･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP1-17
AP1.3 List of Chart Alarms ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP1-18
AP1.4 ARPA Alarms ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP1-20
Appendix 2) NMEA and IEC Sentences

AP2.1 List of Talker name ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-1
AP2.2 Configuration of the Sentence from ARPA to ECDIS ･････････････････････････ AP2-3
1. OSD – Own Ship Data ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-3
2. PAESP – Position Adjust ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-3
3. TTM – Target ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-4
4. RSD – Radar System Data ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-4
AP2.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS to ARPA ･････････････････････････ AP2-5
1. GLL – Position ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-5
2. GGA – Position ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-5
3. FUGLL – Future Position ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-5
4. DTM – Datum･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-6
5. OSD – Own Ship Data ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-6
6. ZDA – UTC Time ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-6
7. DPT - Depth ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-7
8. MWV – Wind ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-7
9. PAESP – Position Adjust Acknowledge･･････････････････････････････････ AP2-7
10. PAESC – Curved EBL ････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-7
11. PAESF – Fix Target Acquire/Cancel ･･･････････････････････････････････ AP2-8
12. PLSPL – Chart Segment ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-8
13. PLSPS – Chart Symbol ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-9
14. PAESW – Waypoint List･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-9
15. PAESN - Notebook･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-9
AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-10
AP2.4.1 Trackpilot ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-10
AP2.4.2 GYRO1 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-10
AP2.4.2.1. When source is a direct gyro with analog synchro or
stepper interface ････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-10
AP2.4.2.2. When source is a direct gyro ････････････････････････････････････ AP2-11
AP2.4.2.3. When source is a trackpilot ･････････････････････････････････････ AP2-11
AP2.4.3 GYRO2 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-12
xii
Contents
AP2.4.4 Rate of Turn ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-12

AP2.4.4.1. When source is a direct gyro ････････････････････････････････････ AP2-12
AP2.4.4.3. When source is a dual axis log with internal rate of turn gyro･･･････ AP2-13
AP2.4.5 Ground speed from a dual axis log (=DAX) ･････････････････････････････ AP2-14
AP2.4.5.1. When source is a dual axis log using VBW message･･･････････････ AP2-14
AP2.4.5.2. When source is a dual axis log using PKVBW message････････････ AP2-14
AP2.4.5.3. When source is a dual axis log with transverse bow and
stern measurement using PSALL message･････････････････････ AP2-15
AP2.4.6 Water speed ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-15
AP2.4.6.1. When source is a pit log with closed contact interface ･････････････ AP2-15
AP2.4.6.2. When source is a dual axis log using VBW message･･･････････････ AP2-16
AP2.4.6.3. When source is a dual axis log using PKVBW message････････････ AP2-16
AP2.4.7 Position, datum, SOG and COG from a DGPS･･･････････････････････････ AP2-17
AP2.4.7.1. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1) ････････････････ AP2-17
AP2.4.7.2. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) ････････････････････････････････････ AP2-17
AP2.4.7.3. Datum (only IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) ････････････････････････････････ AP2-18
AP2.4.7.4. SOG and COG (IEC 61162-1 Ed.1)･･････････････････････････････ AP2-18
AP2.4.8 Position, datum, SOG and COG from any other source than DGPS ････････ AP2-19
AP2.4.8.3. Datum (only IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) ････････････････････････････････ AP2-20
AP2.4.9 System time from a GPS ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-22
AP2.4.9.1. System time･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-22
AP2.4.10 Water depth ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-22
AP2.4.10.1. When source is an echosounder ････････････････････････････････ AP2-22
AP2.4.11 Wind ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-23
AP2.4.11.1.When source is a wind sensor･･･････････････････････････････････ AP2-23
AP2.4.12 Water temperature ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-23
AP2.4.12.1.When source is a water temperature sensor･･･････････････････････ AP2-23
AP2.4.13 ARPA targets･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-24
AP2.4.13.1.When source is a radar using TTM message ･･････････････････････ AP2-24
AP2.4.13.2. When source is a Furuno radar with
”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface････････････････ AP2-25
AP2.4.14 Speed and course from an ARPA radar ････････････････････････････････ AP2-25
AP2.4.14.1.When source is a radar using OSD message ･･････････････････････ AP2-25
AP2.4.14.2.When source is a Furuno radar with
”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface････････････････ AP2-26
AP2.4.15 Optional signals for Conning Display from Engine Control･･････････････ AP2-26
AP2.4.15.1.When source is simulated SINDEL Engine Control ･･･････････････ AP2-26
AP2.4.15.2.When source is NORCONTROL Engine Control ･････････････････ AP2-26
xiii
Contents
AP2.4.16 Transmitted messages to an ARPA radar ･･････････････････････････････ AP2-27

AP2.4.16.1.Datum････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-27
AP2.4.16.2.Own ship position ･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-27
AP2.4.16.3.Depth below transducer ････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-28
AP2.4.16.4.Wind･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-28
AP2.4.16.5. When ARPA radar uses
Furuno ”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface･･････････ AP2-28
AP2.4.16.6.When ARPA radar is a Selesmar radar･･･････････････････････････ AP2-29
AP2.4.17 AIS Targets ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-29
AP2.4.17.1.When source is AIS Transponder ･･･････････････････････････････ AP2-29
AP2.4.18 Route backup to external device ･･････････････････････････････････････ AP2-29
AP2.4.18.1.Datum････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-29
AP2.4.18.2.Waypoint ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-30
AP2.4.18.3.Route ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-30
AP2.4.19 Route restore from external device････････････････････････････････････ AP2-31
AP2.4.19.1.Waypoint ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-31
AP2.4.19.2.Route ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-31
AP2.5 Sensor Data ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-32

AP2.5.1 Sensor and Installation parameter diagram ･･････････････････････････････ AP2-32
AP2.5.2 Source of Position ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-34
AP2.5.3 HDG Data ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-35
AP2.5.4 ROT Data ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-35
AP2.5.5 SOG/COG Data ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-36
AP2.5.6 Source of Docking speed components: Conning and Docking ･････････････ AP2-37
AP2.5.7 Source of Drift ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-37
AP2.5.8 Source of Water Speed for drift calculation･･････････････････････････････ AP2-38
AP2.5.9 Summary of interfaces and optional components･････････････････････････ AP2-39
Appendix 3) Specifications
1. GENERAL･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-1
2. RADAR/CHART RADAR ･･････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-2
3. ECDIS ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-3
4. I/O ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-4
5. POWER SUPPLY ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-5
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ･･････････････････････････････････････AP3-6
7. COLOR ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-6
8. PERFORMANCE MONITOR ･･･････････････････････････････････････････AP3-6
9. SWITCHING HUB ････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-7
xiv
Contents
Ref-1) Installation of C-Map ･･････････････････････････ Ref1
Ref-2) Installation of PP-510 Driver ･･･････････････････ Ref2
Ref-3) Updating of HDD Firmware ････････････････････ Ref3
Electrical Parts List･･･････････････････････････････････････ E-1
Contents of Drawings ････････････････････････････････････ S-0
xv
Introduction
Introduction
1. Checks after Installation
Completion of installation - EC-1000C

LAN1 -> RPU-016
LAN2 -> LAN adapter
- RPU-016
LAN connection check - LAN adapter
LAN port of LAN module
Wiring check on LAN adapter Record the contrast of

the connecting channel
and corresponding
sensor.
IP setting check
- RPU-016
- LAN adapter
- EC-1000C (LAN1, 2)
Old
Program check on EC-1000C and RPU-016 Program updating
LAN adapter must coincide with No Updating of LAN

EC-1000C in program number. adapter program
Installation parameter settings Must coincide in channel

with the wiring of the LAN
adapter.
Sensor settings
Sensor data must be displayed.
Radar initialize settings
Chart installation
Final checks: Check that a proper Radar image is displayed with no

errors. Be sure to make a data backup of Inatalation Parameter.
i
Introduction
Check-list
Reference
No. Check item
page
Check that DIP SW1 #3 on the SPU board of the RPU-016 is ON.
1 The error message "Connection Lost to ARPA CPU" will be displayed and no 4-1
communication with the EC-1000C or RPU-016 will be possible if it is OFF.
Check that the LAN connector for the LAN adapter is connected to the LAN
2 5-7
module.
Check that the power supply to each unit is in conformity with the power
supply specifications of the unit. 11-15
3
Pay attention to the power supply specifications of the RPU-016, in 11-20
particular. There are 100- and 220-VAC models.
Check that the EC-1000C coincides with the LAN adapter in program
number. Otherwise, update the program of the LAN adapter. 9-9
4
- LAN adapter: Type "sercotr" after starting the 7188XW. 12-15
- EC-1000C: Execute [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Selftest.
Check that the LAN adapter is operating.
9-3
5 The LAN adapter is okay if the LED on the LAN module blinks at 1-second
12-7
intervals.
Check that the LAN-1 and LAN-2 ports of the EC-1000C are operating
(communicating).
The LAN-1 port connects to the RPU-016 and LAN-2 port connects to the
LAN adapter. 12-2
6
Each port is in communication if the green LED is blinking. 12-3
Note:
You can check with the Ping command used on the DOS prompt screen
to ascertain whether the LAN connections are correct.
Check that the connection port of each sensor to the LAN adapter is proper.
CH1: TX/RX(4800) CH2: RX(4800) CH3: TX/RX(4800)
CH4: TX/RX(4800) CH5: TX/RX(4800/38.4k) CH6: RX(4800)
7 5-9
CH7: RX(4800) CH8: RX(4800)
Note:
Always connect AIS to CH5.
Check the LAN connection (IP address) settings.
For No.1 Chart radar
EC-1000C Network
- LAN-1 (ARPA radar): 172.31.3.33
- LAN-2 (LAN adapter)：10.0.0.184
For RPU-016 Radar No. 10-3
- Radar: 172.31.3.6 9-7
For LAN adapter IP address 4-2
8
- No. 1 LAN adapter: 10.0.0.194 4-8
- No. 2 LAN adapter: 10.0.0.195
For No. 2 Chart radar 12-3
- LAN-1 (ARPA radar): 172.31.3.34
- LAN-2 (LAN adapter): 10.0.0.185
- Radar: 172.31.3.7
- No. 1 LAN adapter: 10.0.0.196
- No. 2 LAN adapter: 10.0.0.197
ii
Introduction
Check that installation parameter settings are made.

- AIS transponder: Connect the AIS transponder to CH5 of the LAN adapter
with the Device Interface set to IEC61162-2 (38400bit/s).
- ARPA processor alarm relays: Make settings for alarm output from the
RPU-016.
- Dual Axis Log (DAX): Make settings if the DS-30 or 50 is connected.
- Echo Sounder and Weather: Make settings if the FE-700 is connected.
- General: Information on the vessel, based on which the position of
drawing is offset.
9 - Gyro: Connect gyro data to the RPU-016. Make connection device Chapter 5
settings to either ARPA CPU AD-10 (Only Chart Radar) in AD
format or ARPA CPU Serial in serial communication (at 38.4 kbps).
- Log: Make settings if the DS-80 is connected.
- Positioning Equipment 1-6
- Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication (LAN): Radar connections
Set Own for Chart Radar for the local Chart radar on each Radar
transceiver basis, set Chart Radar for other chart radars, and IMO
Radar for the IMO Radar.
- Wind Sensor: Make settings if the Wind Sensor is connected.
Check that sensor settings are made in [Menu] -> Sensor.
10 Check that the data displayed is for the connected sensor. 3-16
**Check Sensor -> Pos, Spd/Cse page settings and display**
Check that [Menu] -> Echo -> Tune Initialize is executed. 4-4
11
Check that [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize settings are made. 4-5
12 Check that the sensitivity of each Radar as well as its image is proper.
3-16
13 Check that the AIS target is displayed.
3-9
3-9
14 Check that the ARPA is in proper operation.
4-10
Check that no error is generated. AP1-1
15
[Menu] -> Recode -> Current Alarm 3-10
16 Check that the installation parameter settings made are backed up. 5-5
17 Check that the necessary charts are installed. Chapter 6

12-15
18 Check that the program number of each unit is confirmed.
12-29
19 Check that the installation parameter settings are copied to the default file. 5-6
Important:
Settings for the RPU-016 can be made from the EC-1000C. Connect the Control unit
and Monitor unit to the RPU-016, however, and check the items Type, Mode, and
Radar No., in particular, on the Initialize menu. Moreover, make ARPA and Trail
settings and check that position data is displayed as well.
Make the following settings for the above: OS POSN -> NAV AID -> LAN、
INITIALIZE -> NETWORK -> NET WORK SETTING -> RADAR -> INS ADDRESS
-> 0000.0000.0000.0000
iii
Introduction
2. Boards Exchange
Be sure to turn the LAN-connected equipment OFF and ON if IP address settings for the
LAN adapter, RPU-016, or EC-1000C are changed.
Reference
Exchange Description
page
Chart radar software is usually installed.
If ECDIS software is installed, replace it with the Chart radar
EC-1000C software. Chapter 6
Other procedures are the same as the following HDD replacement
procedure.
The BIOS screen will be displayed with the power turned ON if the
Chart radar software is not installed. Install the software in that case.
If the software is installed:

1) The HDD is set for No. 1 EC-1000C and No. 1 LAN adapter. Chapter 6
EC-1000C Reinstall the software if the software installed is for No. 2 Chapter 5
HDD EC-1000C and No. 2 LAN adapter. Chapter 9
2) Check that the LAN adapter coincides in EC-1000C program Chapter 10
version, or otherwise update the LAN adapter software.
3) Check the network settings.
4) Make installation parameter and sensor settings.
5) Install the necessary charts.
Implement Load Optimized Defaults -> BIOS setting initialization,
and make the following settings.
1) Standard CMOS Features Halt on -> All, But Keyboard
2) Advanced BIOS Features -> First Boot Device: HDD-0
EC-1000C 13-33
-> Set Second Boot Device: Floppy
CPU board 13-2
3) Integrated Peripherals -> USB Keyboard Support: Enable
4) Integrated peripherals-> PWRON after PWR-Fail: Former-Sts
5) Power Management Setup -> Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN: Delay 4
Sec
CD Drive No settings are required.
FDD No settings are required.

1) Check that the LAN adapter coincides in EC-1000C program 9-12
LAN adapter version, or otherwise update the LAN adapter software. 9-7
2) Make LAN adapter settings. 9-9
B Adapter No settings are required.
1) Check the power supply specifications.
RPU-016 2) Take the procedure of SPU board replacement.
3) Make GC-10 settings.
Refer to the next page and reset the board to factory default
settings.
1) Set the DIP SW1-#3 to ON (RPU-016).
RPU-016 2) Make settings for [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize.
Chapter 4
SPU board (EC-1000C)
3) Make settings for [Menu] -> Echo -> Tune Initialize. (EC-1000C)
4) Make eco trail level and ARPA detail data settings, if necessary.
(RPU-016)
iv
Introduction
Make specification checks.

RPU-016
03P9339A: 100 VAC/24 rpm
PWR board
03P9339B: 100 VAC/42 rpm 11-20
03P9339A-
03P9339C: 220 VAC/24 rpm
D
03P9339D: 220 VAC/42 rpm
HV-9017 Make a specification check.
11-19
board HV settings: HV-9017A (12 kW); HV-9017B (25/30 kW)
RPU-016
IM
GC-10 Make GC-10 settings.
5-24
board
1) Implement [Menu] -> Echo -> Tune Initialize. (EC-1000C)
2) Reset [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> Page2 TX
Time. (EC-1000C) 4-4
Magnetron 3) Make settings for [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> 4-6
Page1 (Echo Adjust). (EC-1000C) 12-23
4) Conduct a self-test to check the magnetron current and other
monitoring values. (RPU-016)
MIC, IF
1) Implement [Menu] -> Echo -> Tune Initialize. (EC-1000C)
AMP, MD, 4-4
2) Make settings for [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize ->
and RFC 4-6
Page1 Echo Adjust. (EC-1000C)
boards
PSU-007 Make a specification check.
HUB-100 No settings are required.
Check the specifications of power supply input and the output
PR-62
voltage (24 V). Make a transformer tap change, if necessary.
2.1 Handling of RPU-016

1. Option Menu
- Going into INITIALIZE menu.
Press the [MENU] key 5 times while pressing [1: HL OFF].
- Resetting to FACTORY DEFAULT.
1) Call the FACTORY menu by pressing the [2], [3], [4] keys in sequence while
pressing the [1: HL OFF] key.
2) When the FACTORY menu is displayed, select 3. FACTORY DEFAULT and press
the [ENTER] key 5 times.
3) The message “Wait now Formatting…” will be displayed, followed by the
message “Completed!! Power on Restart,” at which time turn OFF the power.
- Items kept on hold after factory default settings are made.
- [Menu] -> 0 [INITIALIZE] -> 4 [INSTALLATION] -> 4 RADAR NO, 6 MODEL, 7
TYPE, 0 PM GAIN ADJ
- [Menu] -> 0 [INITIALIZE] -> 7 [NETWORK]
- [Menu] -> FACTORY -> 2 [LANGUAGE]
v
Introduction
2. SPU Board Exchange

1) Set the DIP SW1-#3 of the SPU board to ON.
2) Make factory default settings after taking a note of the INSTALLATION settings in
the INITIALIZE menu along with the Radar pictuer-related settings.
Setting items to be kept in mind:
* INSTALLATION menu:
Radar No., Model, Type, and ARPA-related items, in particular.
Note:
- The type must be IMO.
- ARPA-related item:
6: ARP PRESET -> 7 [ACQ PRESET] ->
6 [ARP DETAIL DATA]
* Radar pictuer-related menus:
- Picture box menu settings
- Trail box menu settings
Reference: INS Network Address

Position data for the RPU-016 side is input from the EC-1000C. If no position data
has been input, the signal processing of echo or other data on the RPU-016 will not
be possible.
Make OS POSN -> NAV AID -> "INS" position data settings. For INS
communication, go into the Factory menu ([Menu] -> Initialize -> Network ->
Network setting -> Radar -> INS ADDRESS) and check that the INS IP Address is set
to 000.000.000.000 or the LAN-1 IP address of the EC-1000C.
Set the RPU-016 to Factory default settings if no position data is input into the
RPU-016 though position data is displayed on the EC-1000C.
vi
Chapter 1. General
1.1 General
1.1 General
The FCR-21x7 and FCR-28x7 Chart Radars are Automatic Radar Plotting Aids (ARPA)
that adapted IEC60963-1/2/3 and IEC61174 standards.
Each model consists of the FAR-2xx7-series Radar and the FEA-2xx7-series Electronic
Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) in combination.
A Chart radar mode is available, in which radar images are superimposed on charts,
besides a Radar mode and ECDIS mode. No corning display mode is available.
Interface switching(Inter SW) is possible, in which radar images connected are
switchable, provided that the FCR-2xx7 and FAR-2xx7 are LAN connected together
and used in Radar mode.
Charts cannot be shared among FCR-2xx7 units. Install charts in each FCR-2xx7 unit.
ENC charts S57 (ed3.0/3.1) are available as of February 2008, but C-Map (Ed.3.0)
charts are not.
1.1.1 List of FCR-2xx7-series Models with Main Functions

- Collision prevention display supported by the ARPA system and Automatic
Identification System (AIS)
- Route planning and route monitoring function
- Continuous monitoring of the vessel’s position by two or more positioning
sensors
- Safe-depth surveillance and stranding warning function
- Loading and updating of electronic charts
- Various alarm functions to ensure safe navigation
- Sharing of route information with the ECDIS
Table 1.1.1 List of FCR-2xx7-series Models

Transceiver
Model Band Display Output
unit
FCR-2117 10 (12) kW
20.1 type
FCR-2127 25 kW
FCR-2817 23.1 type 10 (12) kW 2-unit type
FCR-2117-BB X Band 10 (12) kW
User’s
RCF-2127-BB arrangement 25 kW
FCR-2827W 23.1 type 25 kW 3-unit type
FCR-2137S 20.1 type
2-unit type
FCR-2837S
23.1 type
FCR-2837SW S Band 30 kW 3-unit type
User’s
FCR-2137S-BB 2-unit type
arrangement
1-1
1.1 General
1.1.2 Precautions
1. Vessels Requiring Chart Radar
The Notation AW of Det Norske Veritas (DNV) demands the installation of Chart radars
from vessels with the highest DNV class specifications. The following table shows the
equipment demanded from DNV-classed vessels by the NAUT-OC and NAUT-AW.
Typical minimum equipment installation for NAUT-OC and NAUT-AW

NAUT- NAUT-
Equipment Remarks
OC AW
Course information system
Gyro compass 2 2 Or other approved and equivalent means
Bearing repeaters 2 2
Steering repeaters 1 1
Digital repeaters 2 4
Distribution 3 5
Steering system
Manual system 1 1 1 Steering stand
Manual system 2 2 4 Tiller or mini wheel
Heading control system 1
Track control system 1
Rudder angle indicators 3 5
Rudder order indicator 1 1
Rate-of-turn indicators 1 (2) 1 (2)
Speed measuring system
Speed log, measuring speed through the water 1 1
Speed log, measuring speed over ground 1* 1* * Vessels of 50 000 gross tonnage and above
Slave displays 1 3
Distribution 1 3
Depth measuring system
Echo sounder 1 1
Slave displays 1 3
Radar system
Radar 1
Radar with ARPA functions 1 2* * One radar, with chart facilities, part of integrated
system
Position-fixing system
DGPS 2 2 1 combined GPS/GLONASS (with Differential
1 1 correction capabilities) may replace one DGPS
GPS slave unit 1 When required at route planning workstation
Watch monitoring and alarm transfer Included in the alarm management system
Main system unit 1 1 Collecting signals and distributing alarms
Operating unit On and off + select back-up/(intervals)
Acknowledge buttons 1 1 In the wheelhouse only
Distribution 8 8 Buzzers
Central alarm panel 1 1 May be an integral part of the conning display
Slave central alarm panels w/acknowledge of 2 Complete panel or group alarms only
sound
Sound reception system
Main system 1 1 Microphones, amplifiers, speakers, control panel
Electronic chart system
ECDIS 1 Part of integrated system
Back-up for ECDIS 1 When ECDIS is the legal chart system
Route planning system 1 If ECDIS is not the only legal chart system
Conning information display system
Display unit 1
Weather information 1
Weather facsimile 1 1
Internal telephone system
Automatic identification system (AIS)
Voyage data recorder (VDR)
1-2
1.1 General
2. LAN Connection Restrictions

Both the FCR-2xx7 and FAR-2xx7 are connectable over a LAN (100 Base-TX). Due to
the LAN traffic of echo data, however, there are restrictions on LAN-connected
equipment.
The number of traffic routes of an IMO Radar is limited to 1 and that of a Chart radar is
limited to 2, and the total number of traffic routes on the system is limited to 5.
The traffic of the ECDIS, if connected, is counted as 0. (There is a record of
accomplishment of a maximum of two units.)
Note:
The Radar inter-switch function does not work while the system is in Chart radar
mode. The Radar inter-switch is available only when the system is in Radar mode.
FCR-2xx7’s traffic routes 0 1 2
RAR-2xx7’s traffic routes 4 3 1
Total no. of traffic routes 4 5 5
3. Applicable Geodetic System

The FCR-21x7 or 28x7 Chart radar uses standard ENC charts for the WGS-84 datum.
Therefore, positioning devices connected to the unit must be compatible with the
WGS-84 datum. IMO standards require the generation of an alarm unless positioning
devices are compatible with the WGS-84 datum.
4. Gyro Data Connections

Input gyro data into the RPU-016. It does not connect to the LAN Adapter.
In order to satisfy ARPA tracking control requirements, input the data in AD format
through the GC-10. In serial data is input, however, make sure that the data satisfies the
required condition of IEC61162-2 (38.4 kbps).
5. VDR Connections
Use a distributor so that digital video interface (DVI) output from the EC-1000C will be
distributed for the display and the video digital recorder (VDR). Furthermore, connect
the DVI-RGB conversion interface to the VDR port so that red, green, and blue (RGB)
signals will be input into the VDR.
DVI/RGB
VDR Distributor
interface
DVI
RS-232
1-3
1.1 General
6. Power Supply Connections

Be sure to supply power to the EC-1000C and MU-201CE/231CE through a UPS so
that the equipment will not be damaged by instantaneous power interruptions. Make
sure that the UPS has a minimum capacity of 500 VA.
- EC-1000C: 0.5 A/230 VAC or 1.5 A/100 VAC
- MU-201/231CE: 0.3 A/230 VAC or 0.6 A/100 VAC
7. Ranges Available to Chart Radar Mode

When the system is in Chart radar mode, Radar ranges of 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3,
6, and 12 NM will be automatically available. While in Radar mode, ranges of 0.125,
0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96 NM will be available.
8. Mode
When the system is in Chart radar mode, the “mode” display will be fixed in NU-TM.
While in Radar mode, the “mode” will be set to NU-TM, NU, HU, HU-TB, CU-TM, or
CU.
9. Comparison with FEA-2xx7

- The FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar does not incorporate a multi-workstation
function that shares route plans or sensor sources with LAN connected FEA-2xx7
units.
- The FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar does not incorporate track control function,
and does not connect to FAP-2000 units.
- The FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar does not incorporate a conning display
function.
- The FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar does not incorporate functions to display
Automatic Route Control System (ARCS) charts.
- The FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart Radar cannot share charts with LAN connected
FEA-2xx7 or FCR-2xx7 units.
- C-MAP ed3.0 cannot be used.
1-4
1.1 General
1.1.3 Unit Configuration

1. Radar Antenna Unit
Antenna Unit models and Performance Monitor (PM) models used for the FCR-21x7 or
FCR-28x7 Chart radar are the same as those for the FAR-2xx7 Series. The
specifications of the Antenna Unit models are classified by TR Unit, Antenna, and
Gearbox. For details, refer to the Service Manual for the FAR-2xx7.
List of Antenna Unit Models

Antenna power
Model TR unit Antenna Gearbox
supply
RTR-078
- XN-20AF: RSB-096
FCR-2117(-BB) (X-10 (12) Power at 24 V is
6.5 ft (24 rpm)
kW) supplied from the
- XN-24AF: RSB-097
RTR-079 Radar Processor unit
FCR-2127(-BB) 8 ft (42 rpm)
(X-25 kW)
RSB-098/099
- 3-phase, 200
VAC, 50 Hz
- 3-phase, 220
VAC, 60Hz
RSB-098/099 - 3-phase, 380
- SN-30AF: (21/26 rpm) VAC, 50 Hz
RTR-080 10 ft - 3-phase, 440
FCR-2137S(-BB)
(S-30 kW) - SN-36AF: RSB-100/101/ VAC, 60 Hz
12 ft 102 RSB-100/101/102
(45 rpm) - 3-phase, 220
VAC, 50 Hz
- 3-phase, 220
VAC, 60 Hz
- 3-phase, 440
VAC, 60 Hz
RTR-078
RSB-096
FCR-2817 (X-10(12)
- XN-20AF: (24 rpm)
kW) Power at 24 V is
6.5 ft RSB-097
RTR-079 supplied from the
FCR-2827 - XN-24AF: (42 rpm)
(X-25 kW) Radar Processor unit
8 ft
RTR-081 RSB-103
FCR-2827W
(X-25 kW) (24 rpm)
1-5
1.1 General
RSB-098/099
- 3-phase, 200
VAC, 50Hz
- 3-phase, 220
VAC, 60 Hz
RSB-098/099 - 3-phase, 380
(21/26 rpm) VAC, 50 Hz
RTR-080 - 3-phase, 440
FCR-2837S
(S-30 kW) RSB-100/101/ VAC, 60 Hz
102 RSB-100/101/102
(45 rpm) - 3-phase, 220
- SN-30AF: VAC, 50Hz
10 ft - 3-phase, 220
- SN-36AF: VAC, 60Hz
12 ft - 3-phase, 440
VAC, 60 Hz
RSB-104
- 3-phase,
200VAC, 50 Hz
- 3-phase,
RTR-082 RSB-104/105 220VAC, 60 Hz
FCR-2837SW
(S-30 kW) (21/26 rpm) RSB-105
- 3-phase,
380VAC, 50 Hz
- 3-phase, 440
VAC, 60 Hz
Note:
1. Supply single-phase 100-115/220-230 VAC at 50/60 Hz to the Radar
Processor unit (RPU-016), Chart Processor Unit (EC-1000C), and Display Unit
(MU-201CE/231CE). Power supplies with DC specifications are not available.
2. In the case of the Antenna Unit for the FCR-2837S, the suffix of the PSU-007
Antenna Power Supply Control Unit varies with the applicable Gearbox model.
List of PSU-007 Models
Applicable Power supply Current Thermal relay

PSU-007 model
Gearbox specification set value model
3-phase, 200 (50 Hz)/
PSU-007-70-23-S RSB-098 2.3 A TR-ONH/3 1.7 A
220 V(60 Hz)
3-phase, 380 (50 Hz)/
PSU-007-80-10-S RSB-099 1.0 A TR-ONH/3 0.8 A
440 V(60 Hz)
PSU-007-72-28-50/60-S RSB-100 3-phase, 220 V (50 Hz) 2.8 A TR-ONH/3 2.2 A
PSU-007-72-28-50/60-S RSB-101 3-phase, 220 V(60 Hz) 2.8 A TR-ONH/3 2.2 A
PSU-007-82-12-60-S RSB-102 3-phase, 440 V (60 Hz) 1.2 A TR-ONH/3 0.8 A
1-6
1.1 General
2. Radar Processor Unit： RPU-016

The Radar Processor unit used for the FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar is the same
in model as that for the FAR-2xx7 Series.
The name of the Radar Processor unit, however, is RPU-016 for the FCR-21x7 or 28x7
Chart Radar. Only the difference is that S1 #3 of the SPU board of the RPU-016 is set to
ON for Chart radars. The Radar type is IMO.
The PWR board and HV-9017 board for the FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar vary
with the power supply specifications, transmission output, and Antenna rpm. Refer to
the Service Manual for the FAR-2xx7 for details.
List of PWR Boards

Antenna PWR board setting Gearbox
Input power PWR revolutions Model
supply Antenna
specification board per minute JP161 JP162
(rpm) motor
RSB-096
03P9339A 24 Open Open D8G-516
100 VAC RSB-103
03P9339B 42/36 Short Short RSB-097 D8G-571
RSB-096
03P9339C 24 Open Open D8G-516
220 VAC RSB-103
03P9339D 42/36 Short Short RSB-097 D8G-571
List of HV-9017 Boards
RPU-013 HV-9017
Radar model Transmissi
serial Jumper setting
(TR Unit) on output Type Adjustment Standard
number JP1 JP2
FCR-2x17 COM- COM- 310 to
12 kW 4328-xxxx A Main inverter
(RTR-078) 300V 330V 350 V
adjustment
FCR-2x27
25 kW
(RTR-079)
Adjust VR1 so
FCR-2x37S
30 kW that the voltage
(RTR-080) COM- COM- 520 to
4329-xxxx B between TP1
FCR-2827W 500V 330V 580 V
25 kW and TP2 will be
(RTR-081)
set to 34.7 to
FCR-2837SW 35.3 VDC.
30 kW
(RTR-082)
3. Chart Processor Unit: EC-1000C

The EC-1000C Chart Processor unit used for the FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radars
is the same in model as that for the FEA-2xx7. A different program, however, is used.
Note:
When installing a program, select the ECDIS or Chart radars.
The Radar overlay (ROV) board or video board is not equipped.
1-7
1.1 General
4. Display Unit：MU-201CE/231CE
Display unit models used for the FCR-21x7 and FCR-28x7 Chart radars are the same as
those for the FEA-2xx7. The MU-201CE is of 20.1 type and the MU-231CE is of 23.1
type.
Use a DVI connecting cable (with a maximum length of 10 m) and RS-232C control
signal cable.
List of Display Units
Function MU-201CE MU-231CE

Size 20.1" 23.1"
Resolution 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
Display effective area 408.0 x 306.0 mm 470.4 x 352.8 mm
Video signal interface DVI digital or VGA selectable.
Radar display effective
250 mm 340 mm
diameter
Power supply 100 to 230 VAC
Backlight remote control
RS-232C
interface
DVI or VGA (<10m) Control Signal

MU-201CE
EC-1000C ・Color calibration signal
MU-231CE ・Brilliance control signal
COM1
RS232C Control Signal
1-8
1.1 General
5. Control Units: RCU-020, RCU-015FEA, and RCU-016

Connect the RCU-020 Standard Unit or RCU-015FEA Trackball unit (Control unit) to
the EC-1000C. Then connect the RCU-016 to the Control unit. The RCU-016 alone
cannot be installed because the RCU-016 does not incorporate a power supply switch.
The program used for the Control units is the same as that for the FAR-2xx7 and
FEA-2xx7 series. However, the key display differs.
RCU-015FEA RCU-016
RCU-020
Function (Trackball (Remote Control
(Standard Unit)
Unit) Unit)
Power SW Yes Yes No
Key 28 4 4
VRM/EBL, No
Rotary encoder No
GAIN/SEA/RAIN/BRILL
Trackball 2 click buttons + scrollwheel
RCU-020 RCU-016
or
No PWR SW
RCU-015FEA
6. LAN Adapter: EC-1010

The EC-1010 LAN Adapter used for the FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar is the
same in model as that for the FEA-2xx7.
IEC-61162 data items, such as EPFS, LOG, and AIS, are connected through the LAN
Adapter. The LAN Adapter has eight input channels. If more input channels are
required, connect the No. 2 LAN Adapter through the Hub.
Supply 24 VDC though the PR-62.
Note:
Input bow direction data to the RPU-016.
7. B-Adapter: EC-1020
The EC-1020 B-Adapter used for the FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar is the same
as that for the FEA-2xx7.
The B-Adapter handles analog signals and alarm output.
Supply 24 VDC through the PR-62.
8. Hub: HUB-100
The HUB-100 used for the FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar is the same in model as
that used for the FAR-2xx7. The HUB-100 is a switching hub provided with eight ports
and an Auto-MDIX function. Connect the HUB-100 between the Radar and an ECDIS
unit or between the ECDIS units.
1-9
1.2 Connections
1.2 Connections
Antenna Unit
Model TR Unit Antenna Gearbox

FCR-2117 RTR-078 XN-20AF RSB-096
FCR-2127 RTR-079 XN-24AF RSB-097
Radar Processor Unit SN-30AF RSB-098/099
VDR (RPU-016) FCR-2137S RTR-080
Gyro data SN-36AF RSB-100/101/102
IP=172.31.3.6 FCR-2817 RTR-078 RSB-096
XN-20AF
Radar ALMs FCR-2827 RTR-079 RSB-097
XN-24AF
DVI/RGB IF FCR-2827W RTR-081 RSB-103
100/220 VAC Sub Monitor RSB-098/099
FCR-2837S RTR-080 SN-30AF
RSB-100/101/102
SN-36AF
Distribution FCR-2837SW RTR-082 RSB-104/105
DV
Switching Hub
(HUB-100)
RS-232
100/220 VAC
In the case of Digital signal x 8 CH: (TX/RX: 4 CH, RX: 4 CH)
(EPFS, AIS, LOG, etc) Analog signal x 8 CH
connecting the VDR. Chart Processor Unit (EC-1000C)
LAN1: For Radar IP=172.31.3.33 ALMs: Relay contact x 3
LAN2: For LAN Adapter ALMs: IN/OUTx 3 CH
IP=10.0.0.184
Display Unit LAN 1
(MU-201CE or 100/220 VAC
MU-231CE)
DVI LAN 2
100/220 VAC RS-232
24 VDC 24 VDC
Control Unit
(RCU-020 or RUU-015FEA)
LAN Adapter (EC-1010) B Adapter
System Failure IP=10.0.0.194 (EC-1020)
e0=10.0.0.184
1-10 Fig. 1.2.1 Connection example 1

1.2 Connections
Note: The power supply for each unit and I/O signal
names in Fig. 1.2.2. to 1.2.5 are left out because they
are the same as those in Fig. 1.2.1.
If two LAN Adapter units are used, connect them to the EC-1000C
through the Hub.
No. 1 LAN No. 2 LAN

Adapter: Adapter:
IP=10.0.0.194 IP=10.0.0.195
e0=10.0.0.184 e0=10.0.0.184
Switching Hub
(HUB-100)
LAN 1
B-Adapter
LAN 2
Switching Hub
(HUB-100)
Fig. 1.2.2 Connection example 2：

Two LAN Adapter units are installed.
1-11
1.2 Connections
No. 1 Radar Processor Unit No. 2 Radar Processor

(RPU-016) Unit
IP=172.31.3.6 (RPU-016)
IP=172.31.3.7
Switching Hub Switching Hub

(HUB-100) (HUB-100)
No. 1 Chart Processor Unit No. 2 Chart Processor Unit

(EC-1000C) LAN Adapter (EC-1010) (EC-1000C)
LAN1: For Radar IP=172.31.3.33 IP=10.0.0.194, 195 LAN Adapter (EC-1010)
LAN 1: For Radar IP=172.31.3.34
LAN2: For LAN Adapter e0=10.0.0.184 IP=10.0.0.196, 197
LAN 2: For LAN Adapter
IP=10.0.0.184 LAN 1 e0=10.0.0.185
IP=10.0.0.185 LAN 1
LAN 2
LAN 2
2 sets
max. 2 sets,
max.
B-Adapter
B-Adapter
Fig. 1.2.3 Connection example 2：
1-12 Two FCR units are installed.

1.2 Connections
No.1 Radar Processor Unit Radar Processor

No. 2 Radar Processor Unit
(RPU-016) Unit
(RPU-016)
IP=172.31.3.6 (RPU-013)
IP=172.31.3.7
IP=172.31.3.8
No.1 Chart Processor Unit No. 2 Chart Processor Unit

(EC-1000C) LAN Adapter (EC-1010) (EC-1000C)
IP=10.0.0.194, 195 LAN Adapter (EC-1010)
LAN1: For Radar IP=172.31.3.33 LAN 1: For Radar IP=172.31.3.34
e0=10.0.0.184 IP=10.0.0.196, 197
LAN2: For LAN Adapter LAN 2: For LAN Adapter
LAN 1 e0=10.0.0.185
IP=10.0.0.184 IP=10.0.0.185 LAN 1
LAN 2
LAN 2
Fig. 1.2.4 Connection Example 3：
1-13 Two FCR units and a single radar is installed.

1.2 Connections
- No. 1 ECDIS Processor

Unit
LAN 1: IP=172.31.3.29
Radar Processor LAN 2: IP=10.0.0.180
Unit - LAN Adapter
(RPU-013) IP=10.0.0.190, 19１
IP=172.31.3.8 e0=10.0.0.180
No .1 Radar Processor Unit
(RPU-016) LAN 2
IP=172.31.3.6
LAN 1
No. 1
No.1 ECDIS
Chart Radar
No. 1 Chart Processor Unit No. 2

(EC-1000C) LAN 1 ECDIS
LAN1: For Radar IP=172.31.3.33 No.2
LAN 1
LAN2: For LAN Adapter Chart Radar LAN 2
IP=10.0.0.184
LAN 2
- No. 2 Radar Processor Unit
IP=172.31.3.7
- No. 2 Chart Processor Unit - No. 2 ECDIS Processor
LAN 1: IP=172.31.3.34 Unit
LAN 2: IP=10.0.0.185 LAN 1: IP=172.31.3.30
- LAN Adapter LAN 2: IP=10.0.0.181
LAN Adapter (EC-1010) IP=10.0.0.196, 197 - LAN Adapter
IP=10.0.0.194, 195 e0=10.0.0.185 IP=10.0.0.192, 193
e0=10.0.0.184 e0=10.0.0.181
Fig. 1.2.5 Connection Example 3：

Two FCR/ECDIS units and radars are installed.
1-14
Chapter 2. Operation
2.1 Finishing andOverview
Starting Chart Radar
2.1 Finishing and Starting Chart Radar

2.1.1 Finishing Chart Radar
Procedure
1. Connect the service keyboard to the EC-1000C.
2. Press the [Tab] key while pressing the [Alt] key. When the following screen appears,
press the [Tab] key several times while pressing the [Alt] key until ECAWATCH is
selected.
Whenever the [Tab] key is pressed,

the icon of the application to be
Select executed will change.
ECAWATCH.
3. When the following ECAWATCH screen is displayed, click [Shutdown the Chart
Rader].
Restart/Stop button
for software currently
running.
Shutdown the Chart Rader
4. A prompt screen for the Control Head will be displayed. Press − button and
minimize the screen.
Reference:
Key (trackball) control will be disabled if the Control Head screen is closed
by clicking X.
5. The Windows screen will appear by pressing the [F4] key while pressing the [Alt]
key after clicking anywhere in the screen once.
2-1
2.1 Finishing and Starting Chart Radar
2.1.2 Starting Chart Radar Screen from Windows Screen

Procedure
1. Press the [Windows] key.
2. The Turn off computer screen will appear by clicking Turn Off Computer after
pressing the Windows key while the Windows screen is displayed.
3. Windows will start by clicking Restart.

4. After a while, the Command Head prompt screen will appear, followed by the
ECAWATCH screen.
Note:
Do not erase the Command Head prompt screen with the X button.
Otherwise, the control keys will become disabled. To enable the keys,
press the Windows key and select Start -> Program -> Startup ->
Control Head.
Do not press the X
button.
Normal mode. Press T to enter test mode
5. The “S57 chart draw is starting up” popup message will appear. After a while, the
Chard radar screen will appear.
Reference:
The following method can be used as well. Select Program -> Startup ->
Ecawatch from the Start menu. The Chart radar will start from the above step 4.
2-2
2.2 Screen
2.2 Screen
2.2.1 Chart Radar Screen
Limited to Northup TM up to a range

Status bar: Change with scrollwheel for Pilot, UChart,
of 12 NM while in Chart Radar mode.
or Route monitoring.
Mode selection: Chart
Radar/Radar/ECDIS Status bar: Predictor
Data
display
Chart Radar
screen
When the box with the arrow appearing is Guide

clicked, the relative menu will appear. Corresponds to the
button and scrollwheel
on the trackball.
2-3
2.2 Screen
2.2.2 Radar Screen

Status bar: Change with scrollwheel for Status bar: Predictor
Pilot, UChart, or Route monitoring.
2-4
2.2 Screen
2.2.3 ECDIS Screen
Status bar
- NorthUp TM (RM): Chart display mode
- ECDIS: Mode display
- Route: Route name
- UChart: User chart name
- PilotData: Pilot data name
- Radar: Radar video source
- Predictor: Prediction time
All chart information is

turned ON.
2-5
2.3 Basic Operations

2.3.1 Menu Control
1. The Main menu will be displayed and can be selected by clicking [Menu]. The
Radar mode or Chart radar mode is different from the ECDIS mode in the contents
of the Main menu.
Radar or Chart Radar mode ECDIS Mode
Note:
Installation Parameters or Radar Initialize in the [Initial Settings] -> INITIAL
SETTINGS menu cannot be selected unless the Authorizing Key Disk is
inserted into the FDD.
2-6
2. Turn the scrollwheel and select the target item in the guidance area. Then select the
menu with left/right button and/or scrollwheel control (clicking). The Radar mode or
Chart radar mode is different from the ECDIS mode in the contents of the guidance
area.
3. When a cursor is located on the target place in the data display area, the relative
item (menu) will appear in the guidance area so that the menu can be selected
quickly.
4. By clicking the box marked with the arrow symbol (), e.g., the BRILL box, the
corresponding set menu will appear and can be maneuvered.
5. When the cursor is located on the set data, the display color of the data will change
by wheeling and clicking.
6. In the case of character input, select Options in the guidance area first. Then select
On-Screen Keyboard in the Options menu. Then the keyboard screen will appear,
where characters can be easily input.
7. The Display Selection menu in the data box will appear when Select Sidebar is
selected in the guidance area after locating the cursor in the data box. The Radar
mode or Chart radar mode is different from the ECDIS mode in the contents of the
main menu.
ECDIS Chart Radar Radar

Route Route Route
Autopilot Autopilot Autopilot
Conning Chart Legend Chart Legend
Docking
Chart Legend
2-7
Radar/Chart Radar
Sidebar menu
Route Autopilot Chart Legend
Note:
The Chart Radar does not connect to the Autopilot.
2-8
ECDIS Sidebar menu
Route + Chart Legend Autopilot + Chart Legend
Note:
The Chart Radar does not connect
to the Autopilot.
Route Autopilot
Route+Connin Route+Docking Autopilot+Conning Autopilot+Docking
2-9
8. Display Contents of Guide Box 1

The following table shows items that will be displayed when the cursor is located on the
Radar or Chart screen.
Radar/Chart Radar Mode ECDIS Mode

Menu/info/Chart Menu Menu/info/Chart Menu
Chart Display/Info/Base Display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display
Info/ Nav Marks Show Value/Info/Nav Marks
Tgt Acquire/Info/Tgt Cancel(L=All) Hide Value/Info/Nav Marks
Ref Mark/Info Set Chart Center/Info/Active Scroll
Info/Cursor Menu Info/Cursor Menu
Event/Info/MOB Event/Info/MOB
TM Reset/Info/Ship Offcenter TM Reset/Info/Ship Offcenter
TM Reset/Info/Ship Center TM Reset/Info/Ship Center
Range-/Info/Range+ Range-/Info/Range+
9. Display Contents of Guide Box 2

When the cursor is located in the data display area, the relative menu will be displayed
as shown below. When the scrollwheel is turned, the displayed contents of the guidance
area will change as shown in the above table.
Menu | | Chart Menu . | | Sensors ECDIS Select Sidebar

- Route
- Autopilot
- Conning
. | | Sensors - Docking
- Chart Legend
Radar and
Chart Radar Select Sidebar
- Route
Menu | | Select Sidebar
- Autopilot
・ECDIS - Chart Legend
Show Value | | Nav Mark
・Radar, Chart radar
. | | Nav Mark
Local (UTC)Time | | Set Time
CPA On/Off | |
Menu | | Chart Menu

. | | Initial Setting
Alarm Ack | | Alarm List
2-10
10. The Chart Display menu shows Route, User chart, Pilot data, and Chart
display items. The Radar or Cart radar mode is different from the ECDIS mode in
the contents of the Main menu. Chart display set values can be saved and retrieved.
ECDIS mode
2-11
Chart Radar/Radar Mode
Meanings of Off, Std, and Oth

- Off: The function of the selected item is turned
OFF.
- Std: The function of the selected item is turned
ON when the standard display is effective.
- Oth: The function of the selected item is turned
OFF when the standard display is
effective.
2-12
Reference: Saving and retrieving chart display set values.

Items that can be saved are Other1, Other2, Tracking, Mariner, and Route pages.
1. Create
Open the Chart Display menu and make settings for each page.
Next, when the cursor is put on the [>] mark, the [Chat Display] menu will appear.
Select Create and input the set name.
2. Select, Save, Read Only
To read the preset value, choose Select. Then select the name registered in the above
step. Click Save if any correction is made.
In the case of only reading the set value, select Read Only.
3. Backup and Restore
To eliminate the registered set value, select Backup and Restore.
Select Chart Display Settings in the file category, select the file to be deleted in the
Hard Disk field, and click the [Delete] button. See 2-52.
Name registered in Chart Display.

- ALL-OFF : The set value of the registered name is read.
- *ALL-OFF : The read set value is changed.
- (r)ALL-OFF : The set value is read only and cannot be changed.
2-13
2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

2.4.1 Icon Box on Upper Left-hand Side
1. Range Change
Note:
A maximum range of 12 NM is available while in Chart Radar mode.
12 (
Range 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.5 3 6 24 48 96
See note)
Range ring 0.025 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.5 1 2 4 8 16
Number of
5 5 5 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
rings
2. Display Mode Change

2) Mode change
- Radar
- NorthUp TM - Chart Radar
- NorthUp RM - ECDIS
- HeadUp RM
- HeadUp TB RM
- CourceUp RM
Note:
Only NorthUp TM while in Settings in the PICTURE menu
Chart Radar mode. changes with the mode change
and vice versa.
3. PULSE： Pulse Width Change

The relation between ranges and pulse width varies with Radar Model settings.
Make the following Radar Model settings: [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL
SETTINGS -> Radar Initialize -> Page2
0.125 -
Range 0.5 0.75 - 1.5 3 6 12 - 24 48 - 96
0.25
X-band
S1, S2, S2, M1, M1, M2,
6, 12, 25, S1 S1, S2 M2, M3, L L
M1 M2, M3 M3, L
30 kW
S-band S, M1,
S S, M1 L, M1, M2 M2, L L
50, 60 kW M2
2-14
4. Radar Antenna Switch (Inter SW)

The following description shows an example of the display
configuration of the N1 X-BAND radar name.
- N1: Displayed as registered with Label in the following
settings: [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL
SETTINGS -> Installation Parameters ->
Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA communication
- X-BAND: Set for Radar Model in the following settings:
[Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS ->
Radar Initialize -> Page2
- 6, 12, 25UP, 25DOWN, 50 -> X BAND
- 30UP, 30DOWN, 60 -> S BAND
ANT INFO
The information on the Radar that is LAN connected is
displayed.
If the Radar cannot be connected, the error message “Conn fail”
appears in the PULSE display box.
In that case, nothing will be displayed in the [ANT INFO] box
any more.
Reference: Local Ant No. settings

Take the following steps to set the local Radar number to 2, for example;
1. Set Radar Number to “2” in the following settings: [Menu] -> Initial Settings
-> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Radar Initialize -> Page 2
2. Turn the power supply OFF, and then ON.
3. Furthermore, set Radar transceiver to “2”, Connected to “YES”, and Device
Interface to “Own Chart Radar” in the following settings: [Menu] -> Initial
Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Installation Parameters ->Radar Echo
Overlay/ARPA communication
Others:
Select a different Radar transceiver and check that Device Interface is
not set to Own Chart Radar.
Note:
Make sure that the same IP address does not exist in the network.
For example, the No.1 and No.2 chart radars cannot be set to the same
Radar number.
2-15
Inter SW Priority
Note: The inter switch (SW) settings are available only while in Radar mode.
Priority can be attached to the operation of two or more Radars that are LAN connected.
For example, if the Radar image displayed on two Chart radars is from the same Radar
antenna and Priority for one of the Chart radar is set to ON, the Radar image cannot be
controlled from the Chart radar with Priority set to OFF.
Regardless of whether it is ON or OFF, where there is no difference in priority attached
between the Chart radars, the operation of the Chart radars will be interlocked. That is,
if the range of one of them is changed, the other one will be changed to the same range.
Operable
No. 1 Chart Radar： No. 2 Chart Radar：
Priority ON Not operable Priority OFF
And Radar images, such as echo stretch, echo average, and echo trail images, are
received and processed by the RPU-016.
ARPA-related items, such as acquire and tracking items, are processed by itself, and the
results are transmitted through the LAN. Acquire control, vector mode/time, tracking
interval, and TCPA/CPA settings will be made by the RPU-016 on the selected side.
Functions under individual Function under common control

control of inter SW of inter SW
- Display mode - Range

- Echo stretch - GAIN, STC, A/C Rain
- Signal processing - Tune
- Echo trail - Pulse width
- Vector mode and vector time - Picture settings
- ARPA ON/OFF - ST-BY/Transmission
- AIS ON/OFF - ARPA ACQ
- ARPA Alarm - ARPA GZ
- ARP and AIS tailing interval
- Ship’s speed data
- Latitude longitude data
- EBL and VRM
- dimmer
2-16
5. PICTURE 1: Radar Image Settings

There are 12 types of radar image settings, i.e., PICTURE 1 through COAST, each of
which is different in image setting.
Menu Outline
Rejects Radar interference from other
vessels. (3: Strong)
INT REJECT
Signal correlation is taken per sweep. The
(OFF/1/2/3)
number of correlation taking times will
increase if the set number increases.
Increases the number of echo display dots
for echo expanded display.
ECHO
1: Expanded in the bearing direction
STRETCH
2: Expands in the range direction
(OFF/1/2/3)
3: Expands in the bearing direction and
range direction.
ECHO
Use 1 or 2 if there is excessive sea clutter.
AVERAGE
Use 3 in a long range with weak echo.
(OFF/1/2/3)
Rejects white noise when the function is
NOISE REJ turned ON.
(OFF/ON) The integral processing of echo is
performed for noise suppression.
Divides each scan into 32 sectors and
AUTO STC
each sector is under optimum STC control
(OFF/ON)
automatically.
Makes A/C Rain function settings. (4:
AUTO RAIN Maximum)
(OFF/1/2/3/4) Performs the differential processing of
echo.
Adjusts the contrast of echo.
VIDEO
Sets the inclination level of video
CONTRAST
projected as echo. If the value is set to 4
(1/2/3/4)
(small dynamic range) with C-curve, weak
(A/B/C)
echoes can be projected clearly.
[PULSE]
0.5 NM, 0.75 NM
Sets the pulse width of each range.
1.5 NM, 3 NM
6 NM, 12-24 NM
[CONDITION]
SEA The optimal operation of STC control for
CONDITION the situation is realized by changing the
(1 - 5) condition of the sea, antenna, and STC
ANT HEIGHT range. The larger the STC range is, the
(5 - 50) wider the effective range of STC control
STC RANGE will be.
(-10 - +10)
2-17
PICTURE Initial Set Values

ECHO
INT ECHO NOISE AUTO AUTO VIDEO
STRETC
REJECT AVERAGE REJ STC RAIN CONTRAST
H
PICTURE 1 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF B1
PICTURE 2 2 2 1 OFF OFF OFF B2
PICTURE 3 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF B1
PICTURE 4 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 A2
NEAR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF B2
FAR 2 2 3 ON OFF OFF B3
NEAR BUOY 2 1 1 OFF OFF OFF B2
FAR BUOY 2 2 3 ON OFF OFF B3
ROUGH SEA 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF A2
SHIP 2 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF B2
HARBOR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF B2
COAST 2 OFF OFF(2) OFF OFF OFF B2
Pulse Condition
ANT
0.75 12-24 Sea STC
0.5 NM 1.5 NM 3 NM 6 NM Heigh
NM NM Cond. Range
t
PICTURE 1 S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L 2 5 +0
PICTURE 2 S2 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 5 +0
PICTURE 3 S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 L 3 5 +0
PICTURE 4 S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L 2 5 +0
NEAR S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 L 2 5 +0
FAR S2 M1 M1 M3 L L 3 5 +0
NEAR BUOY S2 M1 M1 M2 L L 2 5 +0
FAR BUOY S2 M1 M1 M3 L L 2 5 +0
ROUGH SEA S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 4 5 +0
SHIP S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 5 +0
HARBOR S1 S1 S2 M1 M3 L 5 5 +0
COAST S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 5 +0
Reference:
ANT Height settings are interlocked with the Antenna height settings in [Menu] ->
Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Radar Initialize -> Page 1.
For example, changes in PICTURE Antenna height settings are as effective as
changes in Radar Initialize Page1 settings, and any changes will be reflected to all the
PICTURE settings.
Note:
To return set values to initial settings, open the PICTURE menu on the radar side
(RPU-016), and execute DEFAULT.
2-18
2.4.2 Icon Box on Lower Left-hand Side
Operation of Index
Line-1 and 2 Disp Dimmer
settings
BRILL1 – 4: Four
types of settings are
possible.
HL OFF: Elimination of
Range Ring, IL, EBL,
VRM, HD Mark, HD Line,
and North mark
EBL settings
- EBL1 -> Dotted line with
wide intervals
- EBL2 -> Dotted line with
TX STBY
narrow intervals
Guidance area
[/L=Delete | | ]
[EBL on || ]
1. I L-1, 2: Index Line

The set menu is common to Index-1 and 2.
Set item Set value Remarks

Stern Mark On/Off
EBL Cursor On/Off
bearing
Range Rings On/Off
Index Lines 1, 2, 3, 6 True or Relative
settings and line
interval settings are
possible.
Index Line Mode Horizontal/ Vertical or horizontal
settings to the HD.
Vertical
2-19
2. BRILL1 – 4: BRILLIANCE
The BRILLIANCE of the marks and characters on the Radar screen or Chart radar
screen can be individually set to four types (BRILL-1 through BRILL-4).

DAY/DAYBLUE Color settings for the
Palette
/NIGHT screen background.
The same as
Panel Dimmer . DIMMER adjustments
in the BRILL box.
The set value will be
reset to initial value
Calibrated ON
(80%) with the item
turned ON.
Dsp Dimmer .
Character .
Cursor .
Green/Yellow/
Echo White
.
Trail .
HL . Dimmer ADJ.
Index Line,
Range Rings, .
EBL, VRM
BRG Cursor .
Tgt Symbol .
Mark .
Chart .
Monochrome ON/OFF
Reference:
Make Palette settings for the ECDIS in [Menu] -> Chart Display -> Chart ->
Palette.
2-20
2.4.3 Icon Box on Upper Right-hand Side

- GAIN
- SEA: MAN/AUTO
- RAIN: MAN/AUTO
- TUNE: MAN/AUTO
TUNE MAN: The TUNE
voltage of the MIC is adjusted
TRIAL setting manually. The triangular mark
[Menu] -> Arpa+AIS -> indicates the voltage (24 V FS).
Trial -> Mode ->
Displayed in dynamic
or static mode. CHART DISP
MENU
1. CHART DISP
The CHART DISP consists of Targets, Mariners, Route, Other, Chart, and Tracking
pages.
The menu is different from the Chart Display menu on the ECDIS screen.
1. Targets
AIS Target and Fusion setting items will not be displayed unless AIS
Function in [Menu] -> Arpa+AIS is set to ON.

ARPA Targets
Symbol Off/Std/Oth Used to make settings for the
Green/Blue/Yellow/ handling of ARPA symbol.
Color
Cyan/Magenta/White To display the ARPA symbol,
Size STD/Small/Large set Symbol to Std.
AIS Targets
Symbol Off/Std/Oth Used to make settings for the
Max 20/40/100/200 number of displayed AIS items
Max 6/12/24/48nm and the display range of AIS
Green/Blue/Yellow/ targets for the handling of the
Color AIS symbol.
Cyan/Magenta/White
To display the AIS symbol, set
Size STD/Small/Large Symbol to Std.
Fusion Targets
Targets ON/OFF Used to make settings for the
Gap 0.000 – 0.999 nm fusion conditions of AIS and an
Rng Dff 0.000 – 0.999 nm ARPA targets. Only the AIS
Spd Dff 0.0 – 9.9 kt symbol is displayed as an
ARPA target under set
Cse Dff 0.0 – 9.9 deg T conditions.
2-21
2. Mariners

Pilot data
Position Off/Std/Oth
Used to select the display of
Range Off/Std/Oth
data created by the Pilot Plan.
Text Off/Std/Oth
User chart
Points Off/Std/Oth
Lines Off/Std/Oth Used to select the display of
Symbols, data created by the UChart
Off/Std/Oth
Tidats Plan.
Areas Off/Std/Oth
Only radar of
Off/Std/Oth
Symbol, Areas
25% Transparent/
Used to set the shade of the
50% Transparent/
display of areas created by the
75% Transparent/
User Chart.
No Color Fill
Manual Updates
Manual
Off/Std/Oth
Updates
Ship
1 : 10000/
Ship 1 : 20000/
True symbol 1 : 50000/
scale limit 1 : 100000/
1 : 200000
Vectors
Std ECDIS/ Make ARPA settings and the
Vectors
Conventional vessel’s vector form settings.
2-22
3. Route

Monitored route
Center line Off/Std/Oth
Channel
Off/Std/Oth Used to make Route display
borders
settings in the Radar or
WP Off/Std/Oth
Chart Radar screen.
Leg marks Off/Std/Oth
Wheel over line Off/Std/Oth
Planed routs
Channel Used to make Plan display
Off/Std/Oth
borders settings in the Radar or
WP Off/Std/Oth Chart Radar screen.
4. Others
Set value Setting Remarks

Depth contour
label
Depth contours,
Used to turn the display of
Magnetics,
,X symbols in charts ON/OFF on
Currents
the Chart Radar screen.
Soundings
Lights
Light descriptions
2-23
5. Charts
Set value Setting Remarks
.
Dsp Dimmer
CALIB/UNCAL
Shallow
0 – 99 m
contour Used to make settings for the
Safety depth 0 – 99 m depth-sounding display on
Safety contour 0 – 99 m charts.
Deep contour 0 – 99 m
Used to reset of screen
TM Reset 0 – 99%
display.
DAY/NIGHT/
Palette
DAYBLUE
Simplified/
Symbols
Paper chart
Two color/
Depths
Multi color Used to make display color
Boundaries Plan/Symbolize settings
Light sectors Limited/Full
Shallow
None/Diamond
pattern
Update All effects/
highlight Detailed
2-24
6. Tracking
Sett value Setting Remarks

Past tracks
Ship Sys Off/Std/Oth
Ship Pri Off/Std/Oth
Used to make the vessel’s
Ship Sec Off/Std/Oth
track display settings.
Length 1 – 120 min
Labels 0 – 60 min
Targets Off/Std/Oth
Used to make settings for
Use 5/10 point
AIS and ARPA track display.
Interval Off/30s/1/2/3/6 min
Event
User
Off/Std/Oth
Event
Used to turn Event display
Auto
Off/Std/Oth ON/OFF.
Event
Positions Off/Std/Oth
Newer than 12
hours/
Newer than 24
hours/
Used to make settings for
Show Newer than 1 week/
Event time display.
Newer than 2 week/
Newer than 1 month/
Newer than 3 month/
All
Event mark and MOB
By selecting the Event

mark and clicking Info in
the guidance area,
information on the mark
will appear.
Reference:
A check can be made with the Event list
or Menu -> Recode.
2-25
2.4.4 Icon Box on Lower Right-hand Side

TGT LIST: ARPA target and
AIS target list display.
ARPA Man, Auto, AutoMan/Off: Used AIS Disp/Off: Used to turn AIS
to decide the acquire method of target display ON/OFF.
ARPA targets and turn ARPA target
display ON/OFF.
GZ1, 2
SET/WORK/SLEEP:
True Trail/Rel Trail: OFF to 30
min, CONT (True Train in the
case of NorthUp TM2) TM Reset
ALM ACK
Note: VRM settings :

The icon box menu of Trail is - VRM1 -> Dotted line with wide intervals
the same as that of [MENU] - VRM2 -> Dotted line with narrow intervals
-> Radar. Guidance area
[/L=Delete | | ]
[VRM on | | ]
1. ARPA, GZ1, and GZ2

These areas are used for ARPA/AIS GZ settings, and common to the automatic acquire
area of the ARPA.
- GZ 1: Set in an arbitrary direction with a width of 0.5 to 1 nm within a range of 3
to 6 NM.
- GZ 2: Set in an arbitrary direction with a width of 0.5 to 1 nm within a range of 24
NM.
GZ2 settings are not possible unless GZ1 settings are made. Furthermore,
unless GZ2 settings are deleted, GZ1 settings cannot be deleted. To delete GZ settings,
locate the cursor in the GZ icon box and continue pressing the left button.
In the case of performing the automatic acquire of ARPA targets, set the number of
targets automatically acquired in the ARPA icon box menu, and set the ARPA to Auto or
AutoMan.
Cancel All:
Used to eliminate all the ARPA targets captured.
2-26
2. TGT LIST
When the TGT LIST icon menu is opened, the ARPA target and AIS target lists will
appear. Each target can be sorted in order of CPA, TCPA, Speed, BCR, BCT, and
Range.
Reference:
The total number of ARPA targets is 100.
The total number of AIS targets can be up to 200 targets in CHART DISP -> Target
-> AIS Target.
Sort By:
CPA/TCPA/Speed/BCR/
BCT/Range
- CPA : Cross Point Approach

- TCPA: Tme Cross Point
Approach
- BRG : Bearing
- RNG : Range
- BCR : Bow Cross Range
- BCT : Bow Cross Time
ARPA target :
Numbers 1 through 100 are
allocated in order of
acquier. The numbers will
be kept on hold until the
power is turned OFF even
if the targets are deleted.
- <<, >>:
The LIST is scrolled UP/DOWN
- Refresh:
The LIST is refreshed.
2-27
In the case of displaying ARPA or AIS targets individually, locate the cursor on the
targets to be displayed so that Info: [xx |Info| xx] will be displayed in the guidance area,
and click the scrollwheel. Up to four ARPA or AIS targets can be displayed.
To display further detailed target information, locate the cursor in the data area so that
Show Details：[Show Details | | xx] will be displayed in the guidance area. Then click
the left button.
> TGT DETAILS

- Show Tgt Name
- Show Tgt Call Sign
Used to select the vessel’s name or call sign for an AIS target.
Target numbers are always displayed in the case of the ARPA.
X : Active
(AIS targets are activated.)
： Sleep
(Sleep target)
ARPA data AIS data
Detailed ARPA data

Show Details
Detailed AIS data
2-28
3. AIS Disp
Menu Outline
Sleep All Target Used to set all AIS targets to Sleep mode.
Activate All Used to set all AIS targets to Activate mode.
This function is used to tell AIS incoming
messages automatically. When a message is
received, the envelope icon above the TGT
Auto Disp Msgs LIST icon box will inform the user of the
reception of the message.
The incoming message will be displayed by
clicking the envelope icon.
Messages received by the AIS are displayed.
When this screen is selected, the MESSAGE
Received msgs screen will appear and Filter will be
automatically set as Received.
Incoming messages are selected by Name.
A message is transmitted by the AIS.
When this function is selected, the
Transmit msg MESSAGE screen will appear. When making
transmission settings, set the check mark in
the Enable changes box first.
Received msgs
- Filter:
All/Received/Read/Unread/
Own/Sent/Unsent
- Name:
R(S) yyyymmdd-hhmmss
(R -> Reception; T -> Time and
date of transmission)
Message status
The message list in a message
category that is selected by Filter is
displayed on the Name box. When a
message is selected, the message
will appear in the message list box.
Message type
Set into the

"Transmit msg"
when this item is
checked. Message
display box
2-29
Transmit msg
The screen that is the same as the following one will appear by selecting [Menu] ->
Safety Message.
1. When transmitting a message with the AIS, check the X Enable changes box and
create a message type or message to be sent.
2. When the edition of the message to be transmitted is finished, click Send Message in
the > SAFETY MESSA... menu.
Create Message
Used to create outgoing AIS
messages
Delete Message
Used to delete the message
in the Name box.
Send Message
Used to transmit created
Step-7 messages.
Auto Disp Msgs
Used to inform the user of
incoming AIS messages
with the envelope icon.
Transmission check
Used to make MMSI settings for the destination if the

message type is set to Addressed to MMSI.
Reference:
Step-6 If the guidance area is set to [Edit Insert |
Info| ], the MMSI, call sign, and vessel’s name
as the target of the selected AIS will be input by
selecting the AIS target and clicking the
scrollwheel.
Message type settings

- Addressed to MMSI, Broadcast to All
- Safety Message, Binary Message
- Channel A, Channel B, Channel A and B,
Don’t care of channel
Step-5
Step-2
Note:
The status of transmission is
Step-3 checked in the Status display.
- Sent and Ack: OK
- If Sent Wait Ack -> Sent but Time
Step-1 out is displayed, the transmission
of the message has failed.
Step-4
2-30
2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

The Chart Radar screen and Radar screen have the following mode status display.
Status bar: Changed with the wheel.

Pilot, Uchart, and route monitoring
Status bar: Predictor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Status bar
- NorthUp TM (RM): Chart display mode
- ECDIS: Mode display
- Route: Route name
- UChart: User chart name
- PilotData: Pilot data name
- Radar: Source of radar video
- Predictor: Prediction time
2.5.1 NorthUp TM (RM)

This is used to change the chart display mode to Course up RM, North up RM, or North
up TM.
2.5.2 ECDIS
This is used to change the operation mode to ECDIS, Chart Radar, or Radar. The
operation mode also can be changed with Mode in the [Menu] -> Radar menu.
2-31
2.5.3 Route
Open the Plan Route dialog box from Plan in the status bar so that the Route Plan menu
will be displayed, where a route can be selected, unselected, or created.
Use the Chart Display menu to make settings for displaying or not displaying registered
routes on the screen. Refer to 2.5.8 for the operation of files.
Item Description
Used to select and edit existing
Select
routes into new routes.
Used to unselect routes presently
Unselect
selected.
Create Used to create new routes.
Exchange Used to exchange planned routes
with Monitor with monitored routes.
Copy from Used to copy monitored routes to
Monitor planned routes.
Backup and Used to back up or overwrite
Restore routes on floppy disks.
Used to generate reports on
Report
planned routes.
Full WP Used to generate detailed reports
Report on planned routes.
Used to generate comprehensive
Passage Plan
reports from active planned routes
Report
and active pilot data.
2-32
1. Procedure for Creating New Routes

1) Open the Route Plan in the status bar and select Create.
2) Input the name of the target route.
3) Check Enable changes in the WP page in the Plan Route dialog box.
4) Locate the cursor in the required position on the chart screen, click the left button,
and set the WP positions in sequence. A WP correction can be made by dragging and
dropping the WP.
Related settings:
Chart Display -> Route -> Planed Route
- Enable changes: Put a check mark to edit each waypoint (WP).

- WP: WP number
- Name: WP name
- Lat: The latitude of each WP in the selected datum.
- Lon: The longitude of each WP in the selected datum.
- Leg/°: Direction in each section
2-33
- Leg/NM: Range between adjacent routes (nm)

- Str mode: Steering mode between adjacent sections (rhumb line or great circle)
- Rad/NM: Turning radius in each WP
- Chl limit/m: Channel border (in meters) between adjacent sections
- Spd min: Minimum ship's speed between adjacent sections
- Spd max: Maximum ship's speed between adjacent sections
- Insert before: Inserts a new WP before an existing WP by clicking the WP number in the
WP field and clicking this button.
- Next WP: Changes the direction and range of the WP next to the selected WP.
- Delete: Deletes the selected WP.
- Import: Insets the selected WPs from existing routes into the present route.
- Reverse: Reverses the voyage order of routes.
- All Visible: Displays center lines, channel borders, WP marks, and leg marks on the
chart screen.
5) After a WP is input, edit the name, steering mode, radius, channel limit, and speed
(minimum and maximum) data. Edit the same on all WPs in the route.
2. Selecting and Monitoring Created Routes

To select a created route to be monitored, locate the cursor on Monitor of Route in the
status bar and select the prepared route. To delete the route, click the right button and
select Unselect in the guidance area (Route Monitor).
Route being monitored Select Route Monitor.
Unselect:
Route elimination
from Monitor.
2-34
Route data being monitored appears in the data display box.
Reference:
Use the Route tag in the Chart Display menu to select necessary
display items (Centerline, Channel borders, Leg mark, and
wheel over line) for the route created in the chart screen.
2-35
3. Deleting Created Routes

Click Plan in the status bar and select Backup and Restore in the Plan Route menu.
Select Route Plans in the [Category] field on the Backup and Restore screen first. Then
select the route to be deleted from the [Hard Disk] field, and click Delete button.
Unselect the route, however, if it is in use.
4. Alarms Page
Before making changes, check Enable changes.
Set safe water areas and other specific conditions to make route checks.
- Enable changes: Check this item to enable edition.

- Ignore during monitoring: No chart objects in the box are used for chart ALM
calculation.
- Indication during monitoring: Chart objects in the box are used for chart ALM calculation,
and ALM is displayed.
- Alarm during monitoring: Chart objects in the box are used for chart ALM calculation.
Both the display ALM and voice ALM are generated for the
selected chart object.
- Safety contour: Used to indicate depth contours set for chart ALM calculation.
- Copy from used settings: Used to copy ALMs set for the system.
2-36
5. Check Page
It is possible to check whether there are any areas shallower than that of the safety
contour or specific dangerous areas on created routes.
A check will start by clicking on the Start button.
6. Parameters Page
Select the target optimization mode in the Optimize window and set relevant
parameters.
- Description: Input memos about the route.

- ETD/UTC: WP-based estimated time of departure (ETD)
- ETA/UTC: The first part shows the planned estimated time of arrival (ETA) at the last
WP. ETA calculation is possible between two WPs. The different calculated
ETA value will be shown on the second line if the planned ETA does not
coincide as a result of selected optimization. The full length of the route will
be displayed as well.
- Speed limit: Set the speed limit for the route.
- Income Input the budget of the voyage (in 1000-dollar units).
- Optimize: There are four types of optimization items (i.e., Max speed, Timetable, Max
Profit, and Min cost).
2-37
7. Prepare Page
The ETA of the specified WP in the present monitored route appears in the Prepare
page.
8. List of > MONITOR ROUT... menu items displayed on the data display
box.
2-38
2.5.4 UChart
Select Monitor or Plan from UChart in the status bar, and open the UChart dialog box,
where user charts are handled.
Use the Chart Display menu for necessary settings, such as the registration of user
charts and the display of registered user charts on the screen. Refer to 2.5.8 for the
operation of files.
Area
Line
Point
Tidal
2-39
Monitor: Displayed in black..

Plan: Displayed in red.
Monitor Item Description

Used to select the Plan mode or Monitor mode for
user charts.
- Monitor (Go Plan mode)
- Go Plan mode: Switches to Plan mode from
Monitor mode.
- Move Mon to Plan.: User charts used in Monitor
Go Monitor
mode can be switched to those in Plan mode
(or Plan)
directly.
mode
- Plan (Go Monitor mode)
- Go Monitor mode：Switches to Monitor mode
from Plan mode.
- Move Plan. to Mon: User charts used in Plan
mode can be switched to those in Monitor
mode directly.
Select Used to specify charts to be used.
Used to unselect the active use of the present
Unselect
chart.
Create Used to create new user charts.
Backup and Used to make backups from the user chart file or
Restore read user charts from backup devices.
Combine Used to combine two or more charts.
Used to make point reports on user charts.
Point report:
(User Chart menu -> Point Report)
Used to make line reports on user charts.
Line report
(User Chart menu -> LINE Report)
Used to make reports on user chart objects.
Area report
(User Chart menu -> AREA Report)
Symbols Used to make reports on user chart symbols.
report (User Chart menu -> Symbols report)
Used to make full reports on all user chart objects.
Full report
(User Chart menu -> Full report)
Used to make reports on all the displayed user
Report for
chart objects on the radar screen.
radar
(User Chart menu -> Report for radar)
2-40
1. Types of User Charts

User charts consist of Line, Area, Symbol, Tidal, and Point items. A single user chart
can include 4,000 lines and 2,000 symbols (including characters and numbers). These
user charts appear on the ECDIS, Radar, and Chart Radar screens.
2. Procedure for Creating New UChart

1) Open UChart in the status bar and select Plan.
2) Locate the cursor on the triangular mark in the Plan USER CHA... dialog box, and
select Create.
3) Input an appropriate User Chart name.
4) Select the user chart Line, Area, Symbol, Tidal, Point tags to be created in the Plan
USER CHA… dialog box.
5) Check Enable change in each tag for the necessary user chart to be created. The
Line, Area, Symbol, Tidal, and Point points can be in any combination.
6) The user chart created will be registered when the dialog box is finally closed.
Explanation of UChart Dialog Box
Point Page
Item Description
Enable
Check this item to register or correct the user chart.
changes
Point box Present point number/Number of all points
Name Used to name the present point.
Position Used to make latitude/longitude input manually.
Used to add a new record with the same information
Add
next to the present record.
Used to select user charts from which points are
Import
taken in.
Delete Used to delete the present point.
2-41
Symbol Page
Item Description
Enable
changes
Symbol box Present symbol number/Number of all symbols
Used to make Label settings (displayed on the
Style ECDIS only) or Symbol settings (displayed also on
the ARPA screen).
Name Used to name the present symbol.
Symbol Used to name the displayed text on the ECDIS.
Used to make latitude input and longitude input
Position
manually.
Dsp on Check this item to display symbols on the radar
radar screen.
Danger Check this item to use symbols for chart
Symbol calculation.
Used to add a new record to the end of the symbol
Add
list.
Delete Used to delete the present symbol.
Used to select user charts from which symbols are
Import
taken in.
Tidal Page
Item Description
Enable
changes
Present tide observation point/Number of all tide
Tidal box
observation points
Name Used to name the present tide observation point.
Used to make latitude/longitude input for tide
Position
observation points.
Used to select tide types (present or predicted
ones). Orientation, Strength, and Time: The speed,
course, and time of the tide can be input.
Type
Note:
The time of the tide is always displayed in local
time.
Used to add a new record next to the present
Add
record.
Delete Used to delete the present tide record.
Used to select and take in files from the list of user
Import
charts to the present tide file.
2-42
Line Page
Item Description
Enable Check this item to register or correct the user
changes chart.
Line box Present line number/Number of all lines.
Name Used to name the present line.
Used to select one from four line types
(Navigation line, Route line, Depth contour, and
Coast line)
Note:
Element type
The navigation lines and route lines can be
displayed on the Radar ARPA screen. Depth
contours and coast lines can be displayed on
the ECDIS screen only.
Check this item to use lines for chart alarm
Danger Line
calculation.
Used to input the latitude and longitude of the line
Start position
starting point.
Used to input the latitude and longitude of the line
End position
end point.
Check this item to draw new lines. When this
New start
checkmark is deleted, a new line input will be
position
connected to the previous line.
record. The position can be edited with new
Add latitude and longitude input or the specification of
a new position with the trackball and left button
used.
Area Page Import Used to select and take in user charts to lines.
Delete Used to delete the present record.
Item Description
Enable Check this item to register or correct the user
changes chart.
Used to display the present area number.
Area box A necessary area can be selected with the
number changed or a new area can be created.
Name Used to name the present area.
Check this item to display areas on the Radar
On Radar
ARPA screen.
Check this item to include the present area in
Danger Area
chart alarm calculation.
Used to set different areas. Click the button to
Add
set a new area.
Import Used to take in areas.
Delete Used to delete areas.
2-43
3. Selecting and Displaying Created UChart

Select Monitor from UChart in the status bar and select the created user chart.
Monitor: Displayed in black.

Plan: Displayed in red.
To select the target user chart objects to be displayed, go to the Mariner page in the
Chart Display dialog box.
2-44
4. Deleting Created User Chart

Select Monitor or Plan from UChart in the status bar to open the UChart dialog box, and
select Backup and Restore.
Select User Chart from Category on the Backup and Restore screen, select the user chart
to be deleted from the Hard Disk field, and click the Delete button.
Unselect the user chart to be deleted if the user chart is in use.
Deleting Object:
1. Open the page of the target user chart object.
2. Select the user chart object to be deleted.
3. Click the Delete button on the page of the selected user chart object.
2-45
2.5.5 Pilot Data

A navigation-related notebook is called "pilot data." Pilot data is a notebook data file
that collects messages to the operator relevant to the specific ship position while the
system is in Route Monitor mode. Pilot data will be displayed when the vessel goes into
a range set as pilot data.
Pilot data is compared with the vessel's position at 1-minute intervals, and applicable
pilot data items will be displayed. Furthermore, when the vessel passes a WP, the
relation with the vessel's position will be compared. When a new page of pilot data is
reached, the alarm message "5001 Pilot Data: New Record" will be generated.
Use the Chart Display menu for necessary settings, such as the registration of pilot data
and the display of registered pilot data. Refer to 2.5.8 for the operation of files.
Types of Pilot Data
- Displays only position marks: i

THIS IS TEST
- Displays position marks and characters: i
- Displays range ring marks in addition to position marks: i

THIS IS TEST
- Displays range ring marks in addition to position marks and characters: i
2-46
Select Monitor or Plan from PilotData in the status bar, and open the Pilot Data dialog
box, where pilot data is handled.
Item Description
Used to select Plan Pilot Data or Monitor
Pilot Data.
* Monitor (Go Plan mode)
- Go Plan mode: Switches from Monitor
mode to Plan mode.
- Move Mon to Plan.: User charts used
Go
in Monitor mode can be switched to
Monitor/Plan
those in Plan mode directly.
mode:
* Plan (Go Monitor mode)
- Go Monitor mode：Switches to Monitor
mode from Plan mode.
- Move Plan. to Mon: Pilot data used in
Plan mode can be switched to that in
Monitor mode.
Used to select pilot data in Monitor mode
Select
or Plan mode.
Unselect Used to unselect pilot data in used.
Used to create new pilot data. Pilot data
Create can be named with a maximum of eight
characters.
Backup and Used to make backups from pilot data or
Restore read pilot data from backup media.
Used to make report in tabular form from
Report
selected pilot data.
2-47
1. Description of Dialog Box

Monitor Pilot Data
Current Record Page:
If the vessel is within a range set for pilot data with
View all records checked, the present record data will
appear in the dialog box as shown right.
View Record Page:
If the arrow key is clicked with View all records
checked, an arbitrary pilot data record can be
displayed.
Enable changes:
The Monitor Pilot data mode can be set to Plan Pilot
Data mode with this item checked.
Plan Pilot Data
Item Description
Check this item to enable changes.
Enable Note:
changes Pilot data can be changed only under
North-up or Course-up mode.
Used to display the present selected record
Rec . box
number and all the number of records.
Displays the latitude and longitude of the
Position
present record.
Used to display the distance from the vessel
Range when the present pilot data is active on the
screen.
Used to edit pilot data message records. This
record will appear on the screen, after the
Description
vessel passes a calculation point. Use this
item to edit text data.
record. The position can be edited with new
Add latitude and longitude input or the specification
of a new position with the track ball and left
button used.
Used to select and take in all or part of existing
Import
files into the present pilot data file.
Delete Used to delete the present record of pilot data.
2-48
2. Procedure for Creating New Pilot Data

1) Open PilotData in the status bar and select Plan.
2) Click the Plan button and open the Plan PilotData dialog box, select
Create, and input pilot data name.
3) Check Enable changes on the Edit page in the Plan Pilot Data dialog
box.
4) Locate the cursor on the position of displaying pilot data on the
ECDIS screen and click the left button.
5) Input the distance from the vessel in the Range box in order to
activate the pilot data.
6) To display text message on the ECDIS screen, input the appropriate
message into the text window.
7) When the dialog box is closed, the created pilot data will be
registered.
3. Selecting and Displaying Created Pilot Data

Select Monitor from PilotData in the status bar and select the created pilot data.
Select pilot data to be displayed on the Mariner page

in the Chart Display dialog box.
2-49
4. Deleting Created Pilot Data

Select Monitor or Plan from PilotData in the status bar to open the Pilot Data dialog
box, and select Backup and Restore.
Select Pilot Data from Category in the Backup and Restore screen, select pilot data to
be deleted from the Hard Disk field, and click the Delete button.
Unselect the pilot data to be deleted if the pilot data is in use.
2.5.6 Radar
Not used.
2-50
2.5.7 Predictor (Predicted Position)

This function makes it possible to display the vessel's position on the ECDIS, Chart
Radar, or Radar screen after an elapse of a specified time of 30 to 180 seconds. It is
necessary to use real scale symbols for the vessel's markings in order to display the
predicted position. The predicated position is displayed by five yellow symbols.
Setting Procedure
1. Turn the trackball on the characters of Predictor in the status bar. The guidance area
will display Predictor ON or Predictor OFF.
2. Click the left button and select ON or OFF.
3. Turn the trackball and locate the cursor on the time display of Predictor.
4. Turn the wheel, select the required time, and press the left button.
By turning the wheel,30, 60, 90, 120, 150, and or 180 seconds can be selected.
Time settings
Predicted position of 30 to 180 seconds
time set by Predictor
Predictor
ON/OFF
2-51
2.5.8 Backing up Created Routes, UCharts, and Pilot Data

The Backup and Restore dialog box is used to back up, copy, rename, and delete data.
The Backup and Restore function is accessible from the Route, Uchart, and Pilot Data
menu or [Menu] -> Recode.
Category：Selection of the target category

Route Plans/ User Charts/ Pilot Data/ Installation Parameters/Chart Display
Settings/ Paper Chart Setup/ Presentation Libraries/Logs/Manual Update/All Charts
and Updates
Hard Disk: Selection of files in the category selected by Category
All the files in the category will be selected if All is checked.
Backup Format: Selection of the target backup format for Route and User Chart.
Select ANTS basically. Backup Format will not appear if the category selected is
not Route or User Chart.
- Route:
INC/ANTS/ASCII PROPRIETARY/ASCII WPNAME POSITION/
ASCII POSITION WPNAME/ORION WEATHEROUTINGT/ASCII FULL
- User Chart:
INC/ANTS
Drive:
A: ¥ -> FDD, D:¥ -> CD, E:¥ -> Removable Disk
2-52
1. Backup Control Procedure

1) Select the target category file from the Category field.
2) Select the target file from the Hard Disk field.
3) Select ANTS from Backup Format field in the case of the Route or User Chart
category.
4) Select the target drive from Drive field.
5) Click the Backup button.
2. File Reading Procedure

1) Select the target category file from the Backup and Restore dialog box.
2) Select the target drive from Drive.
3) Select ANTS from Backup Format in the case of the Route or User Chart category.
The format specified in Backup Format will be used.
4) Select the target file from Backup Device.
5) Click the Restore button.
3. File Copying Procedure

1) Select the target category file from Category in the Backup and Restore box.
2) Select the target file from Hard Disk.
3) Select ANTS from Backup Format in the case of the Route or User Chart.
4) Click the Copy button.
5) Use the wheel and input a new name for the file, and click the OK button.
4. File Name Change Procedure

1) Select the target category file from the Category field in the Backup and Restore
dialog box.
2) Select the target file from the Hard Disk field.
3) Click the Rename button.
4) Use the wheel and input a new name for the file, and click the OK button.
2-53
Chapter 3. Menu Tree
3.1 Summary of Menu
3.1 Summary of Menu

3.1.1 ECDIS Menu
See next page
3-1
3.1 Summary of Menu
Route, User Chart, Pilot Data menu
3-2
3.1 Summary of Menu
Initial Settings menu
3-3
3.1 Summary of Menu
3.1.2 Radar and Chart Radar Menu
See next page
3-4
3.1 Summary of Menu
3-5
3.2 Icon Box Menu on Radar and Chart Radar displays
Icon Box Item Sub Menu-1 Sub Menu-2 Sub Menu-3

0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1.5/
Range 3/6/12/24/48/96
Chart Radar: Max. 12NM
Presentation
Radar/Chart Radar/ECDIS
Mode
NorthUpTM(Chart radar)/
NorthUp RM/
Display
HeadUp RM/
Mode
HeadUp TB RM/
CourceUp RM
PULSE S1, S2, M1, M2, M3, L
Radar Select
ANT No.1 – ANT No.4 Band, Model, Pos.
(Inter SW)
INT REJECT (OFF/1/2/3)
ECHO STRETCH (OFF/1/2/3)
PICTURE 1, ECHO AVERAGE (OFF/1/2/3)
PICTURE 2,
NOISE REJ (OFF/ON)
PICTURE 3,
AUTO STC (OFF/ON)
PICTURE 4,
AUTO RAIN (OFF/1/2/3/4)
NEAR, FAR,
PICTURE NEAR BUOY, (1/2/3/4)
VIDEO CONTRAST
FAR BUOY, (A/B/C)
ROUGH SEA, 0.5NM/0.75NM/1.5NM,
SHIP, [PULSE] 3NM/6NM/12-24NM
HARBOR, -> S1, S2, M1, M2, M3, L
COAST SEA CONDITION (1 - 5)
[CONDITION] ANT HEIGHT (5 - 50)
STC RANGE (-10 - +10)
Stern Mark On/Off
EBL Cursor bearing On/Off
LI 1, LI 2 Range Rings On/Off
Index Lines 1, 2, 3, 6
Index Line Mode Horizontal/Vertical
Palette DAY/DAYBUE/NIGHT
Panel Dimmer . 0-4/4
Calibrated OFF/ON
Dsp Dimmer .
Character .
Cursor .
Geen/Yellow/White
Echo .
BRILL1 – 4 Trail .
HL .
Index Line, .
Range Rings, EBL, VRM
BRG Cursor .
Tgt Symbol .
Mark .
Chart .
Monochrome ON/OFF
3-6
Symbol Off/Std/Oth
Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/
ARPA Targets Color
Magenta/White
Size STD/Small/Large
Symbol Off/Std/Oth
Max 20/40/100/200 (point)
CHART DISP Max 6/12/24/48nm (Range)
AIS Targets
Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/
Color
[Targets] Magenta/White
Size STD/Small/Large
Targets ON/OFF
Gap 0.000 – 0.999nm
Fusion Targets Rng Dff 0.000 – 0.999nm
Spd Dff 0.0 – 9.9kt
Cse Dff 0.0 – 9.9 deg T
Position Off/Std/Oth
Pilot data Range Off/Std/Oth
Text Off/Std/Oth
Points Off/Std/Oth
Lines Off/Std/Oth
Symbols, Tidats Off/Std/Oth
Areas Off/Std/Oth
CHART DISP User chart 25% Transparent/
50% Transparent/
75% Transparent/
[Mariner]
No Colour Fill
Only radar of Symbol,
Off/Std/Oth
Areas
Manual Updates Manual Updates Off/Std/Oth
1 : 10000/1 : 20000,
Ship
Ship 1 : 50000/1 : 100000,
True symbol scale limit
1 : 200000
Vectors Vectors Std ECDIS/Conventional
Channel borders Off/Std/Oth
Monitored route WP Off/Std/Oth
CHART DISP Leg marks Off/Std/Oth
Wheel over line Off/Std/Oth
[Route] Center line Off/Std/Oth
Channel borders Off/Std/Oth
Planed routs
WP Off/Std/Oth
Depth contour label ,X
Depth contours, ,X
CHART DISP Magnetics, Currents
Soundings ,X
[Other]
Lights ,X
Light descriptions ,X
3-7
Dsp Dimmer . CALIB/UNCAL

Shallow contour 0 – 99m
Safety depth 0 – 99m
Safety contour 0 – 99m
CHART DISP Deep contour 0 – 99m
Palette DAY/NIGHT/ DAYBLUE
[Chart] Symbols Simplified/Paper chart
Depths Tow color/Multi color
Boundaries Plan/Symbolize
Light sectors Limited/Full
Shallow pattern None/Diamond
Update highlight All effects/Detailed
Ship Sys Off/Std/Oth
Ship Pri Off/Std/Oth
Ship Sec Off/Std/Oth
Length 1 – 120min
Past tracks
Labels 0 – 60min
Targets Off/Std/Oth
Use 5/10 point
CHART DISP Interval Off/30s/1/2/3/6min
User Event Off/Std/Oth
[Tracking] Auto Event Off/Std/Oth
Positions Off/Std/Oth
Newer than 12 hours/
Events Newer than 24 hours/
Newer than 1 week/
Show Newer than 2 week/
Newer than 1 month/
Newer than 3 month/
All
CPA/TCPA/Speed/BCR/
Sort By:
BCT/Range
「Ship name/ARPA No.
TGT LIST
CPA/TCPA/BRG,
RNG/BCR/BCT」
<< Refresh >>
3-8
Sleep All Target

Activate All
Auto Disp Msgs
All/Received/Read/Unread/
Filter:
Own/Sent/Unsent
Name: R yyyymmdd-hhmmss
Status Read
Send yyyymmdd-hhmmss
Org.
Vessel Call Sign, MMSI
Broard cast to All/
Addressed to MMSI
Received msgs
Safety Message/
“Displayed Type of Msg.”
Binary message
Don’t care Channel, Channel A,
Channel B, Channel A and B
Broard cast to All/
.Ｘ Enable changes Addressed to MMSI
Safety Message/Binary message
“Edit message.” Don’t care Channel/Channel A,
Channel B/Channel A and B
AIS Disp All/Received/Read/Unread/
Filter:
Own/Sent/Unsent
Name: S yyyymmdd-hhmmss
Status Unsent
Send yyyymmdd-hhmmss
Org.
Vessel Ship name/Call Sign/MMSI
Broad cast to All/
Addressed to MMSI
Transmit msg Safety Message/
“Displayed Type of Msg.” Binary message
Channel A/Channel B/
Channel A and B/
Don’t care of channel
Broad cast to All/
.Ｘ Enable changes Addressed to MMSI
Safety Message/Binary message
“Edit message.” Don’t care Channel/Channel A,
Channel B/Channel A and B
Create Message Same as “Transmit msg”
Delete Message OK/Cancel
> Safety Message
Send Message Same as “Transmit msg”
Auto Disp Msgs
Manual 100
Auto 25
Auto 50
ARPA Auto 75
Auto 100
Ref target vector
Cancel All
OFF/15M/30M/1H/3H/6H/
Trail
15H/30H/CONT
3-9
3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

Main
Sub menu-1 Sub menu-2 Sub menu-3 Sub menu-4
Menu
Go Back
Cell name:
Navigational purpose:
Issue date:
Edition number:
Last displayed update:
Update issue date:
Last update appl. Date:
Chart
S57 Legend Projection:
Menu >
Horizontal:
Vertical datum:
Sounding datum:
Quality of data:
Magnetic Ver.:
Depth:
Height:
Close
MOB
Event
Description
Event .
OK Cancel
Go Back
Alarm Queue
Current Alarm
[ ]
Log interval
min
[Danger Targets] Log signal Target
ARPA AIS
> >
Limits
Speed kt
o
Settings Course
Log interval
[Voyage] hours
Alarms
Recode
.
Don’t Recode
Record .
Go Back
Voyage Log
Danger Target Log
Reset > OK Cancel
Distance Counter
Trip Counter
Logs + Counters
3-10
Create Message
Delete Message OK Cancel
> Safety MESSA...
Send Message
Auto Disp Msgs
Filter All/Received/Read/
. > Unread/Own/Sent/Unsent
Name
. >
Status: xxxx
Send: xxxx
Org.: xxxx
Ship name
Safety Vessel Call Sign
Message MMSI
“Displayed Add.” Address to MMSI
> Broadcast to All
“Displayed type of Msg.” Safety Message
> Binary Message
Don’t care of Channel
Channel A
“Displayed Ch.”
Channel B
Channel A and B
“Msg. Box”
.
. Enable changes
Set Base
Display
3-11
F1: NOT SET/

F2: ALARM ACK/
F3: CHART DISPLAY/
SENSOR/
MENU/
STANDARD DISPLAY/
Function keys
TM, CU RESET/
F4: TOGGLE SHIP
CENTER/
RANGE+/RENGE-/
INITIAL SETTINGS
Initial > INITIAL Enable changes
Settings SETTINGS Go Back
Go Back
Cont’d Cont’d Off
Key Beep > Low
Mid
High
Go Back
Operation >
Wheel Drive > Normal
Reverse
Go Back
Off
Alarm Level > Low
Mid
High
3-12
AIS transponder//
Alarm Inputs/AMWSS //
ARPA Processor Alarm Relays//
Central Alarm Text//
Conning Display//
Dual Axis Log(DAX)//
Echo Sounder and Weather//
Electronic chart(Laseplot)//
Engine Control//
Fuel Consumption//
General//Gyro1//Gyro2//
Heel and Trim//Log//
Main Engine Start Air Pressure//
Positioning Equipment 1//
Edit parameters –
Positioning Equipment4//
“Displayed xxx
Setting Items”
Initial > INITIAL Positioning Equipment 6//
OK Cancel
Settings SETTINGS Installation Propeller 1(stern)//
params Propeller 2(bow)//
Cont’d Cont’d Propeller 3(bow)//
Propeller 4(bow)//
Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA
Communication(LAN)//
Rate of Turn Gyro//
RENC Connections//
Rudders//
SatCom/External Computer/
Sindel Repeqters//
Speedpilot//Thruster 1(Stern)//
Thruster 2(Stern)//
Thruster 3(bow)//
Thruster 4(bow)//rack pilot//
VDR//Wind Sensor
Set parameter
Yes No
default
Sensor Ch1: - Chn18: ,
“Display Sio Channel”
Channel Usage B-Adapter
Yes No
3-13
Cable att adj MANUAL/AUTO xx

HD Align 000.0 – 359.9o
Timing adj 0 - 4095
[Page 1] MBS 0 - 255
Antenna height 5 - >50
Echo Adjust Near STC Curve 2/2.5/3/3.5
Mid STC Curve 3/4/5/6
Far STC Curve 6/7/8
Ring suppress 0 - 70
1: Start x Angle x
Blind Sector
[Page 1] 2: Start x Angle x
Antenna Revol AUTO/MANUAL
Scanner Antenna SW ON/OFF
Antenna stopped TX/ TBY
[Page 1] EAV w/o Gyro ON/OFF
Dem Echo OFF/EG
Others
Radar MAIN/SUB
Radar Number 1/2/3/4
MAIN TOP/MAIN2nd/
Radar Posn MAIN3rd/AFT/PORT/STBD/
[Page 2]
FORE/
6/12/25UP/25DOWN/50/30UP/
Installation Radar Mode
30DOWN/60
On Time 0.0 – 999999.9
> INITIAL TX Time 0.0 – 999999.9
Initial PM Gain Adj 0 - 255
SETTINGS
Settings Radar
Length 0 - 999
Initialize
Cont’d Width 0 - 999
Cont’d
Scanner, bow 0 - 999
Scanner, port 0 - 999
[Page 2]
GPS1, bow 0 - 999
GPS1, port 0 - 999
Own Ship Info
GPS2, bow 0 - 999
GPS2, port 0 - 999
Conning, bow 0 - 999
Conning, port 0 - 999
TTM Output OFF/TRUE/REL
[Page 3]
Max Range 24/32NM
Echo Level 1 - 31
ARPA Preset
QV Display OFF/ON
Land Size 100 - 1000
XN4A/XN5A/SN30AF/SN36AF/
[Page 3]
Ant select SN4ASN5A/XN12AF/XN20AF/
XN24AF/
ACQ Preset
Auto Acq Corre 3 - 10
Auto Acq Weed 1-5
Gate Size S/M/L/LL
Filter 1/2/3/4/
Lost Count 1 - 20
[Page 3]
Max Speed 40 - 150
Mode: TIME, SCAN
Track Preset Start Time Tgt
Sec: 20 - 100
Vect
Scan: 8 - 40
Default
3-14
Go Back
Max speed 0 – 80 kt
Ship parameters Max hight 0.0 – 100.0 m
Max draught 0.0 – 100.0 m
Source Off/Auto/Manual
Nav param > Ship and
Spd/lat corr. On/Off
Route Gyro correction
Max corr. 1.0 – 5.0o
Man corr. -5.0 – 5.0o
Max r.o.t 5 – 200o/min
Route parameters
WP app 30/60s
> INITIAL OK
SETTINGS Analog/Alarm/
Initial CPU and Memory/
OK
Settings Selftest Display/Drivers/
Cancel
Network/
Control Head/
Ext Test
*Unknown
Datum
datum
Arpa Test Set values
Position
0.00 – 1.00nm
discrepancy limit
Close
Watch Alarm ON/OFF
WGS72,
WGS84
Set Values
|
[Datum]
Unknown
datum
Set Values
[Position
0.00 – 1.00nm
discrepancy
limit]
3-15
Stab Hdg/
Guard Zone Stabilization
Stab North
Mode Dynamic/Off/Static
Arpa+ x kt x.xx kt/s
Trial Speed Rate
AIS Trial x kt x.xx kt/s
x kt x.x o/s
Trial Turn Rate
x kt x.x o/s
AIS Function On/Off
. Manual speed xx kt
Ref tgt xx kt / xx o
. Dual log xx kt (water)
Spd/Cse . Dual log xx kt, xx kt (bottom)
. Ref tgt xx kt
. Gyro 1 xx o
. Rate gyro xx o/min
. Chart Align
xx o / xx nm
. Enable
xx oxx.xxx’N
. Deadrec
xxx oxx.xxx’E
ON xx oxx.xxx’N/S
Kalman Filter xxx oxx.xxx’E/W
OFF
xx o, xx kt
OFF
Posn Sec xx oxx.xxx’N/S
GPS1 Primary xxx oxx.xxx’E/W
SecNoAlm xx o, xx kt
PrNoAlm
Sensor OFF
Sec xx oxx.xxx’N/S
Cont’d GPS2 Primary xxx oxx.xxx’E/E
SecNoAlm xx o, xx kt
PrNoAlm
Angle xx o
Set and Drift . Manual Set xx o
Drift xx kt
Gyro Corr xx o
kt, m/s
Wind
True Wind, Rel Wind
Depth below Bow xx m, Aft xx m,
trans Echo alarm . m
Other
Temperature Water xx o
Course xx o
Water Current
Speed xx kt
. Danger & Lost Alarm
. Safety/Msg Alarm
AIS Target Record data OK
Display OK
Storage OK
3-16
DGPS
Device Kalman Filter
Position xx oxx.xxx’N Dead Reckoning
Recording xxx oxx.xxx’E Visual
Record Astronmical
Sensor Record
MFDF
Distance counter xx nm
Over Ground
Distance Trip counter x.x nm
Counting Distance counter xx nm
Through Water
Trip counter x.x nm
Int Reject Off/1/2/3
ECHO
Off/1/2/3
STRETCH
ECHO
Off/1/2/3
PICTURE 1/ AVERAGE
PICTURE 2/ NOISE REJ Off/On
Filter
PICTURE 3/ AUTO STC Off/On
PICTURE 4/ AUTO
Off/1/2/3/4
NEAR/ RAIN
FAR/ A1-4
Picture NEAR VIDEO CONTRAST B1-4
BUOY/ C1-4
FAR BUOY/ 0.5NM. S1/S2
ROUGH SEA/ 0.75NM S1/S2/M1
SHIP/ 1.5NM S1/S2/M1
HARBOR/ Pulse
3NM S2/M1/M2/M3
COAST 6NM M1/M2/M3/L
12-24NM M2/M3/L
Sea Cond ANT 1/2/3/4/5
Condition Height 5 ->50
STC Range -10 - +10
Stem Mark On/Off
EBL Cursor
On/Off
bearing
Mark Range Rings On/Off
Index Lines 1, 2, 3, 6
Index Line Horizontal/
Mode Vertical
Go Back
2nd Echo Rej
Echo PM
SART
Tune Initialize
3-17
“Displayed List”
Select
> MONITOR > OK
ROUT… Unselect
Close
To WP .
ETA WP . , Distance nm
Final WP . , Distance nm
Monit min
Suggested spd kt
Trial spd kt
Spd profile .>
Planned as:
Ignore during
.
Route Indicating during
Monitor Alarms .
Alarm during
monitoring
.
Safety m
Planned User Chart
Selections
Planned Pilot Data
WP
LAT
LOG
SPD CSE M
Waypoints
Rad
NAME
Planned ETA
.
Go Back
Go Back
Go Monitor mode > Go Monitor mode
Move Plan to Mon.
“USER CHART”
Select
> OK
> PLAN USER Unselect
CHA… “Write name of the
Create new User Chart”
OK
“USER CHART”
User Combine
Plan User OK
Chart
Chart Close
Cont’d . /
Cont’d Name .
Point
Position .
Enable changes
. /
Name .
Element type >
Line . Danger Line
Start Position .
End position .
Enable changes
3-18
. /
Name .
Area
On Radar
Danger Area
Area
. /
Comer Point of Area .
.
Enable changes
. /
Style >
Name .
Symbol .
Plan User Symbol .
Chart Position
.
Display on radar
Danger Symb
Enable changes
User . /
Chart Name .
Type .
.
Tidal Position
.
o
Orientation
Strength kt
Time UTC .
Enable changes
Go Back
Go Plan mode Go Plan mode
> Monitor User Move Mon. to Plan
Chart Select
Unselect
Monitor User
Close
Chart
Point
Same as “Plan User Chart”
Line
menu
Area
Symbol Deleted: Enable changes
Tidal
Go Back
Go Baclk
Go Monitor mode > Go Monitor mode
> PLAN PILOT Move Plan to Mon.
DAT… Select
Unselect
Pilot Close
Data Edit Recode .
Plan Pilot .
Data Position
Cont’d .
Range . nm
Description .
ADD Import
Delete
Enable changes
3-19
Go Plan mode >

PILOT DATA
> MONITOR Select
> OK
PILOT..
Unselect
Close
Pilot Monitor Pilot Current Record .
Data Data >
.
Position
.
Range . nm
Description .
View all record
Radar Overlay
. >
source
Gain .
Sea clutter .
Rain clutter .
IR IR OFF/R1/R2/R3
Clean OFF/LOW/HIGH
Radar Processor EAV
Echo Average
OFF/EAV1/EAV2/EAV3
Echo stretch ES OFF/ES1/ES2/ES3
Current 0:00 min
Echo trail Length 00:30 – 30:00, CONT
Mode True/Rel
ECDIS/Chart
Mode
Radar/Radar
Close
3-20
3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Main
Sub menu-1 Sub menu-2 Sub menu-3 Sub menu-4 Sub menu-5
Menu
Shown “Operator
Manual FCR-2xx7”
Help
KEYBOARD FOR
ECDIS HELP
Set Std
Display
MOB
Event Description
.
Event
OK Cancel
Go Back
Open Log Open File
Select all Select all files
Unselect all Unselect files
User Chart
Conversion
- User Chart name
LOG FILE .
VIEW
- Select points
Save as User
with distance >
“Log File loading > LOG FILES- Chart
0.3NM
may take time DETAILS LOG
- Elements will be
Details Log and prevent
displayed on
monitoring. Do Shown Log Files
radar
you like to Date --------Corro
Save
continue?”
Print Log
Record
OK Cancel Print All
Cont’d Go Back
Print Font Size: 8
Print Font Print Font Size: 9
Print Font Size: 10
Print Font Size: 11
Close
LOG FILE Open Log
OK
VIEW Select all
> LOG FILES-
VOYAGE Unselect all
“Log File loading Save as User Same as “Details
LOG
may take time Chart Log”
Shown Log Files
Voyage Log and prevent Print Log
monitoring. Do Print All
Date
you like to Print Font
continue?” -----Description
Close
OK Cancel Enable changes
3-21
LOG FILE VIEW Open Log

OK
> LOG FILES- Select all
“Log File loading Unselect all
DANGER Same as “Details
may take time and Save as User Chart
Danger Target TARGETS LOG Log”
prevent monitoring. Print Log
Log Shown Log Files
Do you like to Print All
continue?” Print Font
Date
OK Cancel -----Description Close
Find
Insert String to
> TEXT
search for:
Alarm Log VIEW-ALARMS
OK
LOG
Print Text
Alarm Queue
Current Alarm Shown “Alarm
List”
> TEXT VIEW Print Font Size: 8
Print Font Size: 9
Find Print Font Size: 10
Chart Usage Insert String to
Log search for:
. OK Print Font Size: 11
Record
Print Text
Cont’d Route Plans/
User Charts/
Pilot Datas/
Installation
parameters/
Chart Display
Settings/
Category
Paper Chart Setup/
Presentation
Libraries/
Logs/
Manual Update/
Backup and
All Charts and
Restore
Updates
Backup Format
Hard Disk INC/ANTS/
ASCII
. All > PROPRIETARY/
ASCII WPNAME
POSITION/
Copy Rename
ASCII POSITION
Backup Delete
WPNAME/
ORION WEATHER
Backup Format > ROUTINGT/
ASCII FULL
3-22
Restore Format
INC/ANTS/
Backup Device ASCII
. All > PROPRIETARY/
ASCII WPNAME
Backup and POSITION/
Drive: A:¥, D:¥
Restore ASCII POSITION
View… Delete
WPNAME/
Restore Format > ORION WEATHER
ROUTINGT/
ASCII FULL
Limits
Speed kt
o
Course
Record Voyage Log Interval
VOYAGE . hours
RECODE Alarms Recode .
Don’t Recode .
Settings Log Interval
. min
Danger Target Log signal target
ARPA >
AIS >
Go Back
Voyage Log
Danger Target Log
Reset
Distance Counter OK Cancel
Trip Counter
Logs+Conters
Same as
“Safety
message” of
Safety
the Radar and
Message
Chart Radar
Menu. Refer
to page 3-11.
Go Back
Go Back
Browse LOAD
From CD-ROM
Default load dir
Chart
Reset Set
Menu
Load and Drive: A:¥, C:¥,
Update Chart > D:¥
Cont’d
Manual SubDirs
Contents
. .
Load Chart
3-23
Convert List: .
Cells / Groups
.
. RENC
. CD
SENC Convert
. HD
Convert
Cancel Conv.
Conv. History
CD History
. Automatic
SENC
SENC Convert
conversion
Settings
. Automatic
Display Until
SubDirs Contents
Remove Charts . .
Remove Chart
Source of Chart
Catalogue
Chart . CD RENC
Menu SENC . C-Map
. >
Cont’d
View filters
. Name
Permit RENC
. Canceled Chart
. Group
Navigation purpose
. Overview
Chart . General
Catalogue . Coastal
. Approach
. Harbour
. Berthing
Select Chart
Cell:
Add Frame
Close Edit Group
Inside Outside New Group Name
Edit Group New
. . .
Save As Text
Remove
3-24
Shown charts data

list
“Cell ID//
RENC edt/upd//
SENC edt/upd//
Updates Displ.
until//Updates
Approv. Until”
Latest RENC
Product List//
Oldest date//
Set Chart Newest date//
viewing dates Manual Updates
Display
Until .
Approve.
Until .
. Sync Manual
Chart Update Dates
Menu . All SENCs
Cont’d Manual Update Dates

Select All
Clear
View Current
Public Key Load New
Accept New
Non-HO User Code
. Zones Areas
Selected <-> Non

Selected
.
Chart Permits Non-HO
.
User/Auth Code
Load CD SerNo
Create User Code
Enter Auth Code
Remove
Load File Open
Backup Save AS
Enter Permit
Enter Man.
. OK
3-25
Overview
Info about the chart
display
Shore features, Port
Depth, Currents
Obstructions,
Seabed, Pipelines
Routes Shown Chart
ECDIS Chart 1
Special areas symbols
Lights, services,
radar, small craft
Buoys, Beacons
Mariner’ symbols
Colour
differentiation
diagram
Sub Dirs
Open Chart by
. .
Cell name
Open Chart
Cell: >
CD: >
. RECN CD
HD
- Status -
Chart Last edition/Last
Menu issue date/
Last Base Upd.
Cont’d Included/
Last update number
[Shown Chart Cell

details]
Cell/Item/
Details
Displayed Update/
Chart Cell Approved Update/
Status Latest Update
SENC CONVERT
Cont’d Conversion List:
.
. Cells Groups
. >
. RECN CD
Create SENC HD
Convert
Cont’d Cancel Conv
Print Font Size: 8
>TEXT VIEW
Print Font Size: 9
Shown convert
Print Font Size: 10
History
Conv. History Print Font Size: 11
Insert String to
Find
search for; . OK
Print Text
3-26
Print Font Size: 8

>TEXT VIEW Print Font Size: 9
Shown Load History Print Font Size: 10
Create SENC CD History Print Font Size: 11
Chart Cell Insert String to
Find
Status search for; . OK
Print Text
ADD Update
Conv Log
Go Back
Drawing Type Point/Line/Area
Standard
Orange/Single/Nav
Aid/Easy Lateral
Sea Mark/ Easy
NEW Category Cardinal Sea Mark/
Easy Other Sea
Mark/ Easy
Chart Obstruction/Easy
Menu Light
Accept New Object
Cont’d
Planning Copy Cell .
Manual Modify Objects in display
Updates priority order
.
Cont’d Delete
Manual Accept
Updates
List
.
Edit Properties
Remove from List
Accept Manual
Updates as Permanent
Undo Last
Clear OK Cancel
Same as Record
menu ->
Backup and
Backup and
Restore.
Restore.
Refer to page 3-22
3-27
Go Back
Print Font Size: 8
>TEXT VIEW Print Font Size: 9
Shown Log files Print Font Size: 10
Log File Print Font Size: 11
Insert String to
Find
search for; . OK
Print Text
Chart System > S52 Presentation
Menu > Library
Shown “User
User Permit
permit:”
Refresh Chart after
Backup
Reset Files
Restart drawing
Restart
process
Close
Sama as Icon
Chart
menu. Refer
Display
to 3-7 page.
Lat: .
Set Chart Lon: .
Center
Set Center
Sama as
Radar and
Initial
Chart Radar
Settings
menu. Refer
to 3-7 page.
Speed kt
o
Hdg T
Delay >
Current Trial
Mode:
Dynamic/Off/
Static
Trial Mode :
Maneuver Dynamic/Off/Static
Trial Speed Rate
x kt x.xx kt/s
Trial Setup
x kt x.xx kt/s
Trial Turn Rate
x kt x.x o/s
x kt x.x o/s
Sama as
Radar/Chart
Sensors Radar menu.
Refer to 3-16
page.
Changing
Display
Chart
mode,
Radar On
“ECDIS to
Radar”
3-28
“Displayed List”
Select
> OK
Unselect
Monitor
> TEXT VIEW- Print Font Size: 8
ROUTE Print Font Size: 9
> MONITOR
Report MONITORING Print Font Size: 10
ROUTE…
REPORT Print Font Size: 11
Find Print Text
Close
To
ETA
Final
Monitor
Monit min
Suggested spd kt
Monitor Trial spd kt
Spd profile .>
. > Planned as:
Ignore during
.
Indicating during
Monitor
.
Alarms
Alarm during
monitoring
.
Safety m
Monitor Planned User Chart
Route
Selections Planned Pilot Data
WP/LAT/LOG/
Cont’d
SPD CSE M/
Monitor
Rad/NAME
Waypoints
Planned ETA
.
WP
. Enable changes
Insert before
Next WP
Delete
Import
Reverse
Select PLAN ROUTE All Visible
Plan Alarm
. Enable changes
. > Check
. Enable changes
Cont’d Parameters
. Enable changes
Prepare
Unselect
Same as PLAN
Create ROUTE
(see above)
Exchange with
Monitor
Copy from Monitor
3-29
Same as Record
menu ->
Backup and
Backup and
Restore
Restore.
Refer to page 3-22.
> TEXT VIEW- Print Font Size: 8
ROUTE Print Font Size: 9
Plan PLANING Print Font Size: 10
Report
Route REPORT
. > Print Font Size: 11
Find Print Text
Full WP Report Same as above
Print Font Size: 8
> TEXT VIEW-
Passange Plan Print Font Size: 9
Report Print Font Size: 10
Find Print Text
Print Font Size: 11
Close
Go Back
Go Plan mode Go Plan mode
Move Mon. to Plan
Select . >
Unselect
Same as Record
Backup and menu ->
> MONITOR Restore Backup and Restore
USER… Refer to page 3-22.
Point report
> TEXT VIEW –
Line report Print Font Size: 8
USER CHART
Area report Print Font Size: 9
REPORT
Symbols report Print Font Size: 10
Monitor Full report Print Font Size: 11
User Find Print Text
Report for radar
Chart
. > Close
Cont’d . /
Cont’d Name .
Point
Position . , .
. Enable changes
. /
Name .
Element type
. >
. Danger Line
Line
Start position
. ,.
End position
. ,.
. Enable changes
3-30
[Area]
. /
Name .
. On Rader
. Danger Area
Area
[Corner Point of
Area]
. /
. , .
. Enable changes
. /
User Style
Monitor . >
Chart
Name .
> Symbol Symbol . >
Cont’d
Position . , .
. Display On Rader
. Danger symbol
. Enable changes
. /
Name .
Type . >
Position . , .
Tidal o
Orientation
Strength kt
UTC .
. Enable changes
3-31
Go Back
Go Monitor mode
Go Monitor mode
>
Move Plan to Mon.
Select . >
Unselect
Same as MONITOR
USER CHART
Create Additional Items:
Add
Import Delete
> PLAN USER
CHA… Same as Record
Backup and menu ->
Restore Backup and Restore
Refer to page 3-22.
Combine
Point report
Line report Print Font Size: 8
> TEXT VIEW
Area report Print Font Size: 9
Symbols report Print Font Size: 10
Find Print Text
Plan Full report Print Font Size: 11
User Report for radar
Chart Close
>
. /
Cont’d
Cont’d Name .
Position . , .
Add
Copy from
Chart >
Element category:
Point
Total record count:
xx
Point First recode to
copy: xx
Import
Number of records:
xx
Copy to
Chart: xx
Element category:
xx
Copy
Delete
. Enable change
3-32
. /
Name .
Coast line/Depth
Element type > contour/Rout
line/Navigation line
. Danger Line
Start position
. ,.
Line
End position
. ,.
. New start
position
Add Same as Point
User Import
Refer to page 3-32.
Chart Plan Delete
. Enable change
Cont’d > [Area]
. /
Name .
. On Rader
. Danger Area
Add Same as Point
Import
Refer to page 3-32
Area Delete
[Corner Point of
Area]
. /
. , .
Add
Delete
. Enable change
3-33
. /
Style
. >
Name .
Symbol . >
Position . , .
Symbol
. Display On Rader
. Danger symbol
Add Same as Point
. Monitor Import
Refer to page 3-32
> Delete
User
. Enable change
Chart
. Plan . /
> Name .
Type . >
Position . , .
o
Orientation
Tidal Strength kt
UTC .
Add
Same as Point
Import
Refer to page 3-32
Delete
. Enable change
3-34
Go Back
Go Plan mode > Go Plan mode
Move Mon. Plan
PILOT DATA . >
Select
OK
Unselect
Same as Record
> MONITOR Backup and menu ->
PILOT… Restore Backup and Restore
Refer to page 3-22.
Monitor > TEXT VIEW –
Print Font Size: 8
ILOT DATA
> Print Font Size: 9
Report REPORT
Print Font Size: 10
Print Font Size: 11
Find Print Text
Close
. /
Position . , .
Range . nm
Current Record Description
.
. Enable changes
. View all record
Go Back
Pilot Data Go Monitor
Go Monitor mode
mode >
Move Plan to Mon.
Cont’d
PILOT DATA .
Select
OK
> PLAN PILOT Unselect
DAT… Write name of the
new Pilot Data .
OK
Create
Same as
“Edit Record”
Plan Same as Record
Backup and menu ->
> > PLAN PILOT Restore Backup and Restore
DAT… Refer to page 3-22.
Report
Close
. /
Position . , .
Range . nm
Description
Edit Record .
Add
Import
Delete
. Enable changes
3-35
Radar
Overlay
source
>
Gain .
Sea
clutter
.
Rain Clutter
Gain .
IROFF/IR1/IR2/
IR
IR3
Radar
Clean OFF/LOW/HIGH
Process EAVOFF/EAV1/
Echo Average
EAV2/EAV3
ESOFF/ES1/ES2/
Echo stretch
ES3
Current 0:00 min
00:30 – 30:00,
Echo Trail Length
CONT
Mode True/Rel
ECDIS/Chart
Mode
Radar/Radar
Close
3-36
Chapter 4. Radar 4.1Settings
RPU-016 Settings
4.1 RPU-016 Settings

Radar settings are required if the RPU-016 unit or SPU board is replaced.
4.1.1 DIP Switch Setting for SPU Board

Make settings for DIP switch S1 on the SPU board of the RPU-016.
Set S1-#3 to ON. The Chart radar will not be set if this switch pin is set to OFF.
Moreover, the error message “Connection Lost to ARPA CPU” will appear on the Radar
Status screen and the message “6119 RadOv ARPA CPU Warning” will appear in the
error box.
SPU board
SPU board
RPU-016
DIP switch: S1
RPU−016
Location of S1
Reference: S1 settings
S1
#1 #2 #3 #4 Remarks
MODEL
FAR-21x7 (MU-201CR) OFF OFF OFF Not Used SXGA
FAR-28x7 (MU-231CR) ON OFF OFF Not Used UXGA
Not
FCR-21x7 (MU-201CE) OFF(N/A) OFF ON SXGA
Used
Not
FCR-28x7 (MU-231CE) ON(N/A) OFF ON UXGA
Used
4-1
Reference:
If S1-#3 is set to ON, “ARPA CPU DISPLAY” will appear on the screen on the
Radar side.
4.1.2 RPU-016 Menu Settings

Most RPU-016 settings can be made on the EC-1000C side except the following
settings, which should be made on the RPU-016 side.
When making these settings, change the connection of the monitor from the EC-1000C
to the DVI port of the RPU-016. Connect the operation unit of the FAR-2xx7-series
Radar to KEY of the TB board.
DVI
TB board: KEY
DVI-1 DVI
Add RCU-014
Wiring
change
1. [MENU] -> 0 -> 4 -> 4: RADAR NO

Check that the Radar numbers on the Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication
(LAN) in the parameters in [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Installation of the
EC-1000C coincide.
Radar number 4: RADAR NO (Initial IP address)
1 -> 1 (172.31.3.6)
2 -> 2 (172.31.3.7)
3 -> 3 (172.31.3.8)
4 -> 4 (172.31.3.9)
2. Detailed ARPA-related Settings: [ARP DETAIL DATA]

Make settings if needed. Refer to page 4-10.
3. Settings for Trail Icon Box Menu
Make settings if needed.
4-2
4. Settings for Picture Icon Box Menu

Make settings if needed.
5. IMO Radar Type Settings
Set [Menu] Please set -> Initialize -> Installation -> 7.Type to “IMO”.
6. Radar Model Settings
Make “Radar model” settings in [Menu] -> Initialize -> Installation -> 6. Model
although they can be made on the EC-1000C side.
Reference:
If the RPU-016 does not operate well, set the RPU-016 to factory default
settings. In that case, all settings will be restored to factory default settings
except settings for [Menu] -> Initialize -> Installation -> 4. Radar No. or 6.
Mode -> 7.
The following settings related to Radar images will be restored to factory
default settings as well.
- Picture settings on the EC-1000C side
- Settings for the Trail menu on the RPU-016 side
- Detailed ARPA-related settings on the RPU-016 side: [ARP DETAIL DATA]
Make a note so that the settings can be returned to the previous values.
4-3
4.1.3 Execute Tune Initialize

Open [Menu] -> Echo in Radar or Chart radar mode, and execute tune initialize. While
tune initialize is executed, the message “Tune initialize active” will appear on the data
display box (Date/UTC) and the TUNE display will fluctuate.
4-4
4.1.4 Execute Radar Initialize

Open Radar Initialize menu from [Menu] -> Initial Settings (f) and make radar
settings.
Note:
If two or more chart radars are LAN connected, be sure to disconnect the chart
radars from the LAN before hand to make radar settings individually.
Default: The settings on page 3 will be restored to default settings with Default clicked.
4-5
Setting Details
Setting
Item Remarks
range
The video signal level input into the control unit
varies with the Antenna cable length between the
Radar Processor unit and RF unit. This item is
AUTO/
used for a compensation adjustment to the
CABLE MANUAL
attenuation of the video signal level.
ATT ADJ 30
- AUTO： Automatically adjusted to an optimal
(:0 - 73)
level.
- MANUAL: Set GAIN to 80 and STC/FTC to OFF
so that only a little noise will be generated.
Used to make heading marker adjustment in order
to compensate the direction difference between a
000.0 target and the echo of the target.
HD ALIGN
(0-359.9) Make sure that the direction difference within 0.2°.
Settings are processed on the basis of the
Antenna HD pulse.
Makes adjustment of TX delay by the electrical
circuit and antenna cable. Adjust range of echo so
that a straight target such as a pier is presented as
1 an straight picture on short range. Or makes
TIMING ADJ
(0-4095) adjustment so as to allow main bang of about 5
Echo
mm radius (20 inch monitor) or 7 mm (23 inch
monitor) from the center on the 0.5 NM range
when MBS (listed below) is set to “0”.
Used to make adjustment to Main bang
0 suppression (MBS). Make adjustment so that the
MBS
(0-255) MBS echo will be eliminated in an S1 range of 1.5
NM or below.
Used to select the Antenna height from the sea
5/7.5/10/
surface, which influences the manual and
15/20/25/
DEFAULT ANT automatic STC working ranges.
30/35/40/
HEIGHT Reference:
45/
The value is set as an initial value for [Menu] ->
more 50m
PICTURE -> Condition: Ant Height.
NEAR STC
2/2.5/3/3.5 STC curve slope settings, which usually need not
CRVE
be changed. The STC curve is set by this value
MID STC CRVE 3/4/5/6
and other factors, such as settings for [PICTURE]
FAR STC
6/7/8 ->9: CONDITION and [Menu] ->0->4->6: MODEL.
CRVE
RING 1 Used to adjust to eliminate the ring-shaped image
SUPPRESSION (0-255) outside the MBS echo.
4-6
START
BLIND 000°
SECTOR 1 ANGLE Used to stop transmission in specific directions.
000° Set the target direction where transmission is
START stopped. Set START and ANGLE to 0° if
BLIND 000° transmission should be continued.
SECTOR 2 ANGLE
000°
Used to select 36 or 42 rpm provided that the
RSB-097 (with a DC motor at 42 rpm) is used.
- LO: 36 rpm; HI: 42rpm
- AUTO: HI when the transmission pulse width is
Scanner S1 or S2, and LO when the transmission
Antenna pulse width is M/L.
LO/HI/AUTO
REVOLUTION Reference:
The Antenna revolving speed is classified by
Antenna motor model and PWR board. The
type of Power supply board with 42 rpm
specifications is 03Pxxxxx-B and D, with a
D8G-571 motor used.
Used to turn antenna rotation ON/OFF. Usually
Antenna SW OFF/ON
turn this switch ON.
Antenna Used to set ST-BY or TX when the antenna
STBY/TX
Stopd rotation stops.
Used to make EAV settings without HDG data.
EAV W/O
OFF/ON This item is provided on the assumption that the
GYRO
Others Radar is installed ashore.
DEMO Used to select demonstration images.
OFF/EG
ECHO - EG：EG-3000/2000
Used to make monitor (SUB) settings.
Transmission will be forbidden if this item is set to
Installation RADAR MAIN/SUB SUB.
The monitor signal is input into the terminal board:
J616 (Master Radar) from the Master radar.
The number of the local Radar (ANT) when the
Radar is LAN connected.
When the number is set, turn the Chart radar
system OFF and ON.
- Inter switch function:
LAN-connected Radar information can be
checked with the [ANT INF] icon menu.
Note:
RADAR NO 1/2/3/4
LAN-connected Radar numbers can be set to 1
to 4 (with the ANT unit provided).
Reference:
The Radar IP address can be checked with
[Menu] -> 0 -> 7: NETWORK on the RPU-016.
The IP address is interlocked with the radar
number and allocated automatically.
4-7
FORE/
MAINTOP/ Used as a reference for the setting position of the
RADAR MAIN2ND/ Antenna. This information is displayed in the [ANT
POSN MAIN 3RD/ INF] icon menu.
AFT/ Preset values are not used for signal processing.
PORT/STBD
Used for model settings. Make settings according
to the RF unit.
Items, such as the transmission pulse waveform
6/12/25UP/ (MD board) and STC curve, changes according to
25DOWN/ the settings.
Radar Model
50/30UP/ - X band：6/12/25UP/25DOWN
30DOWN/60
- S band：50/30UP/30DOWN/60
Note: - UP： The RF is built into the Antenna unit.
- DOWN: The RF unit is installed externally.
Used to display the total operating hours of the
ON TIME 000000.0H Radar.
The SPU board counts the time of power supply.
Used to display the total transmission hours of the
Radar.
Used as a reference for the replacement of the
magnetron. When the magnetron is replaced,
TX TIME 000000.0H reset this item to 0H.
The magnetron lasts for approximately 3,000
hours.
Transmission hours are counted on the SPU
board.
Used to make performance (PM) gain adjustment.
Range and signal processing settings will be
PM GAIN automatically made for PM gain adjustment in this
0-255
ADJ menu.
The PM echo is checked with [Menu] -> Echo ->
PM.
LENGTH 0m
LENGTH/ Used for the display size of the own ship symbol.
(0-999)
Interlocked with settings for Installation Parameter
WIDTH 0m
WIDTH -> General.
(0-99)
BOW 0m Used to set the location of the Radar antenna.
SCANNER (0-999) These settings are used for data on the position of
POSN PORT 0m the Radar antenna in the display of the own ship
(99) symbol.
BOW 0m
Own Ship GPS1 (0-999)
Used to set the location of the GPS antenna. This
Info ANT POSN PORT 0m
data is used for the position (latitude and
(0-99)
longitude) calculation of the cursor.
BOW 0m
Interlocked with Installation Parameter ->
GPS2 (0-999)
Positioning Equipment 1 and 2.
ANT POSN PORT 0m
(0-99)
BOW 0m
Used to set the position of navigation.
CONNING (0-999)
These settings are used for data on the position of
POSN PORT 0m
navigation in the display of the own ship symbol.
(0-99)
4-8
TTM OFF/REL/
Used to set the tracking data output of the ARPA.
OUTPUT TRUE
Used to set the maximum acquisition range of the
Max Range 24/32
ARPA.
ARP No setting changes are required.
Preset 16 Received echoes are classified into 32 levels.
Echo Level
(0-31) Used to set the threshold of the level of echoes
handled by the ARPA.
Used to display echoes handled by the ARPA
QV Display OFF/ON
according to the above setting.
No setting changes are required.
800M
Land Size Used to set target sizes. Targets below this set
(100-1000)
level are handled as ARPA echoes.
XN12AF/
XN20AF/
XN24AF/ Used to select the type of antenna installed in
Ant Select XN4A/XN5A/ order to secure ARPA echoes because the
SN30AF/ horizontal beam width varies with the Antenna.
SN36AF/
SN4A/SN5A
ACQ Preset
Used to acquire echoes detected if the echoes are
Auto Acq 5 SCAN
the same continuously during the number of scan
Corre (3-10)
times preset while in auto acquisition operation.
Used to set the number of echo omissions while in
auto acquisition operation. This setting is related
to the above AUTO ACQ CORRE set value.
For example, if the AUTO ACQ CORRE set value
Auto Acq 1 SCAN
is 5 and the AUTO ACQ WEED set value is 1, the
Weed (1-5)
ARPA will start acquiring echoes as long as it
detects five echoes provided that there is only one
omission among them, i.e., the five echoes need
not be continuous.
Specifies the tracking range. This is the setting of
estimated position of ARPA echoes. The range
differs dependeing on distance. When the number
Gate Size S/M/L/LL
of target swaps in the ARPA is large, set GATE
SIZE to “S”. And then, when the number of lost
targets is large, set GATE SIZE “L or LL”.
Used to make processing settings for the tracking
Filter 1/2/3/4
response of waypoints.
Track Used to make lost target processing if there are no
9 SCAN
Preset Lost Count tracking echoes continuously during the number of
(1-20)
scan times preset.
100KTS Used to set the maximum relative speed of ARPA
Max Speed
(40-150) echoes that can be acquired and tracked.
TIME/SCAN/
50SEC(20-1 Used to set the time or the number of scans until
Start Time
00) the vector is displayed after the start of
Tgt Vect
/20SCAN(8- acquisition.
40)
4-9
Reference:
ARPA-related detailed settings are made on the RPU-016 side.
Go into Factory mode (1+2, 3, and 4), use the Initialize menu, and make settings in 6:
ARP PRESET -> 7 [ACQ PRESET] -> 6 [ARP DETAIL DATA].
Do not make settings for this parameter, however, unless otherwise instructed.
4-10
Chapter 5. Installation5.1 Parameter Settings
Before Making Installation Parameter Settings
5.1 Before Making Installation Parameter Settings

Insert the Authorizing Key Disk into the FDD in order to
execute [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Installation Parameter.
[Service.pas] file
The message “Cannot read disk” will appear if an attempt is
made to open the Installation Parameter without this disk.
This key disk is common to the FCR-2xx7 and FEA-2cxx7.
5.1.1 Installation Parameter Menu
Select the item to

be set.
Set parameter default:

The preset values will
return to default values
Remarks:
If a file with preset values is
copied to the default folder, the
set values can be loaded with Check the preset channels
ease. and set items.
5-1
Parameter List
Item Contents
Parameter settings for AIS connections (connecting to CH5 of the LAN
AIS transponder
Adapter).
Alarm Inputs/AMWSS Not used for the Chart radar.
ARPA Processor Alarm Selection of ALM output generated from the Radar side (output from the
Relays RPU-016).
Central Alarm Text Not used for the Chart radar.
Conning Display Not used for the Chart radar.
Dual Axis Log(DAX) Parameter settings for Dual Axis Log (DAX) connections.
Echo Sounder and Weather Parameter settings for Echo Sounder and Weather settings.
Electronic chart (Laseplot) Not used for the Chart radar.
Engine Control Not used for the Chart radar.
Fuel Consumption Not used for the Chart radar.
General Port settings for the B-Adapter and hull information settings.
Gyro1 Not used for the Chart radar.
Gyro2 Parameter settings for Gyro connections to the Radar side.
Heel and Trim Data for conning display. Not used for the Chart radar.
Log Parameter settings for Log connections.
Data for Conning Display. Not used for the Chart radar.
Main Engine Start Air
Parameter settings for Main Engine Start Air Pressure connections
Pressure
(connecting to the B-Adapter).
Positioning Equipment 1
Parameter settings for GPS connections (connecting to the LAN Adapter).
Positioning Equipment4
Propeller 1(stern)
Propeller 2(stern) Data for Conning Display. Not used for the Chart radar. Parameter setting
Propeller 3(bow) for Propeller parameter settings (connecting to the B-Adapter).
Propeller 4(bow)
Radar Echo Overlay / Parameter settings for Radar processor connections (connecting to the
ARPA Communication(LAN) LAN).
Parameter settings for Rate-of-Turn settings (connecting to the LAN or
Rate of Turn Gyro
B-Adapter).
RENC Connections Not used for the Chart radar.
Rudders Displayed for Conning Display/Docking purposes.
SatCom /External Computer/
Not used for the Chart radar.
Sindel Repeqters
Speed pilot Data for Conning Display. Not used for the Chart radar.
Thruster 1(Stern)
Data for Conning Display. Not used for the Chart radar.
Thruster 2(Stern)
Parameter settings for Thruster connections (connecting to the
Thruster 3(bow)
B-Adapter).
Thruster 4(bow)
Track pilot Data for Conning Display. Not used for the Chart radar.
VDR
Parameter settings for VDR connections (connecting to the LAN Adapter).
Parameter settings for Wind Sensor connections (connecting to the LAN
Wind Sensor
Adapter).
5-2
5.1.2 Selecting Sensors

Use Installation Parameters to make sensor connection settings in [Menu] -> SENSOR.
The displayed contents of each page in the SENSOR menu varies with whether sensor
connections made or not with Installation Parameter settings. That is, only related items
set with Installation Parameters will be displayed.
5-3
5.1.3 Sensor Input

Keep in mind that terminals (channels) that can be connected to the LAN Adapter
vary with each sensor.
Heading Data
Heading data is input into the Radar (RPU-016) side. Input data in AD format
through the serial or AD converter. In order to satisfy the ARPA function sufficiently,
make sure that the input baud rate is 38.4 kbps when the data is input in serial. (Only
a baud rate of 38.4 kbps is received if the SPU version is 02.36 or later ones.)
IEC-61162 Data
IEC-61162 data items, such as EPFS, LOG, AIS, are connected through the LAN
Adapter. The LAN Adapter has eight input channels.
If more input channels are required, add another LAN Adapter through the Hub. Input
GGA/GLL, VTG, ZDA, and DTM data items from the GPS.
Analog Signal and Alarm I/O Signal
The B-Adapter handles analog signals and alarm output. Contact signals, such as
200P/NM log output, and rudder and thruster analog signals, are connected to the
B-Adapter.
LAN-Adapter
(EC-1010) Digital signal x 8 CH
RPU-016 EC-1000C (TX/RX: 4 CH, RX: 4 CH)
HUB HUB
Relay contact x 3
GC -> AD
Sync/Step
IEC61162 type Analog signal x 8 CH
Gyro
ALM output x 8 CH
B-Adapter
(EC-1020)
ALM input x 8 CH
Note:
Connect two LAN Adapters, if used, to the
EC-1000C through the Hub.
In that case, connect the B-Adapter to the
second LAN Adapter.
5-4
5.2 Installation Parameter Backup

The Installation Parameter file is stored in the C:\ants_system\params folder. It is
recommended to back up this file in a floppy disk (FD) or removable disk. The backup
can be made on the following OS level basis or in Record -> Backup and Restore.
5.2.1 Overview
Finish the Chart radar and open the C:\ants_system\params folder.
The sensor.prm, ship.parm, wstation.prm files are stored in this folder.
The sensor.prm, ship.parm, and wstation.prm files include data set with the Installation
Parameters.
Moreover, the default folder has the same files, i.e., the sensor.prm, ship.parm, and
wstation.prm files. These files have the default installation parameter values of the
EC-1000C.
Set data files

Default - sensor.prm
- ship.parm
- wstation.prm
Contents of the default folder.
params
Data files with default values

- sensor.prm
- ship.parm
- wstation.prm
- Saved contents of sensor.prm

Menu -> Initial setting -> Installation parameter
- Saved contents of ship.parm
Menu -> Initial setting -> Navigation parameter -> Ship and Rout parameter
- Saved contents of wstation.prm (work station)
This is used for the ECDIS but not used for the Chart radar.
5-5
5.2.2 Handling Installation Parameter Backup Data

1. Saving data in FD or Removable disk.
Select the set file, select Copy in the Edit menu, and paste the data to the FD
(drive A) or a Removal disk.
2. Pasting data from FD or Removal disk.
Open the FD or Removal disk, select the set file to be pasted, select Copy in the
Edit menu, and paste the data to the C:\ants_system\params folder.
3. Replacing the files in the default folder with set data.
Move the set data file to the default folder to overwrite the existing one.
Note:
Do not change the file name, or otherwise the file cannot be read as data.
Checking the contents of the saved Installation Parameter file with the PC
The set sensor.prm file for the installation parameter cannot be opened on the PC. In
order to open the file, take the following procedure.
Procedure
1. Finish the Chart radar and open the C:\ants_system folder.
2. Open the bin folder in the above folder, and copy “ecbhiprm.exe” to a Removal
disk.
3. Go to the C:\ants_system folder, open the “params” folder, and copy the
sensor.prm file to the Removal disk.
4. Create a folder named “ants_system” on the desktop or drive C of the PC, and
make the “bin” folder and “params” folder in it.
5. Paste the copied files to the above folder created.
“bin” folder Æ ecbhiprm.exe
“params” folder Æ sensor.prm
6. Click the ecbhiprm.exe file so that the Installation Parameter screen will appear
and the contents of each parameter can be checked. However, there is a window
tone problem. Furthermore, the “Sensor Channel Usage” screen cannot be opened.
5-6
5.3 LAN Adapter
5.3 LAN Adapter

5.3.1 Connection Ports of LAN Adapter
The LAN Adapter and EC-1000C (LAN-2 port) are connected through the HUB-100
over a crossing or straight LAN cable. All the ports of the HUB-100 incorporate an
Auto-MDIX function, thus performing automatic cable discrimination.
Use a crossing cable in the case of connecting the LAN Adapter directly to the LAN-2
port of the EC-1000C without using the HUB-100.
Connect the B-Adapter to CH4 of the LAN Adapter. If the second LAN Adapter is
used, connect the B-Adapter to CH11 (CH3) and CH12 (CH4) of the second LAN
Adapter.
First LAN Adapter
LAN 2
Second LAN Adapter
Connection
Not available
CH4 Connection
Not available
If the second LAN

CH11 (CH3) and CH12 Adapter is used,
(CH4) connect the B-Adapter
to the second LAN
Adapter.
TS13 or J1
TS13 or J1
B-Adapter
B-Adapter
5-7
5.3 LAN Adapter
Connection Terminal Layout of LAN Adapter
RX1 LED RX8 LED +15V
+5V
J1: J3: J5: J7: CH7 RL

CH1 CH3 CH5 (Rx, RL2)
+24V
RL1
J2: CH2 J4: CH4 J6: CH6 J8: CH8

(Rx) (Tx/Rx) (Rx, RL1) (Rx, RL3) RL J9
(Power)
RL1 – 3 LED
Electric specifications of each CH

- RX1 to RX8+/-: RS-422 input
- TX1 to TX8+/-: RS-422 output
- TX1 to TX5: RS-232C output
- GND: RS-232C GND
- RL1 to RL3: Relay output
- LAN RX/TX+/-: 100 Base
- +24V_IN/R: 24-VDC power
supply input
Note:
- The J9 LAN RX/TX+/- terminals are not used. The LAN connector on the PCB is
not used either.
- The RX1 LED through RX8 LED will be lit according to the cycle of the reception
signals at the corresponding ports, respectively.
5-8
5.3 LAN Adapter
5.3.2 Port Allocations and Specifications of LAN Adapter
No.1 (First) LAN Adapter No.2 (Second) LAN Adapter

Channel Channel
Type Bit/s Type Bit/s
(J x) (J x)
1 (J1) TX/RX 4800 9 (J1) TX/RX 4800
2 (J2) RX 4800 10 (J2) RX 4800
3 (J3) TX/RX 4800 11 (J3) TX/RX 4800
4 (J4) TX/RX 4800 12 (J4) TX/RX 4800
38400 38400
5 (J5) TX/RX 13 (J5) TX/RX
/4800 /4800
6 (J6) RX 4800 14 (J6) RX 4800
7 (J7) RX 4800 15 (J7) RX 4800
8 (J8) RX 4800 16 (J8) RX 4800
Contact: C-A/B Relay Contact: C-A/B
Relay 1(J6) - -
(Operator fitness) 1(J6) (Waypoint approach)
Contact: C-A/B Contact: C-A/B
Relay 2 Relay 2
(Any ECDIS - (Outside channel -
(J7) (J7)
alarm) limit)
Relay 3 Contact: C-A/B Relay 3 Contact: C-A/B
- -
(J8) (Backup navigator) (J8) (Depth below limit)
5.3.3 Restrictions on Connection Channels of LAN Adapter

[Important!!]
The following table shows connectable (TX/RX) channels and sensors.
The B-Adapter must connect to CH4, and the AIS must connect to CH5 at a baud rate
of 38,400 bit/s, for example.
Connectable channels are displayed when making sensor connection port setting.
Therefore, the connection availability of each channel will be known.
First LAN
Sensor Second LAN Adapter
Adapter
AIS
CH5 CH13 (CH5)
(AIS transponder)
B-Adapter CH4 CH11 (CH3), CH12 (CH4), and CH13 (CH5)
GPS, Log, Echo
sounder, ROT, Wind CH1 to CH8 CH9 (CH1) to CH16 (CH8)
sensor
AMWSS
(Alarm CH1 and CH4 CH9 (CH1), CH11 (CH3), and CH12 (CH4)
Inputs/AMWSS)
Note:
Items in parentheses show sensors displayed in the Installation Parameter menu.
5-9
5.3 LAN Adapter
5.3.4 Relay Output of LAN Adapter

The content of each relay output signal is fixed.
1) First LAN Adapter: Relay 1 (Operator fitness)
The relay will work when the ECDIS is operated. The work of the relay is
confirmed with the RL1 LED. This relay is OFF if the ECDIS is not operated.
2) First LAN Adapter: Relay 2 (Any RADAR alarm)
The relay will work if an alarm, such as a Pos. alarm, is generated. This relay
will be OFF if the ALM is generated.
3) First LAN Adapter: Relay 3 (Backup navigator)
Not used.
4) Second LAN Adapter: Relay 1 (4) (Waypoint approach)
A waypoint approach alarm. The alarm will be output when the set starting time
of course change for WP app. in Initial Settings -> Ship and Rout parameter
comes while monitoring a route created in Route -> Plan -> Create.
5) Second LAN Adapter: Relay 2 (5) (Outside channel limit)
An outside channel limit alarm. The alarm will be output if the point of the own
ship is in excess of the set “Ch limit/m” range in a created route while
monitoring the route in Route -> Plan -> Create.
6) Second LAN-Adapter: Relay 3 (6) (Depth below limit)
A depth below limit alarm. The alarm will be output when a depth shallower
than that set for Depth below trans in Initial Settings -> Sensor -> Other is
detected.
Make settings for Initial Settings -> Installation Settings -> Echo sounder and
Water.
Reference:
Relays 1 through 3 of the Second LAN Adapter are allocated to STO channels 2
through 4.
5-10
5.4 B-Adapter
5.4 B-Adapter
5.4.1 Connection Port of B-Adapter
LEDs
+5V
12ISO
+15V
+24V
IN 1-16
OUT
1-8
LOG J1: Serial port
GYRO (Connecting to LAN
Adapter)
The LED of the
operating port is lit. TS13:
- 24V IN,
- Serial port
(Connecting to LAN
Adapter)
* The J1 and TS13 of

the serial port are the
same.
5-11
5.4 B-Adapter
5.4.2 B-Adapter Connections

Connect the TS13 terminal or J1 (9-pin D-sub connector) of the B-Adapter to the CH4
of the LAN Adapter. If two LAN Adapters are installed, connect CH11, CH12, and
CH13 of the second LAN Adapter.
The TXn terminal of the LAN Adapter has RS-232C specifications and the RX+/-
terminal of the B-Adapter has RS-422 specifications. Therefore, it is recommended to
limit the cable length between both Adapters to a maximum of 5 m.
Reference:
To make connection port settings for the B-Adapter, select General in Installation
Parameter, specify the desired connection port (CH4, CH11, CH12, or CH13) in
[B-Adapter SIO Channel], and set YES for [B-Adapter connected].
First LAN-Adapter
CH4
HUB Second LAN-Adapter
B-Adapter
B-Adapter
TS13
First LAN-Adapter
(J4)CH4
1. 24V
2. 24VR
SEcond LAN-Adapter TXn 3. RX+ B-Adapter
(J3)CH11, (J4)CH12, (J5)CH13 GND 4. RX-
(EC-1020)
5. RX RET
RXn+ 6. TX+
RXn- 7. TX-
LAN-Adapter 8. TX RET
(EC-1010) Connecting to
TS terminal
TXn: RS-232C TX+/-: RS-422
RXn+/-: RS-422 RX+/-: RS-422
J1
(9 pin D-sub)
First LAN-Adapter 1.
(J4)CH4 2.
3.
SEcond LAN-Adapter TXn 4. RX+
(J3)CH11, (J4)CH12, (J5)CH13 GND 5. RX- B-Adapter
6. (EC-1020)
7.
RXn+ 8. TX
LAN-Adapter RXn- 9. GND
(EC-1010)
Connecting to
D-sub
TXn: RS-232C TX: RS-232Cs
RX+/-: RS-422
connector
RXn+/-: RS-422
5-12
5.4 B-Adapter
5.4.3 STO Signals 1 through 8

The following signals are allocated to STO (status output) channels 1 through 8. The
STO signal terminals have relay contact output.
STO Allocations
Channel Status signal Remarks

1 (STO 1) Not used
Route monitor:
Alarm output that turns ON if the vessel is outside a
2 (STO 2) Outside Channel
route created in Route -> Plan -> Create.
Limit
Alarm output that turns ON when the set starting time of
Route monitor: Way course change for WP app. in Initial Settings -> Ship
3 (STO 3)
point approach and Rout parameter comes while monitoring a route
created in Route -> Plan -> Create.
Alarm output that turns ON when a depth shallower than
Echo depth below
4 (STO 4) that set for Depth below trans in Initial Settings ->
limit
Sensor -> Other is detected.
5 (STO 5) Not Used
Navigation sensor Alarm output that turns ON if the Navigation sensor runs
6 (STO 6)
ALM out of data.
7 (STO 7) Operator fitness Output when the Radar is operated.
Alarm output that turns ON if the Radar generates an
8 (STO 8) Any RADAR ALM
alarm.
Note:
STO channels 6 to 8 are allocated to Relays 1 through 3 of the first LAN Adapter.
5-13
5.4 B-Adapter
5.4.4 STI Signals 1 through 16

The following signals are allocated to STI (status input) channels 1 through 16.
The STI signal terminals receive signals through photo couplers.
STO Allocations
Channel Status signal Remarks

1 (STI 1) to 8 (STI 8) Status The status of EXT Navigation Equipment.
A close contact signal that acknowledges an
9 (STI 9) ALM ACK
alarm if the alarm is generated.
BUZZER A close contact signal that stops an alarm if
10 (STI 10)
STOP the alarm is generated.
11 (STI 11) to 16 (STI 16) Not used
Reference:
1. BUZZER STOP and ALM ACK
The BUZZER STOP signal only suspends the ALM buzzer for the phenomenon.
If the phenomenon still exists after a step is taken to clear the status (e.g., deleting
the ALM (error) message display or turning ON the ALM ACK), the display
priority of the ALM message will be lowered.
2. 1 (STI 1) to 8 (STI 8)
To enable input channels 1 (STI 1) through 8 (STI 8), select [Menu] -> INITIAL
SETTINGS -> Installation Parameter and set Device Interface in Alarm
Input/AMWSS to STI1.8 input (Uses B-adapter), and check STIn for EXT
Navigation Equipment.
If alarm signals (close contacts) from EXT Navigation Equipment are input, alarm
numbers 4201 through 4208 will be output.
Alarm number 420x: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN

ALARM INPUT X HAS INTERNAL FAILUE
Open is Alarm:
Normally closed when this item is checked. Indicates (STI 1) through
(STI 8) so that the ALM port
will be known.
5-14
5.4 B-Adapter
5.4.5 Analog Signals

The number of analog signals (voltage signals) is eight. The connection ports are A1IN
through A8IN. Analog signals output from the Fuel Consumption, Propeller, Thruster,
and other items are connected. The B-Adapter performs the A/D conversion of the
connected analog signals and input the signals through the LAN Adapter to the
EC-1000C.
Analog signals are connectable to arbitrary ports, provided that the connecting sensors
and channels are set in [Menu] -> INTIAL SETTINGS -> Installation Parameter.
In the following example, if the analog sensor has resistance output, the REF voltage is
added from the B-Adapter to obtain analog voltage.
Usually, voltage signals are output from the analog sensor. Therefore, connect only the
A1IN and SGND.
Analog Sensor
1
1. A1IN B-Adapter
3
2k ohm 2. SGND
2 3. FREF+
Usually, connect only the
4
4. REF- A1IN and SGND if the sensor
5. STI1 has voltage output.
6. GND
5-15
5.4 B-Adapter
5.4.6 Gyro Connections

The FCR-2xx7's data on the ship's heading is input in series or in AD format into the
Radar (RPU-016).
Therefore, the J38 port (S1, S2, S3, S0, R1H, R1L, or R2 terminal) will not be used.
This port, however, will be used if gyro signals on the FEA-2xx7 are in Synchronous
type or Step by Step type.
Relevant settings:
Make Device Interface settings for Gyro1 in [Menu] -> INITIAL SETTINGS ->
Installation Parameter.
5.4.7 LOG Signal Connections

Connect LOG data that is output as contact signals at the rate of 200 pulses/nm to the
J39: LOG+, LOG-, F/A+, and F/A- terminals. Usually, LOG signals are input in serial
into the LAN Adapter.
Terminal Signal
LOG+
LOG signal terminal
LOG-
F/A+ Forward/Astern signal terminal
F/A- (Close = Astern)
Relevant settings;
Make Device Interface settings for Gyro1 in [Menu] -> INITIAL SETTINGS ->
Installation Parameter.
5.4.8 System Failure

System failure signals are output from the J507 #1 and #2 of the RCU-020 Control
unit.
A check signal is periodically sent to the EC-1000C from the Control unit. If there is
no response from the EC-1000C, the Control unit judges that there is a communication
error and outputs a system failure from the Control unit. To test this function at the
time of ship inspection, select Initial Settings -> Selftest -> OK -> Control Head, and
click the SYSTEM FAILURE OFF button. The system failure signal will be output in
about 30 seconds .
5-16
5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.1 General
Set information on the ship for general settings. The conning position set here is the displayed
position of the own ship.
The above settings is interlocked with the settings in Radar Initialize -> Page 2 -> Own Ship
Info.
Setting Details
1. Ship's name
Register the ship's name.
If an installation parameter is copied from another Chart radar, the ship's name for the
Installation Parameter can be checked by opening General.
2. Sensor Message interval: 1 to 99
This item is used to set data retrieval cycles in order to read in data from each sensor.
The default value (4) is appropriate.
5-17
3. B-Adapter SIO Channel: 4/11/12/13

This item is used to make connection port settings for the B-Adapter, which is connected
to the LAN Adapter. Channels 11 to 13 are for second LAN Adapter.
4. B-Adapter connected: YES/NO
Set this item to YES when connecting the B-Adapter to the LAN Adapter. The A-Adapter
will not communicate with the LAN adapter if this item is set to NO.
“B-Adapter” will be displayed for the above set channel in the Sensor Channel Usage
screen of the Installation Parameter.
5. Trim indicator: Disconnected/Connected
This item is not used for the Chart radar. Set this item to Disconnected.
6. Docking Disp. Spd Vector Max Value: 1 to 20
5-18
** From Center Position to **

Information on the ship's hull is displayed on the ECDIS, Radar, and Chart Radar screens.
Displayed items are centered on the conning position. Set the following parameters.
7. Bow Position
0 to 500 Radar bANT positionj
Breadth=30m Dual Axis Log Position
8. Stern Position GPS ANT position
-500 Conning position
9. Length
Bow Position+ Stern Position From center position to
Bow position=100m
10. Dual Axis Log Position

-500 to 500 From center position to
Dual Axis Log position=70m
11. Conning Position
Length=200m
Center
-500 to 500 position
12. Side Position

From center position
5 to 50 to conning positi=-60m
13. Breadth
10 to 100 (2 step)
From center position
14. Sidewise Conning Position to stern position=-100m
-500 to 500
Side Position=15m
15. Total height from keel to mast
From center position to sidewise
-500 to 500 conning position=-10m
5-19
5.5.2 Positioning Equipment 1 through 6

Six types of positioning equipment sensors, such as the DGPS, GPS, and LORAN, can
connect to the LAN Adapter. Positioning equipment 1 through 6 are the same in setting item.
To display position data, make POS settings in [Menu] -> Sensor menu.
Setting Details
1. Connected: YES/NO
This item is used to set the data retrieval of the EC-1000 from sensors connected to the
LAN Adapter.
2. Adapter Chl: 1 through 16
This item is used to make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which sensor data is
connected.
Channels 1 through 8 are for the first LAN Adapter and channels 9 through 16 are for
the second LAN Adapter.
If the item Connected is set to YES, positioning equipment 1 thorough 6 set here will be
displayed in the Ch area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the Sensor
Channel usage screen of Installation Parameters. Check that the connecting terminals of
the LAN Adapter coincide with channel settings.
5-20
3. Device Interface: IEC 61162 ed1/Syledis/Furuno CIF/IEC 61162 ed2

This item is used to make GPS specification settings. “IEC 61162 ed2” is suitable.
IEC 61162-1-ed1 and ed2 are different in DTM and GLL position message. Ed2
specifies that the GLL message must indicate whether GPS or DGPS is used for
position measurement.
Moreover, the IMO specify that the Radar must receive positions only in WGS84.
4. Identification: GLL/GGA/PAT/21 through 28
This item is used to make sentence selection of position data.
Select GLL or GGA position data.
The COG and SOG show VTG sentence data. If there is no VTG sentence, the value set
manually (MAN) will be displayed.
Therefore, the GPS must output GLL, GGA, VTG, ZDA, DTM sentences.
5. Talker Identifier: xx=don’t care/GP/etc
This item is used to make talker identifier settings for sentences. Set GP for the GPS,
and set XX in the case of retrieving data with the talker identifier ignored.
6. Speed Talker ID: xx=don/care/GP/etc
This item is used to make speed talker ID settings for VTG sentences when calculating
SPD display from VTG sentence data. Set GP for the GPS, and set XX in the case of
retrieving data without the talker ID specified.
SPD display obtained from calculation is SPD(CALC) xx kt.
7. Device Name
This item is used to make displayed position sensor name settings in [Menu] -> Sensor
-> Pos menu.
8. Device Type: Kalman/GPS/Transmit/Decca/Omega/Loran/Syledis/Fixtgt/DGPS
This item is used to select devices to be connected to the sensor port.
The device type set here will appear below the position display so that the position
sensor in use will be known to the user.
9. Weight Factor: 0 to 1.0
It is recommended to set 0.4 for the DGPS, 0.2 for the GPS, and 0.1 for the Loran.
Reference:
While in track pilot mode, the user must select Kalman filter on for the Posn
settings in the Sensor menu. In that case, two GPS data items will be compared
with the Kalman filter turned ON. The EC-1000C will output an alarm if the
value exceeds the set weight factor.
10. Cmg Deley: 0 to 999
“Cmg” stands for “Course made good”. Usually set this item to 0.
5-21
11. Offset from Antenna position to Conning position:

-500 to 500 (+Stbd, -Port), -500 to 500 (Bow, -Stern)
This item is used for offset settings for the Conning Position based on the installation
position of the GPS antenna.
That is, the position displayed on the screen is not the position of the GSP antenna but
the Conning Position.
Reference:
Set the Conning Position in the general settings for the Installation Parameter.
12. Device Datum:
WGS72/WGS84/Europeqaan 1950/*Postdam/Adindan/Afgooye/
Ainel Abd 1970/Anna 1 Astro 1965/Antigua Island Astro 1943/ ---- etc
This item is used to make settings for the present Datum in use. The standard ENC chart
is WGS84. Therefore, select WGS84.
Reference:
Datum changes are possible with the wheel used after locating the cursor on
the Datum display below the position display. The Datum settings can be
made in the Initial Settings menu as well. Use this item when changing the
Datum to the one displayed on the paper chart presently in use.
13. Roll and Pitch Receive: Disable/Able
Usually set this item to Disable.
14. IEC 61162-1 Transmit checksum: Not used/Used
Usually this item is not selected.
This item is used to add a checksum to each IEC 61162-1 sentence received from a
preset Adapter channel when the sentence is output from the same port. Regardless of
the settings, a checksum will be always added.
15. $ char included in transmit checksum: Not included/Included
Usually this item is not selected.
This item determines the calculation method of the checksum for the above output
sentence with or without the first character “$” used. Usually, a checksum is calculated
with the character “$” included.
5-22
5.5.3 Gyro1 (2)

This item is used for gyro data settings. The chart radar uses data input into the Radar
(RPU-016).
Setting Details
Set this item to YES.
This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in NMEA data (heading data)
connected to the LAN Adapter. Data from the RPU-016 will not be taken in unless this
item is set to YES.
5-23
2. Adapter Chl: 1 to 16
This item is not used for the Chart radar. The present channel can be left as
it is.
Reference: FEA-2xx7
Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which sensors are connected.
Channels 1 through 8 are for the first LAN Adapter and channels 9 through 16 are
for the second LAN Adapter.
If the item Connected is set to YES, the gyro will be displayed in the Ch area, which
corresponds to the channel set here, on the Sensor Channel usage screen for the
Installation Parameter. Check that the connection terminal of the LAN Adapter
coincides in channel.
3. Gear Box: 1:360/1:180
This item is not used for the Chart radar. The present channel can be left as it is.
Reference: FEA-2xx7
Gyro data in both analog gyro and NMEA signals can be accepted. This item is
used to make speed increment ratio setting for analog gyro signals connected to the
B-Adapter.
Set the device interface to Stepper/Synchro (Uses B-Adapter).
No settings are required if NMEA data is input.
4. Talker Identifier: xx=don’t care/HE/etc
Make talker identifier settings if serial HDG data settings are made, i.e., the next device
interface is set to ARPA CPU Serial (Only Chart Radar).
Set XX if no talker identifiers are specified.
Any talker will do if the device interface is set to ARPA CPU AD-10(Only Chart Radar).
Reference: FEA-2xx7
Make talker identifier settings for NMEA data connected to the LAN Adapter.
Usually set this item to HE. Set XX to take in data with talker identifiers ignored.
5-24
5. Device Interface:
The Heading data for the Chart radar is input in AD format or NMEA data into the Radar
(RPU-016). Set ARPA CPU AD-10 (Only Chart Radar) or ARPA CPU Serial (Only
Chart Radar) according to the input data specifications.
Note:
In the case of ARPA CPU Serial (Only Chart Radar), use serial data at a baud rate
of 38.4 kbps.
Setting item Description

Stepper/Synchro(Uses
This item is used to connect Stepper/Synchro data to
B-Adapter)
the B-Adapter.
Reference:
IEC-61162-1($xxHDT)
This item is used to connect NMEA data into the
LAN Adapter.
DAX: IEC-61162-1
Not supported.
($ｘｘVHW)
Reference:
This item is used to take in heading data that is
Trackpilot
output from the track pilot of the P EMRI. In that
case, only one gyro unit is connected to the track
pilot.
The same as above except the number of gyro units
Trackpilot
connected to the track pilot, i.e., two gyro units are
(double gyro/Gyro1)
connected, and takes in Gyro-1 data.
Chart radar settings.
Reference:
ARPA CPU AD-10 This item is selected if heading data is input in AD
(Only Chart Radar) format into the Radar (RPU-016).
When this item is selected, the HDG source on the
Radar side will be automatically set to AD-10.
Chart radar settings.
This item is selected if heading data is input in
ARPA CPU Serial
IEC61162-2 data format into the Radar (RPU-016).
(Only Chart Radar)
When this item is selected, the HDG source on the
Radar side will be automatically set to Serial.
IEC-61162-1 Reference:
($xxHDT with MAG) This item is selected when MAG compass data is
input in NMEA data format into the LAN Adapter.
5-25
5.5.4 Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication (LAN)

The LAN traffic of echo data limits the number of EC-1000C units and RPU-016 Radar
Processor units connected as shown below according to the processing of echo data.
For example, a single Chart radar can connect to three IMO Radars over LAN.
Chart Radar None 1 unit 2 units

IMO Radar 4 units 3 units 1 unit
Note:
The Inters-switch function operates only while in Radar mode.
5-26
Setting Details
1. Radar transceiver: 1/2/3/4
This item is used to make Radar number settings to enable Radar connections over LAN.
That is, this item is an Inter-switch function to select Radars. To check the connection
(setting) state, open the Radar ANT Box menu on the Radar screen.
However, the Inter-switch function will work only while the system is in Radar mode.
Band, Model, and Pos

data items displayed
are those from the
connecting equipment.
In the case of the own Chart radar, set 1 in Radar Initialize→ [Menu] -> Initial
Settings -> Page 2 Radar Number.
To connect two or more IMO Radars, make settings in [Menu] -> 0 -> 4.
INSTALLATION -> 4. RADAR NO.
IP address
・No.1 Radar IP Address: 172.31.3.6 (No.1 Chart radar: Own for chart radar)
・No.2 Radar IP Address: 172.31.3.7 (No.2 Chart radar, IMO Radar)
・No.3 Radar IP Address: 172.31.3.8 (IMO Radar)
・No.4 Radar IP Address: 172.31.3.9 (IMO Radar)
This item is used to select to connect or not with the Radar the number of which is set
for Radar transceiver.
5-27
3. Device Interface
IMO ARPA/Own for Chart Radar/Chart Radar/Own for Chart Radar with INS
This item is used to make Radar connection mode settings.
1) Installation Mode 1
No.1 Radar No.2 Radar No.3 Radar No.34Radar

(Chart Radar) (Chart Radar) (IMO Radar) (Non)
Radar Radar Radar
Transceiver Transceiver Transceiver
(X-band) (X-band) (S-band)
LAN
No.1 Chart No.2 Chart

Processor Processor
(EC-1000C) (EC-1000C)
Settings on No.1 Chart Radar (EC-1000C) Side

Settings on
Settings on chart radar (EC-1000C) side
radar side
Radar
Connected Device Interface
Transceiver RADAR NO.
setting setting
setting
1 YES Own for Chart Radar 1
2 YES Chart Radar 2
3 YES IMO Radar 3
4 NO N/A 4
Settings on No.2 Chart Radar (EC-1000C) Side

Settings on
Settings on chart radar(EC-1000C) side
radar side
Radar
Transceiver RADAR NO.
setting setting
setting
1 YES Chart Radar 1
2 YES Own for Chart Radar 2
3 YES IMO Radar 3
4 NO N/A 4
5-28
2) Installation Mode 2
This mode is used to connect the Chart radar and ECDIS over LAN in order to monitor route
information created on the ECDIS.
No.1 Radar - TTM: Target Data

(Chart Radar)
([Menu] -> Initial Settings ->
Radar Radar Initialize-> Page 3 ->
Transceiver
(X-band) TTM Output)
172.31.3.6
- OSD: Own Ship Data
TX: TTM, OSD
HUB HUB
RX: Route 172.31.3.33 172.31.3.29
No.1 Chart
Processor ECDIS RX: TTM, OSD
(EC-1000C) (EC-1000C) TX: Route
Settings on
Settings on chart radar(EC-1000C) side
radar side
Radar
Transceiver INS IP Address RADAR NO.
setting setting
setting
Own for Chart Set the IP address of INS
Radar No. 1 YES 1
Radar with INS (ECDIS) (172.31.3.29)
Reference:
When using the route information created on the ECDIS, the route monitored on
the ECDIS will be displayed on the Chart radar.
The route menu on the Chart radar will be deleted. Set the IP address of the Chart
radar with the same setting item on the ECDIS side.
INS IP Address will be added when

Own for Chart Radar with INS is
selected.
5-29
4. Label:
This item is used to make label settings for Radars displayed in the Radar ANT Box on
the Radar and Chart radar screens. Besides, this label is used also for the name of the
Ant No.x in the ANT INFO item in the icon menu.
Make settings so that the user will know which Radar is connected.
Radar Initialize ->

Page2 -> Radar Mode
settings
Label
settings
5. From Radar antenna to Conning position:

xx m (+Stbd, -Port)/ xx m (+Bow, -Sterm)
This item is used to set conning position distance from the Radar antenna.
The Radar image will be rectified to the image seen from the Conning
position.
Reference:
The settings are interlocked with those in [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar
Initialize-> Page2 -> Own Ship Info.
6. IP address: 172.31.3.X
This item cannot be set.
This item displays the IP address of the Radar number set in Radar transceiver.
If Radar transceiver is set to1, “172.31.3.6” will be displayed.
7. Port numbers: 10024 for Radar echo output/10028 for ARPA communication
This item displays the communications ports used for the EC-1000C and RPU-016.
Radar echo output is the port on the EC-1000C side to receive Radar echo signals. ARPA
communication shows the port number used for the EC-1000C to communicate with the
RPU-016.
8. ARPA display number: 1
This item is interlocked with the Radar number set in Radar transceiver.
If Radar transceiver is set to 1, “1” will be displayed.
5-30
9. INS IP Address:
The INS IP address will be added if Device Interface is set to Own for Chart Radar with
INS.
The port number displayed below indicates the port number used for the EC-1000C to
communicate with the INS.
5-31
5.5.5 AIS transponder
Setting Details
Set this item to YES if the AIS is connected.
This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in AIS data (CDM and DCO data)
connected to the LAN Adapter.
2. Adapter chl: 5/13
Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which AIS data is connected.
Channel 5 is for the first (No. 1) LAN Adapter and 13 for the second (No. 2) LAN
Adapter. The baud rate on these channels is 38,400 bps and allocated to AIS-dedicated
connection channel.
If the item Connected is set to YES, the AIS will be displayed in the [Ch] area, which
corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen for the
Installation Parameter. Check that the connection terminal of the LAN Adapter coincides
in channel.
3. Device Interface: IEC61162-2(38400bit/s)/IEC61162-1(4800bit/s)
Set IEC61162-2(38400bit/s) when connecting the AIS for the baud rate settings on the
set channel.
AIS-related sentences used are “!AIVDM (UAIS VHF data-link message)” and
“!AIVDO (UAIS VHF Data-link Own-vessel report)”.
Reference:
If the baud rate is set to IEC61162-1(4800bit/s), data at a baud rate of 4800
bit/s, such as position sensor data, can be accepted.
5-32
4. Device mode: Allow illegal values/Normal IEC61993-2

Set this item to Normal IEC61993-2.
IEC61993-2 specifies AIS rules and only data satisfying the rules will be accepted. If
Allow illegal values is set, data not satisfying the AIS rules will be accepted as well.
5. IEC61162-1 Transmit checksum: Not used/used
Set this item to Not used.
6. Checksum: $char not included (IEC61162-1 EMRI)/
$char included (Some old NMEA)
Usually this function is not used.
Set this item to $char not included (IEC61162-1 EMRI).
5-33
5.5.6 Dual Axis Log (DAX)

Connect the DS-30 and DS-50 to measure the speeds of two axis (i.e., in the Ahead or Astern
direction and Starboard or Port direction).
The sentence used is “VBW”. When Conning or Docking in the Select Sidebar menu is
selected, this item will be displayed on the corresponding screen.
Reference:
Refer to the settings in 5.5.7 Log.
Check Dual log (bottom) in Sensor -> Spd/Cse.
If the system is in speed over ground (SOG) mode at that time, the ship's speed for
Conning or Docking is displayed under BOTTOM.
If the system is in speed through water (STW) mode, Error 4009 Dual-Axis Log (BT)
Error will be output. If the VTG sentence is input, the ship's speed will be displayed
with this data used. At that time, the display will change from BOTTOM to POSN.
Therefore, if Dual log (bottom) in Sensor -> Spd/Cse is unchecked, POSN will be
always displayed. Therefore, no error will result even if the system is changed into STW
mode.
Moreover, the SPD display in the position display area will show SPD(WAT)
xx kt.
If there is no Log data, SPD(CALC) xx kt will be displayed.
Log -> YES
Ship's speed in the

Ship's Starboard or Port
speed in
the Ahead BOTTOM: SOG
or Astern POSN: VTG
direction
Dual Axis Log ->
YES
Ship's speed in
the Starboard or
Port direction
Spd/Cse Screen
Docking Screen
5-34
Setting Details
This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in dual axis log data (VBW data)
connected to the LAN Adapter. If YES is selected, the Dual axis log will be displayed in
the [Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters.
2. Adapter Channel: 1 through 16
Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which Dual axis log data is connected.
If the item Connected is set to YES, the Dual axis log set here will be displayed in the
[Ch] area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage]
screen of Installation Parameters. Check that the connecting terminals of the LAN
Adapter coincide with the channel settings.
IEC61162-1($xxVTG)/IEC61162-1($XXVBW)/IEC61162-1($xxPSALL)
Set this item to IEC61162-1($XXVBW).
Reference:
- VTG: Course over ground and ground speed
- VBW: Dual ground/water speed
- PSALL: P sentence
5-35
4. Sing Positive: for Ahead/for Astern (longitudinal speed)/

This item is used to make Ahead or Astern settings with the reception of
positive signal input.
The positive or negative symbol for the SOG display in the Ahead or Astern
direction will change.
5. Sign Positive: for Starboard/for Port (transversal speed)

This item is used to make Starboard or Port settings with the reception of positive signal
input.
The positive or negative symbol for the SB display in the Ahead or Astern direction will
change.
6. Status Flag Check:
No Check, all flags accepted/Check-only "A," "B," or "W" accepted
Usually set this item to No Check, all flags accepted.
This item determines whether the status contained in sentences is checked or not.
7. Talker Identifier: xx
The talker identifier VD is a standard talker identifier.
The talker identifier will be ignored if this item is set to XX.
5-36
5.5.7 Log
Connect the DS-80 to measure the speed of a single axis (i.e., in the Ahead or Astern
direction).
Make sure that the adapter channel for the lot is set to the same adapter channel set with the
Dual Axis Log (DAX) parameter. As a matter of course, connect the signals from the log to
this channel.
The Dual Log (Water) will be displayed as data from the log in [Menu] -> SENSOR ->
Spd/Cse. The SPD display in the position display area shows SPD(WAT) xx kt.
If there is no log data, SPD(CALC) xx kt will be displayed.
Setting Details
This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in log data (VBW and VHW data)
connected to the LAN Adapter. If YES is selected, the Dual axis log will be displayed in
the [Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters.
5-37

Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which log data is connected.
If the item Connected is set to YES, the log set here will be displayed in the [Ch] area,
which corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of
Installation Parameters. Check that the connecting terminals of the LAN Adapter
coincide with the channel settings.
If Device Interface is set to (DAX )---, the data will be displayed for the adapter channel
set in the Dual Axis Log (DAX) on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of installation
parameters.
Analog Pulse (uses B-Adapter)/ (DAX )IEC61162-1($xxVHW)/
(DAX)IEC61162-1($XXVBW)/(DAX )internal test only
Set this item according to the log output sentence to be connected, i.e., either
“(DAX)IEC61162-1($XXVBW)” or “(DAX )IEC61162-1($xxVHW)”.
Reference:
- VHW: Water speed and heading
- VBW: Dual ground/water speed
4. Measurement Unit: NM/Yards/m
This item is invalid if serial data is input.
If log signals are input in analog pulses, set this item on a single-unit basis.
5. Prefiltering: 0/4/6/64
Usually set this item to 0.
6. Pulse per Unit: 1 to 32000
If log signals are input in analog pulses, set the number of pulses peer unit set for
Measurement Unit.
Connect log signals to the B-Adapter.
Relevant settings:
Set B-Adapter settings for General Parameter to YES.
7. Talker Identifier:
Setting this item to XX may be appropriate. Then the talker identifier will be
ignored.
The talker identifier VD is a standard talker identifier.
5-38
5.5.8 Echo Sounder and Weather

Connect the FE-700 for depth measurement.
Use the sentences “DBT” and “DBS”. When Conning or Docking in the Select Sidebar menu
is selected, this item will be displayed on the corresponding screen. The data will be
displayed in SENSOR -> Other as well.
Reference;
The data will be added to [Menu] -> SENSOR -> Other and Select Sidebar -> Conning
Display.
Echo sounder -> YES
Echo sounder -> YES
Water/Air Temperature
-> YES
and Conning Display
BOW
Water Current -> YES

AFT
SENSOR -> Other Select Sidebar -> Conning Display
5-39
1. Echo Sounder
Setting Details
1. Echo sounder (BOW) and Echo sounder (AFT)
In the case of the following system configuration as shown in case-1, where an
Transducer each is installed in the BOW and AFT transducers that are selected with a
switch, make sure that the Echo sounder (BOW) and Echo sounder (AFT) are the same
in device interface and adapter channel.
If case-2 applies, make device interface and adapter settings individually for each sensor.
Case-1 Echosounder Case-2 Echosounder

(FE-700) (FE-700)
Transducer Transducer
Transducer
(BOW) (AFT)
Settings Details
This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in Echo sounder data (DBT, DBS, and
DPT data) connected to the LAN Adapter. If YES is selected, ECH SOUNDER will be
displayed in the [Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation
Parameters.
2. Device Interface: IEC61162-1($xxDBT)/Simrad N200/IEC61162-1($xxDBS)/
FE-700(xxDPT, $PFEC)
Set this item to FE-700 (xxDPT, $PFEC), if the system select one of the two transducers
with the switch as shown in case-1. If the Echo sounder (BOW) is set to this parameter,
the Echo sounder (AFT) will be automatically set to the same parameter, which cannot
be changed.
If case-2 applies, set this item to IEC61162-1($xxDBT).
Reference:
- DBT: Depth below transducer
- DBS: Depth below surface
- DPT: Depth
5-40
3. Adapter Chl:
Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which Echosounder data is connected.
If the item Connected is set to YES, the log set here will be displayed in the [Ch] area on
the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. Check that the connecting
terminals of the LAN Adapter coincide with the channel settings.
Setting this item to XX may be appropriate. Then the talker identifier will be ignored.
The sounder- and depth-related talker identifier is SD.
5. Median Filter: YES/NO
6. Sensor to keel distance: -100 to 100
This item is used to set the distance between the keel and sensor (Transduser). Positive
values are used if the sensor protrudes from the keel.
2. Water Current
Connect the DS-30.
Setting Details
This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in Water current data (VDR data)
connected to the LAN Adapter. If YES is selected, the water current will be displayed in
the [Ch] area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage]
screen of Installation Parameters.
2. Device Interface: IEC61162-1($xxVDR)
The parameter is fixed at IEC61162-1($xxVDR).
Reference:
- VDR: Set and drift(Current speed, Direction)
3. Adapter Chl:
Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which water current data is connected.
If the item Connected is set to YES, the water current set here will be displayed in the
[Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. Check that
the connecting terminals of the LAN Adapter coincide with the channel settings.
Setting this item to XX may be appropriate. Then the talker identifier will be
ignored.
5-41
3. Water Temperature, Air Temperature, Air Pressure, and Air Humidity

Usually, these sensors are not used.
Connect IEC or analog signal sensor data.
Water temperature and air temperature data values are shown in [Menu] -> SENSOR ->
Other.
Although the conning monitor display air pressure data and air humidity data, the conning
display cannot be connected to the chart radar. Therefore, the air pressure data or air humidity
data cannot be used.
Air Air
Item Water Air Pressure Humidity
Parm Temperature Temperature (Not (Not
available) available)
Connected YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO
- IEC61162-1($xxMTW) - IEC61162-1($xxMDA)
Device Interface - Analog(Uses B-Adapter) - Analog(Uses B-Adapter)
- VISAL - VISAL
Adapter Chl 1 to 16
Output (See note) V (at
V (at 0°C) V (at 0°C) V (at 0%)
(-320.2 to 320.2) 800hPs)
Output per Volt
xx (°C /Volt) xx (°C /Volt) xx (hPa/Volt) xx (% Volt)
(-320.2 to 320.2)
Prefiltering 0/4/8/64
B-Adapter Chl 1 through 8
Note:
The maximum voltage of analog signals input into the B-Adapter is +15 VDC.
If a voltage in excess is used, convert the voltage within the specified range by dividing
the voltage with appropriate parts, such as resistors.
Setting Details
This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in sensor data. Set this item to YES
when making sensor connections regardless of whether the sensor data is IEC or analog
signal input. If YES is selected, the sensor name will be displayed in the [Ch] area on the
[Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters.
Relevant settings:
If analog sensor data signal is connected to the channel of the B-Adapter, set
General -> B-Adapter Connected to YES.
Select IEC, Analog, or VIASAL according to the input data.
Reference:
MTW: Water temperature
- MDA:
- VIASAL:
5-42
3. Adapter Chl:
If Device Interface is set to IEC or VISAL, i.e., serial signals are selected, set the sensor
connection channel of the LAN Adapter.
If the item Connected is set to YES, the sensor name will be displayed in the [Ch] area,
which corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen for the
Installation Parameter. Check that the connection terminal of the LAN Adapter coincides
in channel.
If analog signal are used make settings in B-Adapter Chl.
Furthermore, set General -> B-Adapter Connected to YES.
4. Output:
Set the voltage of the sensor reference point. For example, set the voltage at 0°C in the
case of water temperature.
5. Output per Volt:
Set the voltage variation width of sensor data. For example, set °C/Volt in the case of
water temperature.
6. Prefiltering
7. B-Adapter Chl
If Device Interface is set to Analog, i.e., analog signals are selected, set the channel
connected to the B-Adapter.
If the item Connected is set to YES, the sensor name will be displayed in the [B−
Adapter] area, which corresponds to the B-Adapter set here, on the [Sensor Channel
usage] screen for the Installation Parameter. Check that the connection terminal of the
B-Adapter coincides in channel.
Relevant settings:
Set General -> B-Adapter Connected to YES.
5-43
5.5.9 Wind Sensor

This data is shown in [Menu] -> SENSOR -> Other.
Settings Details
This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in wind data connected to the LAN
Adapter. If YES is selected, Wind will be displayed in the [Ch] area on the [Sensor
Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters.
Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which wind data is connected.
If the item Connected is set to YES, Wind will be displayed in the [Ch] area, which
corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation
Parameters. Check that the connecting terminals of the LAN Adapter coincide with the
channel settings.
3. Device Interface: IEC 6116201($xxMWV)/THIES
Set this item to IEC61162-1($XXMWV).
4. Identification: MWV/MWD/VWR/VWT
This item is used to make sentence selection for use.
Reference:
- MWV:
- MWD:
- VWR: Relative (Apparent) wind speed and angle
- VWT: True wind speed and angle
5-44
5. Interpretation of received angle: wind blows from direction of angle/

wind blows to direction of angle
This item is used to make wind direction settings. Usually set this item to wind blows
from direction of angle.
6. Source of true Wind: Receive (T)heoretical Wind(HDG) and Calculate True wind/
Receive (R)el/Apparent Wind and Calculate True wind/
Receive (T)rue Wind(North) and use it directly
This item is used to make settings for input serial data.
Usually set this item to Receive (R)el/Apparent Wind and Calculate True wind.
See the next page.
7. Style of Display: Display Rel(=Apparent) or True(=North)/
Display Rel(=Apparent) or True(=Theoretical)/
Display Rel (=Theoretical or True(=North)/
This item is used to make settings for data selected and displayed for Rel Wind/Ture
Wind.
Usually set this item to Display Rel (=Theoretical or True(=North). See the next page.
8. Style of send to ARPA: Send T(=True/North) only/
Send T(=True/Theoretical) only/
Send R(=Rel/Apparent) only/
Send R(=Rel/ Theoretical) only/
Send T(=True/North) or R(=Apparent)/
Send T(=True/North) or R(=Theoretical)/
Send T(=True/ Theoretical) or R(=Apparent)/
This item is used to make settings for data that the ECDIS outputs to the
ARPA.
Usually set this item to Send T(=True/Theoretical) only. See the next page.
5-45
Source of true Wind
Selection Description
Receive (T)heoretical R (relative) data on the MWV sentence is received and
Wind(HDG) and Calculate True handled as apparent data for North and Theoretical
wind calculation.
T (True) Data on the MWV sentence is received and
Receive (R)el/ Apparent Wind
handled as Theoretical data for North and Apparent
and Calculate True wind
calculation.
T (True) Data on the MWV sentence is received and
Receive (T)rue Wind(North)
handled as North data for Apparent and Theoretical
and use it directly
calculation.
Style of Display
SENSORS dialog box/Other page
Selection
Rel Wind selection True Wind selection
Display Rel (=Theoretical) or True (=North) Theoretical North
Display Rel(=Apparent) or True (=North) Apparent North
Display Rel(=Apparent) or True
Apparent Theoretical
(=Theoretical)
Style of Send to ARPA
Selection Description
The reference field is set to T (True) for the MWV sentence
Send T (=True /North) only
to output North data. Fixed to a single sentence.
Send T(=True/Theoretical) The reference field is set to T (True) for the MWV sentence
only to output Theoretical data. Fixed to a single sentence.
The reference field is set to R(Relative) for the MWV
Send R(=Rel/Apparent) only sentence to output Apparent data. Fixed to a single
sentence.
The reference field is set to R(Relative) for the MWV
Send R(=Rel/Theoretical)
sentence to output Theoretical data. Fixed to a single
only
sentence.
In the following settings, the SENSORS dialog box/Other page
output and sentence vary with
the Rel Wind and True Wind Rel Wind selection Ture Wind selection
settings.
The reference field is set to The reference field is set to
Send T(=Ture/North) or R (Relative) for the MWV T(True) for the MWV
R(=Apparent) sentence to output Apparent sentence to output North
data. data.
The reference field is set to The reference field is set to R
Send T(=Ture/North) or R (Relative) for the MWV T(True) for the MWV
R(=Theoretical) sentence to output sentence to output North
Theoretical data. data.
The reference field is set to The reference field is set to
Send T(=Ture/ Theoretical) or R (Relative) for the MWV T(True) for the MWV
R(=Apparent) sentence to output Apparent sentence to output
data. Theoretical data.
5-46
5.5.10 Rate of Turn Gyro

The ROT is displayed in the Spd/Cse area of the Sensor menu, and displayed on the Conning
and Docking screens.
Setting Details
1. Connected: YES/NO, Calculated from Gyro source
Usually set this item to NO, Calculated from Gyro source. If this item is set to YES, data
from the ROT will be displayed. If this item is set to NO, Calculated from Gyro source,
the ROT will be calculated using the gyroscope bow direction.
Set this item to YES in the case of using analog signal input or the ROT sentence from
the gyro.
2. Adapter Channel: 1 to 16
If Device Interface is set to an item other than Analog, i.e., serial signals are selected, set
the sensor connection channel of the LAN Adapter.
In the case of analog signals, input the data to the channel set for the B-Adapter Channel.
Set General -> B-Adapter Connected to YES.
5-47
3. Device Type: Analog(uses B-Adapter)/DAX Dolog23($PKDRU)/

Gyro1 IEC61162($xxROT)/Trackpilot)
In the case of analog input, set this item to Analog(uses B-Adapter) along
with the following parameter.
Set this item to Gyro1 IEC61162($xxROT) in the case of using the ROT sentence from
gyro. In that case, set Connect to YES.
4. B-Adapter Channel: 1 to 8
This item is used to make port settings that connect analog signals to the B-Adapter. Set
Device Type to Analog(uses B-Adapter) and General -> B-Adapter Connected to YES.
5. Output at 0/min: -320.0 to 320.0
This item is used to set the voltage of the sensor reference point (0/min) for analog
signal input.
6. Output Volt: -320.0 to 320.0
Set the voltage variation width of sensor data based on the unit used for the data.
7. Prefitering: 0/4/8/64
8. Max Scale: 30 to 200
5-48
5.5.11 ARPA Processor Alarm Relays

The Radar Processor unit has four alarm output terminals (J612#1 through J612#8), and their
functions can be allocated to the Alarm, Ack Out, or Fitness Out. Check items that are
required for alarms. Moreover, the polarity of each output signal is reversible.
- Alarm: Turns ON if a radar alarm signal is generated.
- Ack Out: Turns ON when the ALARM ACK key is pressed.
- Fitness Out: Turns ON when any key is pressed.
Out1 – 4
- Alarm
- Ack out
- Fitness out
5-49
5.5.12 Alarm Inputs/AMWSS

This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.
5-50
5.5.13 Central Alarm Text

5-51
5.5.14 Conning Display

This item is not connected to the Chart radar.
No. Setting item Parameter

1 Conning Mode Harbour-1/ Harbour-2/Navigate-1/ Navigate-2/Standalone
2 Default Palette BULUE BACKGROUND/BLACK BACKGROUND
Display: Left Right
3 Refer to the following Display table.
Upper/Middle/Bottom
Traditional/small size/Double speed/Small with double
4 Center Speed
speed
5 Position device indication Traditional/Detailed
** Display **
Upper Alarm messages/Azimuth propulsion 1/ Azimuth propulsion 2/ Azimuth
Middle propulsion 3/ Azimuth propulsion 4/Bow thruster and Propeller/Depth 50m/
Depth 100m/
Depth 200m/Drift, Radius/Dual CPP Prop with RG/Dual Propulsion with
RG/Empty/
Engine start Air Pressure/Fuel Consumption/Position/Propeller/
Propeller and Engine/ Propulsion and Thruster/Route/Route Next Leg/
Route Next Leg B/ Route Present Leg/ Route Present Leg B/
Route with next Leg/Service Course keep test/Service Hdg, Hsc, ROT/
Bottom Service XET, Rud, Mode/ Serv large XET, Rud, Mode/ Service steering Drift/
Serv long Hdg, Hsc, ROT/ Serv long XET, Rud, Mode/ Serv long large XET, Rud,
Mo/
Service long steering Drift/Singe CPP Prop with RG/
Singe Propulsion with RG/Speed pilot/Thruster/Trackpilot/Trackpilot extended/
Trackpilot Order/Water temp and Propeller/Waypoint/Weather/
Weather and Wind/Wind, depth, Destinations
5-52
5.5.15 Electronic chart (Laserplot)


1 Connected: YES/NO
IEC61162-1/ IEC61162-1(SPECIAL)/
2 Device Interface
IEC61162-1(TRANSAS)
3 Adapter Channel 1 to 16
IEC61162-1 Transmit
4 Used/Not Used
checksum
$ Char Included in
5 Included/Not Included
Checksum
6 Chart Line Colour C/D/T/O
7 Datum Uses Local Datum of ECDIS/Changed to Device Datum
8 Device Datum WGS72/KKJ/EUROP-50/NAD-27/WGS-84
9 Cursor Position Receive Disable/Enable
5-53
5.5.16 Engine Control


1 Connected YES/NO
2 Adapter Channel 1 to16
Not used/IEC 61162-1(time out 30s)
3 Device Type
Not used/IEC 61162-1(time out 4 min)
4 Switch Input Inuse Open is OFF Fixed use for
5-54
5.5.17 Fuel Consumption


1 Connected: YES/NO
2 Device Type Analog (use B-Adapter)/Engine Control
3 VOS Used YES/NO
4 VOS Green Area 0 to 50
5 VOS Lower Cons Goog YES/NO
6 Unit L/kg
7 HFO Used YES/NO
** Parameter **
Item
Main Flow Ret Flow Temperature
Param
InUse YES/NO YES/NO
B-Adapter Channel 1 -- 8 1 -- 8 1 -- 8
Output at 0 Position -320.0 – 320.0 -320.0 – 320.0 -320.0 – 320.0
Output per Volt -320.0 – 320.0 -320.0 – 320.0 -320.0 – 320.0
Prefiltering 0/4/8/64 0/4/8/64 0/4/8/64
Minimum -40 -- 80
Maximum 1 -- 500
5-55
5.5.18 Heel and Trim

Heel refers to the inclination of the ship. Trim refers to difference between the fore and aft in
draft. This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.

1 Connected: YES/NO
2 Device Interface Analog (use B-Adapter)
3 Adapter Chl 1 to 16
4 Output -320.2 to 320.2 V(at 0°)
5 Output per Volte -320.2 to 320.2 °/Volt
6 Prefiltering: 0/4/8/64
7 B-Adapter Chl 1 to 8
5-56
5.5.19 Main Engine Start Air Pressure


1 Connected YES/NO
2 Device Type Analog (use B-Adapter)/Engine control
3 B-Adapter Channel 1 to 8
4 Output at o kg/cm2 -320.0 to 320.0
5 Output per Volt -320.0 to 320.0
6 Prefiltering 0/4/8/64
7 Alarm 0.0 to 100.0
8 Maximum Value 0.0 to 100.0
5-57
5.5.20 Propeller 1 – 4
This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO. This item is used for the
Conning Display of the ECDIS.

1 Connected YES/NO
2 Device Type Analog (use B-Adapter)/Engine control
3 Label
4 Parameter See the Parameter table below.
** Parameter **
Item
RPM Pitch Power Torque M/E Rpm
Param
In use YES/NO
B-Adapter
1 to 8
channel
Output at 0 -320.2 to 320.2V
-320.2 to -320.2 to -320.2 to -320.2 to -320.2 to
Output per Volt 320.2 320.2 320.2 320.2 320.2
RPM/V unit/V kW/V Nm/V RPM/V
Prefiltering 0/4/8/64
-320.2 to -10000 to
-10000 to 10
Minimum 320.2 10
RPM
unit RPM
-320.2 to
10 to 10000 10 to 30000 10 to 50000 10 to 10000
Maximum 320.2
RPM kW Nm RPM
unit
5-58
5.5.21 RENC Connections

This item is not used for the Chart radar.
5-59
5.5.22 Rudders
This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO. This item is used for the
Conning Display of the ECDIS.

1 Connected YES/NO
Analog(uses B-Adapter)/Trackpilot/Engine
Control
Actual analog, Order Trackpilot
Actual Engine Control, Order Trackpilot
2 Device Type
Analog SIN/COS(uses B-Adapter)
No Actual, Order
Trackpilot/IEC61162-1($xxRSA)
Actual IEC61162-1($xxRSA), Order Trackpilot
3 Number of Rudders 1/2/3/4
Navigation Display Scale
4 1 to 93
Max
5-60
5 Harbour Display Scale Max 1 to 93

Conventional/Water Jet(no scale)
6 Rudder type Azimuth Propulsion(no scale)/
Conventional(double scale)
Not used//Connected//Cornered//
7 Numerical value
Only ORD/Centered//Only ORD/Cornered
8 Label
Normal/Azimuth 0 up/ Azimuth 0 down/
9 Display method
Azimuth 180 up/ Azimuth 180 down
5.5.23 SatCom/External Computer/Sindel Repeaters

Reference:
The route can be sent from Device Interface: Route backup FURUNO GP-80GPS to the
ECDIS or from the ECDIS to the GP.

1 Connected YES/NO
SatCom IEC61162-1/Ext.Computer IEC
61162-1/
SINDEL Repetaers/
2 Device Interface
Ext. Com IMO Msg. IEC 61162-01/
SAL SD2-1 Docking log Display/
Route backup IEC 61162-1
3 Adapter Channel: 1/3/4/9/11/12/13
IEC 61162-1 Transmit
4 Use/Not used
checksum
5 $ Char Included Checksum Not included/Included
5-61
5.5.24 Speedpilot

1 Connected YES/NO
2 Adapter Chl 9/11/12/13
3 Device Interface Speedpilot (EMIRI)
4 Device Mode Normal
5 IEC 61162-1 Transmit checksum Not used/Used
$ char not included (IEC61162-1 & EMIRI)/
6 Checksum
$ char included (Some old NMEA)
5-62
5.5.25 Thruster 1 to 4
The thruster is equipment to move the ship sideways. Set this item to Stern-1, Stern-2,
bow-1, or bow-2.
This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO. This item is used for
the Conning Display of the ECDIS.
No. Setting Item Parameter

1 Connected YES/NO
Not used/Analog (use B-Adapter)/
2 Device Type
Engine control
3 B-Adapter Channel 1 to 8
4 Output at 0 rpm -320.2 to 320.2 V
5 Output per Volt -320.2 to 320.2 rpm/V
6 Prefiltering 0/4/8/64
7 Maximum Power 10 to 10000
8 Maximum rpm 10 to 10000
5-63
5.5.26 Track Pilot

This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO. This item is used for
the Conning Display of the ECDIS.

IEC61162-1(HSC 1des CTS 0des)
EMIRI (COURSE)/ASPO-EMRI
EMIRI (COURSETRACK)
1 Device Interface IEC61162-1(HSC 0des CTS 1des)
IEC61162-1(Yokogawa HTC/HTD)
IEC61162-1(Tokimec HTC/HTD)
IEC61162-1(Yokogawa HTC/HTD CatC)
2 Connected YES/NO
3 Adapter Channel 3
4 WP Approach Rule NONE/BSH/DNV/IEC62065
5 Steering Sources Trackpilot/Trackpilot and Raders
6 Radius Values No device limitations/Steermaster compatible
7 Minimal Turning Radius 0.1 to 3.0
8 Lowe Off Course Alarm Limit 5 to 30
Higher Off Course Alarm Limit and
9 10 to 60 25
Drift Compensation Limit
10 Minimum Route Speed 1.0 to 8.0
Traditional/Program Track
11 Steering Style Program Track Lo Assistant
Program Track Hi Assistant
5-64
12 Trackpilot SW type Traditional//Uses Turn/Linear bit

From Conning position to XTE
13 -500 -- 500
Calculation position (+Bow, -Stem)
14 Turn Endine in Route Steering Wp+wop/Wp+wop+f.dist/wp
15 Received Message No check or Alarms/Enable Check and Alarm
16 IEC61162-1 Transmit checksum Not used/Used
$ char not included(IEC61162-1 EMRI)
17 Checksum
$ char included(Some old NMEA)
5.5.27 VDR

1 Connected YES/NO
2 Adapter Chl: 1 to 16
3 Device Interface IEC 61162-1 (FURUNO proprietary)
4 Device Mode Normal
IEC 61162-1 Transmit
5 Not used/Used
checksum
$ char not included (IEC61162-1 & EMRI)/
6 Checksum
$ char included (Some old NMEA)/
5-65
Chapter 6. Installation of Charts
6.1 Overview
6.1 Overview
The world's 7C charts are preinstalled into the Chart radar. The coastlines in the charts,
however, are not precise enough for actual navigation. Therefore, install further charts
covering necessary areas for voyages.
The Chart radar can use S57 ENC (electronic navigation charts). C-MAP Ed-3.0 or
ARCS charts cannot be used.
If two Chart radar units are installed on board, be sure to install charts into the
respective Chart radars. These Chart radar units cannot share the charts.
6.1.1 ENC, SENC, and RENC

1. ENC
Paper charts use S57ed3 coding, and they are called vector charts.
These charts satisfy requirements of the International Convention for the Safety of Life
at Sea (SOLAS), and they are adopted by the International Maritime Organization
(IMO).
S57ed3 charts published by national hydrographic departments are called electronic
navigation charts (or ENC charts). S57ed3 charts published by private enterprises are
called non-ENC charts (C Maps).
ENC charts contain data in standardized format with standardized contents and
configurations issued under permission from relevant hydrographic departments so that
the data can be used for the ECDIS and Chart radar.
ENC charts include all information required for safe navigation. In addition to
information provided by paper charts, supplemental information judged to be required
for safe navigation may be included (for example, the directions of navigation). The
standard name for charts coded for ENC use is "S57ed3."
ENC charts are coded in order to prevent the unauthorized use of the ENC charts. The
display of ENC charts needs an authentication procedure.
In order to use ENC charts for the equipment, load the ENC charts into the hard disk
(HD) and convert them into SENC format.
Some ENC charts may be date dependent. For example, an ENC chart may be displayed
on and after a certain set-up date or only during a restricted period. In the electronic
chart system, all date-dependent data can be displayed only during the set periods in
[Display Until] and [Approve Until].
Moreover, hydrographic departments issue the following two kinds of updating data for
original basic information.
- Updating data as a slight addition to the original basic information.
- Updating data that overwrites the original basic information completely and
issued as a new edition.
All the updating data is added with date information including date-dependent part.
Updating data can be used with date input into [Display Until] and [Approve Until].
Charts can be displayed on a post-dated or future-dated basis as well.
6-1
6.1 Overview
2. SENC
A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by Chart radar for appropriate
use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and other data added by the mariner. It is
this database that is actually accessed by the Chart radar for display and other
navigational functions. The SENC may also contain information from other sources.
3. RENC
A service provider offering ENC delivery and update service as defined in IHO standard
S52e3. Often an RENC provides both CD ROM and telecommunications-based service
to Chart radar users. One example of an RENC is an RENC in Stavanger, Norway,
operating under the marketing name PRIMAR.
6.1.2 Permit
A permit key and a public key are used for authorization. The permit key is included in
the digital signature in each chart. The public key is saved in the equipment and open to
the public.
When installing S57 charts into this equipment, an FD or CD-ROM, where the
information on the permit key is saved, is required.
When installing S57 charts published by the Hydrographic Department of Japan, an
FD that includes public key information downloaded from the website of the IHO is
required along with another FD where the information on the permit key is saved.
- Public Key :
PRIMAR's information on the public key is installed automatically when the
program of the EC-1000C is updated.
Therefore, it is necessary to install information on the public key issued by
the Hydrographic Department of Japan when reinstalling charts published by
the Hydrographic Department.
- - Permit Key
At the time of chart purchase, inform the chart seller of the number of the
dongle attached to the equipment.
A permit key FD corresponding to the dongle number of the equipment is
attached to the CD-ROM of charts (base charts) sent by the chart seller.
The permit key FD includes the contracted chart information. Only
contracted charts can be installed.
6-2
6.1 Overview
Dongle: Attached to the parallel port.
Note: New-type dongle

An USB dongle is used because the production of parallel dongles has been
discontinued.
The casing for the USB dongle has a single USB connector on the back (instead of
two USB connectors provided conventionally).
USB dongle
6-3
6.1 Overview
Supplementary Information:
S57 Chart Service from an RENC
Before you can use an RENC service, you have to be authorized as a customer of an
RENC. To be authorized you have to contact an official distributor (chart agent) of
RENC. Then, the following services are available:
Permits
Permits are used to control the permission to use a chart. A permit in RENC security is
connected to an edition. Permits are issued as two different types:
･ Subscription permit.
These include updates for subsequent 12 months. It is assumed that a typical user is
a SOLAS class ship, which is required to use up-to-date charts.
･ One-Off permit.
These include only updates up to the issue date of the permit. It is assumed that a t
ypical user is a non-SOLAS class ship, which is not required to use up-to-date
charts.
Each permit also includes the expiry date. The expiry date of a permit controls the ENC
to SENC conversion. If the issue date of a chart or update is older or equal to the permit
expiry date, then the system can convert an ENC into the SENC. There are no viewing
time limits as used in some other security systems. The user has a right to view a chart
forever and moreover he has a right to convert a chart from its ENC format into the
SENC forever. An RENC can issue permits in two formats:
･"*.pmt" format.
This format does not include the applicable chart edition nor does it include
applicable permit type.
･ PERMIT.TXT format.
This format includes the applicable chart edition as well as applicable permit type.
Both permit formats are fully operational, but the older “*.pmt” format creates
confusion because it cannot support the user when chart edition changes.
The system display warnings associated with expiry date. Examples are “will expire”
warning 30 days before the expiry date and “have expired” after the expiry date. These
warnings are relevant only for Subscription permits. Only the new PERMIT.TXT
format supports the system to suppress irrelevant warnings associated with expiry date.
6-4
6.1 Overview
6.1.3 Outline of Chart Menu

Chart-related menu items are selected in Menu -> Chart Menu while in ECDIS mode.
While in Radar or Chart radar mode, the contents of the Chart Menu will be “S57
Legend”, which will display chart information.
Item Description
Load and This item is used to load ENC charts onto the HD of
Update Charts the equipment.
SENC Convert This item is used to convert ENC into SENC format.
This item is used to enable automatic ENC-SENC
conversion at the time of loading charts onto the HD.
SENC Convert
Furthermore, this item makes it possible to set the
Settings
displayed term of validity to the present date after
SENC conversion.
Remove Charts This item is used to delete cells from the HD.
Chart Catalogue This item is used for S57 chart management.
This item is used to display the date-dependent
Set Chart function of cells on SENC charts. The name of an
viewing dates updated chart will be displayed green, while it will be
displayed orange if it has not been updated.
This item is used to load the permit of coded charts so
Chart Permits that the charts can be used for the equipment.
PRIMAR's code is by default set.
This item is used to display chart symbols currently
ECDIS Chart 1
used by the equipment.
Open Chart by This item is used to open S57 charts based on the
Cell name chart numbers.
This item is used to display the conditions of cells
saved on the HD, CD-ROM, or RENC. The newest
Chart Cell Status
cell data can be compared with the latest updating
data in use.
Manual Updates This item is used to update charts manually.
- Log file:This item is used to troubleshoot system
defects.
- S52 presentation library：This item is used to check
S52 revision numbers for S57 charts.
- User permit: This item is used to check the user
license (dongle number).
- Refresh charts after backup: This item is used to
refresh charts and updating data available after all
System the charts and updating data on another ECDIS unit
are backed up in the equipment. The chart radar
cannot share charts.
- Reset files: This command is used to make
uploading and downloading checks on chart data.
- AML: This item is used to input the AML password.
- Restart drawing process: This item is used to draw
charts again. Implement this item if the movement,
enlargement, or contraction of charts becomes
disabled.
6-5
6.1 Overview
6.1.4 Warning Display

1. Warning for Subscription License
1) The following warning will appear at 12-hour intervals when the remaining period is
less than 30 days.
S57 Message
Subscription licence will expire in less than 30 days.
Contact your RENC service for a subscription renewal OK
2) When the subscription license is expired, the following warning will appear at
12-hour intervals.
The upper half of the text of the message warns that the list is not up-to-date.
S57 Message
RENC Product List is more than 30 days old.
Used charts may not be up-to-date.
Contact your RENC service for updated Product List.
Subscription licence has expired .
Used charts may not be up-to-date.
Contact your RENC service for a subscription renewal. OK
2. Warning Display for Latest Charts

1) The following warning will appear on the chart screen if Display Until or Approved
Until data on charts presently in use differs in date from the system by 1 week or
more. Use Set Chart viewing dates in the Chart Menu to make displayed valid date
settings.
Permanent Warning
At least one of used charts has more than 1 week
"Approved Until" and/or "Display Until" and current
date. Use Chart Menu-Set Chart viewing dates.
6-6
6.1 Overview
2) The following warning will appear if new updating data loaded onto the HD is not
included in the SENC data. The names of the charts are displayed orange (on the
chart boundary lines).
Use SENC Convert in the Chart Menu to implement SENC conversion.
Permanent Warning
At least one of used charts in not up-to-date. At least
one update is loaded in harddisk, but not in SENC.
Used Chart Menu-Set Chart viewing dates to check charts.
3) If the following permanent warning appears, it means that the charts include data that
are not up-to-date. The available charts and the latest status of the charts can be
checked with the Catalogue window and Chart viewing dates window. To check that
the charts are up-to-date, check that the names of the all the charts in the catalog are
displayed green (on the chart borderlines). Charts that are not up-to-date are
displayed orange.
Permanent Warning
At least one of used charts is not up-to-date. Get or
load latest updates from your RENC service. Use
Chart Menu-Set Chart viewing dates to check chart.
4) The following warning will appear if an attempt is made to use cancelled charts,
provided that the removal of cancelled charts is not set at the time of loading
updating data including chart removal data. To remove the canceled charts, use
Remove Charts in the Chart Menu.
Permanent Warning
At least one of used charts is canceled
Use Chart Menu-Catalogue to check charts.
Use Chart Menu-Remove to remove canceled charts.
6-7
6.2 Installation of Public key and Permit key

6.2.1 Installation of Public Key
Note:
The installation of the public key is required when installing S57 charts issued
by the Hydrographic Department of Japan. PRIMAR's public key has been
already installed.
Procedure
Setp-1
1. Insert the Public Key FD into the FDD.
2. Open the Chart Menu from [Menu] in ECDIS mode and select Chart Permits.
3. Click Public Key on the Chart Permits screen.
4. Click Load New in the Public key menu.
5. Select Internal Public key File [SAY.TXT] from the Files of type pull-down menu.
6-8
6. The SAY.TXT file will be displayed. Select the file and click Open.
Select SAY.txt.
Internal Public key File [SAY.TXT]
- Public key file [*.pub]

- Internal Public key File [SAY.TXT]
7. The read data will appear on the Public Key screen. Click the Accept New box.
8. The Public Key screen will close.
6-9
6.2.2 Installation of Permit Key
Setp-2
1. Insert the Permit Key FD into the FDD.
2. Open the Chart Menu from [Menu] in ECDIS mode and select Chart Permits.
3. Click Load File on the Chart Permits screen.
4. Open the displayed directory.
5. Select Internal Permit File [PERMIT.TXT] from the Files of type pull-down menu
and click Open.
- Permit File [PERMIT.TXT]

- Basic Public file [*.pmt]
6-10
6. When the S57 Message: Test before SENC convert failed appears, click OK.
A list of permitted charts will appear on the Chart Permits screen.
- Cell: Cell number

- Expires: Expiration date of license
- Type: S (Subscription license)
O (Permanent license)
- Edt: The updating number of each licensed chart
7. Close the Chart Permits screen.
6-11
6.3 Installation of Charts

Chart data in use cannot be replaced unless it is overwritten with the latest base cell or
updating data. To reload old data, delete the chart data on the HD first.
6.3.1 Installation of Charts

Step-3
1. Insert the chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Open the Chart Menu from [Menu] in ECDIS mode and select Load and Update Chart,
and select from CD-ROM in the submenu.
3. The CD catalog will be loaded to the HD from the CD-ROM first, and the list of charts
will appear.
Note:
Only the latest version data will be maintained in the equipment. If the
existing data in the equipment is newer, the following error message will
appear. Click OK.
Load CD Catalogue.
TIF or TXT file failure for (1 of 2) files, See more details in Chart Menu > System >
Log File JPREADME.TXT」 OK
6-12
4. Select the target charts to be installed. The charts will be highlighted.

To select the chart, click the frames of the charts.
Charts in the CD-ROM and

selected charts are highlighted.
Chart Selection Method

Use Load Selector and determine the method of selecting required charts.
- Name:
The names of charts will appear on the graphic screen.
- Permit:
Only permitted charts will appear.
- RENC Canceled Charts:
Charts cancelled with the ENC or CD-ROM will appear.
- Group:
Groups available from the CD-ROM will be highlighted if the groups are
predetermined.
6-13
- Manual Selection:
Each listed chart can be manually selected one by one.
- Missing only:
Unloaded charts and updating data will be loaded if the checkbox is checked. To
display all the contents of the CD-ROM, uncheck the Missing only item.
- Navigation purpose:
Selected charts for navigation purposes will appear.
- View CD-ROM Publisher Notes:
Important data issued by the chart publisher will appear when this button is
clicked.
- View CD-ROM content Summary:
A list of chart available from the CD-ROM will appear when this button is
clicked.
- Load and Conv. History:
Data loaded from the CD-ROM or converted will appear when this button is
clicked.
- Remove:
This item is used to delete the CD-ROM catalog completely from the equipment.
- Edit Group:
This item is used to create or change groups.
- Load:
This item is used to start loading.
5. Click the Load box.

6. The following message will appear. “Loading may take time and prevent monitoring.
Do you like to continue?” Click Yes.
6-14
7. The chart will be read automatically, and SENC data conversion will start (see note).
Cells finished with conversion will disappear from the Conversion List.
Note:
The item Automatic SENC conversion
for Chart Menu -> SENC Convert
Settings is usually checked to enable
Disappear from automatic conversion. Refer to page
the list. 6-21.
Reference:
If there is a problem in ENC-to-SENC conversion, the Failed SENC conversion window
will appear and the list of ENC with problems will appear.
Status display: Errors
This status indicates that there is an error in ENC-SENC Failed SENC conversions ×
conversion. Click Conv. History or Cell status and check ENC Status
the details of the error.
DE416050.000 Errors
If it is a fatal error, NON ENC will appear in the DE416050.002 Errors
Conv.History dialog box. Reinstall the latest charts. GB500001.001 Failed
Status display: Failure

This status indicates a total failure in ENC-ENC
conversion and no ENC charts are available. Reinstall the Cell Status Conv. Histrory
latest charts.
8. The CD History screen will appear on completion of chart reinstallation. Close the
screen.
9. Take out the CD-ROM.
6-15
Reference: Standard messages in S57 chart load
1. You do not have a valid permit

1) A chart was not converted into SENC because the permit for it has expired.
S57 LOAD
SES 15: Permit expired Consider renew of Permit GB304010.000 OK
2) A chart was not converted into SENC because a permit is for a different edition.
You can check edition of the permit using the Chart Permits window in the Chart menu
and the edition of the chart by using the Cell Status window.
Typical reason is that the chart has been updated too many times as new edition instead
of an update. Ask for new permits from your chart agent.
S57 LOAD
Decrypt failed for encrypted Cell from RENC. Permit may be for different edition of Cell.
Check edition using Permit Management and Cell Status.
If unsuccessful contact your ERNC service. GB304010.000 OK
3) A chart was not converted into SENC because your permit was for
different edition. You can check edition of a permit using the Chart Permits and the
edition of a chart using the Chart Cell Status window, both in the Chart menu.
The common reason for this message is that the chart has been updated too many times
as new edition instead of update. Ask for new permits from your chart agent.
S57 LOAD
Permit is for different edition of Cell. Check edition using Permit Management and Cell
Status.
If you have unexpired Subscription Permit, you can get a free new Permit either from
Telecomm or from your RENC service. GB304010.000 OK
4) A chart was not converted into SENC because the software, data and system time in
the chart radar indicates tampering.
The common reason for this message is that RENC released a chart before the issue
date of the chart.
S57 LOAD
SSE 14: Permit cannot be used because of incorrect System Date. Perform Initial Set ->
Set Time.
If unsuccessful contact your ECDIS service. GB304010.000 OK
6-16
2. Authentication of chart failed

5) The chart was not loaded because of missing signature.
S57 LOAD
SSE 07: Cannot find signature. Use another CD-ROM or try again in Telecomm.
If unsuccessful contact your RENC service GB304010.000 OK
6) The chart was not loaded because of coding error in Signature.
S57 LOAD
SSE 04: Signature has coding error. Use another CD-ROM or try again in Telecomm.
7) The chart was not loaded because of tampered Signature or invalid Public Key.
S57 LOAD
SSE 03: Public Key Authenticate failed. Either Signature is tampered or Public Key is
invalid. Contact your RENC service to check valid Public Key GB304010.000 OK
8) The chart was not loaded because of invalid or tampered Signature.
S57 LOAD
SSE 09: Signature Authenticate failed. Use another CD-ROM or try again in Telecomm.
3. Additional messages in S57 SENC conversion

9) You do not have a permit.
SENC CONVERT
SSE 11: Permit missing GB304010.000 OK
10) Permit for a chart has expired.
SENC CONVERT
SSE 15: Permit expired. Consider renew of Permit GB304010.000 OK
6-17
11) You have a permit, but it is valid for another edition of the cell. You can check
edition of the permit using the Chart Permits window and the edition of a chart using
the Cell Status window, both in the Chart menu.
A typical reason is that the chart has been updated too many times as a new edition
instead of an update. Ask for new permits from your chart agent.
SENC CONVERT
Decrypt failed for encrypted Cell from RENC. Permit may be for different edition of Cell.
Check edition using Permit Management and Cell Status. If unsuccessful contact your
RENC service GB304010.000 OK
Chart Permits
Chart Cell Status
6-18
Reference: Checks on SENC Conversion History Log

Open SENC Convert from [Menu] and click Conv. History. Then the Conv. History
window will appear.
When Load and Conv. History is clicked, a history check can be made on the Load
History and SENC Conversion Log windows.
Load History
SENC Conversion Log History
Analysis of SENC Conversion Log Messages

1. Perfect chart
Successful auto. conv: ENC: GB203000.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 4 3
2. Perfect chart which is produced by a private chart producer (i.e., chart doesn't have
ENC status)
A private chart cannot fulfil SOLAS requirements
Successful auto. conv: ENC: AS31MATT.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 4 8 NON E
3. Conversion errors, but the chart is partly usable

Use cell status to check details of errors. Note that the chart is still ENC.
Successful auto. conv with errors: ENCD ROME416050.000, edt: 3, upd: 0 / 1998 6 12
4. Conversion errors, but the chart is partly usable as NON ENC

Use cell status to check details of errors. Note that the chart is no longer ENC if it
was produced by a Hydrographic Office.
Successful auto. conv with errors: ENC: n1302322.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 1 4 NON ENC
5. Failed conversion
Chart is not usable and you cannot view the chart.
Failed automatic conversion: ENCD ROMK3EI0XE.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 2 17
6-19
6. Failed conversion of an update

Chart is partly usable, but it is not up-to-date and you need the latest edition of the
chart from its publisher. Note that the chart is still ENC, but it no longer fulfils the
SOLAS requirement..
Failed auto. conv: ENC: GB500005.001, edt: 2, upd: 1 / 1997 9 26 Updating impossible
before new edition of base cell
7. Failed conversion. Checksum is not correct

Chart is not usable and you cannot view it. Try to reload the base cell or update from
the original media. And if that doesn't work order a new CD ROM from your chart
supplier.
Failed automatic conversion: ENC: SG5CONTL.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1996 2 25
CHECKSUM ERROR
8. Failed conversion. Checksum of an update is not correct

Chart is partly usable, but it is not up-to-date. Try to reload the update from the
original media. And if that doesn't work order a new CD ROM from your chart
supplier. Note that the chart is still ENC, but it no longer fulfils the SOLAS
requirement.
Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.002, edt: 1, upd: 2 / 2005 1 1 CHECKSUM
ERROR
9. Failed conversion. At least one of the previous updates has failed in its SENC
conversion
The system cannot accept additional updates unless all previous updates have been
successfully converted into the SENC. Chart is partly usable, but it is not up-to-date.
Try to reload the failed previous update from the original media (in this example the
failed previous update is GB5X01SW.002). And if that doesn't work, order a new
CD ROM from your chart supplier. Note that the chart is still ENC, but it no longer
fulfils the SOLAS requirement.
Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.003, edt: 1, upd: 3 / 2005 9 8 PREVIOUS
Update MISSING
10. Failed conversion. The base cell has failed in its SENC conversion
The system cannot accept updates unless the base cell has been successfully
converted into the SENC. Chart is not usable and you cannot view it. Try to reload
the base cell from the original media (in this example the failed base cell is
GB5X01SW.000). And if that doesn't work, order a new CD ROM from your chart
supplier.
Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.001, edt: 1, upd: 1 / 1998 9 8 PREVIOUS
Base CELL OR Update MISSING
6-20
Reference:
Automatic Conversion Settings
1. Open the Chart Menu from [Menu] and select SENC
Convert Settings.
The SENC Convert Settings dialog box will appear.
2. Check Automatic SENC Conversion and Automatic
Display Until.
Automatic SENC Conversion:

Automatic SENC data conversion is performed when the chart data is loaded onto
the hard disk.
If this item is unchecked, SENC data conversion will be performed manually. To
implement SENC data conversion, open SENC Convert from [Menu] and use the
SENC Convert dialog box.
Automatic Display Until:
The system date of the equipment is automatically set as the date of issuance and
displayed.
Reference:
To set the displayed date of updating data, open the Chart Menu from [Menu],
select Set Chart viewing dates, and make date settings for Display Until and
Approve Until.
The “Permanent Warning” message will appear if Display Until or Approved
Until data on charts presently in use differs in date from the equipment by 1 week
or more. To use this chart in that case, set the above date 1 week later.
6-21
Set the date 1 week later

than present setting.
Permanent Warning
At least one of used charts has more than 1 week
"Approved Until" and/or "Display Until" and current
date. Use Chart Menu-Set Chart viewing dates.
6-22
6.3.2 Check on Installed Charts
Step-4
1. Open the Chart Menu from [Menu] in ECDIS mode and select Chart Catalogue.
2. Click SENC in Source of chart catalogue.
Reference:
- CD: Displays charts available from the
CD-ROM.
- RENC: Displays charts available from RENC.
- SENC: Displays charts saved in SENC format on
the HD.
- C-Map: Displays C-Map Ed3 charts.
Note: This item is not supported as of July 2008. C-MAP Ed2,
however, will be displayed if SENC is selected.
3. Installed SENC charts will be displayed.
Meanings of Colors of Chart Boundary Lines

Green The chart is available for use in SENC format. If the source of the chart
is an RENC then the chart is also up-to-date. If the source of the chart is
something other than an RENC, then all loaded updates are included
into the SENC.
Orange The chart is available for use in SENC format but the chart is either not
up-to-date or has been cancelled. Either the SENC is from a former
edition, the SENC is missing the latest updates or the
chart has been cancelled.
Red If the chart is permit free, you do not have it available for use in SENC
format and thus you cannot use the chart currently.
The chart requires a permit but you do not have the permit for the chart
therefore you cannot use the chart currently.
Blue The chart is available either in ENC format, in SENC format for another
software version or in SENC format for another chart radar. For
example, the chart is blue during SENC conversion and when you
loaded a chart into the chart radar and the system could not convert the
chart into SENC format.
Magenta You have a permit to use the chart, but the chart is not available in
SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently.
6-23
Checks on Chart Information 1

Click select in the guide area, locate the cursor on the boundary lines of the chart, and
click the left mouse button (Select). Then the information will appear in the Select Chart
area.
By clicking Cell Status, the Chart Cell Status window will appear. Click Open so that the
chart will appear.
Locate the cursor on the

boundary lines of the chart
then select.
Select
Reference:
If a striped pattern appears on the chart, it means
that the scale of the chart is too small and not
appropriate.
6-24
Checks on Chart Information 2

While in ECDIS mode, locate the cursor to the Plan Speed or To WP box area, select
Select Sidebar, and select Chart Legend from the Sidebar menu. While in Chart Radar
mode, select S57 Legend from the Chart Menu.
When the cursor is moved to the chart, information on the chart will appear.
Item Description
Cell name Chart name
Purpose of S57 chart:
Navigational Overview, General, Coastal,
purpose Approach, Harbour, or Berthing
will appear
Issue date Issuance date of chart base cell
Edition
Chart edition number
number
Last Latest updating number
displayed (displayed on the chart screen)
update
Date of last updating date
Update issue
(displayed on the chart screen)
date
Last update Valid date of the latest updating
appl. date (displayed on the chart screen)
Projection Always in Mercator projection
Horizontal
Chart datum：WGS84
datum
Vertical
Chart vertical datum
datum
Sounding
Datum used for sounding
datum
Quantitative rough accuracy of
Quality of
chart function (provided by chart
data
creator)
Quantity of magnetic deviation
A positive value is for eastward
Magnetic var.
deviation and a negative value
is for westward deviation.
Unit of water depth
Depth
measurement
Height Unit of height above sea level
6-25
6.3.3 Chart Deletion

While in ECDIS mode, open the Chart Menu in [Menu] and select Remove Chart.
When a sub directory item in the “Sub Dirs” list is clicked, the contents of the directory
will be spread out. The contents of the directory will appear in the Contents area. The
level of the directory will become a rank higher when Go Up is clicked.
Charts that can be eliminated are the base cell (xxx.000), updating data (xxx.001), and
charts in SENC format (xxx.snc).
Procedure
1. Select the target chart to be deleted.
2. Click Remove Chart.
3. The S57 Remove screen will appear. Click Yes.
6-26
6.3.4 Chart Manipulation

To select a chart, take the following steps while in ECDIS mode.
- Open Chart Catalogue from the Chart Menu.
- Select the chart in [Menu] -> Open Chart by Cell name.
To manipulate the chart, locate the cursor on the chart screen while in ECDIS mode and
select the following items in the guide area.
- Range+/-: Chart range expansion or contraction.
- Ship OffCenter: Movement to the center of the ship.
- Set Chart Center: Movement to the center of the chart.
- Active Scroll: Scrolling on the chart screen.
- TM Reset: Resetting on the ship's position.
- [Menu] -> Set Center: Movement on the chart according to longitude and latitude
settings.
Select Chart Display in the guide area for the chart display function.
The display settings of the chart can be registered or retrieved.
6-27
Registration oｒ
reading of Chart
Display.
6-28
6.3.5 Making Groups of Chart Cells

Two or more related charts can be grouped in the following two windows.
1. Creating Groups in “Load or Update Charts from CD ROM” Window

Insert the chart CD into the drive, select Load or Update charts from the Chart Menu.
Then select From CD-ROM. The Load or Update Charts from CD ROM window will
appear.
Frame definition
Uncheck the Group

button first.
Outline of Grouping Procedure 1:

Edit Group -> New Group -> Text Input (Group name) -> Add Frame -> (Frame
definition) -> Done -> (Display of selected cell in Inside box) -> Close Edit -> Check
mark on Group -> Load -> Starts SENC with the chart loaded -> End
** Check the grouped contents in the Chart Catalogue window **
6-29
2. Creation in Chart Catalogue Window

Select Chart Catalogue from the Chart Menu to display the Chart Catalogue window.
Uncheck the Group

button first.
Overview of Loop Procedure 2：
Check Edit Group -> New -> Text Input (Group name) -> Add Frame -> (Frame
definition) -> Done -> Group to display the group name in the Chart Catalogue window.
3. Deleting S57 Chart Cell from Group

Deletion of Grouped Chart Cell:
Check Group in the Chart Catalogue window, select the group name to be edited, and
select the group to be deleted.
- Edit Group -> Remove frame: Delete the chart in the frame.
- Edit Group -> Remove: Delete the group.
6-30
Chapter 7. RPU-016 Program 7.1Updating
Outline of Updating
7.1 Outline of Updating

The RPU-016 (used for Radar Processor unit of the FCR-2xx7) is intrinsically the same
as the RPU-013 (used for the Radar Processor unit of the FAR-2xx7).
There is no difference in program updating procedure between the RPU-016 and
RPU-013. Use either a PC's serial port or LAN port to perform program updating.
Besides, program updating is possible with a Mini-program card used.
When you perform program updating through the serial port, connect the Control unit
and the Display unit to the Radar Processor unit.
RPU-016: TB PCB-J602 (KEY) <--> RCU-014
The output cable for the Control unit of FCR-2xx7 uses 9-pin D-sub connector, which
cannot be connected direct to the Radar Processor unit. Therefore, utilize the Control
unit of the FAR-2xx7 or make a conversion adapter and connect the Control unit. The
Display unit for the FCR-2xx7 may be used instead.
7.1.1 Program Files

The following programs are subject to updating.
- Radar Processor unit: SPU board -> MAIN CPU, ARPA CPU, DRAW CPU, and
FPGA
- Antenna Unit: RFC board -> RFC CPU
The following table shows program folders and the contents of the files in the folders.
Information on each size is a reference only.
Table 7.1.1 List of Program Files (SPU Ver.02.40 or older ones)
SPU board in control block RFC board in antenna block

File name Size File name Size
Arparom.hex 174kB Fr2107rf.bin 105kB
Drawrom.hex 346kB Uppg.exe 94kB
Fpgarom.hex 1,030kB Uprfc.bat 1kB
Fr2107r.hex 2,025kB Uprfc.txt 1kB
Ldarpa.bin 23kB
Lddraw.bin 23kB
Ldmain.bin 23kB
Ldfpga.bin 29kB
uparpa.bat 1kB Note:
updraw.bat 1kB A batch file for the LAN port is added for SPU Ver.
Upfpga.bat 1kB 02.41 or later ones so that a program can be
upmain.bat 1kB renewed through the LAN port. For details, refer
uppg.exe 94kB to page 7-9.
7-1
7.1 Outline of Updating
7.1.2 Program Number Check

The Authorizing Key Disk is not required.
Select [Main menu] -> Initial Settings -> Selftest and click OK button. Then the Self
Test screen will appear. The program version is displayed on the screen.
ARPA CPU: SPU Program Ver

ARPA RFC: RFC Program Ver
7-2
7.2 Updating through Serial Port

7.2.1 Connections between PC and Radar Processor unit
As shown in the following diagram, connect the 9-pin D-sub crossing cable (with
female-to-female connectors) to the serial port of the PC and the RS-232C port of the
Radar Processor unit.
RPU-016
RS-232C port
7.2.2 Precautions for Updating

1) When updating the DRAW program, never turn OFF the power or stop the program
updating midway. If the program updating fails, nothing will appear on the screen. In
that case, the updating needs the use of the Mini-program card. For details, refer to
page 7-8
2) Redo the updating of Chart radar programs if the next step is not available 30 seconds
after the message “NOW ERASING Message….” is displayed.
3) The MAIN, ARPA, DRAW CPU, and FPGA programs are used for the SPU board.
4) The following typical updating periods are required.

Updating Updating
Updating time Updating time
program program
MAIN CPU 25 minutes FPGA 10 minutes
ARPA CPU 2 minutes RFC CPU 5 minuets
DRAW CPU 5 minutes
5) Unless the programs for the SPU board are greatly changed, the set values will
remain unchanged.
6) The serial port of the PC does not require data transfer settings. The baud rate is 9600
bps at the time of updating booting. The baud rate will change to 38.4 kbps after the
updating starts.
The following protocol is used.
* Format - Data bit: 8 - Stop bit: 1
- Parity bit: None
* Flow control - None
7-3
7) If the serial port number of the PC is other than “1”, the batch file will be rewritten.
For example, in the case of program updating with the USB and RS-232C interface,
check the COM port of the driver and overwrite the COM port number specification
of the updating batch file. Otherwise, overwrite the COM port number of the PC to
COM-1.
Procedure for Overwriting COM Port of Batch File
1) Open [Control panel] – [System] – [Device manager], and check the COM port
number (e.g., COM4) of the installed USB - RS-232C driver.
2) Select the batch file to be updated, and open the batch file from [File] –>”Edit”.
3) For example, in the case of the uparpa.bat batch file for the ARPA CPU, the text
uppg /lf ldarpa.bin /hf arparom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999 will appear.
4) Overwrite the above Port 1 with COM port number 4 (uppg /lf ldarpa.bin /hf
arparom.hex /port 4 /sp 9600 /t 9999).
5) Select [File] – “Save as” and save the edited text.

Note:
If the edited text cannot be overwritten, click the right button of the
mouse on the icon of the batch file, select the [Property] – [General] and
check that the Read only box for [Property] is unchecked.
Reference: Batch file

SPU board：0359204-02.xx
- uparpa.bat
uppg /lf ldarpa.bin /hf arparom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999
- updraw.bat
uppg /lf lddraw.bin /hf drawrom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999
- upmain.bat
uppg /lf ldmain.bin /hf fr2107r.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 999999999
C-MAP support
uppg /lf ldmain.bin /hf fr2107rc.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 999999999
- Upfpga.bat
uppg /lf ldfpga.bin /hf fpgarom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999
RFC board：0359202-01.xx
- uprfc.bat
uppg /lf uprfc.txt /hf fr2107rf.bin /port 1 /cpu 1 /sp 9600 /t 999999999
7-4
7.2.3 Procedure for Program Updating

Procedure
1. Turn off the Radar (RPU-016).
2. Connect the 9-pin D-sub crossing cable to the serial port of the PC and the RS-232C
port of the Control Unit.
3. Open the program folder to be updated.
4. Double click the icon of the batch file of the updating program.
Note:
The MAIN, ARPA, DRAW CPU, and FPGA programs are used for the SPU
board. Perform program updating directed by Furuno technical information
provided.
SPU board RFC board

0359204-02.xx 0359202-01.xx
uparpa.bat uprfc.bat
updraw.bat
upmain.bat
Upfpga.bat
5. The updating file will start automatically.
7-5
6. Turn ON the Radar when the message “[Waiting For Target Wake up …] Time: xx
(sec)” appears on the PC screen.
Example of DRAW
CPU updating
Turn ON the Radar after the

message "[Waiting For Target Wake
up --]" appears.
7. Program updating will start automatically. The message “Now Initializing…” on the
Radar screen will remain unchanged.
The program file to be updated is

displayed.
The updating lapsed

time is displayed.
7-6
8. The updating will be finished when the message “Upload complete” appears on the
PC screen. The Radar screen will change to the normal screen on completion of
updating.
The updating is finished when the

"Upload complete" is finished.
9. Turn OFF the Radar and renew the next program. Repeat from step 4.
10. On completion of program updating, turn OFF the Radar and restore the
connections to the original connections.
7-7
7.3 Program Updating with Mini-Program Card
7.3 Program Updating with Mini-Program Card

The mini-program card has a SPU-related program. Note that RFC program is
not included.
Procedure
1. Turn OFF the Radar (RPU-016).
2. Card slot on SPU board: Insert a Mini-program card to J206.
3. Turn ON the Radar. Nothing will be displayed on the screen at this moment.
4. The renewal of all the programs on the SPU board will start automatically.
CR4 on the SPU board is OFF while the programs are updated. Nothing will
be displayed on the screen.
5. The updating will be finished when CR4 on the SPU board blinks.
It takes approximately 5 minutes until the end of updating. Nothing will be
displayed on the screen even after the updating is completed.
6. Turn OFF the Radar and extract the Mini-Program card.
The updating will be

finished when CR4
on the Main CPU
blinks.
Card slot: J206
Furuno's 8-MB Mini-program card

Card (Write the programs with the MC-50.)
7-8
7.4 Updating through LAN Port

The BOOT program has been changed so that the updating of SPU program version
02.43 (part of version 02.41) or later ones will be possible through either the serial port
or LAN port.
The program folder includes batch files for serial and LAN port use.
SPU Program Ver. 02.41 or Later Ones for PC
Program to be
Batch file for serial ports Batch file for LAN port
updated
ARPA CPU Uparpa.bat setuparpa.bat
DRAW CPU Updraw.bat setupdraw.bat
MAIN CPU Upmain.bat setupmain.bat
RFC CPU Uprfc.bat Setuprfc.bat
FPGA Upfpga.bat setupfpga.bat
C Map compatible
― setupmainc.bat
MAIN CPU
Important:
If the CPU board (version 33 or older one) with SPU program version 02.40 or older
one installed is used, program updating through the LAN port will not be possible
due to the difference in boot program.
Once SPU program version 02.41 is installed with the Mini-program card used,
however, the new boot program will be updated as well. Then the updating of SPU
program version 02.41 or later ones will be possible through the LAN port. The new
or old boot program is cannot be checked.
7-9
Procedure
1. Connect the LAN ports of the PC and RPU-016 through the Hub provided with
power. Unless the Hub incorporates an Auto-MDIX function, use a LAN crossing
cable.
PC RPU-016
HUB
Power
supply
2. Set the IP address for the LAN connections of the PC to 172.31.3.100.

1) Select [Start] -> Network connection -> Local area connection and open
Property.
2) Open [General], select Internet protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties (R).
3) Check Select IP address (S), and set the following IP address and subnet mask.
• IP address: 172.31.3.100
• Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
3. Click the batch file of the program to be updated. The DOS prompt screen will appear
on the PC.
4. Turn on the Radar (RPU-16). When the Radar and PC are LAN connected, the
message “P0>connection IP address 172.31.3.x” will appear and program updating
will start automatically.
Note:
The IP address displayed here is the set number (IP address) of the Radar.
7-10
5. When the program updating is completed, the message “finish upload program.(size
=XXXXXXX)” will be displayed and the Radar will start.
6. Turn OFF the Radar and return the connections to the original connections.
7-11
Chapter 8. EC-1000C Program Updating
8.1 Overview
8.1 Overview
8.1.1 Checking of Program Version
The Authorizing Key Disk is not required.
The Self Test screen will appear with the program versions displayed by clicking the
[OK] button after selecting [Main menu] -> Initial Settings -> Selftest.
The program version for the

EC-1000C on the right-hand
side is displayed along with
the program version for the
LAN adapter on the left-hand
side.
Reference:
The versions are also displayed on

the information display area. The
program version for the EC-1000C
on the right-hand side is displayed
along with the program version for
the LAN adapter on the left-hand
side.
Display Program Ver. Remarks

The program version for the EC-1000C is
EC-1000C 05.xx 05.xx displayed. These numbers on the left-hand side
and right-hand side are the same in number.
ARPA CPU 0359204-02.xx The SPU program version for the RPU-016.
ARPA RFC 0359202-01.xx The RFC program version for the RF unit.
Control Unit: The program version for the
Control Head 359203-01.xx
RCU-020/015FEA/016
8-1
8.1 Overview
8.1.2 Preparations
1. Precautions
1) Log data will be deleted at the time of program updating. Back up necessary data.
Input the following items on the ECDIS screen.
Main menu -> Record -> - Details Log
- Voyage Log
- Danger Target Log
Reference:
The log file can be deleted in procedure 17 of program updating by checking [Log
files] on the system cleanup screen.
2) There are files that will not be deleted as a result of program updating, such as
Installation parameter, Route, User Chart, and Pilot Data files. Be sure to back up
these files, however, before program updating. Refer to page 5-6 and 2-52 for the
back-up procedure.
3) Installed charts will not be deleted.
4) When the program for the EC-1000C is updated, be sure to update the program for
the LAN adapter. These programs must be same in version. Refer to page 9-12 for
the back-up procedure.
Otherwise, the message “4097 LAN adapter1(2) version error” will be output.
8-2
8.1 Overview
2. Preparations
Connect the service keyboard and mouse to the EC-1000C. The Authorizing Key Disk
is not required.
Furthermore, disconnect the LAN cables from the LAN adapter (LAN-2) and LAN port
(LAN-1) of the Radar. The Chart radar may not start normally if program updating is
implemented with the LAN cable connected.
Forced power SW
RPU-01 CD drive
FD drive
EC-1000C
Connect the
service
keyboard .
Disconnect the two LAN cables.
LAN-2: Disconnect the cable from the

LAN adapter connection port.
LAN-1: Disconnect the cable from the
RPU-016 LAN connection port.
8-3
8.2 Updating Procedure

Procedure
1. Turn ON the power supply switch on the rear panel of the EC-1000C. Then turn ON
EC-1000C power SW
Control block power SW
the power supply switch on the control block.
2. When the following chart screen appears, press the Windows key on the service
keyboard to finish the application so that the Windows screen will appear.
Refer to page 2-1 for the method of finishing the application.
1. Select [Alt]+ [Tab] ->

ECAWATCH.
2. Click [Shutdown the Chart Windows
Radar]. screen
3. Close the Control Head
screen.
4. Select [Alt] + [F4] -> Windows.
3. Set the program CD-ROM in the CD drive of the EC-1000C.
4. Select Run from the [Start] menu.
RUN
8-4
5. Click BROWSE, specify the d:¥install¥setup.exe file and click OK or type

"d:¥install¥setup.exe" in the Open field.
d:¥install¥setup.exe
6. Click Yes on the bottom of the screen when the System Information screen appears.
The present system information on the

EC-1000C is displayed.
YES
8-5
7. Click Next when the ECDIS/ChartRader Setup screen appears.
NEXT
8. Click Next after checking that [CHART RADAR] is selected on the Setup Type
screen.
Select CHART RADAR.
NEXT
Reference:
- CHART RADAR
Installation of a chart radar program.
- ECDIS
Installation of an ECDIS program.
- ECDIS With Conning (1 Display)
Installation of a program that enables the display of ECDIS information
and conning information on a single display.
- ECDIS With Conning (2 Display)
Installation of a program that enables the display of ECDIS information
and conning information on respective displays. The EC-1000C needs
a video card in this case.
- PC ECDIS
Installation of a PC ECDIS program.
8-6
9. Input "ecdis" in the Password field on the User Info screen and click Next.
Password: ecdis
NEXT
10. Check that the destination folder is C:¥ants_system on the Choose Destination
Location screen, and click Next.
C:¥ants_system
NEXT
11. Check that Enable C-Map ed3 features is not selected. on the C-Map ed3 Settings
screen. Then click Next.
Presently the chart radar does not

support C-Ma Ed3. Therefore, do not
check Enable C-Map ed3 features.
NEXT
8-7
12. Input “2371” in the Hasp Pin field on the HASP Info screen and click Next.
Input "2371".
NEXT
13. Input the following item on the Share Info screen and click Next.
- Input “ANTS_SYSTEM” in the AntsSystem field.
- Input “cd_drive” in the CD-ROM field.
Input "ANTS_SYSTEM".
Input "cd_drive".
NEXT
14. Set the following items on the Set Control Head parameters screen, and click Next.
- COM Port : COM2 (COM1, COM2, NONE)
- Brilliance : 1 255 (0 – 255)
- Alarm Tone :4 (0 – 7)
- Alarm Volume :17 (0 – 7)
NEXT - COM Port: Select COM2.

- Brilliance: Input "1 255".
- Alarm Tone: Select 4.
- Alarm Volume: Select 1 7.
8-8
15. Set one of the following items according to your requirement on the Monitor
Parameters screen, and click Next.
Default Color Calibration:
- LCD FEA-2807 MU-231CE -> Select if the MU-231CE (FCR-2807) is
installed.
- LCD FEA-2107 MU-201CE -> Select if the MU-201CE (FCR-2107) is
installed.
- Leave unchanged (upgrade) -> Select if no setting changes are made.
Monitor Port: [COM1]
NEXT
COM1
COM2
NONE
Reference:
The screen size and display color will change if incorrect settings for Default Color
Calibration are made.
For example, if the FEA-2807 MU-201CE is set while the MU-231CE is installed,
the circular on the Radar screen will be a little distorted in a transverse direction.
The image of the EC-1000C is output in SXGA mode.
The MU-231CE has a UXGA monitor. If the LCD FEA-2807 MU-231CE is set,
the SXGA image output will be a little compressed in a transverse direction.
The MU-201CE has an SXGA monitor. Therefore, the image on the EC-1000C
will be output as it is in SXGA mode.
8-9
16. Set “Interface address type” on the ChartRadar parameters screen, and click Next.
- Interface address type: Default For First (Second) ChartRadar
-> Specify No.1 and No.2 chart radars.
Note: The user is to assign each IP address if User Defined is selected.
- Chart Radar IP for LAN adapters: 10.0.0.184 (Second -> 10.0.0.185)
-> The IP is automatically assigned according to the Interface
address type setting.
- LAN adapter IP:
[10.0.0.194 ] x Install 1
[10.0.0.195 ] x Install 2
address type setting. When connecting the No. 2 LAN adapter,
check Install 2.
- Select IP Address for LAN ARPA: 172.31.3.33
address type setting.
NEXT
Note:
Registry data changes with the
Interface address type settings.
Network settings (LAN IP
settings) in the EC-1000C will
not be made automatically.
Refer to Chapter 10 to make
LAN IP settings.
Chart Radar IP LAN adapter IP

Interface address Select IP Address
for LAN
type Install 1 Install 2 for LAN ARPA
Adapters
First ChartRadar 10.0.0.184 10.0.0.194 10.0.0.195 172.31.33
Second
10.0.0.185 10.0.0.196 10.0.0.197 172.31.34
ChartRadar
8-10
17. Check the Log files box on the “System Cleanup” screen, and click Next. Only the
log file will be deleted.
- Chart Display Setting Files

NEXT - ARCS/S57 Group file
- S57 Senc files
- S57 CD Chart Catalog files
- x Log files
18. Check that the Current Settings is set to “Install” on the Start Copying Files screen,
and click Next. When the Aladdin Device Installation Utility screen appears, click
OK. Then program installation will start.
Note:
In the case of correcting set items, use the [Back] key and return to the previous
page.
NEXT
8-11
When the “Locked File Detected” screen appears while the program updating is in
progress, click Ignore and continue program updating.
19. When the “Aladdin Device Driver Installation Utility” screen is displayed, click
OK. When the next screen appears, the program installation will be completed.
Check “Yes, I want to restart my computer now” and Click Finish. Then the PC
will be rebooted automatically.
20. Eject the program CD-ROM.
8-12
8.3 Registry File Check

8.3.1 Outline of Registry File
1. Registry
Do not edit or set registry data incorrectly.
Information on a variety of items including the following ones, which are regularly
referred to when Windows is running, will be stored in the registry:
The profile of each user, types of applications installed on the PC and types of
documents creatable in each application, property sheet settings for folder and
application icons, types of hardware existing on the system, and occupied ports.
The OS may result in operational error, and the OS may not start in the worst case if the
registry data is edited or set incorrectly.
2. Contents of Registry File

At the time of program installation, the contents of the registry file will be overwritten
according to selecting of the Interface address type of Chart Radar parameters. Check
that the program is installed correctly.
If the registry data varies with that on the next page, LAN adapter or radar
communication will be disabled even if there are no LAN setting problem.
In that case, reinstall the program.
8-13
Table 8.3.1 Registry Data

No.2 FCR
No.1 FCR
(Default for
Item (Default for first Remarks
second
ChartRadar)
ChartRadar)
An IP address for the
EC-1000C to
LAN Arpa Local Address 172.31.3.33 172.31.3.34
communicate with the
RPU-016.
Used to display the
Interface address
LAN Arpa Local Address Default For first Default For Second
type settings at the
Type ChartRadar ChartRadar
time of program
updating.
0X000000002 The Device Number
LAN if adapter 1 ID 0X000000004 (4)
(2) of the LAN adapter.
Used to display the IP
LAN if adapter 1 ID Address 10.0.0.194 10.0.0.196 address of the No.1
LAN adapter.
Used to display the IP
address of the No.2
LAN adapter.
(Additionally
LAN if adapter 2 ID Address 10.0.0.195 10.0.0.197 displayed at the time
of program updating if
the item Install 2 for
the LAN adapter IP is
checked.
0X000000003
(3)
0X000000004 LAN adapter's Device
(4) Number
0X000000005
(5)
Used to display the
Interface address
Default For first Default For Second
LAN if Address type settings at the
ChartRadar ChartRadar
time of program
updating.
An IP address for the
EC-1000C to
LAN if Local IP Address 10.0.0.184 10.0.0.185
communicate with the
LAN adapter.
8-14
8.3.2 Check Procedure for Registry File
Procedure
1. Select Run from the Start menu and type “regedit” in the Open field.
regedit
2. Select “HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE¥SOFTWARE¥FFOY¥ECDIS¥LANAdapter¥ ”
from the Registry Editor folder in My Computer, open the LAN adapter folder, and
check the data with [Table 8.3.1 Registry] Data.
8-15
Case 1:
The following Interface address type is set at the time of program updating.
- Interface address type: Default For First ChartRadar
- LAN adapter IP:
[10.0.0.194 ] x Install 1
[10.0.0.195 ] Install 2
8-16
Case 2:
- Interface address type: Default For First ChartRadar
- LAN adapter IP:
[10.0.0.194 ] x Install 1
[10.0.0.195 ] x Install 2
8-17
Case 3:
- Interface address type: Default For Second ChartRadar
- LAN adapter IP:
[10.0.0.194 ] x Install 1
[10.0.0.195 ] Install 2
8-18
Case 4:
- Interface address type: Default For Second ChartRadar
- LAN adapter IP:
[10.0.0.194 ] x Install 1
[10.0.0.195 ] x Install 2
8-19
8.4 Contents of Program CD ROM
8-20
8-21
Chapter 9. LAN Adapter4.1 LAN
Settings
Adapter の概要
9.1 LAN Adapter Settings

9.1.1 Overview
The IP address of the LAN adapter is factory set to 10.0.0.194. The user (engineer)
should make IP address and parameter settings for the LAN adapter in the case of
connecting the No. 2 LAN adapter or connecting the LAN adapter to the No. 2 Chart
radar. Furthermore, be sure to update the LAN adapter program when the EC-1000C
program is updated.
Reference:
In the case of connecting the No. 2 LAN adapter, reinstall the EC-1000C program.
At that time, check Install 2 in the LAN adapter IP window. Refer to Step 16 (page
8-10) in Chapter 8 EC-1000C Program Updating.
* In Registry file, “LAN if adapter 2 ID Address” will be added. Refer to Case 2
in 8.3.2(page8-17).*
List of IP Addresses
No.1 No.2
Radar: Radar:
172.31.3.6 172.31.3.7
No.1 EC-1000C
LAN1 IF Network:
No.1 EC-1000C 172.31.3.34
LAN1 IF Network:
172.31.3.33
LAN1 LAN1
LAN2
LAN2
No.2 EC-1000C
No.1 EC-1000C LAN2 IF Network:
LAN2 IF Network: 10.0.0.185
10.0.0.184
No.1 LAN adapter: No.2 LAN adapter: No.1 LAN adapter: No.2 LAN adapter:
IP=10.0.0.194 IP=10.0.0.195 IP=10.0.0.196 IP=10.0.0.197
e0=10.0.0.184 e0=10.0.0.184 e0=10.0.0.185 e0=10.0.0.185
Fig. 9.1.1 IP address Settings
9-1
9.2 Preparations
9.2 Preparations
IP Address/Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter and Program Updating
9.2.1 Connections
Turn OFF the power and make the following connections.
The LAN adapter can be turned OFF by disconnecting J9 on the LAN adapter as well
(see the next page).
- Use a serial crossing cable to connect J13 (9-pin D-sub female terminal) of the LAN
adapter and COM1 (9-pin D-sub female connector) of the EC-1000C.
- Disconnect the LAN cable to the LAN adapter.
- Connect the service keyboard and mouse.
DVI
DISPLAY UNIT EC-1000C

DVI1 Not requered
(MU-201/231CE)
RADAR UNIT Radar Precessor Unit
9 pin Dsub
(RPU-016
(Female)
CONTROL UNIT CONTROL HEAD POWER
(COM2) (100 - 230CAC)
(RCU-020/015FEA)
9 pin Dsub
(Female)
J13
COM1
9 pin Dsub 9 pin
9pinDsub:
Dsub:female - female
femele-femele LAN ADAPTER
SERVICE (Male) (Closs
Crosscable)
cable
KEY BOARD (EC-1010)
KEY BOARD
Front panel LAN2
RJ45 Closs cable
Cross cable
RJ45
MOUSE MOUSE/KEYB
Disconnect
If you need. Not requered
LAN1 POWER
POWER HUB-100 (24VDC)
(100 - 230CAC) RJ45
[COM1] ----- [J13]

# 2(RXD) ---- # 3(TXD)
# 3(TXD) ---- # 2(RXD)
# 5 GND) ---- # 5(GND)
Disconnect the
LAN cable. LAN Adapter Rear panel of EC-1000C
COM-1
Connect the crossing
J13: cable.
Connect the crossing
cable.
Fig. 9.2.1 Connections for LAN Adapter Setting Change
9-2
9.2 Preparations
9.2.2 Jumper Settings for LAN Adapter

As shown in the following table, change the jumper settings to put the LAN adapter into
program mode.
J16
J13
J17
J9: Power supply J14
D43
J15
Jumper Factory setting Setting change

J14 TXD1 side TXP side
J15 RXD1 side RXP side
J16 Between INIT and INT H Between INIT and GND
J17 Between CTS1 and CTS1 H Between CTS1 and GND
Fig. 9.2.2 Make Settings Changes to Put LAN Adapter into Program Mode
Reference:
The LED blinking cycle of the LAN Module will change when the LAN adapter is
in program mode.
- Normally: Turns ON and OFF at 1-second intervals.
- Program mode: Turns ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 1 second repeatedly.
- ON: Not operating

- OFF: The program is not operating.
LED on LAN Adapter
9-3
9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter
9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for

LAN Adapter
9.3.1 Outline of Settings
In case of;
- Add No. 2 LAN Adapter to No. 1 FCR. In case of;
or Communication between the EC1000C
- Add LAN Adapter to No. 2 FCR. and LAN Adapter is establish.
Start changing the IP address and

parameters of the LAN Adapter.
Preparations for updating (Refer to 9.2 Preparations)

1) Disconnect the LAN cable from the LAN Adapter.
2) Connect the LAN Adapter and EC-1000C over serial crossing cable.
3) Jumper changes on LAN Adapter：J14, J15, J16, and J17
Start the 7188XW program.

1) Finish the Chart radar.
2) Open C:\LAN Adapter\Shortcut to 7188WX.EXE.
3) Turn ON the LAN adapter.
4) The i7188E> prompt appears.
Set the IP address. Set the parameter.

i7188E>IP ---ÆIP check i7188E>SERCOTR /command
i7188E>SETIP ---ÆIP
Restore the conditions

before rebooting.
Fig. 9.3.1 Outline of IP and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter
9-4
9.3.2 Connecting LAN Adapter (Starting 7188XW Program)
Procedure
1. Finish the Chart radar, open the LAN adapter folder in the C drive, and double click
Shortcut to 7188xw.exe.
Finishing Chart Radar;
Refer to page 2-1 to finish the Chart radar.
1) Press the [Tab] key while pressing the [Alt] key and select ECAWATCH.
2) Click Shutdown the Chart Radar on the ECAWATCH screen.
3) Close the Control Head screen.
4) The Windows screen will appear with the [F4] key pressed while pressing
the Alt key.
C:¥LANAdapter
Shortcut to 7188xw.exe
9-5
2. The i7188E> prompt will appear on the DOS screen when the [Enter] key is pressed
after the 7188XW program starts.
I7188E>
Note:
Turn the LAN adapter OFF and ON if the i7188E> prompt does not appear.
Furthermore, check the connections of the EC-1000C and LAN adapter and the
jumper changes on the LAN adapter.
Disconnect and connect the J9

power connector to turn the LAN
adapter OFF and ON.
Supplement: Typical commands executable on 7188xw.exe.
DIR Shows the information of all files download in the Flash-Memory.

VER Shows the information of MiniOS7.
DEL Deletes all files stored in the Flash-Memory. It will delete all files.
RESET Resets the CPU.
DIAG Hardware Diagnostic.
? Shows help messages of MiniOS7.
F1-key Shows help messages of 7188xw.exe.
F2-key Sets the file name for download (without download operation).
F8-key Downloads the file specified by F2 into FLASH_ROM and execute it.
F10-key Downloads the file specified by F2 into SRAM and execute it.
SERCOTR Shows the settings of LAN-Adapter software.
9-6
9.3.3 Checking and Making IP address Settings for LAN Adapter

Use “ip” and “setip” commands as shown in the following example.
Check the IP registration with i7188 E>ip.
Use i7188E>setip to display the method of IP registration.
i7188E>setip 10.0.0.190: Register the IP.
Use i7188E>ip to check IP registration.
Procedure
1. Start the 7188XW program.
Type “ip” after the i7188E> and press the [Enter] key. The IP address set for the
LAN adapter will appear.
Use i7188E>ip to check

IP registration.
9-7
2. For example, To change the IP address to the No. 1 LAN adapter's IP address, type
“setip 10.0.0.194” after the i7188E> and press the [Enter] key.
Type “setip 10.0.0.195” in the case of the No.2 LAN adapter.
i7188E>setip 10.0.0.194: IP registration
Table 9.3.1 IP Addresses of LAN Adapter
IP address of LAN adapter IP address

No.1 Chart Radar No.1 LAN adapter 10.0.0.194
9-8
9.3.4 Checking and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

1. Parameter Checks
Type “sercotr” after the i7188E> prompt and press the [Enter] key. The parameter of
the LAN adapter will appear.
Check
points
Check Points
- LAN Adapter 05.41
The program version of the LAN adapter is displayed. The version must be the
same as that of the EC-1000C. If they differ, update the program referring to
“9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program”.
- Own IP: 10.0.0.19x
The IP address of the LAN adapter is displayed. The IP address of the No. 1
LAN adapter, which is connected to the No. 1 Chart radar must be10.0.0.194.
- Conf d=5 P=15001 ---
The parameter of the LAN adapter is displayed.
- Hosts e0=10.0.0.18x ---
The LAN adapter displays the IP address of the EC-1000C. The setting is
e0=10.0.0.184 --- in the case of the No. 1 Chart radar.
9-9
2. Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

According to the LAN adapter to set, type the following commands and parameters
(e.g., “sercotr /d=2 /p=15001 /r=” followed by the parameter) after the i7188E>
prompt and press the [Enter] key.
Table 9.3.2 Parameters of LAN Adapter
LAN adapter Command and parameter to be typed

No.1 Chart Radar Sercotr_/d=2_/p=15001_/r=15000_/f=1_/n=8_/m=0_
No.1 LAN Adapter /e0=10.0.0.184_/e1=0.0.0.0
No.2 LAN Adapter /e0=10.0.0.184_/e1=0.0.0.0
No.1 LAN Adapter /e0=10.0.0.185_/e1=0.0.0.0
No.2 LAN Adapter /e0=10.0.0.185_/e1=0.0.0.0
Note: The symbol “_” between parameters means a space.
Parameter
Press the Enter key on completion

of parameter input.
Parameter registration
is finished.
9-10
Reference:
In the case of changing a specific parameter, specify the parameter after the i7188E>.
That is, the parameter to be changed can be corrected with the SERCOTR switch
command only.
For example, if the LAN adapter is connected to the No.2 EC-1000C, the IP address
must be changed to that of the No.2 EC-1000C.
Therefore, type i7188E> SERCOTR one space /e0=１0.0.0.185.
Table 9.3.3 Meanings of Parameters
Parameter Meaning Setting

2: First adapter of first EC-1000C
3: Second adapter of first EC-1000C
d Device number
3: First adapter of second EC-1000C
4: Second adapter of second EC-1000C
p LAN Adapter port 15001: Mandatory port number
r Radar port 15000: Mandatory port number
1: First LAN Adapter
f Number of first serial port
9: Second LAN Adapter
n Number of serial channels 8: Mandatory of serial channels
0: Normal operation mode
m Operating mode
1: Debug mode
First EC-1000C: 10.0.0.184
e0 IP address of first client
Second EC-1000C: 10.0.0.185
e1 – e4 IP address of another client 0.0.0.0
9-11
9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program

9.4.1 Overview
Update the LAN adapter program as well in the case of updating the EC-1000C
program. Load the LAN adapter program from the EC-1000C.
When the LAN adapter is updated, the registered set values in the LAN adapter will
return to default values. Make IP address and parameter settings again.
If the EC-1000C and LAN adapter are different from each other in program version, the
message “4097 LAN adapter1(2) version error” will appear in the Alarm Queue box.
Incase of;
Incase of; The message "LAN adapter1 (2)
The EC-1000 program version error" is displayed in the
was updated. Alarm Queue box.
Renewal of LAN adapter program
Preparations for updating (Refer to 9.2 Preparations)

- Disconnect the LAN cable from the LAN adapter.
- Connect the LAN adapter and EC-1000C over a serial crossing cable.
- LAN adapter jumper change: Make J14, J15, J16, and J17 changes.
Start the7188XW program.

1. Finish the Chart Radar.
2. Execute C:\LAN Adapter\Shortcut to 7188WX.EXE
3. Turn on the LAN adapter.
4. The I7188E> prompt appears.
Updating steps
1. 7188E>DEL 2. i7188E>LOAD
3. i7188E>LOAD Æ filename: autoexec.bat
4. [Alt]+[E] 5. i7188E>LOAD
6. [Alt]+[E] Æ filename: sercotr.exe
Refer to 9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter

Settings IP address and parameter for the LAN adapter.
Restore the conditions before rebooting.
9-12
9.4.2 Updating LAN Adapter Program

Refer to 9.2 Preparations to connect the LAN adapter and EC-1000C or make setting
changes for the LAN adapter.
Procedure
1. Finish the Chart radar and start the 7188XW program.
To start the 7188XW program, refer to 9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter
Settings for LAN Adapter.
2. Type “sercotr” and press the [Enter] key after the i7188E> prompt appear.
The IP address and parameter settings for the LAN adapter are displayed.
3. Type “del” and press the [Enter] key after the i7188E> prompt appear.
The message “….. to delete (y/n) ?” will appear. Press the [Y] key.
i7188>del
9-13
4. The LAN adapter program is deleted. Therefore, only the message “Command not
supported !” will appear when “sercotr” is typed after the i7188E> prompt.
5. Type “load” and press [Enter] key after the i7188E> prompt appear.
The message “Press ALT_E to down load File !” will appear.
i7188>load
6. Press the [E] key while press the [Alt] key. The item “Input filename:” will appear.
Then type “autoexec.bat” and press the [Enter] key.
Type "autoexec.bat" after

the item "Input filename:"
on the screen.
7. Type “load” and press the [Enter] key after the i7188E> prompt appear.
The message “Press ALT_E to down load File !” will appear.
8. Press the [E] key while pressing the [Alt] key. The item “Input filename:” will
appear. Then type “sercotr.exe” and press the [Enter] key.
9-14
9. The last line “Block xx” is counted up. The procedure is finished when “i7188E>” is
displayed.
"Block xx" is counted up and

"i7188E>" appears.
Failure:
If “i7188E>**” is displayed, it means an error occurred. Repeat from step 5.
If "i7188E>**" is displayed,
repeat from step 5.
Note:
A timeout error will result unless the command is input in and after step 5.
The error message “…. NOT enough space to store” will be displayed. Repeat
from step 5.
9-15
9.5 Updating LAN Adapter OS

Take the following procedure if the LAN adapter does not operate normally, the LAN
adapter is not recognized with an error message (e.g., “4059 LAN ADAPTER 1
ERROR”) displayed, or the operating system (OS) of the LAN adapter has been
updated.
In order to check the OS Version, start 7188XW program, type “ver” after the
i7118E>prompt, and press [Enter] key.
Procedure
1. Refer to 9.2 Preparations to connect the LAN adapter and EC-1000C or change
settings for the LAN adapter.
1) Turn OFF the EC-1000C and LAN adapter.
2) Connect the EC-1000C (COM1) and LAN adapter (J13) over RS-232C
crossing cable.
3) Pull out the LAN cable from the LAN adapter.
4) Change the LAN adapter jumpers: J14=TXP, J15=RXP, J16=GND, and
J17=GNG
5) Turn ON the EC-1000C and LAN adapter.
<Copying Files>
2. Finish the ECDIS.
(Display ECAWATCH and execute Shutdown the ECDIS.)
3. Start Explorer.
9-16
4. Decompress the data downloaded from the “Notes: Furuno TecNet” and copy all the
files in the folder to C: \LANAdapter\.
File name:
os.bat, e-070124.img、lan.bat
IPE1L1.bat, IPE1L2.bat, IPE2L1.bat, and IPE2L2.ba
Contents of the LAN adapter

folder
Copied files
<Starting Write-in Software>

5. Double-click and start Shortcut to 7188xw.exe in the LAN adapter folder.
9-17
<Changing OS>
6. Press the [F2] key.
7. The name of the executable file can be input. Type “OS.BAT” and press the [Enter]
key.
8. Press the [F8] key. The batch file will be transferred to the FLASH_ROM and
executed.
9. The batch file will be executed and the message “Press ALT_E to download file!”
will be displayed. Press the [E] key while pressing [Alt] key.
10. The name of the OS file can be input. Type “e-070124.img” and press the [Enter]
key.
11. The OS will be rewritten in approximately 20 seconds.

The OS will be once transferred to the SRAM. If there are no checksum problems,
the OS will be written to the FLASH_ROM.
12. On completion of writing the OS, check that the version has been changed with the
message “Ver. 2.00 build 002 Jan 24 2007” displayed.
9-18
13. Write the LAN adapter program again. Refer to 9.4 Updating LAN Adapter.
14. Make LAN adapter settings. Refer to 9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter
Settings for LAN Adapter.
15. Turn OFF the LAN adapter and restore the conditions to the original state. Be sure
to return the jumper settings for the LAN adapter to the previous settings. Refer to
9-3.
9-19
Chapter 10. Network Settings10.1for EC-1000C
Outline of Network Settings
10.1 Outline of Network Settings

The chart radar has the following two LAN interfaces.
- LAN-1: Used for communication between the RPU-016 (ARPA radar) and
EC-1000C.
- LAN-2: Used for communication between the LAN adapter and EC-1000C.
Connect the LAN-1 port of the EC-1000C to the RPU-016 through the HUB-100, and
connect the LAN-2 port to the LAN adapter.
LAN-2: LAN adapter port LAN crossing cable
LAN-1: FAR LAN port
LAN crossing cable

Note:
Either LAN crossing or straight cable
is available through the HUB-100.
If No. 1 and No. 2 Chart radars are LAN connected, keep in mind that these Chart
radars are different in network IP address set value. Set the following values.
Local Area Connection No.1 Chart radar No.2 Chart radar

LAN-1 (ARPA radar) 172.31.3.33 172.31.3.34
LAN-2 (LAN adapter) 10.0.0.184 10.0.0.185
Reference:
When installing EC-1000C program, set the Interface address type for the
ChartRadar parameters settings in the No. 1 Chart radar to “Default For First
ChartRadar”, and set it in the No. 2 Chart radar to “Default For Second
ChartRadar.” Refer to page 8-10
The IP address of the LAN adapter is allocated to the registry of the EC-1000C
automatically. If an additional LAN adapter is used, reinstall the EC-1000C
program and check Install 2 in the Interface address type. Refer to page 8-10
10-1
10.1 Outline of Network Settings
No.1 No.2
Radar: Radar:
172.31.3.6 172.31.3.7
No.1 ECDIS No.1 ECDIS

LAN1 IF Network: LAN1 IF Network:
172.31.3.33 172.31.3.34
LAN1 LAN1
LAN2 LAN2
No.1 ECDIS No.2 ECDIS
LAN2 IF Network: LAN2 IF Network:
10.0.0.184 10.0.0.185
No.1 LAN adapter: No.2 LAN adapter: No.1 LAN adapter: No.2 LAN adapter:
IP=10.0.0.194 IP=10.0.0.195 IP=10.0.0.196 IP=10.0.0.197
e0=10.0.0.184 e0=10.0.0.184 e0=10.0.0.185 e0=10.0.0.185
Fig. 10.1.1 IP Address Settings
10-2
10.2 Network Settings

10.2.1 LAN-1 Settings (Communication with ARPA Radar)
Procedure
1. Refer to 2-1 and finish the Chart radar, and move to the Windows screen.
1) Press the [Tab] key repeatedly while pressing the [Alt] key until ECAWATCH
is selected.
2) Click “Shutdown the Chart Radar” in the ECAWACH screen.
3) Close the Control Head screen.
4) The Windows screen will appear when the [F4] key is pressed while pressing
the [Alt] key.
2. Select Settings -> Network Connections -> “Local Area Connection" from the Start
menu and open [Properties].
Local Area Connections
Properties
3. Uncheck “Client for Microsoft Networks” and “File and Printer Sharing for
Microsoft Networks” in the setting item [This connection uses the following item:].
Uncheck the
items
10-3
4. Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”, open [Properties], and make IP address and
Subnet mask settings.
LAN-1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway

No.1 chart radar 172.31.3.33 255.255.0.0 Blank
10-4
5. Open [Advanced..] in the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) screen and select the [WINS]
tag. Check “Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP” in the NetBIOS setting.
Check Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
6. OK ボタンをクリックしていき、Local Area Connection 画面に戻します。
6. Continue clicking OK button to return to the “Local Area Connection” screen.
10-5
10.2.2 LAN-2 Settings (Communication with LAN Adapter)

Take the following procedure after 10.2.1 LAN１ Settings (Communication with
ARPA Radar).
1. Select “Local Area Connection 2” and open [Properties].
2. Check the all the items shown under the title “This connection uses the following
items”.
3. Select Internet Protocol(TCP/IP), open Properties, and make IP address and subnet
mask settings.
LAN-2 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway

10-6
4. Open “Advanced”, select the WINS tag, and check “Default” in “NetBIOS setting”.
Check Default.
5. Continue clicking OK to return to the Local Area Connection screen.
10-7
Reference: Check the Config. of the LAN port

Procedure
1. Finish the Chart radar (Refer to Introduction) and open [Start] -> Programs ->
Accessories -> Command Prompt.
Program Accessories Command

Prompt
2. Type "ipconfig /all" after the command prompt and press the [Enter] key.
The IP address and subnet mask settings for LAN-1 and LAN-2 can be checked.
EC-1000C
(Host)
LAN1
LAN2
10-8
Chapter 11. Location of Parts
11.1 EC-1000C
11.1 EC-1000C
E-Token
Fig. 11.1.1 EC-1000C
Power SW CD Drive
Keyboard Terminal FDD
Power ON ＆ USB
HDD LED
E-Token
Fig. 11.1.2 FDD, CD Drive
11-1
11.1 EC-1000C
Power Switch
Fig. 11.1.3 Rear side
9p D-sub 9p D-sub
(CONTROL HEAD) (COM1 to Monitor) USB
Keyboard Terminal
VGA
LAN-2
(LAN Adapter)
LAN-1
(ARPA)
9p D-sub DVI
（RADAR Power
Switch）
Power Switch Parallel Port

5 A Fuse
AC IN (100-230 VAC)
Fig. 11.1.4 Rear side Connectors
11-2
11.1 EC-1000C
Power Supply unit
Memory Card: 512MB

(KVR400X64C3A/512)
HDD: 40.0GB (MHV2040AC)
CD Dｒive/FDD
Fig. 11.1.5 Cover removed
HDD vibration dampener
HDD
HDD cover
Fig. 11.1.6 HDD Cover removed
11-3
11.1 EC-1000C
Dongle
CPU board
Memory Card
Fig. 11.1.7 Inside View-1
24P0092
Fig. 11.1.8 Inside View-2
11-4
11.1 EC-1000C
Memory board x 2
CPU board
Fig. 11.1.9 CPU board: SBC PCG-820
Fig. 11.1.10 CPU board removed
11-5
11.1 EC-1000C
Motherboard
LED
(+12 V, +5 V, -12 V, -5 V, +3.3 V)
Fig. 11.1.11 Motherboard
Buzzer
CR-2032 (Lithium
battery for BIOS)
(more than 3 V)
Fig. 11.1.12 CPU board (1/3)
11-6
11.1 EC-1000C
Fig. 11.1.13 CPU board (2/3)
Fig. 11.1.14 CPU board (3/3)
11-7
11.1 EC-1000C
Reference: new type “EC-1000C”

Shielded HDD cable (between HDD and CPU board) , and changed the dongle to
USB type.
Dongle (USB type)
11-8
11.1 EC-1000C
IDE2 KBMS from

Power Connecter IDE1 from CD Drive Front side Keyboard
for Fan from Hard Disk (9) FDC from Floppy Drive (7)
(1) (10) (8)
for parallel Port
LPT1 (Dongle)
J1
COM1
J2
J4
VGA
LAN2 from
LAN Adapter
LAN1 from
Radar
(RPU-016)
(4) (3) (5) J3 (6)

Connecter from Power supply (2) DVI USB1 from [Power ON] COM2
USB2 from Rear Panel from Control Head
from Front Panel Cable
11-9 Fig. 11.1.15 SBC PCI-951 or PCG-820

11.2 RCU-020
11.2 RCU-020
9p D-sub (male)
Fig. 11.2.1 RCU-020
Fig. 11.2.2 RCU-020 Panel
Trackball
Buzzer Board
(03P9362)
03P9343
Fig. 11.2.3 RCU-020 with Cover Removed
11-10
11.2 RCU-020
J505 (For PROGRAM J502 (REMOTE) for J501 (PROCESSOR) for

Update port, Factory use) RCU-020 EC-1000C
CR10 Not Used
(U8 CPU RUN) J506 (EMRI) for EMRI
(Blinks every second.) Trackpilot
J507 (SYSTEM
FAIL)
S36 (DIP SW) Function

SYSTEM FAIL ALARM
J504: TB JP1 1
(ON: Output from J507)
Open: Write Program
RELAY STATUS
Short: Ordinary 2
(ON: Reversed polarity of the above signal)
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
Fig. 11.2.4 Control Board (03P9343) , A side
Fig. 11.2.5 Control Board (03P9343), B side Fig. 11.2.6 Panel, Rear View
11-11
11.3 LAN Adapter (EC-1010)
11.3 LAN Adapter (EC-1010)

Check the LAN module for operation.
Normal mode: ON/OFF every 1 second.
LANmodule
(i-7188EX)
LAN connection
port
Not Used
TX1, 3, 4 and 5
LEDs J16
(Check for TX) RS232C port
J17 (For Setting port)
J14
J15
RX1 to 8 LEDs D43
(Check for RX) (Check for
+15VDC)
D44
(Check for +5 VDC)
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7
(T/RX) (T/RX) (T/RX) (RX)
D42
(Check for +24VDC)
CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8 Power supply

(RX) (T/RX) (RX) (RX) connection terminal
(+24 VDC)
RL2
(Any ECDIS alarm)
RL1
(Operator fitness)
RL3
Fig. 11.3.1 LAN Adapter
(Backup navigator)
11-12
11.4 B Adapter (EC-1020)
11.4 B Adapter (EC-1020)
LEDs
+5V
12ISO DC/DC power
+15V (+15 VDC)
+24V
IN 1-16
OUT 1-8
LOG
GYRO
9pin Dsub
LEDs of ports (LAN Adapter
in operation Connection)
light up.
Power Input Terminal

(+24VDC) &
LAN Adapter
Connection
STI9-12 AIN5, 6
GYRO STO1-4
AIN1, 2
STI1-4
STO5-8 AIN7, 8
A1, 2 out
Log STI13-16
AIN3, 4
STI5-8
Fig. 11.4.1 LAN Adapter
11-13
11.5 HUB (HUB-100)
11.5 HUB (HUB-100)
Port Number: 1 to 8
(Lights when in use.)
Link/Act
FDx/Col
10M/100M
RJ-45
(Auto-MDIX function)
Fig. 11.5.1 HUB-100
Flip up rotary-lock (a) to release lock

and remove flat cable.
(a)
03P9364
Fig. 11.5.2 HUB-100 cover removed
11-14
11.6 Monitor (MU-201CE)
11.6 Monitor (MU-201CE)
- MU-201CE: 20-inch
- MU-231CE: 23-inch
11-15
11.7 RPU-016
11.7 RPU-016
PROCESSOR UNIT
RPU-016
4329-0103
25KW . 30KW
1.35 0.85
Fig. 11.7.1 RPU-016 Top View
DVI-D Connectors for

LCD Display Unit
(Both are identical. For
Chart Radar, not used.)
F1
LAN Port (RJ45) 100 VAC: 10 A (125 V)
220 VAC: 5 A (250 V)
24 VDC: 20 A (125 V)
Fig. 11.7.2 RPU-016 Bottom View
11-16
11.7 RPU-016
LAN Port
(100BASE-T)
Digital Video Output

(DVI-D)
GND Terminal
Power Supply Terminal
Fig. 11.7.3 Processor Unit, bottom chassis
DVI-RGB I/F Board
DVI-RGB I/F Board

RGB BUFF Stopper
(03P9229B)
Hinge
** Possible to
separate between
GC-10 Board bottom and upper
(64P1106A, Optional) chassis.
Terminal Board
(03P9342) GYRO Input Terminal
(Optional)
Fig. 11.7.4 Processor Unit, bottom chassis
11-17
11.7 RPU-016
S1 (Selection of monitor type)

Model 1 2 3 4
FAR-21x7 (MU-201CR) OFF OFF OFF OFF
FAR-28x7 (MU-231CR) ON OFF OFF OFF
FAR-21x7-BB OFF ON OFF OFF
FCR-21x7 (MU-201CE) N/A OFF ON OFF
FCR-28x7 (MU-231CE) N/A OFF ON OFF
CR4 (Blinks every second.)
CR8
(Blinks every Mounting part
0.5 second.) MAIN CPU of NET-100
(U21)
ARPA CPU
(U74)
S2 DVI-D
Reset SW J204
DVI-D
J205
DRW CPU
(U19)
ＴＰ58 (2 Vp-p) CR2/CR3 (Always ON)

R401 CR5
(OP Video IN ADJ.: TP58 2 Vp-p) (Blinks every second.) CR Check for
CR2 VCC (+5 V)
CR3 3.3 V
CR4 MAIN CPU (U21)
CR8 ARPA CPU (U74)
CR5 DRW CPU (U19)
Fig. 11.7.5 SPU Board (03P9337-33)
11-18
11.7 RPU-016
100BASE-T
(RJ-45)
CR1 (LED-B)
(Blinks when LAN port is used.)
CR2 (LED-A)
(Lights when data flows through ** This board is also used in RPU-013 and CU-200.
LAN port.)
Fig. 11.7.6 NET-100 Board (03P9332)
11-19
11.7 RPU-016
TP1: Main Inverter Output Voltage (VR1 ADJ.)

TP2: SW Reg. Common Line
TP3: Sub Inverter SW Freq. (42.75 to 47.25 kHz)
TP1 to TP4 TP4: Main Inverter SW Freq. (42.75 to 47.25 kHz)
VR1: Main Inverter Output Adj.
Between TP1 and TP2, 34.7
to 35.3 VDC
CR23 (GRN)
CR21 (RED)
JP1
COM 300 V
500 V
Suffix mark (A or B)
A SPEC (12 KW) B SPEC (25 KW) JP2

JP1 COM-300 V COM-500 V COM 300 V
JP2 COM-330 V COM-330 V 330 V
Fig. 11.7.7 HV-9017A/B Board
100 VAC: 10 A (125 V)

220 VAC: 5 A (250 V) Fuse 20 A
Fig. 11.7.8 AC FIL Board (03P9341) Fig. 11.7.9 DC FIL Bpard (03P9352)
11-20
11.7 RPU-016
Setting of Antenna Rotation

24 rpm: 144 Hz at TPI7 with R168, J161 and J162 opened
42 rpm: 252 Hz at TPI7 with R168, J161 and J162 shorted
JP161 (42 rpm)

JP162 (42 rpm) TP13
R168 (RT) TP17 (BP)
TP14 (32 V)
TP15
R106
J105 J106 TP12 (14 V)
TP16 (5 V)
TP11 (12 V）
TP18
TP19
J104
CR63 (MTR)
TP9
CR64 (RF)
TP2(PR0V) CR65 (Tx-HV)

J103
R48 (45 kHz)
TP-1 (S-5V)
CR23 (IN-ER)
R88 TP3 (PR12 V)
TP4 (PR5 V)
TP5 (PR5 V)
TP7
R21 (OVER)
TP6
J101
CR63: ANT Motor Over current

J108 CR64: ANT24 V Over current
220 VAC: No jumper CR65: TX-HVOver current
100 VAC: Jumpers between 1-2, CR23: Input Over/Low-Voltage
4-7 and 5-8
Board Name Power Supply Antenna speed
03P9339A 100 VAC 24 rpm
03P9339B 100 VAC 42 rpm
03P9339C 220 VAC 24 rpm
03P9339D 220 VAC 42 rpm
Fig. 11.7.10 AC PWR Board, 03P9339A/B/C/D
11-21
11.7 RPU-016
J654: SPU J652: PWR

J653: PSU
J651（HV）
- 12kW: 310-350 V
- 25kW: 520-580 V
J613: SCANNER
J609: IF VIDEO
J601: RS-232C J614: CARD I/F
(9P D-SUB)
J615: OPTION
J610:SCANNER J616: From Master
J617: To Slave_1
J602: KEY
J604:PSU
J618: To Slave 2
J605:HEADING
(IEC-61162-2) J656
J619: ECDIS
J603: GC-10
J611: AIS
J606: NAVIGATOR
J655
J622: KEY
J607: LOG J620: TRACK CONTROL
J621: SERIAL I/F
J608: AD CONVERTER J612: EXT ALARM
J656: HEADING(IEC-61162-2)
Selection of 110-ohm terminator on HDG Data line.
(Default: Jumper between 1 and 2; terminated)
J655: AIS (IEC-61162-2)
Selection of 110-ohm terminator in AIS Data line.
(Default: Jumper between 1 and 2; terminated)
Fig. 11.7.11 TB Board (03P9342)
11-22
11.8 Scanner Unit
11.8 Scanner Unit

11.8.1 X-Band (2 Unit type)
Performance Monitor (PM-31)

Antenna
Fig. 11.8.1 Scanner Unit (RSB-096 with PM-31)
11-23
11.8 Scanner Unit
FAN: 24VDC
Internal heat is agitated.
J921: Tx_HV
RTR-079（25 kW）
VR1 (Power)
This hole is used to access VR1 on MD board

（03P9244A/B） for magnetron current
adjustment at factory.
Fig. 11.8.2 Scanner Unit with Cover Removed (1)
IF AMP: 03P9335A
PM-31 Connection
J92 (HV)
Fig. 11.8.3 Scanner Unit with Cover Removed (2)
11-24
11.8 Scanner Unit
O-Ring Rotary Joint
Guide Pin Hole Guide Pin Hole
Fig. 11.8.4 Antenna Bracket
PM-31 Antenna
（03P9361）
PM-31/B3RX1626
Fig. 11.8.5 PM-31
11-25
11.8 Scanner Unit
Motor Brush Holder (x2)
Motor Brush (MG120-5x6x11)

(When bush wears to white line, it must be
replaced.)
Motor Type Antenna Speed Scanner Unit

D8G-516 24 rpm RSB-096 Fig. 11.8.6 Antenna Motor
D8G-571 42 rpm RSB-097
Magnet for Heading Lead Switch
Antenna Turning Gear
Gear Retainer
Rotary Joint
Fig. 11.8.7 Antenna Motor Gear
11-26
11.8 Scanner Unit
Heading Lead SW
J916
(HD/B.P) B.P GEN board (03P9347)
IF AMP Board OUTPUT Terminal
J918: FAN 24V

RT TB Board (03P9349)
J914: ANT 24V
J915: Tx_HV
TB80 TB803
J917
(FAR-2837SW: RTR-082)
TB-804
(Antenna Motor Power
Supply)
Fig. 11.8.8 Antenna Terminal Board
B.P GEN board (03P9347)
Antenna Drive Gear
Fig. 11.8.9 Antenna Drive Gear
11-27
11.8 Scanner Unit
RFC Board (03P9346A) Circulator

Diode Limiter
IF Board (03P9335A) PWR(RF) Board

- 03P9348A: 12 kW
- 03P9348B: 25 kW
MIC: RU-9601
Fig. 11.8.10a RTR-079 (25 kW)
Fig. 11.8.10b RTR-079 (25 kW)
11-28
11.8 Scanner Unit
Common use:
RTR-078/079
IFAMP OUT
（J823） J3
1. Mag.Cur
3. GND
03P9346-33A and after;
Added 2P connector
CR9
Fig. 11.8.11 RFC Board (03P9346-00A) (Blinks every second,
CPU (U19) operations)
Mag. Heater Volt ADJ.：（J833-#11）

R28 (Maｇ. H)
マグネトロン
MG5439 R32 (Mag. L)
J833
R62（ADJ）
（MIC TUNNIING,
+32 V at J833#6）
マグネトロン
MG4010 or MAF1425B
- 03P9348A: 12 kW
- 03P9348B: 25 kW
- 03P9348C: 30 kW （S-Band）
R57 (-12 V at J833-#1)
Fig. 11.8.12 PWR(RF) Board (03P9348)
11-29
11.8 Scanner Unit
J823 (IF Output)

J824 (IF Output)
Fig. 11.8.13 IF AMP Board (03P9335A)
60 MHz IF Output
VR1 (Power)
Used to adjust magnetron
current at factory.
03P9244A: X band 10 kW
03P9244B: X band 25 kW
03P9244E: S band 30 kW
Fig. 11.8.14 MD Board (03P9244A/B)
11-30
11.8 Scanner Unit
MD Board
（03P9244B）
Pulse Transformer
(RT9023)
Magnetron
(MG5436)
Fig. 11.8.15 RTR-079 (25 kW)
MD Board
（03P9244A）
Magnetron
(MG4010 or MAF1425B) Pulse Transformer
(RT9025)
Fig. 11.8.16 RTR-078 (10 kW)
11-31
11.8 Scanner Unit
11.8.2 S-Band (2 Unit type)
Performance Monitor Antenna
Antenna Motor (SW)

Cable Gland
Fig. 11.8.17 RSB-098
IF AMP Board
(03P9335B) with
shield cover removed
MIC (RU-9427)
TB Board (03P9349A)
Antenna Motor
(RM-7398)
Fig. 11.8.18 RSB-098 with Cover Removed
11-32
11.8 Scanner Unit
TB Board (03P9349A)
Fig. 11.8.19 RSB-098 with TB Board Removed
Performance Monitor Antenna
PM-51
Diode Limiter
Fig. 11.8.20 RSB-098 with MIC Removed
11-33
11.8 Scanner Unit
Antenna Motor Power

Supply Terminal
RFC Board
(03P9346-33A)
Fig. 11.8.21 RSB-098 with Cover Removed
MSS-7497 Board
PWR (RF) Board (03P9348C)
Fig. 11.8.22 RSB-098 with RFC Board Chassis Removed
11-34
11.8 Scanner Unit
MD Board Magnetron (MG5223F)

（03P9244E）
Pulse Transformer (RT9273)
Fig. 11.8.23 RSB-098 with Shield Cover Removed
Magnetron Cooling Fan
Fig. 11.8.24 RSB-098 with Magnetron Removed
11-35
11.8 Scanner Unit
Antenna Motor SW
Circulator
Fig. 11.8.25 RSB-098 with Pulse Mounting Chassis Removed Transformer and MD Board
Ｂ.ＰＧEN Board (03P9347)
Fig. 11.8.26 RSB-098, Rotary Joint
11-36
11.8 Scanner Unit
Antenna Motor Mounting Plate

MD Board
Antenna Motor
(MSS-7497 Board Removed)

TB Board
Fig. 11.8.27 RSB-098 Antenna Motor
11-37
11.9 Radar Console
11.9 Radar Console

600
- CCN-003 (23-inch Display)

- CCN-004 (20-inch Display)
* The dimension of both consoles
is the same.
1100
960
570
Fig. 11.9.1 CCN-003
Fig. 11.9.2 CCN-004
11-38
11.9 Radar Console
RPU-016
EC-1000C
Fig. 11.9.3 Cover Removed Fig. 11.9.4 Cover (Rear panel) Removed
RPU-016
Mounting part of
B-Adapter LAN-Adapter
Wiring
Fig. 11.9.5 EC-1000C with Cover Removed
11-39
11.9 Radar Console
Fig. 11.9.6 EC-1000C Removed
HUB-100
PSU-008
PR-62
Fig. 11.9.7 EC-1000C, Top View
11-40
11.9 Radar Console
Fig. 11.9.8 Console, bottom view
11-41
Chapter 12. 12.1
Maintenance
Checking LAN Connections
12.1 Checking LAN Connections
No.2 FCR-2xx7
•RPU-016: 172.31.3.7
•EC-1000C LAN-1: 172.31.3.34
•EC-1000C LAN-2: 10.0.0.185
•No.1 LAN Adapter: 10.0.0.196
No.1 FCR-2xx7 LAN •No.2 LAN Adapter: 10.0.0.197
IP: 172.31.3.6
LAN-1
IP: 172.31.3.33
LAN-1
LAN-2
LAN-1 IP: 10.0.0.184
LAN-2 No.1 LAN Adapter

IP: 10.0.0.194
Option
Option
CH4
Note: LAN cables

Since the HUB-100 has the MDIX
function, either cross or straight cables
can be used for LAN connections. B Adapter
If the HUB-100 is not used, use cross No.2 LAN Adapter
cables for LAN connections. IP: 10.0.0.195
Fig. 12.1.1 Typical LAN Connection
12-1
12.1.1 Checking LEDs

1. LED for EC-1000C
Make sure that the LED (green) in the LAN connector for the EC-1000C is blinking. If
the LED is not blinking, this trouble does not result from IP address setting, but from
electrical defect. For example, a defect in LAN cable or machine failure is supposed.
LAN-2: 10M bps (LAN Adapter)

Green (data): Blinking / Orange: OFF
LAN-１: 100M bps (RPU-016)

Green (data): Blinking / Orange: Lit
2. LEDs on HUB-100
LEDs of ports connected to LAN light up or blinking.
3. LEDs on NET-100 of RPU-016
NET-100 100BASE-T
(RJ-45)
CR1 (LED-B):
(Blinking while LAN is connected)
CR2 (LED-A):
(Blink when data exist on LAN)
12-2
12.1.2 Ping Command

You can check the connections of LAN Adapter, RPU-016 and EC-1000C to LAN by
using the Ping command. If you receive no response from the destination, check IP
addresses.
Procedure
1. Referring information on page 2-1, exit the Chart Radar, and then select [Start] ->
Programs -> Accessories -> Command Prompt to open the window Command
Prompt.
Programs Accessories Command Prompt
2. For example, to check LAN connection to No. 1 LAN Adapter of No. 1 FCR, type
the IP address of No. 1 LAN Adapter in the Ping command following C:¥ ----------- >.
In other words, typing “Ping 10.0.0.194”, and then pressing [Enter] key will display
response from the destination.
Unit IP address Remark

No.1 Chart Radar 172.31.3.6 Make Radar No. setting on the
No.2 Chart Radar 172.31.3.7 RPU-016 side.
RPU-016 No.3 IMO Radar 172.31.3.8 ([Menu] -> INITIALIZE->
INSTALLATION -> RADAR
No.4 IMO Radar 172.31.3.9
NO)
No.1 LAN Adapter 10.0.0.194
No.1 EC-1000C Make IP setting of LAN
Adapter.
No.2 EC-1000C For detail, see page 9-7.
No.1 EC-1000C LAN 1 Port 172.31.3.33 Make network settings of
No.1 EC-1000C LAN 2 Port 10.0.0.184 LAN-1 and -2 Ports.
No.2 EC-1000C LAN 1 Port 172.31.3.34 For detail, see pages 8-10 and
No.2 EC-1000C LAN 2 Port 10.0.0.185 10-3.
12-3
Note:
Even with “Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA communication (LAN)” Connected parameter
in the Installation Parameter menu set to “NO”, LAN connection statuses can be
checked by using the Ping command.
In other words, when LAN is connected, “Reply” will be made from the RPU-016.
Case-1) LAN is connected to the RPU-016: OK
Reply from 172.31.3.6

Reply from the RPU-016
(172.31.3.6) has been received.
Case-2) LAN is not connected to the RPU-016: NG (Disconnect/IP Error)
Destination host unreachable
12-4
Case-3) LAN is connected to the LAN Adapter: OK
Reply from 10.0.0.194

Reply from the LAN Adapter
(10.0.0.194) has been received.
Case-4) LAN is not connected to the LAN Adapter: NG (IP Error)
Request timed out
12-5
Case-5) LAN is not connected to the LAN Adapter: NG (LAN Disconnect)
Hardware error
Reference:
To check the configuration of the LAN port of EC-1000C, type “ipconfig /all”. For
detail, see page 10-8.
12-6
12.2 Checking LAN Adapter and B-Adapter

12.2.1 LAN-Adapter (EC-1010) Check the LAN module for operation
Normal mode: ON/OFF every 1 second
LAN module
(i-7188EX)
LAN connection port
Not used
TX1, 3, 4, 5 LED J16

(Check for TX) RS232C port
J17 (Setting port)
J14
J15
RX1-8 LED D43
(Check for RX) (Check for +15VDC)
D44
(Check for +5VDC)
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7
(T/RX) (T/RX) (T/RX) (RX)
D42
(Check for +24VDC)
CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8 Power supply

(RX) (T/RX) (RX) (RX) connection terminal
(+24VDC)
RL2*
(Any ECDIS alarm)
RL1∗
(Operator fitness)
Fig. 12.2.1 LAN Adapter RL3∗
(Backup navigator)
12-7
1. LEDs in LAN-Adapter
LED Function Operation Remark

D34 RX1 This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH1. J1:TX/RX
D41 RX2 This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH2. J2: RX
D38 RX6 This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH6. J6: RX & RL1
1st LAN-Adapter: Operator fitness
D49 RL1 J6: RX & RL1
2nd LAN-Adapter: Waypoint approach
1st LAN-Adapter: Any ECDIS alarm:
2nd LAN-Adapter: Outside channel limit
1st LAN-Adapter: Backup navigator:
2nd LAN-Adapter: Depth below limit
D45 TX1 This LED lights up by output signal of TX CH1. J1:TX/RX
D42 +24V This LED is used to check +24V power supply output.
Note:
1. The LEDs RX1 to RX8 are used to check whether or not signal is input and
have nothing to do with the setting of the Connected parameter in the
Installation Parameter menu to Yes or No. To check input data, see page 12-14.
2. For detail of the functions RL1 to RL3, see page 5-10.
3. To check output data on TX1 to TX5, see page 12-14.
2. LEDs on LAN Module

Normal mode : ON/OFF every 1 second
LAN-Adapter program mode : ON rapidly
3. Jumper setting
Setting for setting change

Jumper Factory set value
(Program mode)
J14 TXD1 side TXP side
J15 RXD1 side RXP side
J16 Between INIT and INT H Between INIT and GND
J17 Between CTS1 and CTS1 H Between CTS1 and GND
12-8
12.2.2 B Adapter (EC-1020)
LEDs
+5V
12ISO DC/DC Power
+15V supply (+15VDC)
+24V
IN 1-16
OUT DC/DC Power supply
1-8 (+5V, +12VDC)
LOG
GYRO
The LEDs of 9pin Dsub

ports in (LAN Adapter connection)
operation light ALM OUTPUT
up. RL8 ------------------------------ -RL1
Power supply connection
terminal
(+24VDC) &
LAN Adapter connection
AIN5, 6
GYRO STO1-4 STI9-12
AIN1, 2
STI1-4
STO5-8 AIN7, 8
A1, 2 out
STI13-16
Log
AIN3, 4
STI5-8
Fig. 12.2.2 B Adapter
12-9
1. LEDs in B-Adapter
+5V +5V power supply display

12ISO +12V power supply display
GND Power supply display
+15V +15V power supply display
Received message indicator (Flashing every
−
1 second)
− Normally ON
− Software RUN (Blinking rapidly)
24V +24V power supply display
STI IN 1
STI IN 2
STI IN 3
STI IN 4
STI IN 5 EXT Navigation Equipment Status
STI IN 6
STI IN 7
STI IN 8
STI IN 9 ALM ACK

STI IN 10 BUZZER STOP
STI IN 11
STI IN 12
STI IN13
Not used
STI IN 14
STI IN 15
STI IN 16
ALM OUT 1 Not used

ALM OUT 2 Route monitor: Outside Channel Limit
ALM OUT 3 Route monitor: Way point approach
ALM OUT 4 Echo sounder below limit
ALM OUT 5 Backup navigation ALM
ALM OUT 6 Navigation sensor ALM
ALM OUT 7 Operator fitness
ALM OUT 8 Any ECDIS ALM
Forward
LOG
Astern
Reference
Phase 3
GYRO
Phase 2
Phase 1
12-10
12.3 Checking LAN Signal

Press the [TAB] key while pressing the [Alt] key on the keyboard to select “LANINS”.
The “LANINS: display 0 (Press S, D, or C)” screen will appear.
Every time the [TAB] key is pressed,

the icon of application to be executed
is changed.
LANINS
Pressing the D or S key will change items to be displayed.

1. List of operation keys
- D and S: Used to change display items
(change to the previous or the next page).
- F and G: Used to change display contents of the item selected
(change to the previous or the next page).
- T: Used to select Tx or Rx data.
- P: Used to turn ON or OFF the screen pause.
- R: Used to move to the first and last display contents of the item
selected.
- C: Used to clear display contents.
- X: Used to close the TX Channel.
- J: Used to select mode for SIO Diagnostic.
- H: Used to select mode for SIO Diagnostic.
12-11
2. List of display items

The following section lists display items. Terms inside the parentheses represent valid
operation keys for item selected. A description below an item represents the contents of
the relevant item, respectively.
1. Display 0 (Press S, D, or C)
2. Nav. Equipment (Press S, D, or C)
3. Kalman (Press S, D, F, G or C)
F/G --> Kalman, Kalman 16 to Kalman 1
4. Gyro (Press S, D, or C)
5. Log (Press S, D, or C)
6. Position (Press S, D, or C)
7. Weather (Press S, D, or C)
8. Analog (Press S, D, or C)
9. Propulsion & Rudder & Engine (Press S, D, or C)
10. Draught & Alarms & AMWSS Basic (Press S, D, F, G or C)
F/G --> Basic, Alarm Relay counters, Relays
11. Steering (Press S, D, F, G or C)
F/G --> Basic, TrackLogic, TurnLogic, CurvedEBL, AlarmProcvess, Drift, Radius
for Rout
12. Trackpilot (Press S, D, F, G or C)
F/G --> Basic, 7, Radius for Rout, Transfer to Local, Prigram Track, CurvedEBL,
Position prosess, Process
13. ARPA/Radar Overlay (Press S, D, F, G or C)
F/G --> 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, Radar Pverlay Translate table, Antenna ID from ARPA radar,
ARPA target source
14. ARPA Comm (Press S, D, F, G or C)
F/G --> Basic, Chart Align, User Chart, Not Exe, ARPA Frees process, LANdll
targets part2, Comm Err, LANdll targets part2, Msg to FURUNO
15. Reftgt (Press S, D, F, G or C)
F/G --> Basic, Process, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 1, Gyro Corr
16. Lanins Message ch1 RX (Press S, D, F, G, T, P, R, X or C)
F/G --> Ch32 RX(TX)∼Ch1 RX(TX), LANserial INS RX(TX), LANserial ARPA4
RX(TX) to LANserial ARPA1 RX(TX)
12-12
17. Lanins Protocol (Press S, D, F, G, T, P or C)

F/G --> Show alive msg, Shown version PAUSED, Use of UDP blocks PAUSED,
UDP blocks for priority 4 Adapter 1 to UDP blocks for priority 0 Adapter 1,
Protocol 15, Protocol 14, Shown all receive, Shown all send, Shown host msg,
LAN ADAPTER SHARING, Shown alive, Build config,
18. Radar Overlay (Press S, D or C)
19. Route Monitor (Press S, D or C)
20. SIO diagnostic (Press S, D, F, G, H, J, X or C)
F/G --> Chl 18 Mode 0 to Chl 1 Mode 0
21. AIS (Press S, D, F, G or C)
F/G --> Safety msg, RPC clients, Unkown msg, Target details, DeadRec process,
Freeze process, Received msg, Basic, 15, 14, 13, Target List, Guard Zone, Fusion,
Harmonized Safety msg, Own vessel
22. SpeedPilot (Press S, D or C)
23. INS connections (Press S, D or C)
24. SIO386 Development Debug Msg (Press S, D or C)
25. INS connections 1 (Press S, D or C)
26. INS connections 2 (Press S, D or C)
27. ECRif INS (Press S, D or C)
28. IMO arpa (Press S, D, F, G or C)
F/G --> Basic, Uchart line 41..60, Uchart line 21..40, Uchart line 1..20, Uchart
symbols, Route sync
12-13
3. Verifying data on RX Channel of LAN Adapter

For example, to check sentenses input from GPS when GPS is connected to the CH1 of
LAN Adapter, select “Lanins Messages Ch1 RX”.
Data on the channel 1 can be verified in real time.
Setting the Channel Connection (Connected) parameter in the Installation Parameter
menu to “No” will display nothing even if data are input.
Reference-1;
Example of data on LANINS: Lanins Messages Ch (with GPS connected)
RX data
Reference-2;
Example of data on LANINS: AIS (Displayed regardless of whether the AIS Function
is set to ON or OFF)
12-14
12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C

Procedure for putting EC-1000C into Selftest mode
Select [Main menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS (Bar menu) -> Selftest,
and then press OK. The SELF TEST screen will appear. Click on a test item to start the
relevant test.
1. Version Numbers
Used to display installed program versions.
- EC-1000C : 05.xx 05.xx
The EC-1000C program number appears on the right-hand side, while the LAN
Adapter program number appears on the left-hand side.
Normally, the same number appears on each side.
- ARPA CPU : 0359204-02.xx
The program of SPU board of the RPU-016 appears.
- ARPA RFC : 0359202-01.xx
The program of RFC board of the RF unit appears.
- Control Head : 359203-01.xx
The program of RCU-020, RCU-016, and RCU-015FEA appears.
12-15
2. Analog
This test is conducted to check suitability for reading the input signal and analog signal
of the B-Adapter.
Unless the “B-Adapter connected” parameter out of General setting in the Installation
Parameter menu is set to “Yes”, this test becomes invalid and all items are left blank.
For example, even if a short circuit is established between ST11 and GND, the items
will be left blank.
1. STI1 to STI16:
When status input (STI) checked by the B-Adapter is connected to GND, the status
turns ON from OFF, thus indicating that the input of the relevant terminal has been read.
The status inputs can be also checked by the LEDs (IN 1 to 16) in the B-Adapter.
2. A1IN to A8IN:
These items display analog voltages input in the B-Adapter. With nothing connected to
the B-Adapter, the voltages fluctuate in the range of ±0.00 to 0.07V.
Since applying an analog voltage to AxIN to check will display the corresponding
voltage, it turns out that an analog signal of the relevant terminal has been read.
3. Alarm
This test is conducted to check suitability for the alarm output control of the LAN
Adapter (RL1 to 3) and the B-Adapter (STO1 to 8).
STO1 to STO8 outputs of the B-Adapter are not displayed unless the “B-Adapter
connected” parameter out of General setting in the Installation Parameter menu is set to
“Yes”.
12-16
1) STO1 to STO8:
Setting the radio button to ON/OFF will turn ON/OFF the corresponding STO
(status output) of the B-Adapter. The status outputs can be also checked by the
LEDs (OUT 1 to 8) in the B-Adapter.
2) 1/RL3 to 1/RL1:
Setting the radio button to ON/OFF will turn ON/OFF the corresponding RT
output of the LAN-Adapter. The status outputs can be also checked by the LEDs
in the LAN-Adapter.
(LED D49 -> RL1, LED D50 -> RL2, LED D51 -> RL3)
Set the radio button

to ON/OFF
B-Adapter LAN Adapter

STO1 to STO8 check LEDs RL1 to RL3 and their check LEDs
LED (OUT 1-8)
12-17
4. CPU and Memory

This test is conducted to display CPU and memory information.
5. Display
Clicking on an item selected will clear the Display menu from the screen and display
the relevant item on the whole screen.
To display the Display menu, put the pointer outside the Display menu display area.
See next page.
12-18
Draw each item in the

specified color.
To clear the drawing, click
Clear.
Draw each item by the

specified line.
Clear.
Draw each item by

changing the intensity of
the specified color.
Clear.
12-19
6. Drivers
This test is conducted to display Information on Hard, Floppy, and CD-ROM drives
available.
7. Network
This test is conducted to display Information on Network adapter and protocol
available.
12-20
8. Control Head
Pressing any of the keys will cause the display corresponding to the key to respond.
Check EBL, VRM, GAIN A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, BRLL, trackball, and scroll wheel with
increase or decrease of the relevant figure.
In addition, this test includes the following tests.
1) ALARM BUZZER ON/OFF:
This test is conducted to check ON/OFF of the alarm buzzer. To check that, click
the ALARM BUZZER key displayed.
2) SYSTEM FAILURE OFF:
This test is conducted to check the system failure buzzer.
Pressing the SYSTEM FAILURE key will output the system failure buzzer after
a lapse of 30 seconds.
Pressing the SYSTEM FAILURE key again will stop the buzzer sounding.
Reference:
The System Failure signal is output at normal close contact interlocking
with the System Failure signal between #1 and #2 of J507 of the operation
unit (RCU-020).
9. Exit Test
Used to exit the test mode. This display returns to the Mode screen from which the
Selftest was commenced.
12-21
12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

To conduct the Selftest on the Radar side, connect the Monitor unit to the RPU-016:
Radar Processor unit. For the Motor unit, it is only needed to change the connection.
Do not disconnect LANs connected between EC-1000C and LAN Adapter, and
EC-1000C and RPU-016.
Note:
Connection between the [RADAR UNIT] port of the EC-1000C and the [KEY]
connector of the RPU-016 is made for the power supply switch signal of the
RPU-016.
Since the RCU-014 is connected to the [KEY] connector, even if the power supply
of RCU-020 is turned ON, that of the RPU-016 will not be turned ON. Turn
ON/OFF the power supply from each processor unit.
Change wiring.
DVI
TB board: KEY
DVI
DVI-1
RADAR UNIT
Disconnect wiring
CONTROL HEAD
RPU-016 Power ON
Add RCU-014.
XH 10P 9 Pin D-sub Female
KEY TXD_B 1 1 KEY TXD_B
KEY TXD_A
KEY RXD_B
2
3
2
3
KEY TXD_A
KEY RXD_B
Reference:
KEY RXD_A 4 4 KEY RXD_A To connect the RCU-020 to the RPU-016, use
PWR SW 5 5 PWR SW
GND 6 6 GND
the “9pin D-sub (Male) <-> XH10P” conversion
+12V 7 7 +12V adapter manufactured as shown on the left.
GND 8 8 GND
SYS_FAIL_H 9 9 NC
SYS_FAIL_C 10
The Selftest has two functions. One is to be conducted from the normal operation. The
other is a factory test entering from Option Menu. The contents of these tests are the
same as those of the FAR-2xx7 series.
This Manual describes Selftest needed to perform minimum maintenance. For detail,
refer to information in the Service Manual of the FAR-2xx7 series.
12-22
12.5.1 Normal Selftest

Procedure
1. Select [MENU] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2 ->2: START to conduct the Selftest.
2. An alarm will sound and the screen shown below will appear.
This screen is used to check program number, the monitor of the processor unit and
RF unit, and keys.
<SELF TEST>
PROGRAM No. ROM RAM DIP SW
SPU 0359204-02.xx OK OK 0100
RFC 0359202-01.xx OK OK Check the program number,
KEY 0359203-01.xx OK OK
REMOTE1 0359203-01.xx
ROM/RAM, and DIP switch.
* * * *
REMOTE2 0359203-01.xx * * * *
CARD 0359209-01.01 * * * * * * * *
PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR
-12V -12V
3.3V 3.2
5V 4.8
12V 12.0 PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR
SCANNER MOTOR 22.5
RF UNIT MONITOR
TEMPERATURE 33.2
TUNE IND 1.3
HV 517.4
R.MONITOR 1.4
MAG CURRENT 2.5
HEATER 4.1
12V 11.9
-12V -11.5
RF UNIT MONITOR
5V 4.8
32V 31.6
TUNE OUT 15.0
TRIGGER FREQ 1058
ANT SPEED 22.3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ARPA CPU DISPLAY Key check
28 0
88 0
To quit press [F1] key twice
Typical Selftest Monitor Screen
3. To proceed to the next screen, press the [F1] key twice.
12-23
4. The screen shown below will appear. Pressing the [F1] key again will make it
possible to check input sentences on the second page.
<SELF TEST> <SELF TEST>
<GPS1> <AIS>
GGA VDO
GLL VDM
RMC <INS>
RMB ZDA ECZDA, 0601156.15.24, 01, 2008, 000, 00*4C
VTG GGA
ZDA GLL ECGLL, 3444.458, N, 13521.259, E, , A, A*5F
DTM OSD ECOSD, 000.0, A, 025.8, P, 00.1, P, , , N, 00.0, V*2B
DPT ECDPT , , *46
BWR
BWC [F1] MWV ECMWV, , T, , V*2A
<GPS2> DTM ECDTM, W84, , 00.000, S, 00.000, E, -000.0, W84*4E
GGA FUGLL FUGLL, 3444.481, N, 143521.258, E, A, 000.0*28
GLL PAESP PAESP, V, 0000.000, 000.0*1D
RMC PAESC PAESC, , , , , , , , , N*26
PAESF
RMB
PLSPL PLSPL, , , , , , , , , , 999, *46
VTG
PLSPS PLSPS, , , , , 999, , *59
ZDA
PAESW PAESW, , , , , , 6, , ,V*1C
DTM
PAESN
BWR

BWC
<SPEED>
VBW
VHW
VDR
<HEADING>
HDT
<NAV DATA> There are no restrictions on the
WPL
RTE display of input sentences
MWV ECMWV, , T, , N, V*2A
VWT depending on versions.
VWR
DPT ECDPT, , *46
DBT
DBS
MTW
VDM
To quit press [F1] key
Typical Selftest NMEA Check Screen
5. After the completion of this check, press the [F1] key to return to the Selftest main
menu screen.
Display of program numbers

Selftest Items
The same program is available for any model of radars, such as S band or X band radar.
Program
Display Available program
number
SPU PROCESSOR UNIT (SPU BOARD: MAIN、ARPA、DRAW CPU) 0359204-02.xx
RFC TRANSCEIVER UNIT (RFC BOARD: RFC CPU) 0359202-01.xx
KEY STANDARD CONTROL UNIT: RCU-020
REMOTE 1 TRACKBALL UNIT: RCU-015FEA 0359203-01.xx
REMOTE 2 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT:RCU-016
CARD CARD I/F UNIT: CU-200 0359209-01.xx
12-24
ROM/RAM, DIP Switches

ROM and RAM are checked when the Selftest and factory test are conducted. RAM is
checked by the Read/Write function, while ROM is checked by the Check-sum
function.
Important: DIP Stitches
DIP switches are used to display the set status of the SPU board: S1. For the Chart
radar specification, the DIP switch S1-#3 must be set to ON. Setting it to OFF will
disable the function as Chart radar.
Furthermore, “Connection Lost ARPA CPU” error is displayed on the EC-1000C
side.
However, since LAN is connected, position data from the EC-1000C can be received,
and further HDG data from the RPU-016 are output to the EC-1000C side.
FCR-21x7 FCR-28x7
S1
(MU-201CE): SXGA (MU-231CE): UXGA
#1 OFF (N/A) ON (N/A)
#2 OFF (N/A) OFF (N/A)
#3 ON ON
#4 Not used Not used
Note:
For example, if “0100” is displayed, S1-#3 is set to ON and other DIP switches
are set to OFF. In other words, S1-#1 represents the rightmost DIP switch, and
“0” means that the switch is in the OFF state.
S1 (DIP SW)
Arrangement of DIP Switches on CU-200/SPU Board
12-25
PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR

This is a voltage monitor for the Processor Unit RPU-016.
Processor Unit Monitor Circuit Diagram
Displays on Processor Unit Monitor
Display Description
-12V Used to display −12V output from the 3-pin power supply on the PWR board.
Used to display 3.3V output, which is generated by converting 5V output from the PWR
3.3V
board through the SPU board.
5V Used to display 5V output from the PWR board, which is set within the range of ±5%.
Used to display 12V output from the PWR board, which is regulated within the range of
12V
±5% by R26.
Used to display ANT MOTOR voltage output from the PWR board if the Antenna motor
is designed for 24V. The Antenna motor power supply incorporates a feedback circuit
that detects Antenna motor revolutions to keep the revolutions constant. Consequently,
the voltage values vary with wind pressure received by the Antenna or voltage drops
SCANNER
caused by the Antenna cable. The voltages normally range from 21V to 27V.
MOTOR
Note: 24V Antenna motor power supply output from the PWR board of the RPU-016 is
also output from both S- and X-band Radars. However, since the S-band Radar
does not use this power supply on the Antenna side, an approximately 0V voltage
is displayed.
RF UNIT MONITOR
This is a monitor of voltages detected by the transceiver unit.
Monitor values are detected under the current set conditions such as range and pulse
width, and thereby TRIGGER FREQ and MAG CURRENT monitor values and others
vary with ranges.
TEMP OUT AD
U20
TEMP sensor RFC p.c.,b
R.MON(D MON) AD
RU MIC
IF TUNE
A/D
TUNE IND AD
Antenna IF AMP p.c.b TUNE
From/To SPU pc.b
32V AD
U19: U17: RF RXD
12V AD
Gate Arrey RFC CPU RF TXD
-12V AD
PWR p.c.b 5V AD
HEATER AD
TRIGGER 1-4
Mag. MD p.c.b
MAG CURRENT (MAG CURRENT LVL) AD
HV(HV PROTECT) AD
Pulse
Transformer
HD/BP ANT SPEED(B.P)
GEN p.c.b
Transceiver Unit Monitor Circuit Diagram
12-26
Displays on Transceiver Unit Monitor
Display Description
TEMPERATURE Used to detect the temperature of the RFC board.
Used to display TUNE detected voltage output from the IF AMP board. This
TUNE IND
voltage is used to Tune indicator the display unit.
Used to display HV voltage output from the TX-HV board of the processor unit.
HV This voltage is applied to magnetron. 10kW: 310 to 350V, 25kW or more: 520 to
580V
R.MONITOR Used to display Di monitor voltage from MIC.
MAG CURRENT Used to display magnetron current.
HEATER Used to display magnetron heater voltage output from the RF PWR board.
12V Used to display 12V voltage output from the RF PWR board.
-12V Used to display −12V voltage output from the RF PWR board.
5V Used to display 5V voltage output from the RF PWR board.
Used to display 32V voltage output from the RF PWR board.
32V
This voltage is used as power supply for the tune circuit of MIC.
TUNE OUT Used to display TUNE controlled voltage of MIC. This voltage varies with MIC.
TRIGGER Used to display transmit trigger frequency. This frequency varies from 450 Hz to
FREQ 3,000 Hz with pulse width or range.
Used to find antenna motor revolutions from bearing pulse detected by the
H.D/B.P board.
ANT SPEED
The revolutions come to 24/42 rpm at the X band and 21/26/45 rpm at the S
band, which varies with the type of gearbox.
Examples of actual measurement

** FAR-2x27, 2827W **
L: 48NM M2: 6NM M1: 3NM S2: 1.5NM S1: 0.125NM

TUNE IND 1.6 1.6 1.5 0.7 1.0
R MONITOR 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9
MAG CURRENT 4.6 3.6 2.8 2.5 1.9
HEATER 1.4 1.4 1.7 1.7 1.7
TUNE OUT 16.0 16.0 16.3 16.2 16.2
** FAR-2x37S, 2837SW **
L: 48NM M2: 6NM M1: 3NM S2: 1.5NM S1: 0.125NM

TUNE IND 1.5 1.7 1.6 1.4 2.6
R MONITOR 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3
MAG CURRENT 4.3 3.9 3.2 2.7 2.0
HEATER 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8
TUNE OUT 9.9 10.0 10.1 10.1 9.8
Note:
On the RF monitor, HEATER displays 1.4V voltage, but the actual heater voltage
ranges from 7.4V to 9.4V. The voltage is measured between J833-#11 and -#12 of the
RF PWR board.
12-27
Checking keys
Check panel keys.
Turning the rotary control and trackball will change the keys in the range of “0 to 255”.
Pressing a key will highlight the display of the corresponding key box.
Checking input sentences

Sentences to display are fixed and data on input sentences are displayed.
〈GPS1〉:
Data related to positions input from the [NAVIGATOR] port of the TB board are
displayed. The Chart radar does not display these data.
〈GPS2〉:
Data related to positions input from any port other than the [NAVIGATOR] port of
the TB board are displayed. The Chart radar does not display these data.
〈SPEED〉:
Data related to speed regardless of input ports are displayed. The Chart radar does
not display these data.
〈HEADING〉:
Data related to heading regardless of input ports are displayed. The Chart radar does
not display these data.
〈NAV DATA〉:
Data related to NAV regardless of input ports are displayed. The Chart radar displays
MWV and DPT sentences.
〈AIS〉:
Data from AIS are displayed. The Chart radar does not display these data.
〈ISN〉:
Data related to INS are displayed.
The Chart radar displays ZDA, GLL, OSD, DPT, MWV, DTM, FUGLL, PAESP,
PAESC, PLSPL, PLSPS, and PAESW sentences.
Note:
The setting of [Menu]->0->8->5:INS is made to LAN. However, setting that
to OFF will disable loading data from the EC-1000C.
12-28
12.5.2 Factory Test

Procedure
1. While pressing the [1:HL OFF] key, press the [2], [3], and [4] keys in the order
described.
2. The [Factory] menu will appear. Then, select “4. Factory test”.
The 〈FACTORY TEST〉 shown below will appear.
<FACTORY TEST>
PROGRAM No. ROM RAM DIP SW 1 2 3 BOARD
SPU 0359204-02.4x OK OK 0100 005C 0015 0006 2
RFC 0359202-01.3x OK OK 0008 002C
KEY 0359203-01.xx OK OK SPU Board Version 2:
REMOTE1 0359203-01.xx * * * *
Version 44 and later
REMOTE2 0359203-01.xx * * * *
CARD 0359209-01.01 * * * * * * * *
PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR FPGA Program No. and

RFC Board Version
-12V -12V
3.3V 3.2
5V 4.8
12V 12.0
SCANNER MOTOR 0.0
SIO
AIS - -
HDG - -
LOG - -
*NAV - -
Results of loop back test
TRK - - (Testing port requires jumpers.)
RS-232C - -
KEY_IO OK
RF_IO OK
ALARM_IO 1000
FACTORY TEST Screen
3. To exit this screen, press the [F1] key.
12-29
4. The buzzer will sound and the screen will turn to red (8 patterns).
Pressing the [F1] key will stop the buzzer sounding and display a green pattern.
Subsequently, every time the [F1] key is pressed, the screen will turn to blue, white,
and black. Then, pressing the [F1] key again will return the display to the former
screen.
Red pattern + Buzzer Green pattern
Blue pattern White Black
Screen Test
Contents of Factory Test:

FPGA Program Numbers and RFC Board Ver
FPGA Program Numbers of the SPU and RFC Boards are displayed
1 2 3 BOARD Display number

005C 0015 0006 2 FPGA Ver on SPU Board and SPU Board Ver
0008 002C RFC Board Ver and its FPGA Ver
FPGA Program Numbers and RFC Board Ver

SPU Board
Display 1 2 3
Ver
U12: U13: - 1: Ver-22
SPU U46: SPU FPGA Ver
Echo FPGA Ver DRW FPGA Ver - 2: Ver-44
RFC Display RFC Board Ver in hex U17: FPGA Ver
12-30
Loop Back Tests

Loop back tests on ports are conducted to determine the acceptance of input and output
ports. As shown below, make jumper settings for ports to loop back on the TB board of
the RPU-016.
SIO check items are changed sequentially. If the port for which jumper setting is made
is good, “OK” will be displayed. If it is abnormal, “−” will be displayed.
** AIS port test ** ** NAV port test **
J611 AIS J606 NAVIGATOR J619 ECDIS
AIS TD-A 1 NAV H 1 1 ARPA TD A
AIS TD-B 2 NAV C 2 2 ARPA TD B
AIS RD-A 3 N.C 3 3 GND
AIS RD-B 4
AIS COMMON 5
** TRACK port test ** ** HDG port test **
J620 TRACK CONTROL J621 SERIAL I/F J605 HDG SENSOR
TRK TD-A 1 RSV1 TD A 1 1 HDG A
TRK TD-B 2 RSV1 TD B 2 2 HDG B
TRK RD-A 3 GND 3 3 GND
TRK RD-B 4 RSV2 TD A 4
GND 5 RSV2 TD B 5
GND 6
** RS-232C port test ** ** LOG port test **
J601 RS-232C J621 SERIAL I/F J607 LOG
N.C 1 RSV1 TD A 1 1 LOG A
RS-232C RX 2 RSV1 TD B 2 2 LOG B
RS-232C TX 3 GND 3 3 N.C
N.C 4 RSV2 TD A 4
GND 5 RSV2 TD B 5
N.C 6 GND 6
N.C 7
N.C 8
N.C 9
Jumpers for Loop Back Tests
12-31
12.6 Replacing BIOS Battery on CPU Board of EC-1000C
12.6 Replacing BIOS Battery on CPU Board of EC-1000C

The life of the BIOS battery on the CPU board is 3 to 6 years. If this battery runs out,
the BIOS setting will return to its default.
When the following message appears at the start up of power supply, replace the BIOS
battery. When the battery is replaced, fix it with silicone rubber (KE-348T).
“Keyboard error or no keyboard present CMOS checksum error - Defaults loaded”
“Press F1 to continue, DEL to enter SETUP.”
Lithium battery: CR-2032

(Not less than 3V)
12.7 BIOS Setting

When the battery is replaced, the BIOS value has returned to its default. In this case,
make changes to the following settings.
For the procedure, refer to information in Chapter 13 “1. BIOS Setting”.
Load Optimized Defaults -> Initialize the BIOS setting, and then
1. Standard CMOS Features Halt on -> Set to “All, But Keyboard”;

2. Advance Bios Features -> Set to “First Boot Device: HDD-0”;
-> Set to “Second Boot Device: Floppy”;
3. Integrated Peripherals -> Set to “PWRON after PWR-Fail:
Former-Sts”
4. Integrated Peripherals -> Set to “USB Keyboard Support: Enable”;
and
5. Power Management Setup -> Set to “Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN: Delay 4 Sec”.
12-32
12.8 Replacing HDD of EC-1000C

Replacing HDD
Dismount the HDD cover, and then replace the HDD with a new one. The HDD is just
placed on the vibration dampener. To connect a HDD connector, be sure to follow the
instruction label affixed to the HDD cover. Use the red and black cables of the
connector for power supply line.
The red and black cables must

be used for the power supply
line and located far right.
Replacing with a HDD storing no applications for the Chart radar and turning ON the
power supply will display the BIOS screen shown below.
12-33
1. When replacing with a HDD storing no applications:

Referring information in Chapter 13, start with installation of the OS of Windows
XP.
Brief procedure:
Make BIOS setting -> Install the OS of Windows XP ->
Install various system drivers -> Make environmental setting ->
Make BIOS setting -> Install software for FCR-2xx7 ->
Make equipment setting
2. When replacing with a HDD storing application:

Make equipment setting in accordance with equipment configuration.
1) Make sure that equipment setting is made to No.1 or No. 2 EC-1000C.
Relevant information:
- “8.3 Verifying Registry File”
- If equipment setting is made to No. 2 EC-1000C or No. 2 LAN Adapter is
equipped, refer to information in “Chapter 8 Updating EC-1000C
Program” to update the EC-1000C program.
2) The Program Version of the LAN Adapter must correspond to that of the
EC-1000C.
- Refer to information in “Chapter 8 Updating EC-1000C Program”.
- Refer to information in “9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program”.
3) Verify network setting.

- Refer to information in “Chapter 10 EC-1000C Network Setting”.
4) Make installation parameters setting.

- Refer to information in “Chapter 5 Installation Parameters Setting”.
12-34
Chapter 13. Installation of13.Windows
Chapter XP
Installation of Windows XP
Preparation
Disconnect the LAN Adapter (LAN2) and the LAN (LAN1) from the Radar. In addition,
connect the mouse and the service keyboard to the EC-1000C.
1. BIOS Setting
1.1 Perform key operation on the service keyboard.
While pressing the [DEL] key, turn ON the power supply of the EC-1000C. Press
and hold the [DEL] key until the BIOS Setup screen appears.
> Standard CMOS Features

> Advanced BIOS Features
Load Optimized Defaults
1.2 Select “Load Optimized Defaults” on the BIOS Setup screen, and then press the
[Enter] -> [Y] -> [Enter] keys. The objective of this operation is to initialize the
BIOS setting.
1.3 Open the setting of “Advanced BIOS Features” on the BIOS Setup screen, make
changes to the settings shown below, and then save the change. Make these
setting changes using the [Pg Up] or [Pg Dn] key. The objective of these settings
is to select a drive from which the device is booted.
- First Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to CD-ROM
- Second Boot Device: Change from Floppy to HDD-0
- First Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to CD-ROM

- Second Boot Device: Change from FDD to HDD-0
13-1
1.4 Open the setting of “Standard CMOS Features” on the BIOS Setup screen, and
then verify / make a change to the setting shown below. The objective of this
setting is to output no error message even if the keyboard is unplugged.
- Halt on: Set to All, But Keyboard
1.5 Open the setting of “Integrated Peripherals” on the BIOS Setup screen, and then
verify and make a change to the setting shown below.
- PWRON After PWR-Fail -> Former-Sts
PWRON After PWR-Fail -> Former-Sts

(Final row)
1.6 Pressing the [F10] key will display the message “SAVE to CMOS and EXIT
(Y/N)?”. Then, press [Y] -> [Enter] key to save the set value.
1.7 By the operation shown above, the system is automatically rebooted. Insert the
“Recovery Disc for EC-1000C” CD into the CD drive, and then turn OFF the
power supply of the EC-1000C.
13-2
2. Loading Windows XP software

Following the procedure under the preceding section,
2.1 Turn ON the power supply of the EC-1000C.
2.2 When booting the system, press the [Enter] key while the message “Press any key
to boot from CDROM” is displayed on the screen.
2.3 After a period of time, the “Welcome to Setup” window will appear.
Welcome to Setup.
To set up Windows XP now, Press ENTER.
13-3
3. Formatting
3.1 Press the [Enter] key to start making Windows XP setting.
3.2 The “Windows XP Licensing Agreement” window will appear. Then, press [F8]
key to specify “I Agree”.
Windows XP Licensing Agreement.
3.3 The “Windows XP Professional Setup” window will appear. Then, press [Esc] key
to specify “Don’t Repair”.
Windows XP Professional Setup
F3=Quit R=Repair ESC=Don’t Repair
13-4
3.4 On the following “Windows XP Professional Setup” window, press the [Enter] key
to install “C: Partition1 [NTFS]”.
C: Partition1 [NTFS]
ENTER=Install D=Delete Partition F3=Quit
3.5 On the following “Windows XP Professional Setup” window, press the [C] key to
continue setting.
C=Continue Setup ESC=Cancel
3.6 On the following “Windows XP Professional Setup” window, select “Format the
partition using the NTFS file system (Quick)”, and then press the [Enter] key to
continue setting.
Select “Format the partition using the NTFS file system (Quit)”
ENTER=Continue ESC=Cancel
13-5
3.7 On the following “Windows XP Professional Setup” window, press [F] key to
initiate formatting the C drive.
To format the drive, press F.
F=Format ESC=Cancel
3.8 “Setup is copying files…” will be initiated. After the completion of copying, the
system will be automatically rebooted to also automatically initiate “Installing
Devices”. It takes approximately 10 minutes to complete this procedure.
“Setup is copying files…” is

complete.
Installing Devices
(It takes some time to
display this.)
13-6
4. Windows XP Setup
4.1 When the “Installing Devices” step is complete, the “Regional and Language
Options” window will appear.
Regional and Language Options
Customize
4.2 Click the Customize.. button, and then open the “Regional Options” tab. Select
“English(United States)” from the Language list and “United States” from the
Location list, and the click [OK] button.
Regional Options
English (United States)
[Location]
United States
13-7
4.3 The display will return to the “Regional and Language Options” window. Then
click the [Next] button.
4.4 The “Personalize your Software” window will appear. Type “ECDIS” in the Name
box, leave the Organization box blank, and then click the [Next] button.
Type ECDIS” in the Name box.
4.5 The “Computer Name and Administrator Password” will appear. Then, type
- “EC1000C-xxxx” in the [Computer name] box (“xxxx” represents the serial
number of the EC-1000C or equipment number);
- “ administrator” in the [Administrator password] box; and
- “administrator” in the [Confirm password] box.
After that, click the [Next] button.
Type “EC1000C-xxxx” in the Computer Name box.
- Type “administrator” in the Administrator password box.

- Type “administrator” in the Confirm password box.
13-8
4.6 Select “[GMT] Greenwich Mean Time: Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London” from
the Time Zone list.
Further, check “Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes”, and then
click the [Next] button.
Select “[GMT] Greenwich Mean Time: ”.
Check here.
4.7 Each set value will be automatically saved (the window will be switched one after
another). When saving is complete, the system will be automatically rebooted to
display the “Thank you for purchasing Microsoft Windows XP” Screen. It takes
approximately 15 minutes to complete this procedure.
“Thank you for purchasing Microsoft Windows XP”

Note: The window size is not correct.
The window will be

switched one after
another.
13-9
4.8 Click the [Next] button displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the “Thank
you for purchasing Microsoft Windows XP” screen.
[Next]: Displayed in the lower right-hand corner.

(If you cannot see this button, scroll the window.)
4.9 Check “Not right Now”, and then click the [Next] button.
Check “Not right Now”.
4.10 Type “ECDIS” in the [Your name] box, and then click the [Next] button displayed
in the lower right-hand corner of the window. Furthermore, click the [Finish]
button on the next window.
Type “ECDIS” in the Your name box.
[Finish]: Displayed in the lower right-hand corner.

[NEXT]
[Next]: Displayed in the lower right-hand corner.

13-10
4.11 Windows XP will be automatically booted.

Click X button to erase the pop-up box displayed.
Erase this pop-up box.
5. User Accounts Setting

5.1 Select Control panel -> User Accounts from the [Start] menu.
User Accounts
13-11
5.2 Click the icon for ECDIS Computer administrator, and then click on “Create a
password”.
5.3 Type “ecdis” in the “Type a new password” box and also “ecdis” in the “Type the
new password again to confirm” box, both in lower-case letters, and then click
the Create Password button.
Type a new password -> “ecdis”
Type the new password

again to confirm: -> “ecdis”
Create Password
13-12
5.4 Click the Yes, Make Private button.

Click X to erase dialogs displayed one after another, and then return the display to
Windows screen.
Erase windows displayed until

Windows screen appears.
Yes, Make Private
6. Installing System Driver

6.1 Replace the CD-ROM with the Chart Radar: FCR-2xx7 Software.
6.2 Select “Run” from the [Start] menu.
Start Browse
13-13
Installing Chipset Driver

6.3 Click the Browse… button to specify Chipset Driver from Browse.
To specify it, select Browse -> Desktop -> My Computer -> 05_4x (D:) ->
Support -> PCI-951 -> Chipset -> infinst_autol, and then click the Open button.
It is also acceptable to directly specify the file.
In this case, type “D:¥Support¥ PCI-951¥ Chipset¥ infinst_autol.exe”.
6.4 The display will return to the Run window. Then, click OK. The Chipset Driver
install wizard will be automatically booted. Follow the instruction displayed to
proceed with installation of the Chipset Driver.
6.5 On the “InstallShield(R) Wizard Complete” window, check the radio button for
“Yes, I want to restart my computer now”, and click the Finish button to complete
installation. Windows will automatically restart.
“InstallShield(R) Wizard Complete”
Check “Yes, I want to restart my computer now”.
Finish
13-14
6.6 When Windows is booted, type “ecdis” in the Password box, and then press the
[Enter] key. Windows screen will appear.
Type “ecdis”.
Installing VGA Driver

For installation procedure, follow the same procedure as 6.3 to 6.6 Installing
Chipset Driver.
6.8 Click the Browse… button to specify VGA Driver from Browse.
Support -> PCI-951 -> video -> win2k_xpm1141, and then click the Open button.
In this case, type “D:¥Support¥ PCI-951¥ video¥ inf win2k_xpm1141.exe”.
6.9 The display will return to the Run window. Then, click OK. The VGA Driver
proceed with installation.
6.10 On the “InstallShield(R) Wizard Complete” window, check the radio button for
“Yes, I want to restart my computer now”, and click the Finish button to
complete installation. Windows will automatically restart.
6.11 When Windows is booted, type “ecdis” in the Password box, and then press
13-15
Installing Network Driver

Chipset Driver.
6.13 Click on the Browse… button to specify Network Driver from Browse.
Support -> PCI-951 -> ethernet -> pro2kxpm, and then clock the Open button.
In this case, type “D:¥Support¥ PCI-951¥ ethernet¥ pro2kxpm.exe”.
6.14 The display will return to the Run window. Then, click OK. The Network Driver
License Agreement
Location to Save File
Check “I accept the terms in the license

agreement”, and then click [Next].
C:¥IntelPRO
Install now
Finish
13-16
Installing Audio Driver

Chipset Driver.
6.16 Click on the Browse… button to specify Audio Driver from Browse.
Support -> PCI-951 -> audio -> setup, and then click the Open button.
In this case, type “D:¥Support¥ PCI-951¥ audio¥ setup.exe”.
6.17 The display will return to the Run window. Then, click OK. The Audio Driver
6.18 On the “Install Shield Wizard Complete” window, check “Yes, I want to restart
my computer now”, and click on the Finish button to complete installation.
Windows will automatically restart.
6.19 When Windows is booted, type “ecdis” in the Password box, and then press the
13-17
7. Security Center Setting

7.1 Select Security Center from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu, and
then make the following settings.
- Set to Windows Firewall -> General -> “Off(nor recommended)”.
- Set to Automatic Updates -> “Turn off Automatic Updates”.
Security Center
Automatic Update Windows Firewall
To make setting, click this icon.
General
Check “Turn off Automatic

Check “Off (not recommended)”,
Updates”, and then click OK. and then click OK.
Automatic Update Windows Firewall
13-18
8. Switching Windows XP to Classic

8.1 Select Switch to Classic view from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu.
Switch to Classic view
Taskbar and Start Menu
8.2 Select Taskbar and Start Menu.

8.3 Click on the “Start Menu” tab, check “Classic Start menu”, and then click OK.
Start Menu
Classic Start menu
13-19
9. Computer name, Work group, and Virtual memory Setting

Computer name, Work group
9.1 Select System from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu.
9.2 Click on the “Computer Name” tab, and then the Change button.
9.3 Type “ecdis” in the [Workgroup] box, and then click OK.
In the Computer name box, “EC1000C-xxxx” that is the name registered in Step
4.5 is displayed.
Following the instruction on the window, restart the system once.
Computer Name
Change
Type “ecdis” in the Workgroup box.

ecdis
13-20
Visual Effects
Click the “Advanced” tab, and then click the Settings button in the Performance
box.
9.5 Open the “Visual Effects” tab.
9.6 Check “Custom:” to check off all items displayed in the box.
9.7 Click on Apply -> OK.
9.8 Following the instruction on the window, restart the system once.
When Windows is booted, type “ecdis” in the Password box, and then press the
Advanced
Visual Effects
Performance
Settings
Custom
Check off all items.
13-21
Virtual memory
9.10 Click the “Advanced” tab, and then click the Settings button in the Performance
box.
9.11 Open the “Advanced” tab.
9.12 Click the Change button in the Virtual memory box.
9.13 Check “No paging file”.
9.14 Click Set -> OK.
9.15 Following the instruction on the window, restart the system once.
When Windows is booted, type “ecdis” in the Password box, and then press the
Advanced
Settings
Check “No paging file”.
Change
13-22
10. Display properties

Display Tab Themes
10.1 Select Display from the
Windows Control Panel in the
[Start] menu. Display
10.2 Click on the “Themes” tab.
10.3 Select “Windows Classic”

from the “Themes:” menu, and Select Windows Classic.
then click Apply -> OK.
Screen Saver Tab-1

Screen Saver
10.4 Select Display from the Windows
Control Panel in the [Start] menu.
10.5 Click on the “Screen Saver” tab.
10.6 Select “(None)” from the “Screen saver”

menu, and then click Apply -> OK.
Select (None).
13-23
Screen Saver Tab-2

10.7 Select Display from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu.
10.8 Open the “Screen Saver” tab.
10.9 Click the Power button.
10.10 Open the “Power Schemes” tab, and then make the following settings.
- Power schemes : Home/Office Desk Presentation
- Turn off monitor : Never
- Turn off hard disks : Never
- System stand-by : Never
10.11 Click Apply -> OK.
Screen Saver
Power Schemes
Set to Power schemes -> Home/Office

Desk Presentation.
Make settings as follows.

- Turn off monitor -> Never
- Turn off hard disks -> Never
Power
- System stand-by -> Never
13-24
Appearance Tab-1
10.13 Click on the “Appearance” tab, and then make the following settings.
- Windows and buttons : Windows Classic style
- Color scheme : Windows Classic
- Font size : Normal
10.14 Click Apply -> OK.
Appearance
Make settings as follows.

- Windows and buttons
-> Windows Classic style
- Color scheme
-> Windows Classic
- Font size
-> Normal
13-25
Appearance Tab-1
10.16 Click on the “Appearance” tab, and then the Advanced button.
According to the set values listed in the table below, make settings of “Font:”
and “Size” by each “item:”.
10.17 After the completion of settings, click OK, and then the Apply button.
Appearance
Advanced
Set values
Item; Font: Font Size

Active Title Bar
Inactive Title Bar
Menu Arial Narrow 12
Message Box
Select Items
13-26
Settings Tab-1
10.19 Open the “Setting” tab, and then click the Advanced button.
10.20 Open the “Adapter” tab, and then click the List all Mode button.
10.21 Select “1280 by 1024, 256 Colors, 60 Hertz” from [List of valid modes].
10.22 Click OK. This window will disappear to return to the previous screen.
Settings
Adapter
List all Modes

Select “1280 by 1024, 256 Colors, 60 Hertz”.
Advanced
13-27
Troubleshoot Tab
10.23 Open the “Troubleshoot” tab.
10.24 Set the level bar for “Hardware acceleration” to 40%.
Settings
Troubleshoot
Set the level bar for “Hardware

acceleration” to 40%.
10.25 Click OK.
10.26 The Monitor Settings window will appear. Then, click the Yes button over until
Reverting in xx seconds is set to 0 seconds.
Counting down the time
13-28
11. Opening Windows Explorer to make C drive properties setting

[File] Menu setting
11.1 Press the [E] key while pressing the [Windows] logo key on the service keyboard
to open the Explorer window. Then, select “Local Disk (C:)”.
11.2 Select “Properties” from the “File” in the menu bar.
11.3 Open the “General” tab, and then check off “Allow Indexing Service to index this
disk for fast file searching”.
11.4 Clicking OK to display the “Conform Attribute Changes” window. Check “Apply
change to C;¥, subfolders and files”, and then click OK.
Settings
Check “Apply changes to C;¥, subfolders

and files”.
Check off “Allow Indexing Service to
index this disk for fast file searching”.
13-29
11.5 When the “Error Applying Attributes” window appears, click on the
Ignore All button.
Ignore All
11.6 Upon completion of setting, the display will return to the Explorer window.
[View] Menu Setting

11.7 Open Local Disk (C:) to select “Choose Details” from the “View” menu in the
menu bar.
11.8 Check the items shown below, and then click OK. The display will return to the
Explorer window.
X Name
X Size
X Type
X Date Modified
X Attributes
13-30
[Tools] Menu Setting-1

11.9 Select “Folder Options” from “Tools” in the menu bar.
11.10 Open the “General” tab to check “Use Windows classic folders” in the Task box,
and then click OK. The display will return to the Explorer window.
General
Check “Use Windows classic folders”.
[Tools] Menu Setting-2

11.11 Select “Folder Options” from “Tools” in the menu bar.
11.12 Open the “View” tab to check items of “Advanced settings:”. Check nine items.
13-31
View
Apply to All Folders
X Automatically search for network folders and printers

X Display file size information in folder tips
X Display simple folder view in Explorer’s Folders list
X Display the contents of system folders
X Display the full patch in the address bar
X Display the full patch in the title bar
◎ Show hidden files and folders
X Hide protected operating system files (Recommended)

X Show encrypted or compressed NTFS file in color
11.13 Clicking on Apply to All folders key

will display the “Folder views”
window. Then, click Yes and then
OK.
13-32
12. Returning BIOS setting to its original state

12.1 Turn OFF the power supply of the EC-1000C once.
12.2 While pressing the [DEL] key, turn ON the power supply of the EC-1000C. Press
> Advanced BIOS Features
12.3 Open the setting of “Advanced BIOS Features“ on the BIOS Setup screen, and
make changes to the settings shown below. Make these setting changes using the
[Pg Up] or [Pg Dn] key. The objective of these settings is to select a drive from
which the device is booted.
- First Boot Device: Change from CD-ROM to HDD-0
- Second Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to Floppy
- First Boot Device: Change from CD-ROM to HDD-0

At the same time, verify the following settings.

- Standard CMOS Features Halt on -> All, But Keyboard
- Integrated Peripherals -> USB Keyboard Support : Enable
- Power Management Setup -> Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN : Delay 4 Sec
13-33
12.4 Pressing the [F10] key will display the message “SAVE to CMOS and EXIT
(Y/N)?” Then, press [Y] -> [Enter] key to save the set value.
12.5 By the operation shown above, the system is automatically rebooted.
13. LAN setting

Following the procedure under the preceding section, and referring to information in
Chapter 10, make LAN1 and LAN2 settings.
14. Installing Chart Radar software

Following the procedure under the preceding section, and referring to information in
Chapter 6, install the software.
15. Permissions setting

15.1 When the Chart radar software is installed and the power supply is turned ON, the
Chart Radar window will appear.
15.2 Exit the Chart radar according to the procedure shown below.
1) While pressing the [Alt] key, press the [Tab] key over to select
“ECAWATCH”.
2) When the ECAWACH window shown below appears, click [Shutdown the
Chart Radar].
3) The Prompt window of Control Head will appear. Then, press the X button to
exit this window.
4) Press [F4] key while pressing the [Alt] key to display Windows screen.
13-34
15.3 Press the [E] key while pressing the [Windows] logo key on the service keyboard
to open the Explorer window.
15.4 Select Properties from the “ants_system” in Local Disk (C:).
15.5 Click on the Security tab, and then Click the ADD button. The “Select Users or
Group” window will appear.
15.6 Click the Advanced button on the “Select User or Group” window.
Ant_system
Local Disk (C:)

Security
Properties window of Ant_system
Add
Select User or Group window
Advanced
13-35
15.7 Click the Find Now button.
15.8 Select “Everyone” from the list displayed below, and click OK and then OK on
the previous window.
Find now
Select “Everyone”.
15.9 Check the items shown below (on the Allow side) in the “Permissions to
Everyone” box on the Security Tab window, and then click OK.
Security
Allow
X Modify
X Read & Execute
X List Folder Contents
X Read
X Write
13-36
16. Automatically Log On setting

Command Prompt
16.1 Select Run from the [Start] menu, type “cmd”, and then click OK.
Type “Cmd”.
16.2 The Command Prompt window (C:¥Documents and Settings¥ECDIS>) will

appear. Type “control userpasswords2” and then press the [Enter] key.
16.3 When the command is accepted, the “User Accounts” window will appear.
User Accounts
16.4 check off “Users must enter a user

name and password to use this
computer”, and then click Apply
-> OK.
Check off “Users must enter a user name and

password to use this computer”.
13-37
Automatically Log
16.5 The Automatically Log On window will appear. Type as shown below, and then
click OK.
- User name: ecdis
- Password: ecdis
- Confirm Password: ecdis
Type “ecdis” in all boxes.
This is the end of the installation of Windows XP.
13-38
Chapter 14. Q & A
Q1. Is the Chart radar available for the connection of Auto Pilot?
The Chart radar is not designed to connect it. The connection is restricted by the
Chart radar program.
Q2. Is the Chart radar available for the connection of Conning Display?
The Chart radar is not designed to connect it. The connection is restricted by the
Chart radar program.
Q3. Can the C Map be used?

As of February 2008, the C-MAP ed 3.0 chart cannot be used. Only the ENC
chart: S57 (ed3.0/3.1) can be used.
Q4. Let me know the maximum cable length between units.

- Between EC-1000C and Control unit: Max. 30 m
- Between RPU-016 and TR unit: Max. 100 m (300 m with RJB-001)
- Between EC-1000C and Display unit: Max. 10 m
(The maximum cable length under the DVI standard is 5 m. It is 10 m for
supplied cables. For further extension, you can use DVI-DVI repeaters that are
available on the market.)
- LAN cable: The maximum length for optional cables is 30 m.
Reference:
Under the 100BASE-T(100 Mbps) Standard, LAN cables are to be
Category 5 and the maximum length is to be 100 m.
Q5. Let me know how to connect the EG-3000.

You need to set [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> Page1 -> Dem
Echo to EG.
Q6. Let me know about HUB-100.

The HUB-100 has the Auto-MDIX specification for all ports and automatically
identifies cables connected. Consequently, while cross cable is used for LAN cable
between the EC-1000C and the RPU-016. HUB-100 enables to use either straight
or cross cable.
Q7. Why is the HUB-100 connected between the EC-1000C and the RPU-016?
The HUB-100 is necessary for using the Inter-switch function or connecting to No.
2 Chart radar or ECDIS. Furthermore, since using unauthorized HUB to connect to
external equipment may disable the system not to function as Chart radar, we have
incorporated the HUB-100 as part of the system.
14-1
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q8. The error massage [Permanent Warning : At least one of used charts
has more than 1 week----] is displayed. (6-22)
This message alert you that the chart in current use is using “Display Until” or
“Approved Until” having date different from the system date of this Marine Radar
by not less than one week.
To avoid this message displayed, you need to select “Set Chart viewing dates”
from the chart menu to set the expiration date of display to later than the current
date.
Q9. What menu can I use to change the background color of the window?
You need to select “Chart Display” in the guidance area, and select the Chart tab
from the “Chart Display” to make setting of a display color.
Q10. The mode status bar on the ECDIS window does not display “Route”.
(5-29)
You have selected [Menu] -> Initial Setting -> Installation Parameter, and then
made setting of the Device menu of Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication
(LAN) to “Own for Chart Radar with INS”. This setting is used to monitor the
Route prepared by INS: ECDIS.
Q11.Where can I make selection of the data box display? (2-9)

Putting the cursor in the data box and selecting “Select Sidebar” in the guidance
area will display the data box display selection menu. Then, select Route or
Conning.
Q12.Where can I find the menu to eliminate the MOB or the Event mark?
You need to execute [Menu] -> Recode -> Reset -> Voyage Log.
Q13.A big letter of “XX” is displayed on the screen. What does this mark indicate?
This mark indicates that the ARPA test is in progress. The ARPA test is included in
[Main Menu] -> Initial Settings.
Q14.The Inter-switch function does not work while in Chart Radar mode.
The Inter-switch function works only while in Radar mode.
Q15. What kind of functions do “Set Std Display” of [Main Menu] in ECDIS
mode and “Set Base Display” of [Main Menu] in Radar/Chart Radar
mode have?
These items have the function of returning windows set by Standard, Other1,
Other2, Target, Tracking, Route, and Mariner in the Chart Display menu to the
basic window.
14-2
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q16.What do the settings of Off, Std, and Oth in the Chart Display menu mean?
- Off: Used to turn OFF the function of the item selected.
- Std: Used to turn ON the function of the item selected when Standard Display is
valid.
- Oth: Used to turn OFF the function of the item selected when Standard Display is
valid.
Q17.When I try to open the Installation Parameter menu, “Cannot read

disk” is displayed.
“FD: Authorizing Key Disk” is required to open this menu.
You need to set this FD into the FDD.
For your reference, this key disk is common to FCR-2xx7 and FEA-2xx7.
Q18.“Unknown” is displayed in the Datum box under the position display

box.
You can make a change to Datum by Datum setting in [Menu] -> Initial Settings,
or by putting the cursor on the Datum display and scrolling it. Basically, the chart
should be used with the WGS-84 datum.
Q19.Where can I set whether or not to make Gyro correction? I cannot set
it by selecting [Menu] -> Sensor -> Other to “Gyro corr”.
“Gyro corr” is used to display a set value. For setting, you need to select [Menu]
-> Initial Settings -> Navigation Parameters -> Ship and Route parameters to
“Gyro correction”.
Q20.Can I save Route Plan data to a floppy disk and further edit the saved
dada on my PC? (2-52)
You can save data by Backup and Restore menu in the Route, User Chart, and
Pilot Data menu. Further, you can edit the Route data on your PC. For detail, refer
to Appendix 6 in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL of the FEA-2xx7 series.
Q21.Are Route, User Chart, and Pilot data displayed on Radar Mode window?
(2-4)
YES. You need to put the cursor on Route (User Chart, Pilot Data) in the status
menu bar on the window and select data you want to display.
Q22.Position data is displayed in red. What do letters inside the parentheses

by the SOG and COG display represent?
For detail, refer to AP2-34.
Q23.How does the system draw echoes?

It circulates echoes as data by 8x8 dots on the LAN. Consequently, when looking
carefully, you will find that echoes are not smoothly drawn as the FAR-2xx7 series,
but that echoes are drawn by block.
14-3
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q24.Can I make the cursor motion faster?

You need to exit the Chart radar mode to return the display to Windows screen first,
select Start -> Control Panel -> Mouse, open the Pointer Options page, and then
make adjustment of the cursor motion.
Q25.What is the Kalman filter?

The objective of the Kalman filter is to continuously monitor the positions
measured by individual sensors to determine the reliability of them. Gyro and
speed log selected are included in this analysis. As the result of processing through
the filter, you can smoothly monitor your ship position and use it as the final
position of your ship. Even if there is a position jump in a sensor, the filter will
eliminate this jump at the final position. (Position jumps are caused by the loss of
differential signal with DGPS or else.)
When the filter is set, an alarm will be given if the system has no effectively
available position data. As long as the filter can forecast a reliable position based
on position sensors selected, no alarms will be given even if a position jump takes
place in the position measurement sensor selected to use through the filter.
14-4
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q26.Please let me know about charts.

1) S57 ENC Chart
An electronic navigational chart (ENC) prepared under the S57 Standards
(e.g. metric system) by using new technologies such as GPS. This
navigational chart is an “Official Chart”, and obliged to be used for the
ECDIS in sea areas for which the ENC has been prepared. The Hydrographic
Office of each country is to take charge of preparing the relevant ENC for its
sea area. However, the ENC is only available for part of sea areas and has
not covered the whole world.
European countries use PRIMAR in Norway to prepare their ENC. Japan has
completed the ENC for its area.
2) ARCS Chart
ENC service provided by the British Admiralty. This service has been
computerized by taking paper hydrographic charts published by the B.A. as
an image.
The service covers sea areas all over the world except for some part of them.
The service includes slightly over 3,000 charts (saved on 11 CD-ROMs),
navigator service with weekly updating, and skipper service without
updating (not available for the chart radar).
3) C-MAP Chart
An ENC prepared by C-MAP Inc. in Norway through plotting the existing
paper hydrographic charts. This Chart covers sea areas all over the world
except for some part of them. The Chart includes slightly over 6,000 charts,
which are classified into 9 global data zones and saved on 3 CD-ROMs.
Types of charts Data format Data standard Publisher

Hydrographic Office of
S57 ENC Chart Vector S57 ed3 each country
ARCS Chart Raster (Image) British Admiralty
C-MAP Chart Vector C-MAP Inc.
Chart selection method

S57 ENC Chart and C-MAP Chart: Automatic selection (S57 is prioritized.)
Vector chart and Image chart: Selection by menu
Chart data conversion
To display a Vector chart you purchased, you need to convert data loaded
from the CD-ROM. The data converted is referred to as “SENC (System
ENC)”. The Raster chart requires no data conversion.
14-5
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q27.The system freezes. What measures do I need to take when the

system is slow in motion?
Please try to delete the “C:¥ ants_system” folder and reinstall the program. However,
since files such as Installation Parameters, Chart, Route, Pilot Data, and User Chart
are also deleted, you need to back up the these data beforehand.
Q28.Even if I turn ON the system power supply, the RPU-016 is not

powered on.
You need to check for the connection of the RADAR UNIT port (9 pin D-sub) of
the EC-1000C. This signal is a contact signal and connected to the J602-#5 and #6
(PWR SW) signal of TB board in the RPU-016.
Q29.Let me know what measures I need to take when I have replaced HD.
(12-33)
To use the HD for No.2 Chart Radar, you should rewrite IP addresses set for No. 1
Chart Radar into those for No. 2 Chart Radar. These addresses can be rewritten by
reinstalling the program. It can be done by rewriting Registry, however, we cannot
recommend this method because erroneous rewriting causes the system to
malfunction.
Furthermore, make sure that the program number of the LAN Adapter corresponds
to that of the Chart Radar. If NOT, you need to update the program of the LAN
Adapter.
Q30.Let me know what measure I need to take when I have replaced the
CPU board of the EC-1000C. (13-1)
You need to check for BIOS settings as shown below.
Initialize the BIOS settings with Load Optimized Defaults, and then set
1) Standard CMOS Features Halt on to “All, But Keyboard”;
2) Advanced BIOS Features to “First Boot Device: HDD-0” and “Second Boot
Device: Floppy”;
3) Integrated Peripherals to “USB Keyboard Support: Enable”;
4) Integrated peripherals to “PWRON after PWR-Fail: Former-Sts”; and
5) Power Management Setup to “Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN: Delay 4 Sec”.
14-6
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q31.Sensor data such as position data are not entered. (Chapter 12)
If no communication between the LAN Adapter and the EC-1000C, the error
message “4064 LAN fail for LAN Adapter” will be displayed. In this case, you
need to conduct the following;
1) Turn ON the LAN Adapter power supply again. In order to turn ON or OFF the
power supply, you may insert and remove the power supply input terminal.
2) Does the LED of the LAN Adapter input port turn ON in response to receiving
cycles? If NO, change the sensor connection port as a test. If the LED turns ON,
this problem results from faulty input circuit of the relevant port.
3) Is the LED of the LAN2 port of the EC-1000C blinkng? If NO, this problem
results from faulty LAN connection. In this case, check for the LAN cable
(cross cable).
4) Check for the LED of the LAN module. This LED normally flashes at intervals
of one second. While in program mode, the LED of the LAN mode is blinking
at quick intervals. In this case, check the LAN Adapter for jumper setting.
In addition, if the LED is kept ON or OFF, the problem results from the
malfunction of the LAN Adapter.
5) Check the Installation Parameters such as Connect, Adapter Channel, Device
Interface, and Talker for their setting.
6) Similarly, check for settings, such as sentences output from the sensor side and
talker names.
7) Check for IP addresses. The IP address of the LAN2 is “10.0.0.184”, while that
of the LAN Adapter is “10.0.0.194”. Use the Ping command to check for LAN
connection.
8) Select Run from the Start menu, and then type “regedit” in the Open box to
check for the Registry file. The device number of the LAN Adapter, i.e., “LAN
if adapter 1 ID” will appear. If Not, try to reinstall the program of the Chart
Radar.
9) Try to reinstall the LAN Adapter.
Q32.Please let me know the method for checking of B-Adapter. (12-9)

Connect the B-Adapter to CH4 of the LAN Adapter, and further set the
“B-Adapter connected” to “YES” using the General Setting in the Installation
Parameters menu.
You can check for the state with the TX-4 LED and RX4 LED of the LAN Adapter
flashing.
In addition, conduct Self test on the EC-1000C, i.e., analog and alarm tests by
selecting
[Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS(Bar menu) -> Selftest.
Q33.Navigation parameters cannot be saved.

You need to delete “C:¥ants_system¥params” folder, and then reinstall the
program.
14-7
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q34.The VRM and EBL do not smoothly move. Does this problem result
from faulty rotary encoder? Further, echoes do not smoothly switch
when I make range setting change.
This is not a failure. The Chart Radar is just slow in software processing.
Q35.How many hours of life the LCD of the display unit has?
The life of MU-201CE (CR) is 30,000 hours, and the life of MU-231CE (CR) is
35,000 hours, depending on its operating environments. You can consider the life
of LCD modules same as that of backlights.
Q36.Let me know how I can make setting and connection of alarm output
on the RPU-016 side (ARPA).
You need to use ARPA Alarm in the Installation Parameter menu. The alarm output
set with this menu is given to the alarm terminal of the RPU-016.
Q37.Since sensitivity seems to have degraded, I want to check for

magnetron current. How can I check?
You need to connect the control unit of the FAR-2xx7 to the RPU-016, replace the
EC-1000C motor unit with the RPU-016, and then conduct Selftest according to
the same procedure as that for the FAR-2xx7.
Q38.I replaced magnetron. Then, what shall I do?

You need to select [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> Page 2, and
then reset Tx time in the menu on page 2 to “0”.
Q39.The Radar displays no image. Further, the error message “Connection

Lost to ARPA CPU” is displayed.
Have you set the Dip SW1-#3 on SPU board of the RPU-016 to ON?
You also need to check for the IP setting of the LAN1 port and the setting of
“Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication(LAN)” in the Installation Parameters
menu.
Q40.What are the differences between data on “Conning Position” setting

made with the General setting in the Installation Parameters menu,
GPS position set with Position Equipment, and Own Ship info shown
on page 2 in the Radar Initialize menu?
These settings are equivalent. Set values are incorporated regardless of setting
methods.
To avoid any confusion, you are requested to make settings using the Installation
Parameters menu.
14-8
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q41.Can RPU-016 setting be made by selecting Initial Settings -> Radar

Initialize menu?
Both detailed ARPA setting and echo trail level setting are made on the RPU-016
side. Consequently, to make these settings, you need to connect the control unit
and display unit of the FAR-2xx7 to the RPU-016.
Reference:
The detailed ARPA setting means [ARP DATAIL DATA] setting on the ACQ
PRESET page included in the factory setting menu (1 -> 2, 3, and 4 keys).
Q42.No setting can be made even by changing the Radar number with the
Radar Initialize menu.
You cannot save settings on the Radar side unless you turn OFF then ON the
RPU-016 power supply again. When you made any Radar number setting change,
you need to make network setting of LAN-1 of the EC-1000C.
Q43.Where can I make adjustment of echo trail level?

This adjustment is not included in the Chart Radar menu. This adjustment is made
on the RPU-016 side. Consequently, you need to connect the Monitor and Control
unit to the RPU-016 and then make adjustment on the Radar side using the same
Trail iron menu as FAR-2xx7 series radars.
Q44.Do I need to connect GYRO data to the LAN Adapter?

The data cannot be connected to the LAN Adapter. You need to connect them to
the RPU-016. The data are saved in the AD format or 38.4kbps(IEC61162-2) in
case of serial data.
Q45.Could the Chart, Installation Parameter, Route, UChart, and Pilot Data
be deleted by updating the program?
NO. But you need to back up these data just in case.
Q46.ARPA targets are lost.

Have HDG data saved in the AD format or IEC61162-2: 38.4kbps?
If YES, you need to select [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> Page
3 and change the parameters on page 3. For detail, refer to information in the
SERVICE MANUAL for the FAR-2xx7 series.
In addition, you can make further detail settings on the RPU-016 side.
For this purpose, you need to put the system into Factory mode and then Initialize
mode to select 6: ARP PRESET -> 7 [ACQ PRESET] -> 6 [ARP DETEL DATA].
However, you should not make any setting change to parameters in these menus
unless otherwise specified.
Q47.Let me know the method for checking the input of serial data in the
LAN Adapter.
If the relevant LED of the connection port of the LAN Adapter keeps blinking, the
data have been input in the LAN Adapter.
14-9
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q48.Can I monitor Sensor data vs. Serial data?

You need to press over the [TAB] key while pressing the [Alt] key on the keyboard,
and then select “LANINS”. You will see the “LANINS: display 0 (Press S, D, or
C)” window. You can monitor these data on this window.
Q49.Let me know the method for checking the B Adapter.

To check each port for the control, you need to select [Menu] -> Initial Settings ->
INITIAL SETTINGS -> Selftest menu, and then conduct Alarm and Analog tests.
Q50.I connected the monitor to the RPU-016 to verify position data, but no
position data are displayed. Is this normal? The Chart Radar displays
echoes.
Normally, the position data are displayed. If no position data is input in the
RPU-016 side, signal processing cannot be done on RPU-016 side.
In this case, you need to make sure that the OS POSN -> NAV AID menu is set to
“INS”.
Or, you need to select Factory menu to set [Menu] -> Initialize -> Network ->
Network setting -> Radar -> INS ADDRESS to”000.000.000.000, or to the IP
address of LAN-1 of the EC-1000C.
Q51. I connected the monitor to the RPU-016 to verify AIS data, but no AIS
targets are displayed. Is this normal? The Chart Radar displays as the
AIS targets.
Yes, it is normal. In this case, no AIS data are output from the EC-1000C
Q52.Is there any method for verifying the Installation Parameter file on my PC?
(5-6)
The sensor.prm file for the Installation Parameter set cannot be opened on a PC. To
open this file, you need to conduct the following operation.
Copy C:¥ants_system -> bin -> ecbhiprm.exe files and C:¥ants_system -> params
-> sensor.prm files to a removable disk.
Create a folder under the name of “ants_system” on the desk top of your PC, and
further create two folders under the name of “bin” and “params” respectively in
the “ants_system” folder. Subsequently, past the copy of the ecbhiprm.exe file to
the “bin” holder, and that of the sensor.prm file to the “ants_system” folder.
Clicking on the ecbhiprm.exe file will enable you to view the Installation
Parameter file. However, the color shade is poor, and you cannot open the Sensor
Channel Usage window.
Q53.When I turn ON the power supply, a keyboard error is caused. When I

plug the keyboard and press [F1] key, the system normally boots up.
(12-32)
In this case, you need to change the setting of HALT ON of BIOS to “ALL But
Keyboard”.
Furthermore, you need to check whether the battery of the SBC-PCG-820 (CPU)
board runs out.
14-10
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q54.AIS targets are displayed, but I cannot transmit AIS message from the
chart radar.
You need to check for the Tx- 5 LED of the LAN Adapter.
This LED turns ON when data is transmitted. If the LED does not turn ON, the
LAN adapter (TX circuit of CH-5) has got faulty.
Q55.The key of the monitor unit does not work.

This is normal. The reason is that the RS232C port of the Monitor unit is
connected to the COM-1 port of the EC-1000C. To conduct key operation, you
need to press any of other keys while pressing the [LOCK] key or pressing the
[LOCK] and the [MENU] key at one time to display the menu and set the keypad
lock to “off”.
Q56.Why is the RS232C port of the Monitor unit connected to the COM-1
port of the EC-1000C?
The reason is that brilliance and contrast adjustment needs to be made from menu.
Q57.When I turn ON the power supply and connect DVI cable, no data are
displayed.
This is normal. You need to connect the DVI cable, and then turn ON the power
supply.
As to the selection of default monitor signal for the EC-1000C, the primary device
is set to RGB signal, while the second device is set to Digital display.
Q58.Can I use both RGB signal and DVI signal?

Yes, you can. In this case, you need to select Display Properties -> Setting ->
Advanced -> Intel Extreme Graphics -> Graphics Properties, and then check
“Intel(R) Dual Display Clone”.
Q59.Which do you recommend us to select DVI or RGB signal for the

monitor signal?
Select DVI signal.
Q60.I registered the wrong Computer name. Let me know how to make
registration change.
Even if you register the wrong name on the Chart Radar, that will present no
obstacle. However, if the ECDIS is set to Multi mode, a serial number following
the hyphen like “EC1000C-xxxx” should be entered. If the configuration has an
underscore like “EC1000C_xxxx”, no communications with the ECDIS will be
enabled.
To make registration change, you need to exit the Chart Radar to return the display
to Windows screen. Subsequently, you need to select Start -> Control Panel ->
System to open the Computer name page, and then click on the Change button to
type a new name in the Computer name box. The computer name should be
configured as “EC1000C-xxxx”.
14-11
Chapter 14. Q&A
Q61.How to communication between the RPU-016 and the EC-1000C?

When the power supply is turned ON, data on set values of the RPU-016 will be
loaded from the EC-1000C. If any change is made to the set values on the
EC-1000C side, the change will be set to the RPU-016.
14-12
Appendix 1) AP1.1
List Listof Alarms
of Navigation Alarms
Description of the Alarm Priority System

The permanently visible alarm is the top most urgent alarm at any moment. Alarms
have priority from 1 to 10 to control urgency. Priority 1 is the highest. The list of alarms
chapters show these priorities for each alarm with following syntax: “/1” at the end first
line means priority = 1, “/1/8” at the end of first line means that priority is = 1, if
unacknowledged and priority = 8, if acknowledged but the state of alarm still exists.
Unacknowledged alarm is shown in black text (or white depending on color scheme) on
red background and acknowledged alarm which still exists is shown in orange text on
white background.
You may view the alarms in the Alarm Queue. Place the cursor on the alarm text and
then push the right mouse button. See the example below.
How to read the Alarm Queue (first row as an example):

- First digit “2” indicates alarm priority.
- Second four digits “5100” indicate alarm number.
- Text indicates reason of alarm “Safety Contour”.
In the top alarm queue example, alarm

priority changes from 1 to 8 after it is
acknowledged. Then alarm 5100 is
assigned highest priority.
In the bottom alarm queue example,

the priority of alarm 5100 is changed
to 10 after it is acknowledged. Then
alarm 5103 is assigned highest
priority.
AP1-1
AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 1101: REFTGT: NO FILE CHOSEN /7
------------------------------------
USE 'REFERENCE TARGET' BUTTON TO CHOOSE VALID
REFERENCE TARGET FILE.
Alarm number 1102: REFTGT: NEED 8 TARGETS /7

------------------------------------
FILE MUST CONTAIN AT LEAST 8 TARGETS IN ORDER TO
UTILIZE REFERENCE TARGETS USE 'REFERENCE
TARGET' BUTTON TO CHOOSE ANOTHER REF. TARGET.
Alarm number 1200: DEPTH BELOW LIMIT /5/13

------------------------------------
ECHO SOUNDER INDICATES WATER DEPTH BELOW
TRANSDUCER TO EXCEED SPECIFIED SAFE LIMIT.
Alarm number 2000: FILTER: POSITION UNRELIABLE /1

------------------------------------
ECDIS IS NOT ABLE TO ESTIMATE A RELIABLE POSITION.
VERIFY AND CHOOSE SPEED AND POSITION SENSORS
THROUGH SENSORS’ FUNCTION .
Alarm number 2001: NO SPEED AVAILABLE /1/8

------------------------------------
NO VALID SPEED SENSOR HAS BEEN FOUND.
VERIFY AND CHOOSE SPEED SENSORS IN 'SENSORS'
BUTTON.
Alarm number 2002: NO HEADING AVAILABLE /1/8

------------------------------------
NO VALID HEADING SENSOR HAS BEEN FOUND. VERIFY
AND CHOOSE HEADING SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’
FUNCTION.
Alarm number 2004: GYRO DATA UNRELIABLE /1/8

------------------------------------
IF YOU HAVE BOTH GYRO1 AND GYRO2 CHOSEN AND IF
THEY VALUE DIFFERS MORE THAN 5 DEGREES ALARM IS
GENERATED. VERIFY AND CHOOSE HEADING SENSORS
IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION.
AP1-2
Alarm number 2005: LOG DATA UNRELIABLE /1/8

------------------------------------
LOG GIVES 0 KN SPEED, WHICH DOES NOT
CORRESPOND WITH OTHER SPEED SENSORS.
VERIFY AND CHOOSE SPEED SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’
FUNCTION.
Alarm number 2006: ROUTE:COURSE JUMP POSSIBLE /1

------------------------------------
SYSTEM HAS AUTOMATICALLY CHANGED TO DEAD
RECKONING. IF YOU NOW CHOOSE “ON” A POSITION
SENSOR YOU MAY GET A JUMP FOR COURSE. CHANGE
FROM ROUTE STEERING TO MANUAL STEERING OR
CHECK POSITION VERY CAREFULLY BEFORE CHOOSING
“ON”.
Alarm number 2007: POSITION DISCREPANCY /2/9

------------------------------------
SYSTEM HAS DETECTED MORE DIFFERENCE THAN SET
LIMIT BETWEEN OWN SHIP PRIMARY AND SECONDARY
POSITIONS OR BETWEEN OWN SHIP AND ANY SENSOR
POSITION. CHECK POSITION SENSORS.
Alarm number 2008: FILTER: SPEED BELOW xx KN /1/8

------------------------------------
KALMAN FILTER REQUIRED THAT THE SPEED OF THE
OWN SHIP IS MORE THAN SPEED LIMIT SET IN ECDIS
INSTALLATION PARAMETERS. IF ROUTE STEERING WAS
NOT USED, THEN KALMAN FILTER HAS BEEN SET
AUTOMATICALLY OFF BY THE SYSTEM.
Alarm number 2009: POSITION SOURCE CHANGED /1

------------------------------------
POSITION SOURCE OF OWN SHIP PRIMARY POSITION
HAS BEEN CHANGED AUTOMATICLLY TO ANOTHER
SOURCE THAN BEFORE. VERIFY NEW SOURCE.
Alarm number 2010: FILTER:POS SOURCE CHANGE /2

------------------------------------
DGPS POSITION SENSOR USED IN FILTER POSITIONING
HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO
DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TONORMAL.
Alarm number 2011: CHARTALING:OVER 30 MINUTES /2

------------------------------------
IF POSITION ALIGNMENT IS USED THEN USER IS
REMINDED OF IT EVERY 30 MIN.
AP1-3
Alarm number 2013: SOG&COG DATA UNRELIABLE /1/8

------------------------------------
SOG AND/OR COG DATA FROM SENSORS IS UNRELIABLE.
VERIFY AND CHOOSE SPEED/COURSE AND POS
SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION. IF REASON IS
FAST MANOUEVRE, LIMIT CAN BE INCREASED BY
SETTING “MAX RATE OF TURN” LIMIT OVER 150 DEG/MIN.
Alarm number 2052: ROUTE:ILLEGAL ETA WAYPOINT /7

------------------------------------
ETA WAYPOINT DOESN'T EXIST IN ROUTE FILE OR ETA
WAYPOINT IS NOT BETWEEN NEXT AND FINAL WAYPOINT.
VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONITOR' THAT A VALID ROUTE IS
CHOSEN.
Alarm number 2053: ROUTE:ILLEGAL NEXT WAYPOINT /7

------------------------------------
NEXT WAYPOINT DOESN'T EXIST IN ROUTE FILE. VERIFY
IN 'ROUTE MONITOR' THAT A VALID ROUTE IS CHOSEN.
Alarm number 2054: ROUTE:ILLEGAL FINAL WAYPOINT /7

------------------------------------
FINAL WAYPOINT DOES NOT EXIST IN ROUTE FILE.
VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONITOR' THAT A VALID ROUTE IS
CHOSEN.
Alarm number 2055: ARPA RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH ARPA 1 VERIFY
THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE DECLICKED
ON THE ARPA RADARS.

------------------------------------
ON THE ARPA RADARS.

------------------------------------
ON THE ARPA RADARS.
AP1-4

------------------------------------
ON THE ARPA RADARS.
Alarm number 2060: ROUTE: WP CHANGE DISABLED /7

------------------------------------
NEXT WAYPOINT CANNOT BE CHANGED DURING ROUTE
STEERING. CHANGE FROM ROUTE STEERING MODE
BEFORE CHOOSING A NEW NEXT WAYPOINT.
Alarm number 2061: CHART ALIGN: EXECUTING /7

------------------------------------
IF CHART ALIGNMENT IS DONE BY MEANS OF SELESMAR
ARPA RADAR, ALARM IS DISPLAYED WHEN YOU DEFINE
ALIGNMENT.
Alarm number 2063: ROUTE:CHOOSE DISABLED /7

------------------------------------
A NEW ROUTE CANNOT BE CHOSEN DURING ROUTE
STEERING. USE 'RADIUS CONTROL' TO OVERRIDE ROUTE
STEERING BEFORE CHOOSING A NEW ROUTE.
Alarm number 2064: ROUTE:CANCEL DISABLED /7

------------------------------------
A ROUTE CANNOT BE CANCELED DURING ROUTE
STEERING. USE 'RADIUS CONTROL' TO OVERRIDE ROUTE
STEERING BEFORE CANCELING THE ROUTE.
Alarm number 2067: MANUAL DRIFT DISABLED /7

------------------------------------
MANUAL DRIFT VALUE CAN ONLY BE INSERTED WHEN NO
SENSORS PROVIDE SPEED OVER GROUND DATA.
USE 'SENSORS' BUTTON TO VERIFY AND CHOOSE
SENSORS TO BE USED.
Alarm number 2072: CHARTALIGN: NO LINE AVAIL /1

------------------------------------
TO PERFORM CHART ALIGN WITH AN ARPA RADAR
THERE MUST BE TRANSFERRED USER CHART'S LINES IN
THE ARPA RADAR. CHECK THAT YOUR CURRENT USER
CHART HAS LINES AND THAT THEY ARE VISIBLE
ON ARPA RADAR DISPLAY.
AP1-5
Alarm number 2101: USER CHART: NEED POINTS /7

------------------------------------
USER CHART HAS MORE THAN 60 LINES OR 20 SYMBOLS
AND IT DOES NOT CONTAIN ANY POINTS. USE 'USER
CHART' MENU TO CHOOSE A VALID USER CHART OR ADD
POINTS TO CURRENT USER CHART.
Alarm number 2351: REFTGT: FORCED TO CANCEL /1

------------------------------------
YOU HAVE CHOSEN NEW REFERENCE TARGETS
WITHOUT FIRST CANCEL OF CURRENT ONE. THE USE OF
CURRENT REFERENCE TARGETS HAS BEEN CANCELLED.
Alarm number 2352: REFTGT: LOST POSITION /1

------------------------------------
YOU HAVE CHOSEN REFERENCE TARGETS AS A
POSITION SOURCE AND THE SYSTEM IS UNABLE TO
SOLVE OWN SHIP POSITION BASED ON REFERENCE
TARGETS CHECK YOUR REFERENCE TARGET
POSITIONS AND THEIR TRACKING.
Alarm number 2353: REFTGT: LOST GYRO CORR. /2

------------------------------------
LOST OF GYRO ERROR CORRECTION VALUE WHICH IS
BASED ON REFERENCE TARGETS TRACKING.
Alarm number 2354: REFTGT: TRACKING FULL /1

------------------------------------
IF CONNECTED ARPA RADAR HAS LESS THAN 8 FREE
TRACKING CHANNELS AVAIL.
Alarm number 2454: ROUTE: END REACHED /1

------------------------------------
YOU HAVE PASSED THE FINAL WAYPOINT OF YOUR
MONITORED ROUTE. CURRENT MONITORED ROUTE HAS
AUTOMATICALLY CANCELLED.
Alarm number 2457: ROUTE: OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS /3/10

------------------------------------
SHIP IS OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS SPECIFIED FOR
CURRENT LEG OF ROUTE. CHECK SHIP POSITION AND
ROUTE.
AP1-6
Alarm number 3000: PARAM CHANGE DISABLED /3

------------------------------------
INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CANNOT BE CHANGED IF
THE ROUTE STEERING IS ON OR THE KALMAN FILTER IS
IN USE. CHECK THE SITUATION AND TRY AGAIN.
Alarm number 3300: SENSOR DATAFLOW ERROR /1

-----------------------------------
ECDIS HAS INTERNAL SENSOR MANAGEMENT ERROR
ALL CONNECTION TO SENSOR DATA IS LOST.
Alarm number 3500: AIS TARGET OVERFLOW /2/9

------------------------------------
MAXIMUM COUNT OF AIS TARGETS SET TO BE
DISPLAYED ON ECDIS HAS BEEN EXCEEDED WITHIN
DEFINED MAXIMUM RANGE. IT IS POSSIBLE THAT SOME
OF AIS TARGETS ARE NOT DISPLAYED ON ECDIS. TO
GET ALL AIS TARGETS TO BE DISPLAYED, INCREASE
MAXIMUM COUNT OF AIS TARGETS OR DECREASE VALUE
OF MAXIMUM RANGE.
Alarm number 3501: AIS TARGET STORAGE FULL /2/9

------------------------------------
MAXIMUM COUNT OF AIS TARGETS WHICH CAN BE
STORED FOR DISPLAYING ON ECDIS HAS BEEN
EXCEEDED. IT IS POSSIBLE THAT SOME OF AIS TARGETS
ARE NOT DISPLAYED ON ECDIS.
Alarm number 3502: DANGEROUS AIS TARGET /3/10

------------------------------------
AIS TARGET HAS MET DANGEROUS TARGET LIMIT SET BY
CPA AND TCA.
Alarm number 3503: LOST AIS TARGET /3

------------------------------------
NO UPDATE INFORMATION RECEIVED FROM TRACKED
AIS TARGET WITHIN DEFINED REPORTING INTERVAL OF
SHIP TYPE.
Alarm number 3505: AIS TARGET IN GUARD ZONE /3

------------------------------------
AIS TARGET HAS ENTERED TO GUARD ZONE AND
BECOME AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVE AIS
TARGET.
AP1-7
Alarm number 4000: NO SENSOR PARAMETERS /2

------------------------------------
SENSOR PARAMETER FILES ARE MISSING. LOAD
INSTALLATION PARAMETERS OF ECDIS. IF REQUIRED
USE BACKUP COPY OF PARAMETERS.
Alarm number 4001: B-ADAPTER ERROR /4/11

------------------------------------
B-ADAPTER DOES NOT OPERATE DUE TO A SYSTEM
FAULT. SWITCH OFF MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER AND THEN
ON AGAIN. CALL SERVICE IF FAILURE STILL EXISTS.
Alarm number 4002: ENGINE CONTROL COMM ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
CONNECTION TO ENGINE CONTROL HAS BEEN LOST.
CHECK THAT CONNECTION IS OK.
Alarm number 4005: GYRO ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
GYRO1 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY USE 'INITIAL
SETTINGS' MENU TO SET GYRO AGAIN. IF FAILURE STILL
EXISTS, USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/POSITION PAGE TO
CHOOSE VALID SENSORS.
Alarm number 4006: GYRO ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
GYRO2 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY USE
'SENSORS' SPEED/POSITION PAGE TO CHOOSE VALID
SENSORS.
Alarm number 4008: LOG ERROR /3/10

-----------------------------------
LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE
'SENSORS' SPEED/COURSE TO CHOOSE VALID SENSORS.
Alarm number 4008: DUAL AXIS LOG (WT) ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
DUAL AXIS LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE
SPEED/COURSE PAGE TO CHOOSE VALID SPEED
SENSORS.
Alarm number 4009: DUAL AXIS LOG (BT) ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
DUAL AXIS LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.
USE SPEED/COURSE PAGE TO CHOOSE VALID SPEED
SENSORS.
AP1-8
Alarm number 4010: ECHO SOUNDER ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECHO SOUNDER DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.
VERIFY ECHO SOUNDER OPERATION.
Alarm number 4011: WIND SENSOR ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
WIND SENSOR DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.
VERIFY WIND SENSOR OPERATION.
Alarm number 4012: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION EQUIPMENT 1 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED
CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO CHOOSE
VALID POS SENSOR.

------------------------------------
CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID
POS SENSOR.

------------------------------------
POS SENSOR.

------------------------------------
POS SENSOR.

------------------------------------
POS SENSOR.
Alarm number 4018: ROT GYRO ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ROT GYRO DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.
VERIFY ROT GYRO DEVICE.
AP1-9
Alarm number 4019: PITCH&ROLL SENSOR ERROR 3/10

------------------------------------
PITCH&ROLL DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.
VERIFY SENSOR FOR PITCH&ROLL DATA.
Alarm number 4021: ARPA RADAR SYSTEM ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
RADAR FROM CHANNEL 1 REPORT RADAR SYSTEM
FAILURE OR ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH THE
RADAR. VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INC ON'
ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADAR.

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

------------------------------------
Alarm number 4027: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10

------------------------------------
DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1 HAS
CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO
DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL.
CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE
SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR.
AP1-10

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

------------------------------------
Alarm number 4033: ARPA RADAR SPD/CRS ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ARPA RADAR CHOSEN AS SPD AND CRS SOURCE IS NOT
RECEIVED CORRECTLY USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/COURSE
TO CHOOSE VALID SPD/CRS SENSORS.
Alarm number 4034: SPEEDPILOT RECEIVE ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
DATA FROM SPEEDPILOT IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.
CHECK CONNECTION OF SPEEDPILOT.
AP1-11
Alarm number 4035: B-ADAPTER INTERFACE ERROR /1/8

------------------------------------
B-ADAPTER DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY DUE TO
INTERNAL SOFTWARE ERROR IN COMMUNICATION
PROGRAM. TO RESTART COMMUNICATION PROGRAM,
OPEN INSTALLATION PARAMETERS OF ECDIS AND CLICK
OK WITHOUT CHANGING ANY PARAMETERS. OR RESTART
ECDIS.
Alarm number 4036: AMWSS COMM ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
COMMUNICATION WITH AMWSS FAILS.
CHECK CONNECTION TO AMWSS
Alarm number 4037: AIS RECEIVE ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
DATA FROM AMWSS IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.
CHECK CONNECTION TO AMWSS
Alarm number 4038: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1 OUTPUTS
POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS
INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK, THAT SENSOR
OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM.

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

------------------------------------
AP1-12

------------------------------------
Alarm number 4044: DATUM CHANGE /1

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1 HAS CHANGED
OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84
DATUM.

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 2 HAS
CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO
WGS 84 DATUM.

------------------------------------
DATUM.

------------------------------------
DATUM.

------------------------------------
DATUM.
Alarm number 4050: ARPA ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13

-----------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANTENNA ID FROM RADAR IN
CHANNEL 1.

-----------------------------------
CHANNEL 2.
AP1-13

-----------------------------------
CHANNEL 3.

-----------------------------------
CHANNEL 4.
Alarm number 4063: ECDIS IP ERROR FOR LANADA /3/10

------------------------------------
IF ECDIS IP-ADDRESS FOR LAN ADAPTERS IS DIFFERENT
BETWEEN WINDOWSXP CONTROL PANEL AND ECDIS.
Alarm number 4064: LAN FAILURE FOR LANADAPT /3/10

------------------------------------
UNEXPEXTED LAN ERROR -> MAYBE LAN CABLE OR HUB
BROKEN/DISCONNECTED. ECDIS CONTINUE OPERATION
WITHOUT INTERFACES. FIX THE PROBLEM AND RESTART
THE ECDIS. CHECK IP ADDRESSES.
Alarm number 4065: NO LAN ADATER INSTALLED /3/10

------------------------------------
INSTALLATION MISTAKE. “NO LAN ADAPTER(S) DEFINED.
INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN.
Alarm number 4066: LAN ADATER 1 PARAM ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
INSTALLATION MISTAKE. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN.

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

------------------------------------
AP1-14
Alarm number 4070: ECDIS IP ERROR FOR LANRAD /3/10

------------------------------------
IF ECDIS IP-ADDRESS FOR LAN RADAR IS DIFFERENT
BETWEEN WINDOWSXP CONTROL PANEL AND ECDIS.
CHECK IP ADDRESSES.
Alarm number 4071: LAN FAILURE FOR LANRADAR /3/10

------------------------------------
UNEXPEXTED LAN ERROR -> MAYBE LAN CABLE
BROKEN/DISCONNECTED. FIX THE PROBLEM AND
RESTART THE ECDIS.
Alarm number 4072: LAN RADAR 1 CONN ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN RADAR 1.
CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR LAN RADAR ON ECDIS
AND ON RADAR.

------------------------------------
AND ON RADAR.

------------------------------------
AND ON RADAR.

------------------------------------
AND ON RADAR.
Alarm number 4083: LAN ADATER PARAM CONFLICT /3/10

------------------------------------
ID OF LAN ADAPTER ON ECDIS IS INCORRECT OR
PARAMETER "F" ON LAN ADAPTER IS INCORRECT.
CHECK THE PARAMETERS.
Alarm number 4201: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6

------------------------------------
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN ALARM INPUT 1
HAS INTERNAL FAILURE.
AP1-15

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

------------------------------------
AP1-16
AP1.2 Additional Navigation Alarms
AP1.2 Additional Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 4057: Water current error
Alarm number 4058: Water temperature error
Alarm number 4059: LAN adapter 1 error
Alarm number 4060: LAN adapter 2 error
Alarm number 4076: Air temperature error
Alarm number 4077: Air pressure sensor
AP1-17
AP1.3 List of Chart Alarms

Alarm number 5001: NEW PILOT DATA /2/10
Alarm number 5100: SAFETY CONTOUR /2/10
Alarm number 5101: AREAS TO BE AVOIDED /2/10
Alarm number 5102: SPECIALLY PROTECTED AREAS /2/10
Alarm number 5103: USER CHART DANGER AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5104: TRAFFIC SEPARATION ZONE /2/10
Alarm number 5105: TRS CROSSING/ROUND ABOUT /2/10
Alarm number 5106: TRS PRECAUTIONARY AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5107: TWO WAY TRAFFIC ROUTE /2/10
Alarm number 5108: DEEP WATER ROUTE /2/10
Alarm number 5109: RECOMMEND TRAFFIC LANE /2/10
Alarm number 5110: INSHORE TRAFFIC ZONE /2/10
Alarm number 5111: FAIRWAY /2/10
Alarm number 5112: RESTRICTED AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5113: CAUTION AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5114: OFFSHORE PRODUCTION AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5115: MILITARY PRACTICE AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5116: SEAPLANE LANDING AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5117: SUBMARINE TRANSIT LANE /2/10
Alarm number 5118: ICE AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5119: CHANNEL /2/10
Alarm number 5120: FISHING GROUND /2/10
AP1-18
Alarm number 5121: FISHING PROHIBITED /2/10
Alarm number 5122: PIPELINE AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5123: CABLE AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5124: ANCHORAGE AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5125: ANCHORAGE PROHIBITED /2/10
Alarm number 5126: DUMPING GROUND /2/10
Alarm number 5127: SPOIL GROUND /2/10
Alarm number 5128: DREDGED AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5129: CARGO TRANSSHIPMENT AREA /2/10
Alarm number 5130: INCINERATION AREA /2/10
AP1-19
AP1.4 ARPA Alarms
AP1.4 ARPA Alarms

Alarm number 6*12: ARPA dangerous target
Alarm number 6*13: ARPA target in guard zone
Alarm number 6*14: ARPA lost target
Alarm number 6*15: Rad0v STBY Warning
Alarm number 6*16: ARPA Auto acq full
Alarm number 6*17: ARPA Man acq full
Alarm number 6*18: ARPA System error
Alarm number 6*19: RadOv ARPA CPU Warning
AP1-20
Appendix 2) NMEA and IEC
AP1.1Sentences
IEC61162 2 ED の概要 nd
AP2.1 List of Talker name
Talker Equipment name

AG Heading Track Controller (Autopilot): General
AP Heading Track Controller (Autopilot): Magnetic
AI Automatic Identification System
CD COMMUNICATIONS: Digital Selective Calling (DSC)
CR COMMUNICATIONS: Data Receiver
CS COMMUNICATIONS: Satellite
CT COMMUNICATIONS: Radio-Telephone (MF/HF)
CV COMMUNICATIONS: Radio-Telephone (VHF)
CX COMMUNICATIONS: Scanning Receiver
DE DECCA Navigator
DF Direction Finder
EC Electronic Chart System (ECS)
EI Electronic Chart Display & Information System (ECDIS)
EP Emergency Position Indicating Beacon (EPIRB)
ER Engine room Monitoring Systems
GL GLONASS Receiver
GN Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
GP Global Positioning System (GPS)
HC HEADING SENSORS: Compass, Magnetic
HE HEADING SENSORS: Gyro, North Seeking
HN HEADING SENSORS: Gyro, Non-North Seeking
II Integrated Instrumentation
IN Integrated Navigation
LC Loran C
P Proprietary Code
RA Radar and/or Radar Plotting
SD Sounder, depth
SN Electronic Positioning System, other/general
SS Sounder, scanning
TI Turn Rate Indicator
VD VELOCITY SENSORS: Doppler, other/general
VM VELOCITY SENSORS: Speed Log, Water, Magnetic
VW VELOCITY SENSORS: Speed Log, Water, Mechanical
VR Voyage Data Recorder
YX Transducer
ZA TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Atomic Clock
ZC TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Chronometer
ZQ TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Quarts
ZV TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Radio Update
WI Weather Instruments
AP2-1
AP2.1 List of Talker name
Reference: Symbol characters of data
A Status symbol; Yes; Data Valid; Warning Flag Clear, Auto; Ampere
a Alphabet character variable A through Z or a through z
B Bars (pressure, 1000 mb=1000kPa), Bottom
C Celsius (Degrees); Course-up
c Valid character, Calculating
D Degrees (of Arc)
E Error, East; Engine
F Fathoms
f Feet
G Great Circle; Green
g Good
H Compass Heading; Head-up; Hertz; Humidity
h Hours; HEX number
I Inches
J Input operation completed
K Kilometers; km/hour
k Kilograms
L Left; Local; Lost Target
l Latitude; Liters; Liters/second
M Meters; Meters/second; Magnetic; Manual; Cubic Meters
m Minutes; message
N Nautical miles; Knots; North; North-up; Newton
n Numeral; address
P Purple; Proprietary (only when following $); Position sensor, Percent; Pascal (pressure)
Q Query; Target-Being-Acquired
R Right; Rhumb line; Red; Relative; Reference; Radar Tracking; Rev/min (RPM)
S South; Statute miles; Statute miles/hour; Shaft; Salinity in parts per thousand
s Seconds; Six bit number
T Time difference; True; Track; Tracked-Target
t Test
U Dead Reckoning Estimate
u Sign, if minus “-” (HEX 2D)
V Data invalid; No; Warning Flag Set; Manual; Volt
W West; Water; Wheelover
x Numeric character variable
y Longitude
Z Time
AP2-2
AP2.2 Configuration of the Sentence from ARPA to ECDIS

1. OSD – Own Ship Data
$RAOSD , x.x , A , x.x , a , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , N *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Contents Data Reference

1 Heading, degrees true
2 Heading status, A = valid
3 Course
4 M = manually entered
W = water referenced
Course reference, B/M/W/R/P B = bottom tracking log
R = RADAR tracking of fixed target
- SPEED P = position system ground reference
- COURSE 5 Speed
- HEADING 6 M = manually entered
Speed reference, B/M/W/R/P B = bottom tracking log
R = RADAR tracking of fixed target
P = position system ground reference
7 Drift course, manually entered
8 Drift speed, manually entered
9 Speed units, N = knots
2. PAESP – Position Adjust

$PAESP , A , x.x , x.x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
Contents Data Command

S = position adjust start
- POSITION ADJUST START 1 Command, S/E
E = position adjust end
- POSITION ADJUST END
2 Range
(RANGE, BEARING)
3 Bearing
AP2-3
3. TTM – Target
$RATTM , xx , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a , c—c , a , a , hhmmss.ss , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Contents Data Target status/Reference tgt./Acquisition

1 Target number, 00 to 99
2 Target distance from own ship
3 Bearing from own ship, True/Relative
4 Target speed
5 Target course, True/Relative
TARGET 6 CPA
- BEARING 7 TCPA, min., "-" increasing
- DIST 8 User data (eg. name)
- SPD Q = query, target in the process of acquisition
- CRS T = tracking, perfect
- TCA 1 = tracking, but 1 miss in last 10 scan
- CPA 2 = tracking, but 2 misses in last 10 scan
- NUMBER 9 Target status
|
- STATUS 9 = tracking, but 9 misses in last 10 scan
- REF_TARGET L = lost, target has been lost, 10 misses in last
- TIME 10 scan
- ACQ TYPE R = fix target, acquired by external computer
10 Reference tgt. = R
null = normal target
11 UTC time of data
A = automatic
12 Acquisition M = manual
R = reported
4. RSD – Radar System Data

$RARSD , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , a , a *hh<CR>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Contents Data Disp. rota.

1 Origin1 range
- TRACK BALL 2 Origin1 bearing
BEARING 3 VRM1, range
RANGE 4 EBL1, degrees
- EBL 5 Origin2 range
BEARING 6 Origin2 bearing
- VRM 7 VRM2, range
RANGE 8 EBL2, degrees
- STATUS 9 Cursor range
DISPLAY, 10 Cursor bearing
TRANSMITTER, 11 Range scale
ANTENNA, 12 Range units
TRACKING, C = course up
ETC... 13 Disp. rota. H = head up
N = north up
AP2-4
AP2.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS to ARPA

1. GLL – Position
$ECGLL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , hhmmss.ss , A *hh<CR>
1 2 3 4
Talker ID Data Disp. rota.

1 latitude, N/S
2 longitude, E/W
II or EC
3 UTC of position
4 status: A = valid
2. GGA – Position
$ECGGA ,, llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , x ,,,,,,, *hh<CR>
1 2 3
Talker ID Data quality=Pos quality indicator.

1 latitude, N/S
2 longitude, E/W
EI 0: pos invalid
1: pos valid
3 quality, 0..8
2: information from DGPS is included into position, pos valid
6: dead reckoning, pos valid
3. FUGLL – Future Position

$FUGLL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , hhmmss.ss , A , x.x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Talker ID/Contents Data Note

1 future latitude, N/S
Talker ID: fixed value FU
2 future longitude, E/W
3 UTC of future position
- FUTURE POSITION (LAT,LON) 4 status: A = valid
- FUTURE HEADING (COURSE) 5 future heading
AP2-5
4. DTM – Datum
$ECDTM , aaa , xx.xxx , a , xx.xxx , a , xxxx.x , aaa *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Talker ID Data Note

1 local datum
2 latitude offset, N/S
EI or EC 3 longitude offset, E/W
4 altitude offset
5 reference datum e.g) WGS84
5. OSD – Own Ship Data

$ECOSD , x.x , A , x.x , a , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , N , x.x , A *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Talker ID/Contents Data Reference

1 heading, degrees true
2 heading status, A = valid
3 course
Talker ID: EC M = manually entered
- SPEED 4 course reference, B/M/W/R/P B = bottom tracking log
- COURSE R = RADAR tracking of fixed target
- HEADING 5 speed
- HEADING M = manually entered
- ERROR 6 speed reference, B/M/W/R/P B = bottom tracking log
(ANGLE) R = RADAR tracking of fixed target
- SIMULATION 7 drift course (NOT USED)
(VALID)
8 drift speed (NOT USED)
9 speed units, N = knots
10 heading error
11 simulation: A = valid
6. ZDA – UTC Time

$ECZDA , hhmmss.ss , dd , mm , yyyy , hhh , mm *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4

Talker ID: EI or EC 1 UTC time
2 UTC date
- UTC TIME 3 local hours difference
- LOCAL TIME DIFFENRENCE 4 local minutes difference
AP2-6
7. DPT - Depth
$ECDPT , x.x , x.x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2

Talker ID: EI, II or EC 1 depth, meters
- DEPTH (DEPTH) 2 offset from transducer (NOT USED)
8. MWV – Wind
$ECMWV , x.x , T , x.x , N , A *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5

Talker ID: EI, II or EC 1 wind angle, 0 to 360 degrees
2 reference, T = true
- WIND 3 wind speed
4 wind speed units, N = knots
(TRUE SPEED, TRUE COURSE) 5 status: A = valid
9. PAESP – Position Adjust Acknowledge

$PAESP , A , x.x , x.x *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3
Contents Data Note

1 command, A = acknowledge
- POSITION ADJUST
2 range
ACKNOWLEDGE
3 bearing
10. PAESC – Curved EBL

$PAESC , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , L *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contents Data Mode

1 latitude, N/S
- CURVED EBL 2 longitude, E/W
LAT
3 course
LON
4 radius [0.0 .. 2.0]
CRS
RAD 5 distance
DIST 6 next course
NEXT CRS L = LOCKED (curved ebl starts from given lat/lon position)
LOCKED M = MOVING
7 mode, L/M/N
VALID (curved ebl starts from own ship and own ship pushes it)
N = NO DATA (curved ebl is not defined)
AP2-7
11. PAESF – Fix Target Acquire/Cancel

$PAESF , A , x , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4
Contents Data Note

- FIX TARGET ACQUIRE A=TARGET ACQUIRE)
1 command type, A/C
C=TARGET CANCEL)
(LAT,LON,NUMBER) 2 target number, 1 to 8
- FIX TARGET CANCEL 3 latitude, N/S
(NUMBER) 4 longitude, E/W
12. PLSPL – Chart Segment

$PLSPL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , a , xxx , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contents Data Note

1 start latitude, N/S
2 start longitude., E/W
- CHART SEGMENT 3 end latitude, N/S
START LAT 4 end long., E/W
C=continuous
START LON O=dotted
END LAT 5 linetype D=dashed
T=dot - dashed
END LON E=erase
LINETYPE 1 -- 998: legal lines
6 number
999: erase all
COLOR
B=blue G=green R=red
NUMBER
7 color C=cyan M=magenta
Y=yellow W=white L=black
AP2-8
13. PLSPS – Chart Symbol

$PLSPS , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , xxx , c—c , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5
Contents Data Note

1 latitude, N/S
- CHART SYMBOL 2 longitude, E/W
LAT 1..998 legal symbols

3 number
999 erase all
LON ASCII string, 1 to 8 characters
4 label
LABE legal ASCII values from hexadecimal 20h to 7Fh
B=blue G=green R=red C=cyan
NUMBER 5 color M=magenta Y=yellow W=white L=black
E=erase
14. PAESW – Waypoint List

$PAESW , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , c—c , x , x.x , x.x , a *hh<CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contents Data Note

1 latitude, N/S
- WAYPOINT LIST 2 longitude, E/W
3 waypoint identifier ASCII string, 1 to 8 characters
ARRAY OF
4 number, 1 to 6
[LAT, LON, RADIUS, 5 radius, 0.1 to 2.0
6 channel
CHANNEL, NUMBER,
A = valid
MODE] 7 mode, C/L/E V = no waypoint
L = valid and last waypoint
15. PAESN - Notebook

$PAESN , A , c—c *hh<CR><LF>
1 2
Contents Data Note

NOTEBOOK 1 status: A = valid
(TEXT, VALID) 2 text string, 0 to 71 chars
AP2-9
AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces
AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces (Extracted from FEA-2107 service manual)
AP2.4.1 Trackpilot
When trackpilot is EMRI SEM 200 or FURUNO FAP-2000

EMRI interface is two-way and it uses similar techniques as standard NMEA V1.5, but
it has special proprietary messages.
Message format Proprietary 4800 bit/s

Use of checksum yes
Transmitting interval nominal is 0.4 seconds
Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line As defined in introduction. Timeout is 10
interruption or at no more received messages seconds.
AP2.4.2 GYRO1
AP2.4.2.1. When source is a direct gyro with analog synchro or stepper

interface
90-115V, 50Hz, 1:360

synchro 90-115V, 60Hz, 1:360
Compatible devices
90-115V, 400Hz, 1:360
stepper 24V, 1:360
all alternatives are sampled using
Operation principle 48V, 1:360
optocouplers
Resolution 1/6° = 0.167°
only synchro uses reference
missing reference and then timeout is 2
seconds
Detected errors all phase lines has no signal or low
timeout is 2 seconds
signal
all phase lines has high signal timeout is 2 seconds
unexpected transition of phase lines timeout is 2 seconds
with 50/60 Hz reference 500 °/min
Max rate of turn with 400 Hz reference 1000 °/min
with stepper 1000 °/min
AP2-10
AP2.4.2.2. When source is a direct gyro
Message format IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

Used message identifier HDT
Example of a message $HEHDT,359.9,T
Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are
Use of talker identifier
accepted with any talker identifier.
Use of checksum As defined in introduction
min 1 message/second
Receiving interval minimum and maximum
max 5 messages/second
Used fields
Field Field name
1+2 Heading, degrees, true
AP2.4.2.3. When source is a trackpilot
Message format NMEA V1.5

Used message identifier SSA
Example of a message $PESSA,000.0,,,,,,,,,
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Heading, degrees
AP2-11
AP2.4.3 GYRO2

Example of a message $PESSA,000.0,,,,,,,,,
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Heading, degrees
AP2.4.4 Rate of Turn
AP2.4.4.1. When source is a direct gyro

Used message identifier ROT
Example of a message $IIROT,-000.0,A
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Rate of turn, degrees/min, “-“ bow turns to port
2 Validity of Rate of turn
AP2-12

Example of a message $PESSA, ,,,,P,,P,000.0,P,AAAA
Used fields
Field Field name
AP2.4.4.3. When source is a dual axis log with internal rate of turn gyro

Used message identifier DRU
Example of a message $PKDRU,,M,000.0,A,
min 1 message / 2 second
Used fields
Field Field name
AP2-13
AP2.4.5 Ground speed from a dual axis log (=DAX)
AP2.4.5.1. When source is a dual axis log using VBW message

Used message identifier VBW
Example of a message $VDVBW,,,,10.95,2.85,A,,,,,
Used fields
Field Field name
4 Longitudinal ground speed, knots, “-” astern.
5 Transverse ground speed, knots, “-” port.
6 Validity flag.
AP2.4.5.2. When source is a dual axis log using PKVBW message
Message format NMEA V1.5 based KRUPP ATLAS proprietary

Example of a message $PKVBW,,,,10.95,2.85,B
Used fields
Field Field name
5 Transverse ground speed, knots, “-” port.
6 Validity flag.
AP2-14
AP2.4.5.3. When source is a dual axis log with transverse bow and stern
measurement using PSALL message

Used message identifier PSALL
Example of a message $PSALL,s00.00,s00.00,s00.00,X
Use of talker identifier Talker is fixed for this proprietary message.
Used fields
Field Field name
2 Transverse bow ground speed, knots, “-” port.
3 Transverse bow ground speed, knots, “-” port.
4 Mode flag.
AP2.4.6 Water speed
AP2.4.6.1. When source is a pit log with closed contact interface
200 pulses / NM
Compatible devices pulse output
500 pulses /NM
closed contact is sampled
Operation principle
using optocoupler
Smallest detected 200 pulses / NM 0.7 kt
speed 500 pulses /NM 0.3 kt
200 pulses / NM 35 kt
Highest detected speed
500 pulses /NM 25 kt
Missing pulses are detected, if the speed
Detected errors missing pulses was over 5 kt before a state of no pulses
for 30 seconds or more started.
AP2-15
AP2.4.6.2. When source is a dual axis log using VBW message

Example of a message $VDVBW,10.95,2.85,A,,,,,,,,,
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Longitudinal water speed, knots, “-” astern.
2 Transverse water speed, knots, “-” port.
3 Validity flag.
AP2.4.6.3. When source is a dual axis log using PKVBW message
Message format NMEA V1.5 based KRUPP ATLAS proprietary

Example of a message $PKVBW,10.95,2.85,W,,,
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Longitudinal water speed, knots, “-” astern.
2 Transverse water speed, knots, “-” port.
3 Validity flag.
AP2-16
AP2.4.7 Position, datum, SOG and COG from a DGPS
AP2.4.7.1. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1)

Used message identifier GGA
Example of a message $GPGGA,,0000.00000,N,0000.00000,E,2,,,,,,,,
System accepts either only selected talker or
any talker is accepted.
min 1 message per 5 second
max 1 message/second
Used fields
Field Field name
2+3 Latitude
4+5 Longitude
6 GPS quality indicator
AP2.4.7.2. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2)
Message format IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

Used message identifier GLL
Example of a message $GPGLL,0000.00000,N,0000.00000,,A,A
Used fields
Field Field name
1+2 Latitude
3+4 Longitude
6 Status
7 Mode indicator
AP2-17
AP2.4.7.3. Datum (only IEC 61162-1 Ed.2)

Used message identifier DTM
Example of a message $GPDTM,W84,,,,,,W84
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Local datum. Any other alternative than “W84” create datum error
AP2.4.7.4. SOG and COG (IEC 61162-1 Ed.1)

Used message identifier VTG
Example of a message $GPVTG,000.0,T,000.0,M,00.0,N,00.0,K
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Course, degrees, true.
3 Course, degrees, magnetic.
5 Speed, knots.
7 Speed, km/h
AP2-18

Example of a message $GPVTG,000.0,T,000.0,M,00.0,N,00.0,K,A
Used fields
Field Field name
5 Speed, knots.
7 Speed, km/h
Position system mode indicator. The content of this must be identical to GGA
9
message GPS quality indicator.
AP2.4.8 Position, datum, SOG and COG

from any other source than DGPS
Typical examples are such as GPS, LORAN.

Example of a message $GPGLL,0000.00000,N,0000.00000,,A
Used fields
Field Field name
1+2 Latitude
3+4 Longitude
6 Status
AP2-19

Example of a message $GPGLL,0000.00000,N,0000.00000,,A,A
Used fields
Field Field name
1+2 Latitude
3+4 Longitude
6 Status
7 Mode indicator
AP2.4.8.3. Datum (only IEC 61162-1 Ed.2)

Example of a message $GPDTM,W84,,,,,,W84
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Local datum. Any other alternative than “W84” create datum error
AP2-20

Used fields
Field Field name
5 Speed, knots.
7 Speed, km/h

Used fields
Field Field name
5 Speed, knots.
7 Speed, km/h
Position system mode indicator. The content of this must be identical to GLL
9
message mode indicator.
AP2-21
AP2.4.9 System time from a GPS
AP2.4.9.1. System time

Used message identifier ZDA
Example of a message $GPZDA,000000.00,,,,
For checksum as defined in introduction. The
system doesn’t require that ZDA messages are
received. ZDA message is only used to
Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line
synchronise system clock if the difference is
interruption or at no more received messages
more than 5 seconds and if the system is not
part of steering and if the system doesn’t have
active Kalman filter.
No minimum rate of messages
Used fields
Field Field name
1 UTC
AP2.4.10 Water depth
AP2.4.10.1. When source is an echosounder

Used message identifier DBT
Example of a message $IIDBT,20.0,f,6.1,M,3.3,F
Used fields
Field Field name
1+2 Water depth, feet
3+4 Water depth, meter
5+6 Water depth, fathom
AP2-22
AP2.4.11 Wind
AP2.4.11.1. When source is a wind sensor

Used message identifier MVW
Example of a message $WIMWV,000.0,R,00.0,N,A
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Wind angle
2 Reference
3 Wind Speed
4 Wind speed units
5 Status
AP2.4.12 Water temperature
AP2.4.12.1. When source is a water temperature sensor

Used message identifier MTW
Example of a message $WIMTV,00.0,C
Used fields
Field Field name
1 temperature
2 Temperature, degrees
AP2-23
AP2.4.13 ARPA targets
AP2.4.13.1. When source is a radar using TTM message
Typical examples are FURUNO and other radar using generic IEC 61162-1 Ed.1.
Used message identifier TTM
Example of a message $RATTM,00,0.000,0.00,T,0.0,0.0,T,,,N,,T,R,,
accepted withany talker identifier.
As defined in introduction.
Note1:
System doesn’t supervise reception of TTM
messages, but system supervises ARPA
target life. Basis of target life supervise is the
target number. System can receive up to 40
targets, which are numbered from 1 to 40.
TTM message can inform an ECDIS about a
target measurement, but TTM message
cannot tell an ECDIS about lost or cancelled
Behaviour at checksum miss match, at
target.
line interruption or at no more received
Thus system internally cancels ARPA targets,
messages
which have been silent for last 15 seconds.
Here silent is “no TTM message with given
target number received”.
Note2:
If system has received from ARPA radar at
least one OSD message, then system
assumes that existence of OSD message is a
mandatory requirement to accept TTM
messages. Timeout is in this case 20
seconds.
For all TTM messages:
no min number of messages per time unit
max 4 messages / second
For TTM messages from a numbered target:
Receiving interval minimum and min 1 message / 10 seconds
maximum max 1 message / 2 seconds
Note:
40 targets and max 4 messages per second is
equal to 1 message / 10 seconds for each
target
AP2-24
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Target number
2 Target distance from own ship
3+4 Bearing from own ship, degrees True/relative
5 Target speed
6+7 Target course, degrees True/relative
8 Distance to closest point of approach
9 Time to CPA
10 Speed / distance units
12 Target status
13 Reference target

”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface
Furuno Voyager interface uses similar techniques as standard IEC 61162-1, but it has
special additional messages and a little bit different interpretation of some standard
message.

AP2.4.14 Speed and course from an ARPA radar
AP2.4.14.1. When source is a radar using OSD message

Used message identifier OSD
Example of a message $RAOSD,,,000.0,B,00.0,B,,,
min 1 message / 5 seconds
Used fields
Field Field name
3+4 Vessel course, degrees true Course reference
5+6 Vessel speed, Speed reference
AP2-25

”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface
Furuno Voyager interface uses similar techniques as standard IEC 61162-1, but it has
special additional messages and a little bit different interpretation of some standard
message.

AP2.4.15 Optional signals for Conning Display from Engine

Control
AP2.4.15.1. When source is simulated SINDEL Engine Control
Simulated SINDEL Engine Control uses proprietary messages based on standard

NMEA V1.5.

AP2.4.15.2. When source is NORCONTROL Engine Control
NORCONTROL Engine Control uses proprietary messages based on standard NMEA V1.5.

AP2-26
AP2.4.16 Transmitted messages to an ARPA radar
When ARPA radar uses standard messages
AP2.4.16.1. Datum

Example of a message $EIDTM,W84,,00.000,N,00.000,E,0000.0,W84
Used of talker identifier EI
Use of checksum yes
Transmitting interval once before WPL messages
Used fields
Field Field name
1 local datum “W84”
AP2.4.16.2. Own ship position

Example of a message $ECGLL,0000.000,N,00000.000,E,,A,A
Used of talker identifier EC.
Use of checksum yes
Used fields
Field Field name
1+2 latitude in WGS 84 datum
3+4 longitude in WGS 84 datum
6 Status
AP2-27
AP2.4.16.3. Depth below transducer

Used message identifier DPT
Example of a message $ECDPT,1234.5,
Use of checksum yes
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Water depth relative to the transducer
2 Offset from transducer
AP2.4.16.4. Wind
Used message identifier MWV
Example of a message $ECMWV,000.0,T,00.0,N,A
Use of checksum yes
Used fields
Field Field name
1 Wind angle
2 Reference
3 Wind speed
4 Wind speed units
5 Status
AP2.4.16.5. When ARPA radar uses

Furuno ”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface
Furuno Voyager interface uses similar techniques as standard IEC 61162-1 Ed.1, but it
has special additional messages.
AP2-28
AP2.4.16.6. When ARPA radar is a Selesmar radar

Selesmar interface uses proprietary binary format
Message format Proprietary binary
AP2.4.17 AIS Targets
AP2.4.17.1. When source is AIS Transponder
IEC 61993-2 Ed.1

Message format
38400 bit/s
!AIVDM
Used message identifier Only message types 1,2,3 and 5 are used.
!AIVDO
Example of a message !AIVDM,…..
As defined in introduction.
Note that message !AIVDO is used to check
Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line that the AIS transponder itself is fully operative.
interruption or at no more received messages If no !AIVDO messages are received then
no !AIVDM message is accepted. Timeout is
20 seconds.
min 1 !AIVDO message / 10 second
max full line load without interruption
AP2.4.18 Route backup to external device
AP2.4.18.1. Datum

Example of a message $EIDTM,W84,,00.000,N,00.000,E,0000.0,W84
Use of checksum yes
Transmitting interval once before WPL messages
Used fields
Field Field name
1 local datum “W84”
AP2-29
AP2.4.18.2. Waypoint

Used message identifier WPL
Example of a message $EIWPL,00 00.000,N,000 00.000,E,1
Use of checksum yes
Once a burst of WPL messages after DTM
Transmitting interval message. Max number of transmitted
waypoints is 30.
Used fields
Field Field name
5 number of waypoint
AP2.4.18.3. Route

Used message identifier RTE
Example of a message $EIRTE,1,1,C,1,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
Use of checksum yes
once a burst of RTE messages after WPL
Transmitting interval
messages
Used fields
Field Field name
1 total number of messages transmitted
2 message number
3 message mode is “C” = complete
4 route identifier
5….15 15 number of waypoint
AP2-30
AP2.4.19 Route restore from external device
AP2.4.19.1. Waypoint

Used message identifier WPL
Example of a message $EIWPL,00 00.000,N,000 00.000,E,1
Use of checksum yes
Once a burst of WPL messages . Max number
Transmitting interval of received waypoints is 200.
Used fields
Used fields
Field Field name
5 number of waypoint
AP2.4.19.2. Route

Used message identifier RTE
Example of a message $EIRTE,1,1,C,1,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
Use of checksum yes
once a burst of RTE messages after WPL
Transmitting interval
messages
Used fields
Field Field name
1 total number of messages transmitted
2 message number
3 message mode is “C” = complete
4 route identifier
5…15 number of waypoint
AP2-31
AP2.5 Sensor Data
AP2.5 Sensor Data

AP2.5.1 Sensor and Installation parameter diagram
Gyro synchro or stepper DCODRIVE

Analog gyro1:if_type=Stepper/Synchro (uses B-Adapter)
GYRO $xxHDT CMPRXPRO

IEC 61162-1 Ed2 or Ed.1 gyro1:if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxHDT)
$xxR
OT GYRO1
CMPRXPRO
rot:if_type= Gyro1:IEC 61162-1 ($xxROT)
ve
APLDRIVE
cti
)
fa
ro gyro1:if_type= Trackpilot
gy
no
(
A
tio
E SS
ica
$P 1) APLDRIVE
Ind
yro
A (g gyro1:if_type= Trackpilot (double gyro1) GYRO2
SS
$PE
TRACKPILOT $PESSA (gyro) APLDRIVE

(Only EMRI) gyro2:if_type= Trackpilot
calculation
NMEA V1.5 $PES
SA (g
yro2)
$P APLDRIVE
ES
SA gyro2:if_type= Trackpilot (double gyro2)
(gy
ro2
)
$P APLDRIVE
ES
SA rot:if_type= Trackpilot (double gyro1&2) ROT
APLDRIVE
rot:if_type= Trackpilot
DAXRXPRO
SAL dax:if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxVBW)
or $PS
VBW
$PK
DAX
DAX or LOG $PKVBW DAXRXPRO Ground
NMEA V1.5 dax:if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($PSALL) Speed
$PK
DRU
DAXRXPRO
dax:if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxVBW)
DAX or LOG $xxVBW DAXRXPRO

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or Ed.1 LOG
$xx Water
VBW Speed
DAXRXPRO
LOG 200p/nm DCODRIVE

Analog log:if_type=Analog Pulses (uses B-Adapter)
AIS !xxVDO and !xxVDM AISDRIVE AIS

TRANSPONDER if_type= IEC 61162-2 (38400bit/s) TARGETS
IEC 61993-2 Ed.1
ROUTE BACKUP $EIDTM, $EIWPL and $EIRTE EXTTRPRO

IEC 61162-1 Ed2 if_type= Route backup IEC 61162-1
ECHOSOUNDER $xxDPT ECHRXPRO

DEPTH
IEC 61162-1 Ed2 or Ed.1 if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxDPT)
WIND SENSOR $xxMWV WNDRXPRO

WIND
IEC 61162-1 Ed2 or Ed.1 if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxMWV)
AP2-32
AP2.5 Sensor Data
proprietary binary 9600 bit/s SELDRIVE

ARPA RADAR if_type= Selesmar Status 12 bytes,
(SELESMAR) proprietary binary 9600 bit/s Selesmar Status 13bytes,
binary serial Selesmar Status 14 bytes or
Selesmar New Checksum
$xxOSD, $xxTTM and $PAESP
ARPA RADAR RADRIVE
(FURUNO) if_type= FURUNO IEC 61162-1 ( talker ID=II)
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 $IIDTM,$IIGLL,$IIMVW,$IIDPT,
$FUGLL,$PLSPL,$PLPSP,$PAESC,
$PAESF,$PAESN,$PAESP and ARPA
$PAESW TARGETS
$xxOSD, $xxTTM and $PAESP
ARPA RADAR RADRIVE
(FURUNO) if_type= FURUNO IEC 61162-1 ( talker ID=EC)
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
$ECDTM,$ECGLL,$ECMVW,$ECDPT,
$FUGLL,$PLSPL,$PLPSP,$PAESC, SPEED &
$PAESF,$PAESN,$PAESP and COURSE
$PAESW from ARPA
ARPA RADAR $xxOSD and $xxTTM

RADRIVE
(IMO compliant)
if_type= FURUNO IEC 61162-1 ( talker ID=EI)
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or Ed.1
$EIDTM,$EIGLL,$EIMVW and
$ECDPT
$AMACK
ALARXPRO
AMWSS if_type= IEC 61162-1 (AMWSS)
$PNEDA,$PNEDB,$PNEAL and
$PNERI
DGPS VTG
$xxDTM,$xxGGA,$xxVTG and $xxZDA POSDRIVE A and
om GG
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or Data fr DGPS
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 G POSITION
DGPS ident=GGA d VT
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
$xxGGA,$xxVTG and $xxZDA
A an G SOG & COG
talker=xx
GG VT
d
spd talker=xx
from an
G
ata LL
VT
D G
nd
m
POSDRIVE fro
La
DGPS $xxDTM,$xxGGA,$xxVTG and $xxZDA a
GL
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or at
D
m
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
fro
ident=GGA
ta
DGPS $xxGGA,$xxVTG and $xxZDA
Da
talker=GP
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
spd talker=GP
D
at
POSDRIVE Da
a
fro
DGPS f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or ta
$xxDTM,$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA fro
m
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 ident=GLL m
ZD
ZD A
talker=xx A
spd talker=xx Data
from
ZDA
POSDRIVE UTC
DGPS f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or
$xxDTM,$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA Data from ZDA TIME
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 ident=GLL
talker=GP
spd talker=GP ZDA
om
a fr ZD
A
Dat
m
fro
GPS POSDRIVE ta
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2
$xxDTM,$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA
f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or Da
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
GPS ident=GLL
$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 talker=xx
spd talker=xx Dat
a fr
om
GLL
and
GPS POSDRIVE VTG
$xxDTM,$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA GPS
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or
POSITION
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
Data from GLL and VTG SOG & COG
GPS ident=GLL
$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 talker=GP
spd talker=GP
LORAN POSDRIVE
$xxDTM,$xxGLL and $xxVTG f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
ident=GLL
LORAN $xxGLL and $xxVTG talker=xx
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 spd talker=xx LORAN
POSITION
SOG & COG
LORAN POSDRIVE
$xxDTM,$LCGLL and $LCVTG f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
LORAN ident=GLL
$LCGLL and $lcVTG
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 talker=LC
spd talker=LC
AP2-33
AP2.5 Sensor Data
AP2.5.2 Source of Position

The figure below shows how source for position is chosen. The Kalman filter uses all
position sensors which have either primary or secondary as input for its calculation. DGPS
and SYLEDIS position sensors are considered more accurate than other position sensors.
The latitude and longitude position is shown at the upper right corner on the chart radar
display, and in the example below the position source is DGPS. Other indications which may
be displayed in the position area are as follows:
- NO POSIT: Appears (in red) when no dead reckoning sensors are chosen and valid.
- DEAD REC: Shown (in red) when position source is dead reckoning.
- DGPS, GPS, LORAN: Name of position source.
- LOST DGPS: Shown (in red) when the user-selected DGPS device has lost the DGPS
signal.
- FIL LOST DGPS: Shown (in red) when the Kalman filter is in use and the
user-selected DGPS device has lost the DGPS signal.
- FILTER HIGH: Shown when the position source is the Kalman filter with
high-precision position sensor.
- FILTER: Shown when position source is the Kalman filter without high-precision
position sensor.
- BAD FILTER: Shown (in red) when position source is the Kalman filter and the filter
has excluded at least one of the chosen sensors because of poor accuracy.
Selected and position exists

KALMAN filter
Not selected or
no position GPS in diff.
Mode Selected and position exists
selected as
Not selected or
no position
GPS in diff. Mode
Selected and position exists
selected as
SECONDARY
Not selected or Position
no position used by
Any other than
the system
GPS in diff. Selected and position exists
Mode
selected as
Not selected or
no position
Any other than
GPS in diff. Mode Selected and position exists
selected as
SECONDARY
Not selected or
no position
Backup Dead
Reckoning
Selected and no
position
AP2-34
AP2.5 Sensor Data
AP2.5.3 HDG Data
Manual COURSE Selected
Not selected Selected and

value exists
GYRO 1 Heading
used by
Not selected or no value system
Selected and
value exists
GYRO 2
Not selected or no value

Available
GYRO from RADAR
Not available
Alarm 2002
No Course
Available
AP2.5.4 ROT Data

ROT used by system is shown in the Spd/Cse page of SENSORS dialog box.
The Rate Gyro field shows the text “(calc.)” when the system calculates ROT from
movement of heading. No text is shown when the value is received from an ROT gyro.
Selected in Installation
Calculated ROT parameters
from movement of
Heading
ROT
Not selected in Installation used by
parameters system
Value exists
ROT Gyro
No value
Alarm 4018
ROT gyro error
AP2-35
AP2.5 Sensor Data
AP2.5.5 SOG/COG Data

SOG/COG used by the system is shown at the upper right corner of the chart radar
display. Text which denote SOG/COG source are;
- bot: Bottom tracking dual-axis log - arpa: Combined data of COG and SOG
- wat: Water tracking log - calc: speed calculated from SOG
- pos: Average of chosen position sensors - man: Manual entry
- filter: KALMAN filter
Average of Selected and

SOG/COG from value exists
all selected
DGPS, GPS
Not selected
or no value
DUALLOG Selected and

(Bottom track of value exists SOG/COG
dual axis Doppler log used by
the system
Not selected
or no value
Selected and
RADAR value exists
(measures SOG/COG
from target = Auto drift)
Not selected
or no value
Average of Selected and

SOG/COG from all value exists
selected Decca,
Loran or
Ref.Target
Not selected
or no value
Selected and
KALMAN filter value exists
calculation result
from the movement of
position
Not selected
or no value
Water speed
and
Gyro heading
AP2-36
AP2.5 Sensor Data
AP2.5.6 Source of Docking speed components: Conning and Docking

Docking speed components are bow speed (transversal), stern speed (transversal) and
center speed (longitudinal).
Installation parameter offset values
ROT used by the system
SOG/COG used by the system Bow and

Calculator
stern speed
used by
Speed (water speed) used by the system
the system
Heading used by the system
AP2.5.7 Source of Drift

Drift used by the system is shown in the “Other page” of the Sensors dialog box. Text
which may appear to show source of set and drift are;
- log: Log or dual axis log
- posit: Position sensor
- filter: KALMAN filter
- man: Manual entry
Selected
Manual
DRIFT Not
selecte Drift
used by
the
SOG/COG used by the system system
Speed (water speed) used by the system Calculator
Heading used by the system
AP2-37
AP2.5 Sensor Data
AP2.5.8 Source of Water Speed for drift calculation

“SOG, COG” is speed over ground and course over ground, respectively. “Speed” is
speed over water, “Drift” is the difference between speed over water and speed over
ground. The figure below shows the source of water speed is used for drift calculation.
Manual Selected
SPEED
Not selected
LOG
(Water track of Selected and value exist
dual axis doppler
log OR Pilot log)
Speed
Not selected used by
or no value the system
RADAR Selected and value exist (Water
(measures Speed)
water speed)
Not selected
or no value
SOG, if available
from any of Available
selected position
receiver
Not available
Alarm 2001
No Speed
Available
AP2-38
AP2.5 Sensor Data
AP2.5.9 Summary of interfaces and optional components
The tables below contain description of interfaces and optional components usable in the system. Alternatives, which might be available from
the installation parameters, are not recommended for the system. “Default” is recommended.
Op- Transmitted
Interface Alternative Signal type Received message Notes
tion message
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or
Gyro Default HDT min 1 message per second
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
Gyro Alternative 1 Yes Stepper 1 step per 1/6°, requires B-Adapter
Gyro Alternative 2 Yes Synchro Synchro 1:360, requires B-Adapter
Proprietary ASCII Proprietary ASCII
Trackpilot Default Yes Serial 4800bit/s messages based on messages based on For EMRI SEM 200 trackpilot
NMEA V1.5 NMEA V1.5
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or
Log Default VBW Min 1 message per 2 second
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
Log Alternative 1 NMEA V1.5 Proprietary PKVBW Min 1 message per 2 second
Log Alternative 2 NMEA V1.5 Proprietary PSALL Min 1 message per 2 second
Log Alternative 3 Yes Pulse 200 pulses / NM
GGA, DTM, VTG,
Position 1 Default IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 For DGPS
ZDA
Position 1 Alternative 1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 GGA, DTM, VTG For DGPS
GLL, DTM, VTG,
Position 1 Alternative 2 IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 For any EPFS
ZDA
Position 1 Alternative 3 IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 GLL, DTM, VTG For any EPFS
Position 1 Alternative 4 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GGA, VTG, ZDA For DGPS
Position 1 Alternative 5 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GGA, VTG For DGPS
Position 1 Alternative 6 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GLL, VTG, ZDA For other than DGPS
Position 1 Alternative 7 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GLL, VTG For other than DGPS
AP2-39
AP2.5 Sensor Data
GGA, DTM, VTG,

Position 2 Default IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 For DGPS
ZDA
Position 2 Alternative 1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 GGA, DTM, VTG For DGPS
GLL, DTM, VTG,
Position 2 Alternative 2 IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 For any EPFS
ZDA
Position 2 Alternative 3 IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 GLL, DTM, VTG For any EPFS
Position 2 Alternative 4 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GGA, VTG, ZDA For DGPS
Position 2 Alternative 5 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GGA, VTG For DGPS
Position 2 Alternative 6 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GLL, VTG, ZDA For other than DGPS
Position 2 Alternative 7 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GLL, VTG For other than DGPS
GGA, DTM, VTG,
Position 3 Default Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 For DGPS
ZDA
Position 3 Alternative 1 Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 GGA, DTM, VTG For DGPS
GLL, DTM, VTG,
Position 3 Alternative 2 Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 For any EPFS
ZDA
Position 3 Alternative 3 Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 GLL, DTM, VTG For any EPFS
Position 3 Alternative 4 Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GGA, VTG, ZDA For DGPS
Position 3 Alternative 5 Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GGA, VTG For DGPS
Position 3 Alternative 6 Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GLL, VTG, ZDA For other than DGPS
Position 3 Alternative 7 Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GLL, VTG For other than DGPS
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or GLL, DTM, MWV,
ARPA radar 1 Default TTM, OSD For any ARPA radar
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 DPT
Alternative 1 Proprietary ASCII Proprietary ASCII For FURUNO ARPA radar with
ARPA radar 1 FURUNO Serial 4800bit/s messages based on messages based on VOYAGER Integrated Bridge System
VOYAGER NMEA NMEA V1.5 interface
Alternative 2 Proprietary binary Proprietary binary
ARPA radar 1 Serial 9600bit/s For SELESMAR ARPA radar
SELESMAR messages messages
AP2-40
AP2.5 Sensor Data

ARPA radar 2 Default TTM, OSD For any ARPA radar
Alternative 1 TTM, OSD + Proprietary ASCII For FURUNO ARPA radar with
ARPA radar 2 FURUNO IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 proprietary messages based on VOYAGER Integrated Bridge System
VOYAGER messages NMEA V1.5 interface
ARPA radar 2 Serial 9600bit/s For SELESMAR ARPA radar
ARPA radar 3 Default Yes TTM, OSD For any ARPA radar
Alternative 1 TTM, OSD + Proprietary ASCII For FURUNO ARPA radar with
ARPA radar 3 FURUNO Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 proprietary messages based on VOYAGER Integrated Bridge System
VOYAGER messages NMEA V1.5 interface
ARPA radar 3 Yes Serial 9600bit/s For SELESMAR ARPA radar
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or
Wind sensor Yes MWV Min 1 message per 10 second
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or
Echo sounder Yes DBT Min 1 message per 10 second
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
Water
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or
Temperature Yes MTW Min 1 message per 10 second
IEC 61162-1 Ed.1
sensor
AIS IEC 61993-2 Ed.1
Yes !AIVDM, !AIVDO Min 1 !AIVDO per 10 seconds
transponder Serial 38400bit/s
Proprietary ASCII Proprietary ASCII
This interface is required for Lloyds
AMWSS Yes Serial 4800bit/s messages based on messages based on
Register class notation NAV1 IBS
IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 IEC 61162-1 Ed.2
Route backup
EIDTM, EIWPL, Send once after selection of Monitored
for external Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.2
EIRTE Route
device
Route backup Send once after selection of Monitored
EIDTM, EIWPL,
and restore for Yes IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 EIWPL, EIRTE Route Received once after Route import
EIRTE
Furuno GP-80 from external device
AP2-41
AP2.5 Sensor Data
ECDIS failure Contact output Open when ECDIS failure

Open when outside, requires either 2nd
Outside
Yes Contact output LAN-Adapter EC-1010 or B-Adapter
channel limits
EC-1020
Open when below limit, requires
Depth below Echosounder and either 2nd
Yes Contact output
limit LAN-Adapter EC-1010 or B-Adapter
EC-1020
Open when any navigation sensor
Navigation
Yes Contact output alarm, requires either 2nd LAN-Adapter
sensor alarm
EC-1010 or B-Adapter EC-1020
Any ECDIS
Contact output Open when any ECDIS alarm
alarm
IEC 62065
Backup
Contact output Open when backup navigator alarm
navigator
alarm
Operator Closed when a key is pressed on control
Contact output
fitness panel
Closing of this acknowledge current
Alarm Ack Yes Contact input
alarm
Closing of this mute buzzer but do not
Buzzer stop Yes Contact input
acknowledge current alarm
Radar echo
Yes See separate table Requires Radar Echo Overlay card
overlay
Engine start air
Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage Requires B-Adapter EC-1020
pressure
Proprietary ASCII
Engine start air
Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From NORCONTROL Engine control
pressure
on NMEA V1.5
AP2-42
AP2.5 Sensor Data
Air pressure Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

Proprietary ASCII
Air pressure Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From Engine control
on NMEA V1.5
Fuel
consumption
Proprietary ASCII
Fuel
Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From NORCONTROL Engine control
consumption
on NMEA V1.5
Rudder 1 Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage Requires B-Adapter EC-1020
Proprietary ASCII
From EMRI SEM 200or FURUNO
Rudder 1 Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based
FAP-2000 track pilot
on NMEA V1.5
Proprietary ASCII
Rudder 1 Alternative 3 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From Engine control
on NMEA V1.5
Rudder 2 Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage Requires B-Adapter EC-1020
Proprietary ASCII
From EMRI SEM 200 or FURUNO
Rudder 2 Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based
FAP-2000 track pilot
on NMEA V1.5
Proprietary ASCII
Rudder 2 Alternative 3 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From Engine control
on NMEA V1.5
Propeller 1 RPM Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage Requires B-Adapter EC-1020
Proprietary ASCII
Propeller 1 RPM Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From simulated SINDEL Engine control
on NMEA V1.5
Proprietary ASCII
Propeller 1 RPM Alternative 3 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From NORCONTROL Engine control
on NMEA V1.5
AP2-43
AP2.5 Sensor Data
Propeller 1 Pitch Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

Proprietary ASCII
Propeller 1 Pitch Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From simulated SINDEL Engine control
on NMEA V1.5
Propeller 2 RPM Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage Requires B-Adapter EC-1020
Proprietary ASCII
Propeller 2 RPM Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From simulated SINDEL Engine control
on NMEA V1.5
Propeller 2 Pitch Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage Requires B-Adapter EC-1020
Proprietary ASCII
Propeller 2 Pitch Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From simulated SINDEL Engine control
on NMEA V1.5
Thruster 1
(stern)
Proprietary ASCII
Thruster 1
Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From simulated SINDEL Engine control
(stern)
on NMEA V1.5
Thruster 1
Single linear voltage from 0° to 360°
(stern) Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage
Requires B-Adapter EC-1020
Azimuth
Thruster 1 2 separate voltage signals, which
(stern) Alternative 2 Yes 2 x Analogue voltage represent sine and cosine of angle.
Azimuth Requires B-Adapter Ec-1020
Thruster 1 Proprietary ASCII
(stern) Alternative 3 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From simulated SINDEL Engine control
Azimuth on NMEA V1.5
AP2-44
AP2.5 Sensor Data
Thruster 3 (bow) Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

Proprietary ASCII
Thruster 3 (bow) Alternative 2 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From simulated SINDEL Engine control
on NMEA V1.5
Thruster 3 (bow) Yes Analogue voltage Requires B-Adapter EC-1020
Thruster 3 (bow) Single linear voltage from 0° to 360°
Alternative 1 Yes Analogue voltage
Azimuth Requires B-Adapter EC-1020
2 separate voltage signals, which
Thruster 3 (bow)
Alternative 2 Yes 2 x Analogue voltage represent sine and cosine of angle.
Azimuth
Requires B-Adapter EC-1020
Proprietary ASCII
Thruster 3 (bow)
Alternative 3 Yes NMEA V1.5 messages based From simulated SINDEL Engine control
Azimuth
on NMEA V1.5
AP2-45
1. GENERAL
1.1 Model
Frequency Output Transceiver

Model Display Radiator
Band Power location
FCR-2117 12 kW
20.1"
FCR-2127 25 kW
FCR-2817 12 kW In Antenna
23.1" 204 cm,
FCR-2827 X-band 25 kW unit
255 cm
FCR-2117-BB 10 kW
User supply
FCR-2127-BB 25 kW
FCR-2827W 23.1" 25 kW TR unit
FCR-2137S 20.1" In Antenna
FCR-2837S unit
23.1" 309 cm,
FCR-2837SW S-band 30 kW TR unit
377 cm
In Antenna
FCR-2137S-BB User supply
unit
1.2 Display Unit

- Display Raster scan, daylight bright, single or multicolor (32)
- Scan system Interlace (horizontal, 48.3 kHz, vertical 60 Hz)
- Picture
FCR-2107 series FCR-2807 series

Size 20.1-inch LCD 23.1-inch LCD
Display range 408×306 470.4×352.8
Resolution 1280×1024 pixel 1600×1200 pixel
Effective display area 250 mm 340 mm
- Display mode Radar mode, Chart radar mode, ECDIS mode

- Presentation mode Head-up, Heading-up TB, Course-up,
Course-up true, North-up, North-up true
AP3-1
2. RADAR/CHART RADAR
2.1 Antenna unit

- Type Slotted waveguide array Antenna Radiators
- Polarization Horizontal
- Wind resistance Relative wind 100 kt
- Beam width and side lobe attenuation
X-band S-band
XN20AF XN24AF SN30AF SN36AF
Length 204 cm 255 cm 309 cm 377 cm
Beam width(H) 1.23° 0.95° 2.3° 1.8°
Beam width(V) 20° 25°
Sidelobe within ±10° -28 dB -24 dB
Sidelobe outside ±10° -32 dB -30 dB
- Rotation FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827: 24 rpm or 42 rpm

FCR-2137S/2837S : 21 rpm (50 Hz)/26 rpm (60 Hz)/
45 rpm (High Speed Craft)
FCR-2827W : 24 rpm
FCR-2837SW : 21 rpm (50 Hz)/26 rpm (60 Hz)
2.2 Transceiver
- Frequency X-band: 9410 MHz ± 30 MHz
S-band: 3050 MHz ± 30 MHz
- Output power FCR-2117/2817: 12 kW FCR-2127/2827: 25 kW
FCR-2137S/2837S/2837SW: 30 kW
Unwanted emissions comply with ITU-R RR.
- Pulse length, PL, PRR and range
Pulselength S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L
PL (µs) 0.07 0.15 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.2
PRF (Hz) 3000* 3000* 1500 1000 1000 600**
0.125,
Range 0.5, 0.75, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 3, 6, 12, 6, 12, 24,
0.25, 0.5,
scale(nm) 1.5, 3 3, 6 24 24 48, 96
0.75, 1.5
*: 2200 Hz with ARPA on 32 nm range

**: 450 Hz on 96 nm range
AP3-2
- IF 60 MHz
- Noise figure X-band: 6 dB, S-band: 4 dB
- Duplexer Ferrite circulator with diode limiter:
FCR-2117/2127/2137S/2817/2827/2837S
Ferrite circulator with TR limiter:
FCR-2827W/2837SW
2.3 Display-related specifications

- Minimum range 20 m w/raw video + 0 - 2 m w/digitize error
- Range discrimination 20 m w/raw video + 0 - 6 m w/digitize error
-Range scales (nm), range ring interval
0.125 (0.025), 0.25 (0.05), 0.5 (0.1), 0.75 (0.25), 1.5 (0.25),
3(0.5), 6 (1), 12 (2), 24 (4), 48 (8), 96 (16)
- Range accuracy Within 1% or 10 m, whichever is greater
- Bearing discrimination 1.5° (XN20AF), 1.2° (XN24AF), 2.5° (SN30AF),
2.0° (SN36AF)
- Bearing accuracy ±1°
- Radar map Route, coastline, buoy, etc. 20,000 pts.
in radar mode, 6,000 pts. in chart mode (using IC card)
- ARPA/ATA Acquisition: 0.1 - 32 nm, 100 targets (auto and/or manual,
selectable from menu)
Vector time: 7 times (OFF to 30 m)
Time from acquisition to display: within 60 s at 24 rpm
Trail maneuver available
- AIS Complies with IMO SN CIRC. 217, IEC60936-5
- Max. no of targets 200 targets; Safety messages: 100
- Safety msg input Address-specific, all ships
- Data display Ship's name, call sign, L/L, range, heading, course, speed,
CPA/TCPA, BCR/BCT, ROT, IMO no., MMSI no, etc.
3. ECDIS
3.1 Display contents
- Chart materials IHO/IMO S57 edition-3 ENC vectorized material
- Own ship display Own ship mark and numeral indication or lat/lon,
speed and course
- Other ship display ARPA target mark and numerical data
(range and bearing from own ship, course, speed,
CPA,TCPA)
- Other data Route, waypoint, nav line, electronic chart,
various alarms
AP3-3
3.2 Other display features Chart zoom in and zoom out

- Cursor EBL, VRM, parallel cursor
- One-touch restore One-touch restore of standard mode
- Chart data Select to show applicable data
3.3 User interface

- Position fixing - Navigation by position from external EPFS
- Dead reckoning by gyro, log
- Kalman filter determines best position from gyro
data and EPFS
- Navigation planning - Planning by Rhumb line, Great circle
- Route creation
- Route data may be transferred to radar
- Route data may be transferred from ECDIS
- Route monitoring - Off-track display
- Waypoint arrival alarm
- Shallow depth alarm
- User chart User chart creation
(Max. 2000 lines, 1000 symbols), with overlay
- MOB (Man Overboard) Position, etc. at time of man overboard are recorded
and MOB mark is displayed on the screen.
4. I/O
4.1 Heading data Built-in interface (option) for sync signal
(20 - 135 VAC, 50 - 400 Hz),
or stepper signal (20 - 100 VDC), any polarity,
for gyrocompass, GPS compass SC-60/120 by IEC
61162-2
4.2 Speed signal IEC 61162-1
4.3 AIS interface IEC 61162-1, ABM, BDM, etc.
4.4 Input sentences BWC, BWR, DBS, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, HDT,
RMA, RMB, RMC, RTE, VBW, VDR, VHW, VWR, VTG,
VWT, MTW, MWV, WPL, ZDA (IEC 61162-1)
4.5 Output sentences TLL, RSD, TTM, AAM (IEC 61162-1)
AP3-4
5. POWER SUPPLY
5.1 Display unit 100-230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz, 0.6-0.3 A

5.2 Radar units FCR-2117/2817/2117-BB
- 100 - 115 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 2.6 A1/3.0 A2
- 220 - 230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 1.6 A1/1.7 A2
FCR-2127/2827/2127-BB
- 100 - 115 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 3.0 A1/3.4 A2
- 220 - 230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 1.8 A1/1.9 A2
FCR-2137S/2837S/2837SW/2137S-BB
- 100 - 115 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 3.0 A1/3.0 A2
- 220 - 230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 1.7 A1/1.7 A2
FCR-2827W
- 100 - 115 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 3.2 A (24 rpm)
- 220 - 230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 1.8 A (24 rpm)
1
24 rpm, 2 42 rpm
5.3 Chart processor unit 100 - 230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 1.5 A-0.5 A
5.4 Switching hub 100 - 230V AC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 0.1 A
5.5 S-band antenna
Model Antenna voltage input (at wind speed 100 kt)

200 VAC, 380 VAC,
220 VAC, 220 VAC, 440 VAC,
3ø, 50 Hz/ 3ø, 50 Hz/
3ø, 50 Hz 3ø, 60 Hz 3ø, 60 Hz
220 VAC, 440 VAC
(HSC) (HSC) (HSC)
3ø, 60 Hz 3ø, 60 Hz
FCR-2137S(BB) 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A
FCR-2837S 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A
FCR-2837SW 3.0 A 1.5 A - - -
AP3-5
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
6.1 Useable temperature range

- Antenna unit -25°C to +55°C (storage +70°C)
- Display unit, processor units, control unit, power supply, transceiver
-15°C to +50°C
6.2 Relative humidity 93 ± 3 % at 40°C

6.3 Waterproofing
- Antenna unit IPX6 (IEC 60529)
- Display unit, processor units, control unit, power supply:
IPX0 (IEC 60529)
- Switching hub IPX0 (IEC 60529)
6.4 Vibration - From 2 Hz to 5 Hz to up to 13.2 Hz with an excursion of
±1 mm ± 10%
-13.2 Hz to 100 Hz with a constant maximum acceleration
of 7 m/s2
7. COLOR
7.1 Display unit Chassis: 2.5GY/1.5, Panel: N3.0
7.2 Chart processor unit 2.5GY/1.5
7.3 Control unit/Switching hub N3.0
7.4 Antenna unit N9.5
7.5 Power processor unit 2.5GY/1.5
8. PERFORMANCE MONITOR
8.1 PM-31 (X-band)
- Frequency 9365 - 9455 MHz
- Input power Min. +8 dBm, Max., +28 dBm
- Power output -36 dBm (2-phase pulse max output)
- Level difference 9.0 - 11.0 dB (1-phase pulse, 2-phase pulse)
AP3-6
8.2 PM-51 (S-band)

- Frequency 3020 - 3080 MHz
- Input power Min. +5 dBm, Max., +15 dBm
- Level difference 9.0 - 11.0 dB (1-phase pulse, 2-phase pulse)
9. SWITCHING HUB
9.1 Access CSMA/CD

9.2 Transmission speed Half duplex: 100 Mbps/100 Mbps
Full duplex: 20 Mbps/200 Mbps
9.3 Necessary cabling 10BASE-T: STP cable, category 3 or better
100BASE-TX: STP cable, category 5 or better
9.4 No. of ports 8 ports, all ports comply with Auto-MDIX
AP3-7
Ref-1) Installation of C-Map
Note;
As of now (March 2003), the FCR-2107 series has not supported the C-Map
Ed.3 Chart. This document describes the procedure for installing the C-Map
Ed.3 Chart on the FEA-2107 series as reference.
1. Mounting corresponding kit

Insert the dongle (eToken) of the C-Map Ed.3 in any of the USB ports. Then, connect
the corresponding kit to the USB port located on the back of the ECDIS to facilitate
inserting and removing the dongle from the front.
Note:
Before mounting the corresponding kit to the EC-1000C, remove the dongle
(eToken) once. Insert it to install the C-MAP.
2. Enabling installation of C-Map

According to the program updating procedure, check “Enable C-Map features” on the
“C-Map ed3 Settings” window. For detail, refer to information on page 8-7.
To use the C-Map Ed.3 Chart, check

“Enable C-Map ed3 features”.
Ref1-1
Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP
1. Verifying version through installing and verifying C-Map Ed.3

The following chart shows the work flow from the verification of the ECDIS and LAN
Adapter versions after starting the ECDIS through the installation of C-Map Ed. 3 Chart
and the verification of its operation.
Work Flow 2
Conduct the following for the number
of EC-1000C units. Items required for verification
Start the ECDIS.

- Floppy disk (used to save
license)
Conduct “Preparation for - C-Map Ed.3 License (to be
updating LAN Adapter” and prepared for the number of
“Updating of LAN Adapter”
again. EC-1000C units by customer)
Verify the ECDIS - C-Map Ed.3 Chart CD (to be
and LAN Adapter
versions. prepared by customer)
The LAN
Adapter version
Are the is different.
versions the
same?
YES
Install the
eToken driver. ∗1: Individually install the eToken
(See ∗1)
Load the
C-Map Ed. 3 ∗2: Load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart
Chart. into each EC-1000C.
(See ∗2)
Load the
C-Map Ed. 3 ∗3: Load the corresponding
License. license into each eToken.
(See ∗3)
Verify the
display of the
C-Map Ed.3
Chart.
∗Option: See Appendix 2 for detail.
End
Ref1-2
Important;
∗1 Individually install the eToken driver.
∗2 Even if the ECDIS system are operated in Multi < - > Multi mode, load the C-Map
Ed.3 Chart into each EC-1000C.
∗3 Load the corresponding license into each eToken.
2. Verifying ECDIS and LAN Adapter versions

Restarting the ECDIS will initiate rebuilding the chart.
Time required for rebuilding varies with the volume of the chart loaded into each
ECDIS. (It may take 30 minutes or more to load the chart if a large volume of data such
as S57 chart or Ed.2 chart is loaded.)
Upon completion of rebuilding the data and starting the ECDIS, verify at the location
shown in the window below whether the ECDIS software and the LAN Adapter are
normally updated.
Verify the version number.
Note:
If the version number of the ECDIS software is different from that of the LAN
Adapter, the ECDISD will generate “LAN Adapter 1(or 2) Version Error” alarm.
In this case, referring to information in Chapter 9, update the LAN Adapter.
Ref1-3
3. Installing eToken driver

Install the eToken drive according to the procedure shown below.
Precautions;
- If the system is operated in Multi mode, change the mode to Single mode.
(The driver can be installed only in Single mode.)
- Even if the system is operated in Multi mode, the eToken driver needs to be installed
individually.
Procedure
(1) Make sure that the eToken is removed.
(2) Clear the Single mode and LAN radar overlay setting, and then set the system to S57
mode.
(3) Insert a key disk in the floppy disk drive, and then select Main Menu -> Initial
Settings -> “C-Map Ed.3 installation”.
Main Menu ->

Initial Settings ->
C-Map Ed3 installation
(4) The ECDIS software will automatically stop running and the window shown below
will be displayed in the place in which the “Initial Settings” window was displayed.
Make sure that the button located in the lower center of the window displays
“Install”, and then click this “Install” button. (Note that the button is actually
difficult to be seen.)
Click this button.
Ref1-4
(5) After the following message is displayed, insert the eToken in the USB port of the
corresponding kit (i.e., the position in which the eToken was originally inserted).
When this message is

displayed insert the eToken.
(6) When the eToken is inserted, “Hardware Wizard” of the Windows will be displayed.
Click the “Cancel” button at this time. (If the eToken is already installed, the
windows of Step 6 to 9 will not appear.)
Click the “Cancel” button.
(7) Cancel the “Hardware Wizard” shown above, and then click “Yes”.
Click “Yes”.
Ref1-5
(8) After the following message is displayed, remove the eToken from the USB port
once. After that, click “OK”.
Remove the eToken,

and then click “OK”.
(9) After the following message is displayed, insert the eToken in the USB port once
again. After that, click “OK”.
Insert the eToken, and

then click “OK”.
(10) Click “Yes”.
Click “Yes”.

Note that clicking “No” will not complete the installation.
Click “Yes”.
Ref1-6
(12) Start the installer, and then click the “Next” button.
Click the “Next” button.
(13) Click the “Next” button.
(14) Click the “Next” button.
Ref1-7
(15) Installation will be initiated.
(16) When the installation is complete, click the “Close” button.
Click the “Close” button.
Ref1-8
(17) The installer will be closed, and the window shown below will be displayed.
Make sure that the button located in the lower center of the window displays
“Uninstall”. (Note that the button is actually difficult to be seen.)
Press the “×” button in the upper right-hand corner of the window to close the
window. When the window is closed, the ECDIS software will automatically
restart running.
“Uninstall” must be displayed.

∗Do not click this button.
Be sure to click the “×”

to close this window.
Important;
At this time, NEVER click the “Uninstall” button. Clicking the “Uninstall”
button will initiate deleting the driver.
Accidentally clicking this button will start the uninstaller. In this case, select
“Remove”, not “Repair”, delete the driver, and then reinstall the eToken driver
once again according to the procedure shown above.
(18) Restart the ECDIS software, and then remove the key disk from the driver.
Ref1-9
4. Loading C-Map Ed.3 Chart

Precautions;
To load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart, pay particular attention to the following. (For detail,
refer to information in page Ref1-18 Appendix 1.)
- The C-Map Ed.3 Chart needs to be loaded individually into the EC-1000C processor
units equipped.
(Unlike the Ed.2 Chart, this Chart cannot be copied by Harmonize.)
Procedure
(1) Select Main Menu -> Chart Menu -> C-Map Ed3 ->“Load and register for use”.
(2) The ECDIS software will automatically stop running and the window shown below
will be displayed. Insert the C-Map Ed.3 Chart CD in the CD-ROM drive, and then
click the “Copy Database to HD” button located in the center of the window.
Insert the Chart CD, and

then click this button.
(3) You will be asked a copy destination. Select “Local Disk (M)” (“M” drive), and then
click “OK”.
Select “M” drive.
After selecting,
click ”OK”.
Ref1-10
Click “Yes”.
(5) Copying of the database will be initiated. (The copying takes approximately 10
minutes.)
(6) Upon completion of copying the database, the dialog box shown below will be
displayed. Then, click “OK”.
Click ”OK”.
(7) After the completion of copying the database, the window shown below will be
displayed again.
The version number of the Chart copied will be displayed in the left-hand column.
Then, verify that the displayed version number corresponds to that of the original
Chart.
Click “×” to close the window.

Verify the version number.
After verifying the version number, click the “×” button in the upper right-hand
corner of the window to close the window. When the window is closed, the ECDIS
software will automatically start up. (At this point, the Chart will not be
displayed.)
Ref1-11
5. Loading C-Map Ed.3 license

Load the C-Map Ed.3 license.
The following two methods are available for loading the license. The loading method
varies with the format in which the license was ordered.
- Loading the license in a file
- Loading the license in a license string.
Precautions;
To load the license, pay particular attention to the following.
(1) A license corresponding to the eToken needs to be loaded.
(No different license can be loaded.)
(2) It needs to be verified that the license of each EC-1000C is a license belonging to
the same guard zone in the Multi operation.
(If different, inform customer that the licenses must belong to the same guard zone,
and then exit from loading of the license.
5.1 Loading license in a file

Procedure
(1) The save the relevant license to a floppy disk.
(Be sure to prohibit writing in the floppy disk after saving the license to it.)
After the completion of loading the license, return the floppy disk to the customer,
and properly control the license.
(2) Select Main Menu -> Chart Menu -> C-Map Ed3 -> Licenses.
The ECDIS software will automatically stop running, and the window shown below
will be displayed. The ID of eToken will be displayed in the “System ID” area in the
upper left of the window. Then, verify that the System ID is corresponding to that of
the eToken connected.
Verify the “System ID”

and the ID of the
eToken.
Ref1-12
(3) Click the “Add Licenses from file” button.
Click the ”Add Licenses from file” button.
(4) You are asked the license file destination. Then, insert the previous floppy disk in the
floppy disk drive. Subsequently, select (A) (“A” drive) and the “password.usr” file,
and then click “OK”.
Select the
“password.usr” file.
Click “OK”.
(5) Click “Yes”
Click “Yes”.
Ref1-13
(6) License loading will be initiated.
(7) When license loading succeeds, the dialog box shown below will be displayed. Then,
click the “Close” button.
Click the “Close” button.
(8) Click the “License List” button.
(9) The “License List” will be displayed. Verify that the license has been registered.
Click the “License

list” button
Click “×” to close the window.

Verify the license.
(10) Click the “×” button in the upper right-hand corner of the window to close the
window.
Ref1-14
5.2 Loading license in License String

Procedure
∗Obtain the License String code from customer.
(1) Select Main Menu -> Chart Menu -> C-Map Ed3 ->“Licenses”.
(2) The ECDIS software will automatically stop running, and the window shown below
will be displayed.
(3) Click the “Add License manually” button.
(4) Type a code in the “License String” box at the lower right of the window, and then
click the “Add License” button.
Click the “Add

License
manually” button.
Type a code.
Click the “Add License” button.
(5) If the code typed is correct, the dialog box shown below will be displayed. Then,
click “OK”.
Click “OK”.
Ref1-15
(6) The “License List” will be displayed. Verify that the license has been registered.
Click “×” to close

Verify the license. the window.
(7) Click the “×” button in the upper right-hand corner of the window to close the
window.
Ref1-16
6. Verifying the display of C-Map Ed.3 Chart

Verify that the C-Map Ed.3 Chart is displayed.
Procedure
(1) Select Main Menu -> Chart Menu ->“Chart Catalogue”.
(2) The “Chart Catalogue” will be displayed. Then, check “C-Map” in the “Source of
Chart Catalogue” menu. Verify that checking “C-Map” turns the cells green as
shown below.
Cells to be turned
green frame.
“Cell Name” and ”Green - Permit and SENC OK”

to be displayed.
(3) Select any cell in the catalogue, and then verify that “Cell Name” and “Green -
Permit and SENC OK” are displayed in the Selected Chart column.
(4) Click the “Open” button to verify that the relevant cell opens.
(5) Use “Chart Legend” (displayed by moving the cursor to the sidebar, right-clicking
the cursor to select “Chart Legend” from the menu, and then clicking the wheel) or
Cell “Info” in the Chart Catalogue to verify the cell name.
Conduct this verification in a sea area having no S57 Chart. Not doing so will
prioritize the S57 Chart, thus causing the Ed.3 Chart not to be displayed.
∗The C-Map Ed.3 Chart is displayed in priority to the Ed.2 Chart.
The proper display of the Chart indicates that the setting

Selected cell to open
of the C-Map Ed.3 Chart is complete.
∗After the completion of loading the C-Map Ed.3 Chart,
conduct the operation specified in Appendix 2 with the
permission of customer. (This is not an essential
operation.)
Ref1-17
Appendix 1. Precautions for C-Map Ed.3 Chart in Multi operation

To load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart into the EC-1000C that is being operated in Multi < - >
Multi operation, particular attention needs to be paid. The following section describes
precautions.
1. Loading S57, C-Map Ed.2, and ARCS Charts

To use the S57, C-Map Ed.2, and ARCS Charts in Multi operation, follow the procedure
shown below.
(1) Use the EC-1000C No.1 to load the S57, C-Map Ed.2, and ARCS Charts.
(2) Set the EC-1000C No.1 and No.2 to Multi mode.
(3) Harmonization will be initiated.
(4) Chart loaded into the EC-1000C No. 1 will be copied into No. 2.
∗If the time stamp of “global_catalog.cat” of No. 1 is newer than that of No. 2:
S57、C-Map Ed.2などの場合
For S57, C-Map Ed.2, etc.
EC-1000C No.1 EC-1000C No.2
②Multi
e Harmonized
③Harmonizeされる
c Load the S57,

①S57、C-Map Ed.2を f Copied
④コピーされる
C-Map, and Ed.2
ロードする
Charts.
Ref1-18
As shown above, for the S57, C-Map Ed.2, and ARCS Charts, loading the Chart into
one EC-1000C unit could copy the Chart into the other unit.
However, for the C-Map Ed.3 Chart, loading operation comes to an end as shown
below.
2. Loading C-Map Ed.3 Chart

(1) Use the EC-1000C No.1 to load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart.
(4) Chart loaded into the EC-1000C No. 1 is not copied into No. 2.
Even if the C-Map Ed.3 Chart is a multiple chart, it cannot be harmonized
(copied).
In other words, in case of the C-Map Ed.3 Chart, the Chart must be loaded into all
EC-1000C units.
* However, loading the C-Map Ed.3 Charts requires very short time and completes
in a period of approximately 10 minutes.
C-Map
For Ed.3の場合
C-Map Ed.3 Chart
EC-1000C No.1 EC-1000C No.2
②Multi
e Harmonized
③Harmonizeされる
f Not copied
④コピーされない
①C-Map Ed.3のチャ
c Load the S57,
ートをロードする
C-Map, and Ed.2
Charts.
Ref1-19
Furthermore, connecting the EC-1000C units with a license for different Zone of the
C-Map Ed.3 Chart in Multi operation loads the Chart as shown below.
3. License for different zone of C-Map Ed.3 Chart

(1) Load the Zone license incorporated in the EC-1000C No.1.
(2) Load a license different from that of the EC-1000C No.1 into No.2.
(5) Due to different licenses, only the Chart corresponding to each license can be
displayed even in Multi mode.
For C-Map
C-MapEd.3の場合
Ed.3 Chart
EC-1000C No.1 EC-1000C No.2
③Multi
④Harmonize
それぞれのライセンスに相当
Only the portion
する部分のみ表示
corresponding to each
license will be
displayed.
c
①あるZoneのライセンス
Load a license for d Load a license for
②別のZoneのライセン
a certain zone.
をロードするスをロードする
a different zone.
The situation comes to as shown above.

In other words, to load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart into Multi operation system, attention
needs to be paid to the following two points.
- The C-Map Ed.3 Chart need to be individually loaded into the EC-1000C units
equipped.
- Be sure to load a license for the same Zone into the EC-1000C units operating in Multi
mode (except for cases where different licenses are intentionally loaded).
Ref1-20
Appendix 2. Deletion of C-Map Ed.2 Chart

Important
Conducting the operation shown below produces effects such as saving disk space and
also reducing time needed to rebuild the Chart. However, conduct the operation only
when customer does not need the C-Map Ed.2 Chart.
(At the same time, conducting the cleanup of disk and defragmentation will produce
further effect.)
1. Deleting C-Map Ed.2 Chart

Procedure
(1) Stop the ECDIS software running.
(2) Start Windows Explorer from the “START” menu, and then move to
“C:¥ants_system¥s57_system¥charts”.
(3) Delete all folders and files contained in the “NON_HO” folder.
Delete the “NON_HO” folder.
(4) Restart the EC-1000C.
Ref1-21
(5) Restart the ECDIS software, and then execute Main Menu -> Char Menu -> System
->“Refresh Chart after backup”.
With that, the deletion of the C-Map Ed.2 Chart is complete.
Ref1-22
Ref-2) Installation ofRef-2)
PP-510
Installation of Driver
PP-510 Driver
To print the Details Log, Voyage Log, Alarms Log, and others on PP-510 through
selecting [Menu] -> Record, a printer driver needs to be installed.
Connect the printer to the USB port. For connection, USB/Printer converter cable
shown below is required.
The EC-1000C has a printer port. However, note that the port is not available for
printing.
Centronics 36pin
USB
USB/Printer converter cable
Step-1: Installing driver
1. Exit the Chart Radar, and then move to Windows screen.
2. Open the Start -> Control Panel menus to select “Printer and Fax”.
3. Click the Add Printer icon.
Ref2-1
Ref-2) Installation of PP-510 Driver
4. The Add Printer Wizard will boot up. Then, click the Next button.
5. Check the radio button of “Local printer attached to this computer”, and then click
the Next button.
Check “Local printer attached to this computer”.
Ref2-2
6. Check the radio button of “Use the following port”, select “USB001 (Virtual printer
port for USB)”, and then click the Next button.
Check “Use the following port”.
Select “USB001 (Virtual printer port for USB)”.
7. On the window shown below, select “IBM” in the [Manufacture] box and “IBM
Proprinter II” in the [Printers] box, and then click the Next button.
Select “IBM Proprinter II”.
Select “IBM”.
Ref2-3
8. Click the radio button of “Keep existing driver (recommended)”, and then click the
Next button.
Check “Keep existing driver (recommended)”.
9. On the window shown below, “Printer name” will be set to “IBM Proprinter II”.
Then, click the Next button.
“IBM Proprinter II” is set.
Ref2-4
10. On the Printer Sharing window, check the radio button of “Do not share this
printer”, and then click the Next button.
Check “Do not share this printer”.
11. On the Printer Test Page, check the radio button of “No”, and then click the Next
button.
12. Click the Finish button. The installation is complete.
“IBM Proprinter II” is added.
Ref2-5
Step-2: IBM Proprinter II setting procedure
1. Open the Start -> Control Panel menus to select “Printers and Faxes”.
2. Select “IBM Proprinter II”, and then open “Printing Preferences..” from the File
menu.
Open “Printing Preferences..”
3. Press the “Paper/Quality” tab, and then select “Automatically Select” in the Paper
Source box to press the Advanced.. button.
Select “Automatically Select”.
Ref2-6
4. Select “A4” in the Paper/Output: Paper Size box.

Subsequently, click “Graphic: Printer Quality” to select “120 × 144 dots per inch”,
and then click OK button to return the display to the “Printers and Faxes” window.
Select “A4” in the Paper Size box.

Select “120 × 144 dots per inch”
in the Print Quality box.
5. Select “IBM Proprinter II”, and then open “Properties”.
Open “Properties”.
Ref2-7
6. Press the “Device Setting” tab, select “A4” in the Tractor Feed box, and then press
OK button. With that, the setting is complete.
Select “A4” in the Tractor Feed box.
Point: On the IBM Proprinter ll Document Properties window,

Press the “Paper Quality” tab, and then select Paper Source -> Automatically Sheet
Advanced: Paper size -> A4,
Print Quality -> 120 x 144 dots per inch.
Typical printing of Alarm:
Ref2-8
Ref-3) Updating of Ref-3)
HDD Firmware
Updating of HDD Firmware
If the Revision (Ver) of MHV2040AC firmware for 2.5-inch HDD is “00900005”, the
program may freeze. In this case, be sure to rewrite the firmware referring to the
revision verification procedure and information on Ref. 3-3 page.
Rewriting it will not erase installed charts and set values.
Preparation
Disconnect the LAN Adapter (LAN2) and the LAN (LAN1) from the radar. In addition,
connect the mouse and the service keyboard to the EC-1000C.
1. Rewriting procedure
1.2 Open the setting of “Advanced BIOS Features“ on the BIOS Setup screen, make
changes to the settings shown below, and then save the change. Make these setting
changes using the [Pg Up] or [Pg Dn] key. The objective of these settings is to
select a drive from which the device is booted.
- First Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to Floppy
- Second Boot Device: Change from Floppy to HDD-0
- First Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to Floppy

- Second Boot Device: Change from FDD to HDD-0
1.3 Insert a floppy disk for firmware change in the floppy disk drive of the
EC-1000C, and then turn ON the power supply of the EC-1000C
Ref3-1
Ref-3) Updating of HDD Firmware
1.4 The MS DOS will start up, and the software will automatically start running to make
a floppy disk firmware change.
1.5 When updating is complete, the window shown below will be displayed.
1.6 Upon completion of successful verification of the window shown above, turn OFF
the power supply of the EC-1000C.
1.8 Open the setting of “Advanced BIOS Features“ on the BIOS Setup screen, and then
return the changed setting to the original setting to save the setting.
- First Boot Device: Change from Floppy to HDD-0
Ref3-2
2. Rewrite verification procedure

2.1 Start the EC-1000C, and then exit the Chart Radar.
Exiting procedure:
1) While pressing the [Alt] key, press over the [Tab] key to select “ECAWATCH”.
2) Click the [Shutdown the Chart Rader] button on the ECAWACH window.
3) While pressing the [Alt] key, press the [F4] key. Windows screen will appear.
2.2 Open the Settings -> Control Panel -> System menus from the Start menu, and
then press the “Hardware” tab.
2.3 Open Device Manager window to select Disk drives.
2.4 Right-click the “FUJITSU MHV2040AC” icon to open “Properties”.
Ref3-3
2.5 Press the “Details” tab on the Properties window, and then enter the pull
down menu to select “Hardware lds”.
2.6 A firmware revision number will be displayed. Then, verify that the number is set
to the updated revision number, i.e., “004A0005”.
Ref3-4
E-1
ﾌｧﾝﾊﾟﾜｰｽｲｯﾁ
FAN POWER SWITCH I/Oｶｰﾄﾞﾌﾞﾗｹﾂﾄ
EC-1000C AD0812LB-A73GL
(000-165-008)
KM01.1105.11
(000-165-004)
CARD BRACKET
427-059700E
(000-165-045-10)
ﾋｭｰｽﾞ ① COM2ﾚｰﾀﾞｰｹｰﾌﾞﾙ
COM2 CABLE
GLASS TUBE FUSE
24-010-9011
FGMB 250V 5A PBF
(000-164-997)
(000-157-570-10)
ﾋｭｰｽﾞﾎﾙﾀﾞｰ
FUSE SOCKET
4301.1403
(000-165-046) ① ②③ L=310
② USBｹｰﾌﾞﾙS
USB CABLE (S)
GU2007-0031-I1
(000-164-996-10)
CPUﾎﾞｰﾄﾞｹﾝｻｽﾐﾋﾝ EMCﾌｨﾙﾀ
CPU BOARD ASSY (INSPECTED) ﾏｻﾞｰﾎﾞｰﾄﾞ EMC FILTER
PCG820GV/CPU/M/C
DDR SDRAM DIMM BOARD BACKPLANE BOARD FN2080-6-06 ③ DVI-Dｹｰﾌﾞﾙ
(001-047-000) PCI-5S-RS-R40(ROHS) (000-165-007) DVI-D CABLE
旧
old
KVR400X64C3A/512 512MB/1piece 2 (000-170-056-10) 24-010-9012
(000-165-001)
ﾊﾟﾜｰｻﾌﾟﾗｲ
POWER SUPPLY
新 77.G1136.44G UPF250-AA-BG(ROHS)
new (000-164-603-10) 1024MB/1piece 1 (000-165-006-11)
CPUｸｰﾗｰ
CPU COOLER ASSY
Z7H7Y49214 (ROHS)
(000-169-086-10) EC-1010 EC-1020
BATT(LI)
LITHIUM BATTERY
CR2032 LANｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀｹﾝｻﾋﾝ
PCB(Bｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ)
(000-159-662-10) LAN CONV.ASSY (INSPECTED)
PCB(B-ADAPTER)
I-7188EX-512/X506/S
24P0093
(000-165-666)
(001-046-960)
HDﾎﾞｳｼﾝｻﾞｲﾌｸﾛﾋﾝ
HD ANTI-VIBRATION RUBBER
EC-1000C HDｿﾌﾄｶｷｺﾐﾋﾝ
HD W/SOFTWARE INSTALLED
ﾎﾞｳｼﾝｻﾞｲ1 MHV2040AC(EC-1000C)
ANTI-VIBRATION RUBBER1 (001-008-110)
ｺｳｼﾞｻﾞｲﾘｮｳ 24-005-5107-1
4
INSTALLATION MATERIALS (100-336-921-10) PCB(POWER-ON)
ﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝｹｰﾌﾞﾙ 24P0092
POWER CABLE ﾎﾞｳｼﾝｻﾞｲ2 (001-046-980)
K15031H5183BR ANTI-VIBRATION RUBBER2
(000-164-998) 24-005-5108-0
4 ｺﾈｸﾀ PCB(ｺﾈｸﾀ)
PCB(LAN) CONNECTOR PCB (CONNECTOR)
(100-336-930-10)
ﾌｿﾞｳﾋﾝ 24P0091 1803633 24P0095
ACCESSORIES (001-046-970) (000-165-002) (001-046-990)
ｷｰﾎﾞｰﾄﾞ
KEYBOARD
WK750P DVD-ROMﾄﾞﾗｲﾌﾞ
(000-168-795-10) DVD-ROM DRIVE
ﾏｳｽ GDR-H30N
MOUSE (000-160-935-10) MODEL FEA-2107/2107-BB/2807
LYNX M9 MOUSE L=520 FCR-2117/2127/2117-BB/2127-BB/2137S/2137S-BB
(000-165-011) USBｹｰﾌﾞﾙL FDD(3.5) FCR-2817/2827/2827W/2837S/2837SW
PS/2ﾌﾞﾝﾊﾟｲｹｰﾌﾞﾙ USB CABLE (L) FLOPPY DISC DRIVE (3.5)
PS/2 KEYBOARD/MOUSE Y CABLE GU2007-0052-I1 FD-235HF APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT EC-1000C 制御部 PROCESSOR UNIT Sinfer
0C501P0104151000 (000-164-995-10) EC-1010 ECDIS LANｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ ECDIS LAN ADAPTER
(000-165-010)
(000-164-999) 18 Sep.2008 18 Sep .2008 18 Sep.2008 EC-1020 ECDIS Bｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ ECDIS B ADAPTER
Y.Kamba T.Yoshida S.Kubota DWG.NO.

LEDﾌｲﾙﾀｰ +ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｺﾈｼﾞ
LED FILTER BINDING HEAD SCREW
03-163-9615-0 M3X8 C2700Wﾎﾟﾘｼｰﾙ
(100-320-010-10) (000-163-651-10)
ｹｲｺｸﾗﾍﾞﾙ(1)
ﾌﾀ WARNING LABEL 1
LID 86-003-1011-3
03-163-9612-1 (100-236-233-10)
(100-319-981-10)
HUBLEDﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
03P9365(LF)
(008-554-860)
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ(FPC) (000-163-190-10)
FLAT CABLE
SML2CD30X230AD6P.5S4
(000-150-306-10)
HUBﾎｳﾈﾂｲﾀ
HUB HEAT SINK
03-163-9614-2
(100-320-002-10)
ﾎｺﾞｼｰﾄHUB
PROTECTION SHEET HUB
03-163-9617-0 ROHS
(100-320-410-10)
ﾎｺﾞｼｰﾄFIL
PROTECTION SHEET FIL
03-163-9616-1
ｺｳｱﾂﾏｰｸ(2) (100-320-401-10)
HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABEL
16-018-3206-0
(100-297-770-10)
ｷﾞﾔﾂﾌﾟﾊﾟﾂﾄﾞ
GAP PAD
GP1-4.0-013019
(000-162-654-10)
+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽBK
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB WASHER HEAD SCREW *BK*
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-518-10)
(000-163-190-10)
HUBﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ FL-VHｺﾈｸﾀ
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD NOISE FILTER W/CONNECTOR
03P9364(LF) 03-2169(ﾌｨﾙﾀ-3P)
(008-554-830) (008-543-900)
ｹｰｽ +ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽBK
CASE WASHER HEAD SCREW *BK*
03-163-9611-2 M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
(100-319-972-10) (000-163-518-10)
ﾋｭｰｽﾞﾎﾙﾀﾞｰ
FUSE HOLDER
ﾁﾖｳﾅﾂﾄﾅﾐﾋﾝ FH-001AF
WING NUT (000-157-349-10)
M4 MFNI2
(000-863-320)
ｺﾈｸﾀ(NR)
RECEPTACLE
NR-203-RM
(000-160-149-10) ﾋｭｰｽﾞﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ
FUSE MOUNTING PLATE
03-163-9613-0 ROHS
(100-319-990-10)
MODEL FAR-21X7/28X7 series FCR-21X7/28X7 series

FEA-2107/2807/2107-BB
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT HUB-100 ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞﾊﾌﾞ
28 Mar.2008 28 Mar.2008 28 Mar.2008 SWITCHING HUB
Y.Kamba T.Yoshida S.Kubota DWG.NO. C3519-E10-A
E-2
ﾊﾞﾂｸﾗｲﾄﾕﾆﾂﾄ
BACKLIGHT UNIT
201LHS02 ﾊﾟﾜ-ｻﾌﾟﾗｲ
(000-151-540) AC/DC CONVERTER BOARD
HYPERION OBL03 131
(000-151-543)
ﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝﾌｲﾙﾀ-
FILTER W/AC INLET & FUSES
5220.0123.1
(000-151-544)
PCB(DVI I/F)
DVI I/F BOARD
FPI NO SW
(000-151-542)
LCDﾊﾟﾈﾙ
LCD MODULE
NL128102AC31-02
(000-151-537)
PCB(ﾊﾞﾂｸﾗｲﾄINV)
BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD
AC1458 KEY BOAD I/F
(000-151-523)
PCB
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
AC1457
(000-151-539)
INVｸﾐﾋﾝ
BACKLIGHT INVERTER ASSEMBLY
AC1457/1458 ﾌｿﾞｸﾋﾝ
(000-161-037) ACCESSORIES
FP03-09810
部品構成数
Parts Include
+ﾄﾗｽﾀﾂﾋﾟﾝﾈｼﾞ1ｼﾕ
SELF TAPPING SCREW
6X30 SUS304
4
(000-162-614-10)
ﾊﾟﾈﾙﾌｯｸ
PANEL HOOK 2
03-163-1102-0
(100-305-120)
ﾊﾟﾈﾙｶﾊﾞｰ
PANEL COVER
03-163-1101-1 4
(100-305-111)
MODEL FEA-2107
FCR-2117/2127/2137S
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT MU-201CE 表示部
25 May.2007 25 May.2007 25 May.2007 MONITOR UNIT
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.Kubota DWG.NO. C4122-E03-B
E-3
+ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽ F ｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄ
BINDER HEAD SCREW GROMMET
M3X8 C2700W MBCR2 G-49
(000-163-538-10) (000-166-406-10) ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
CABLE CLAMP
ｶﾊﾞｰ 03-163-7804-2
COVER (100-305-502-10)
03-163-7802-2
(100-305-672-10)
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ A
WASHER HEAD SCREW *A*
M4X8 C2700W MBNI2
(000-163-177-10)
ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ)
CABLE ASSEMBLY ｽﾍﾟｰｻ
XH10P-W-6P L=10M SPACER
RCU-015/016 03-163-7806-0
(000-149-747)
(100-305-520)
XH10P-W-6P L=2.3M
RCU-015A
(000-150-000) ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｹｰｽ
XH10P-DS-5P L=10M SHIELD CASE
RCU-015FEA 03-163-7805-4
(000-149-744)
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ B (100-305-514-10)
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*
CLAMP M3X6 C2700W MBNI2
CK-07H (000-163-189-10)
XH-PADｺﾈｸﾀ (000-570-244-10)
XH-PAD CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY ｽﾍﾟｰｻ
03-2123(12-16P) SPACER
(008-536-710) ｽﾍﾟｰｻ SQ-8
SPACER (000-159-319-10)
SQ-25
(000-159-306-10)
ｻﾝﾀﾝｼｵｻｴｲﾀ KEYTBﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
ｷﾞｬｯﾌﾟﾊﾟｯﾄﾞ 3-PORT CLAMP PLATE ｽﾍﾟｰｻ PCB(KEYTB)
GAP PAD 03-163-7803-0 SPACER 03P9344(LF)
GP1-0.5-011016 (100-305-490-10) CZ-413 (008-555-940)
(000-147-983-10) (000-165-638-10)
ｺｷﾕｳｼｰﾄﾗﾊﾞｰｷｰ(E)
RESPIRATION SHEET RUBBER KEY (E)
03-163-7511-2 03-163-7851-2
(100-305-432-10) (100-305-562-10)
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ B
M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
(000-163-190-10)
ﾎﾞﾀﾝｶﾊﾞｰ
BUTTON COVER
RCU-016
ｽﾍﾟｰｻ 03-163-7841-1
SPACER (100-305-571-10)
SQ-25
(000-159-306-10) ﾃﾞｲｽﾄﾚｽｶﾊﾞ-ﾌｸﾛ
DISTRESS SWITCH COVER
RCU-015
05-085-1011/2/3/4
ｿｳｻﾊﾟﾈﾙ (005-950-570)
CONTROL PANEL
03-163-7801-1
(100-305-661-10)
ﾄﾗｯｸﾎﾞｰﾙ
TRACK BALL
TA4726N1
(000-147-139-02)
MODEL FEA-2107/2107-BB/2807
FAR-2XX7 series FCR-2XX7 series
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RCU-015/A/FEA, RCU-016
6 Oct.2008 6 Oct.2008 6 Oct.2008 操作部 CONTROL UNIT
Y.Kamba T.Yoshida A.Yabuta DWG.NO. C4122-E02-B
E-4
ｶﾊﾞｰﾏｸﾂｷｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄﾏｸﾂｷｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄ
REAR COVER GROMMET GROMMET
03-163-7502-3 MG-16 MG-14
(100-305-653-10) (000-166-459-10) (000-166-457-10)
ｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄ
+ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽ F GROMMET
BINDER HEAD SCREW G-39
M4X10 C2700W MBCR2 (000-166-401-10)
(000-163-543-10)
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｶﾅｸﾞ
CLAMP FIXTURE +ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA
03-163-7506-0 WASHER HEAD SCREW *A*
(100-305-390-10) M4X8 C2700W MBNI2
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟﾀﾞｲ (000-163-177-10)
CLAMP PLATE
03-163-7505-0
(100-305-380-10) ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ)
CABLE ASSEMBLY
XH10P-DS-5P L=10M
+ﾅﾍﾞSﾀｲﾄUIｻﾞﾂｷ (000-149-744)
PAN HEAD S-TIGHT UI SCREW
3X8 SWRM10
(000-158-070-10)
ﾎｺﾞｼｰﾄ
PROTECTION SHEET
03-163-7507-2
XH-PADｺﾈｸﾀ (100-305-402-10)
XH-PAD CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
03-2118(12-16P)
(008-534-740) +ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽBK
WASHER HEAD SCREW *BK*
M3X8 C2700W MBNI2
(000-163-518-10)
PNLﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄﾎｳﾈﾂｼｰﾄ(1)
PCB(PNL) HEAT SINK RUBBER(1)
03P9343(LF) 10-071-2007-2
(008-555-910) (100-285-702-10)
ﾌﾞｻﾞｰｺﾃｲｺﾞﾑ
BUZZER FIXING RUBBER
03-163-7512-1
(100-305-461-10)
ﾗﾊﾞｰｷｰ(E)
RUBBER KEY (E)
BUZﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
03-163-7551-3 ﾃﾞｲｽﾄﾚｽｶﾊﾞ-ﾌｸﾛ
PCB(BUZ)
(100-305-443-10) DISTRESS SWITCH COVER ｴﾝｺｰﾀﾞﾀﾞｲｱﾙ
03P9362(LF)
05-085-1011/2/3/4 ENCODER DIAL
(008-554-810)
(005-950-570) 03-163-7503-1
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ B (100-305-161-10)
M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 ﾂﾏﾐ
(000-163-190-10) KNOB
ｺｷﾕｳｼｰﾄ 03-163-7504-1
RESPIRATION SHEET (100-305-171-10)
ｿｳｻﾊﾟﾈﾙ 03-163-7511-2
CONTROL PANEL (100-305-432-10) ﾚｸﾄﾗDｽﾌﾟﾘﾝｸﾞ
03-163-7501-5 LECTRA D SPRING
(100-305-645-10) #6601-P
(000-161-413-10)
ﾄﾗｯｸﾎﾞｰﾙｽﾗｲﾄﾞｼｰﾄ
TRACK BALL SLIDE SHEET
TA4726N1 03-163-7509-0
(000-147-139-02) (100-305-420-10)
MODEL FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-BB/2127-BB
FCR-2137S/2837S/2837SW/2827W/2137S-BB
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RCU-020 操作部
6 Oct.2008 6 Oct.2008 6 Oct.2008 CONTROL UNIT
Y.Kamba T.Yoshida A.Yabuta
DWG.NO. C3559-E03-A
E-5
+-ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽ F
WASHER HEAD SCREW SPUｼｰﾙﾄﾞｹｰｽ
ｶﾊﾞｰ
M4X8 C2700W MBCR2 SPU SHIELD CASE
COVER
(000-168-313-10) 03-163-8025-1
03-163-8001-3
(100-308-301-10)
(100-304-553-10)
ｽﾍﾟｰｻ
SPACER
NET100ﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ SQ-16
PCB(NET) (000-159-300-10)
03P9332(LF)
(008-555-450) SPUﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
PCB(SPU)
03P9337A(LF)
(008-567-360)
ﾅｯﾄｻﾞｲ
NUT PLATE
10-071-6308-0
(100-289-380-10) SPUﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ
ﾌｲﾝｶﾞｰｶﾞｰﾄﾞ SPU MOUNTING PLATE
FINGER GUARD 03-163-8012-5
FG-06ULB (100-304-575-10)
(000-161-414-10) ﾁｮｳﾊﾞﾝ
BL-SMｺﾈｸﾀ HINGE
FAN TH-TM-5(TG)
03-2082(ﾌｧﾝ-R2P) (000-166-422-10)
ﾌｱﾝﾀﾞｸﾄ (008-534-870)
FAN DUCT
03-163-8017-2
(100-304-622-10)
ﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝｶﾊﾞｰ
POWER SUPPLY COVER
03-163-8015-1
(100-304-601-10)
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB
PWRﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PCB(HV)
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY M4X35 C2700W MBNI2 HV-9017A
FCR-2117/2817 (001-048-050)
03P9339A(LF) (000-163-197-10)
AC100V 24RPM
(008-555-760)
HV-9017B
FCR-2127/2137/2827/2837
03P9339B(LF) (001-048-060)
AC100V 42RPM
(008-555-790)
03P9339C(LF)
AC220V 24RPM HVｶﾊﾞｰ
(008-555-820) AC FIL
HV COVER AC FILTER ASSEMBLY
AC220V 42RPM 03P9339D(LF) 03-163-8016-0
(008-555-840) (100-304-610-10) RPU013/A(LF)*AC100V*
AC100V
(008-571-580)
RPU013/A(LF)*AC220V*
AC220V
HICﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ (008-571-600)
PCB(HIC)
03P9375(LF)
(001-025-840) ﾋﾗｶﾞﾀﾜﾝﾀﾂﾁｽﾃｰ
STAY
PWR HICﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ B-38-3-R
PCB(HIC) (000-162-809-10)
03P9340(LF)
(008-555-870)
ｹｰｽ(ｳｴ)
CASE (UPPER) ﾋｰﾄｼﾝｸ(R)
03-163-8011-1 HEAT SINK (R)
(100-304-561-10) 03-163-8022-4
(100-304-664-10)
ｶﾊﾞｰｵｻｴｸﾞ
ﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｲﾀ COVER FIXTURE
POWER SUPPLY CLAMPING PLATE
03-163-8023-1
03-163-8018-1
(100-304-671-10)
(100-304-631-10)
+ｻﾗｺﾈｼﾞ
ﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｶﾊﾞｰ FLAT HEAD SCREW
POWER SUPPLY CLAMP COVER M3X12 C2700W
03-163-8021-0 (000-163-619-10)
(100-304-650-10) ﾇｷｻｼﾁｮｳﾊﾞﾝｶｺｳﾋﾝ
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB HINGE ASSY
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* 03-163-8065-0
M4X15 C2700W MBNI2 (100-308-130-10)
(000-163-208-10) GCｶﾊﾞｰ
GYRO CONVERTER COVER
80-0665
(008-537-030)
ｹｰｽﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ
CASE MOUNTING PLATE
03-163-8052-2 ﾇｹﾄﾞﾒﾜｯｼｬｴﾝｻﾞﾝﾌﾞﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
(100-304-782-10) WASHER PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
TM-147-2 64P1106A(LF)
(000-801-833-10) (004-655-910)
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ B ﾁﾖｳﾊﾞﾝﾅﾂﾄｻﾞｲ
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* HINGE NUT PLATE
M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 03-163-8057-0
(000-163-190-10) (100-304-830)
TBﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
PCB(TB) ﾁｮｳﾊﾞﾝ(ｽﾌﾟﾘﾝｸﾞ)
03P9342A(LF) HINGE
(008-555-880) TH-61SUS-3
(000-166-427-10)
ｷｬｯﾌﾟｽﾍﾟｰｻｽﾄﾂﾊﾟｰ
CAP SPACER STOPPER
CS-10S 03-163-8056-1
+ｱﾌﾟｾｯﾄUIｾﾑｽB (000-164-960-10) (100-304-821-10)
WASHER HEAD SCREW
M6X30 SUS304 ｹｰｽ(ｼﾀ)
(000-163-760-10) CASE (LOWER)
ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｵｻｴｶﾅｸﾞ
03-163-8051-4
CABLE FIXING PLATE
(100-304-774-10)
03-163-8055-1
(100-304-811-10)
ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｵｻｴｲﾀ
MODEL FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-BB/2127-BB
CABLE SUPPORTING PLATE FCR-2137S/2837S/2837SW/2827W/2137S-BB
03-163-8054-2
(100-304-802-10) APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RPU-016 制御部
ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ
CABLE CLAMP 7 Oct.2008 7 Oct.2008 7 Oct.2008 (1/2) PROCESSOR UNIT
03-163-8053-2
(100-304-792-10) Y.Kamba T.Yoshida A.Yabuta DWG.NO. C3559-E01-A
E-6
E-7
GYRO COMPASS Ext. A-D CONVERTER SERIAL I/F

CONNECTOR
232-306/026-FUR
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR (000-147-408-11)
PSU-004
CONNECTOR 232-304/026-FUR 232-303/026-FUR EXT ALARM IN/OUT TRACK_CONTROL CARD I/F
231-107/026-FUR (000-147-405-11) (000-147-407-11) CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
(000-147-413-11) HDS SENSOR LOG NAVIGATOR ECDIS 232-312/026-FUR 232-305/026-FUR 734-202-FUR 232-302/026-FUR
(000-147-409-11) (000-147-406-11) (000-147-410-11) (000-147-403-11)
CONNECTOR RS-232C AIS SLAVE DISPLAY 1 SLAVE DISPLAY 2 MASTER RADAR KEY SCANNER UNIT
231-607/019-FUR
(000-147-414-11)
CONNECTOR
VH CONNECTOR ASSY VH CONNECTOR ASSY 232-312/026-FUR
03-2090(3P) 03-2089(5P) (000-147-409-11)
(008-534-660) (008-534-650) TB
03P9342
NH CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
03-2091(5P)
(008-534-670) CONNECTOR
TMP-W-1.5C-L700
GC-10 (000-147-545)
64P1106A
VH CONNECTOR CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR
03-2086(2-2P) HIF6-80D-AA-66 231-632-FUR
(008-534-910) (000-147-755-10) (000-147-412-11)
CONNECTOR
HV 734-205-FUR
(000-147-411-11)
XH-PH CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY HV9017
03-2088(6-14P) A,B
(008-534-640)
VH CONNECTOR VH CONNECTOR
03-2087(10-10P) 03-2085(3-3P)
(008-534-920) (008-534-900)
SHIP'S MAIN XH CONNECTOR

03-2084(15-15P)
100-115/220-230V AC (008-534-890)
SPU
AC FIL AC PWR
03P9337
03P9341 03P9339
03P9341A A,B,C,D
XH-SM CONNECTOR
03-2083(4-P2,P2P)
(008-534-880)
NET 100 03P9332
MODEL
FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-BB/2127-BB
FCR-2137S/2837S/2837SW/2827W/2137S-BB
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RPU-016 制御部
6 Oct.2008 6 Oct.2008 6 Oct.2008 (2/2) PROCESSOR UNIT
Y.Kamba T.Yoshida A.Yabuta
DWG.NO. C3559-E02-A
Contents of Drawings
回路図目次
Name Type Drw. No. Page Remark

FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827 C3559-C01 S-1
FCR-2137S/2837S C3561-C01 S-2
CCN-003/004
C3559-C03 S-3
Interconnection (FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827)
diagram CCN-003/004
C3561-C02 S-4
(FCR-2137S/2837S)
LAN Adapter,
EC-1010/1020 C3559-C02 S-5
B-Adapter
EC-1010/1020 LAN Adapter,
C3559-C04 S-6
(CCN-003/004) B-Adapter
FAR-2107/2807/-BB Scanner unit
C3519-K01 S-7
series (X - 12/25kW/UP)
C3527-K01 S-8 Scanner unit
FAR-2827W
C3527-K02 S-9 (X - 25kW/Down)
FAR-2137S/2837S/-BB Scanner unit
C3521-K01 S-10
series (S - 30kW/UP)
C3528-K02 S-11 Transceiver unit
FAR-2837SW
C3528-K01 S-12 (S - 30kW/Down)
PSU-007 C3521-K02 S-13 Power supply unit

HUB-100 C3519-K13 S-14 HUB unit
EC-1010
24P0091 C4122-K01 S-15
(LAN Adapter)
Circuit diagram 24P0093 (1/2) C4122-K02 S-16 EC-1020
24P0093 (2/2) C4122-K03 S-17 (B- Adapter)
03P9342 (1/3) C3519-K20 S-18

RPU-013
03P9342 (2/3) C3519-K21 S-19
Terminal board
03P9342 (3/3) C3519-K22 S-20
03P9344 (1/5) C3519-K35 S-21
03P9344 (2/5) C3519-K36 S-22
RCU-015
03P9344 (3/5) C3519-K37 S-23
Control board
03P9344 (4/5) C3519-K38 S-24
03P9344 (5/5) C3519-K39 S-25
64P1106 (1/2) C4340-K01 S-26 AD-100
64P1106 (2/2) C4340-K02 S-27 GC-10/8/7
S-0
D
C
B
A
注記
110/115/ *1 *2
220/230VAC, DPYC-1.5 RU-3305
1φ,50-60Hz
100-115/
TB901
DPYCY-1.5 *1
200-230VAC
100VAC,1φ, 1 100VAC-H
1φ,50-60Hz
1φ,50-60Hz
＊２）オプション。
＊１）造船所手配。
RADAR
100-230VAC
1
50-60Hz
*1
2 100VAC-C
1φ,50-60Hz
3 NC
PE *5
氷結防止用
空中線部
440VAC DPYC-1.5
*1
保護ｱｰｽ
FOR DE-ICER *4
IV-3.5sq.
RSB-096/097
ANTENNA UNIT
DPYC-2.5
*1
*3
J613 RW-9600,φ22
RW-4747
トランス
TX_HV 1 15/30/40/50m TB801
チャ 1
RU-1803 *2
NC 2 BRN TX_HV
STP CABLE(CAT5)
TRANSFORMER
J610 2 NC
PE *1
100/115/
TB1 24V_PLUS 1 ダイ(太) ORG[B] 3 24V_PLUS
IV-8sq.
220/230VAC
24VDC
＊４）船内配電盤では3Aのブレーカを使用。
1 H 24V_MINUS 2 キ(太) YEL[B] 4 24V_MINUS
1φ,50-60Hz
IV-8sq.
*1
2 C MOTOR(+) 3 アオ(太) BLU[B] 5 MOTOR(+)
RJ45
6
3
2
1
MOTOR(+) 4 ハイ(太) GRY[B] 6 MOTOR(+)
MOTOR(-) 5 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B] 7 MOTOR(-)
RJ45 RJ45 LAN MOTOR(-) 6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8 MOTOR(-)
RXN
RXP
TXN
TXP
DPYC-1.5
*1
NR203PF-VVS1.25,3.5m 1 1
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m
1
AC TXP TXP SPU_RF_D-A 7 アカ RED 9 SPU_RF_D-A
PM-31
2 AC TXN 2 2 TXN SPU_RF_D-B 8 ﾐﾄﾞﾘ GRN 10 SPU_RF_D-B
＊３）最長 100m (延長するときは接続箱RJB-001が必要 )

6
3 GND RXP 3 3 RXP RF_SPU_D-A 9 クロ BLK 11 RF_SPU_D-A
＊６）LANアダプタおよびB-アダプタの外部接続は別図参照。
IV-2sq.
*1
RXN 6 6 RXN RF_SPU_D-B 10 シロ WHT 12 RF_SPU_D-B
＊５）保護アース用ケーブルは緑／黄の絶縁線を使用のこと。
NR203PF-VVS1.25,3.5m
SG 11 ﾐﾄﾞﾘ(太) GRN[B] 13 SG
RJ45 GND 12 アカ(太) RED[B] 14 GND
整流器 *2
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
HUB-100
TXP J609 TB802
NOTES
5 PR-62 (-)
RECTIFIER (+)
TXN 2 IF_VIDEO IF_VIDEO
パフォーマンスモニター
3
2
1
RXP 3 GND GND
ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞﾊﾌﾞ
2
PE *1
RXN 6
SWITCHING HUB
IV-2sq.
*1
*2: OPTION.
J680
DPYC-1.5
*1
15-563,1.5m MPYC-7
HUB-100 *2
GYRO_R2 1 GYROCOMPASS
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m
IV-2sq.
*1
2
SWITCHING HUB
GYRO_R1
GYRO_S1 3
RJ45
8
6
3
2
1
GYRO_S2 4
*1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY.

PE *1
J9
GYRO_S3 5
IV-8sq.
NC
6
RXN
RXP
TXN
TXP
GYRO_T
LAN1
24R_IN
3 PE
2 AC
1 AC
7
+24V_IN
GYRO_FG
15-565,1.5m
POWER
EC-1010
RJ45 LAN2
DPYC-1.5
1
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m
1
*1
TXP TXP J608
TTYCS-4
LAN ADAPTER
TXN 2 2 TXN AD_DATA-H 1 A-D CONVERTER
*1
*6
RXP 3 3 RXP AD_DATA-C 2
RXN 6 6 RXN AD_CLK-H 3
NC 8 8 NC AD_CLK-C 4
DVI-D/D DVI1 RADAR UNIT J602
3
2
1
J3 SINGLELINK5M,5m J204 1 1 KEY_TXD-B J601
*2
*1
*5: USE GRN/YEL WIRE FOR PROTECTIVE EARTH.

DVI0TX2_N 1 1 DVI0TX2_N 2 2 KEY_TXD-A NC 1
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m
RS-232C CABLE
PE
AC
AC
DVI0TX2_P 2 2 DVI0TX2_P 3 3 KEY_RXD-B RX 2 PC
POWER
*1
IV-2sq.
*4: USE 3A BREAKER IN SHIP'S MAINS SWITCH BOX.

A_GND 3 3 A_GND 4 4 KEY_RXD-A TX 3
4 4 PWR_SW_OUT 5 5 PWR_SW NC 4
RS-232C
NC NC
J9
TXP 1 NC 5 5 NC PWR_SW_GND 6 6 GND GND 5
DPYC-1.5
TXN 2 NC 6 6 NC 7 7 +12V NC 6
24R_IN
RXP 3 NC 7 7 NC 8 8 GND NC 7
+24V_IN
*1
RXN 6 NC 8 8 NC 9 9 SYS_FAIL-H NC 8
表示部
3
NC 8 DVI0TX1_N 9 9 DVI0TX1_N 10 SYS_FAIL-C NC 9
LAN ADAPTER
DVI0TX1_P 10 10 DVI0TX1_P J622 *1
*3: 100m MAX. JUNCTION BOX RJB-001 IS REQUIRED FOR EXTENSION.

A_GND 11 11 A_GND 1 SYS_ACK-H J605
XH10P-DS9P,2m
12 12 2 SYS_ACK-C HDG-A 1
TTYCS-1T HDG SENSOR
MONITOR UNIT
NC NC
P (IEC-61162-2)
EC-1010 *2 *6 GND
TX5
RX5-
RX5+
13 13 HDG-B 2
J5
NC NC
VCC 14 14 VCC HDG_C0MMON 3
GND 15 15 GND
EC-1000C
NC 16 16 NC J606
DVI0TXD_N 17 17 DVI0TXD_N NAV-A 1
*1
-2PL700A
*2
DVI0TXD_P 18 18 DVI0TXD_P NAV-B 2
IV-2sq.
NFKVV-SB0.3
RPU-016
A_GND 19 19 A_GND NC 3
チャート制御部
NC 20 20 NC J607
NC 21 21 NC LOG-A 1
24R
24V
TX-
TX+
RX-
RX+
*6: REFER TO ANOTHER DIAGRAM FOR EXTERNAL CONNECTION OF LAN ADAPTER AND B-ADAPTER.
TS13
A_GND 22 22 A_GND LOG-B 2
23 23 NC 3
CHART PROCESSOR UNIT
DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_P
レーダー制御部
(-)
(+)
DVI0TXC_N 24 24 DVI0TXC_N J619
ARPA-A 1
DSUB9P-DSUB9P COM1
RS232 ARPA-B 2
*2 *6
EC-1020
-L5.0M,5m
NC 1 1 DCD NC 3
RADAR PROCESSOR UNIT
B-ADAPTER
MU-231CE(FCR-2817/2827)
MU-201CE(FCR-2117/2127)
TXD 2 2 RXD J620

RXD 3 3 TXD KEYBOARD(AT) TRK_TD-A 1
GND 5 5 GND CLOCK 1 TRK_TD-B 2
NOT USED
IV-2sq.
*1
NC 9 9 RI DATA 2 TRK_RD-A 3
PE *1
NC 3 TRK_RD-B 4
IV-8sq.
GND 4 GND 5
4
J502/J522 J501/J521 CONTROL HEAD +5V 5 J621

1 10m 1 10m 1 TXD+ RSV1_TD-A 1
TD_DN-H TO_UP-H 1
2 2 TD_DN-C TO_UP-C 2 2 TXD- RSV1_TD-B 2
3 3 RD_DN-H RD_UP-H 3 3 RXD+ MOUSE/KEYB GND 3
操作部
4 4 RD_DN-C RD_UP-C 4 4 RXD- KEYBOARD_DATA 1 RSV2_TD-A 4

5 5 NC PWR_SW 5 5 PWRIN MOUSE_DATA 2 RSV2_TD-B 5
RCU-016 *2
6 6 GND GND 6 6 GND GND 3 GND 6

CONTROL UNIT
7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12VDC +5V_FUSED 4 J611

8 8 GND GND 8 8 GND KEYBOARD_CLOCK 5 AIS_TD-A 1
9 9 NC SYS_FAIL-H 9 NC 9 NC MOUSE_CLOCK 6 AIS_TD-B 2
10 10 NC SYS_FAIL-C 10 NC AIS_RD-A 3
J507/J527 VGA1 USB1 AIS_RD-B 4
SYS_FAIL-H 1 1 R_VIDEO VCC 1 AIS_GND 5
SCALE
DRAWN 2 G_VIDEO 2
SYS_FAIL-C 2 D- *1
DWG.No.
CHECKED
APPROVED
SYS_ACK-H 3 3 B_VIDEO D+ 3 J612 TTYCS-7
SYS_ACK-C 4 4 NC GND 4 ALARM1_0 1 ALARM SYSTEM
P
5 NC ALARM1_1 2
RCU-015FEA
RCU-020 OR
CONTROL UNIT
操作部
6 GND USB2 ALARM2_0 3

P
Feb. 27 '07
Feb. 27 '07
7 GND VCC 1 ALARM2_1 4

8 GND D- 2 ACK_OUT_0 5
P
9 NC 3 ACK_OUT_1 6
MASS
D+
10 GND GND 4 OPERATOR_FITNESS_0 7
P
C3559-C01-A 11 GND OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8
12 NC USB3 EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9
P
T.TAKENO
13 H_SYNC VCC 1 GND 10

Mar.14'07 R.Esumi
5
kg
T.YAMASAKI
14 Y_SYNC D- 2 SYS_FAIL-H 11
P
15 NC D+ 3 SYS_FAIL-C 12
GND 4
J616(NH)
USB4
RW-4864,φ9.5
REF.No.
GND 1 MASTER RADAR

VCC 1 OP_HD_IN 2
D- 2 GND 3
D+ 3 OP_BP_IN 4
GND 4 GND 5
OP_TRIG_IN 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_IN 8
J617(NH)
03-173-6001-0
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 SUB DISPLAY1
OP_HD_1 2
GND 3
(FULL-LOG)
OP_BP_1 4
GND 5
NAME
TYPE
名称
OP_TRIG_1 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_1 8
J618(NH)
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 SUB DISPLAY2
6
OP_HD_2 2
GND 3
(SEMI-LOG)
相互結線図
OP_BP_2 4
GND 5
OP_TRIG_2 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_2 8
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827
自動衝突予防援助レーダー
S-1
D
C
B
A
注記
440VAC
110/115/ *1 *2
220/230VAC, DPYC-1.5 RU-3305
1φ,50-60Hz
1φ,50/60Hz
1φ,50-60Hz TB901
DPYCY-1.5 *1
PE *1
100VAC,1φ, 1 100VAC-H
440VAC,3φ,50Hz
220VAC,3φ,50Hz
110VAC,3φ,60Hz
(FOR RSB-098/099)
IV-8sq.
50-60Hz
UNIT
電源
*1
2 100VAC-C
POWER
IV-8sq.
*1
SUPPLY
制御部
氷結防止用 3 NC
PE *5
空中線部
100-115/200-230VAC,
220/440VAC,3φ,60Hz
200/380VAC,3φ,50Hz
PSU-007
1
保護ｱｰｽ
DPYC-1.5
*1
*1 FOR DE-ICER *4
K2 XK1
TPYC-2.5
ANTENNA UNIT
1 U U 1
RADAR
100-230VAC
2 V V 2
1φ,50-60Hz
*1
ANT_ON_N 2
+12V 1
3 W W 3 TB902
TB1
IV-3.5sq. RW-4747
RU-6522
RU-5693
TPYCY-2.5
RU-5466-1
DPYC-2.5
*1
1 U
トランス
DPYC-1.5 *1 2 V
RU-1803 *2
TRANSFORMER
3 W
PE *1
J613 *3
IV-8sq.
J604
100/115/
RSB-098/099/100/101/102
TX_HV 1 RW-9600,φ22,15/30/40/50m TB801
2 GND
220/230VAC
TB1 NC 2 チャ BRN 1 TX_HV
1φ,50-60Hz
STP CABLE(CAT5)
1 H J610 2 NC
2 C 24V_PLUS 1 ダイ(太) ORG[B] 3 24V_PLUS
1 ANT_12V_ON
24V_MINUS 2 キ(太) YEL[B] 4 24V_MINUS
MOTOR(+) 3 アオ(太) BLU[B] 5
RJ45
6
3
2
1
MOTOR(+) 4 ハイ(太) GRY[B] 6
MOTOR(-) 5 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B] 7
DPYC-2.5
*1
RJ45 RJ45 LAN MOTOR(-) 6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8
RXN
RXP
TXN
TXP

P5E-4PTX-BL,2m
IV-2sq.
*1
1 AC TXP 1 1 TXP SPU_RF_D-A 7 アカ RED 9 SPU_RF_D-A
PM-51
6
NOTES
アカ(太)
整流器
RJ45 GND 12 RED[B] 14 GND
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
TXP 1 J609 TB802
HUB-100
2

HUB-100 *2
*2: OPTION.
5 PR-62 (-)
RECTIFIER (+)
RXP 3 GND GND
3
2
1
PE *1
6
SWITCHING HUB
RXN
SWITCHING HUB
IV-2sq.
*1
J680
MPYC-7
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m
15-563,1.5m GYRO_R2 1 GYROCOMPASS
IV-2sq.
*1
GYRO_R1 2

GYRO_S1 3
DPYC-1.5
*1
RJ45
8
6
3
2
1
GYRO_S2 4
PE *1
J9
GYRO_S3 5
IV-8sq.
NC
6
RXN
RXP
TXN
TXP
GYRO_T
15-565,1.5m
LAN1
24R_IN
3 PE
2 AC
1 AC
GYRO_FG 7
+24V_IN
POWER
RJ45 LAN2
1
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m
1
*1
TXP TXP J608
EC-1010 *6
DPYC-1.5
TTYCS-4
LAN ADAPTER
TXN 2 2 TXN AD_DATA-H 1 A-D CONVERTER
*1

DVI1 RADAR UNIT J602
3
2
1
J3 03S9657,5m J204 1 1 KEY_TXD-B J601 *1

DVI0TX2_N 1 1 DVI0TX2_N 2 2 KEY_TXD-A NC 1
*2
RS-232C CABLE
PE
AC
AC
DVI0TX2_P 2 2 DVI0TX2_P 3 3 KEY_RXD-B RX 2 PC
POWER
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m
*1
IV-2sq.
A_GND 3 3 A_GND 4 4 KEY_RXD-A TX 3
RS-232C
NC NC
J9
TXP 1 NC 5 5 NC PWR_SW_GND 6 6 GND GND 5
TXN 2 NC 6 6 NC 7 7 +12V NC 6
DPYC-1.5
24R_IN
3
RXP 3 NC 7 7 NC 8 8 GND NC 7
+24V_IN
RXN 6 NC 8 8 NC 9 9 SYS_FAIL-H NC 8
*1
表示部

NC 8 DVI0TX1_N 9 9 DVI0TX1_N 10 SYS_FAIL-C NC 9
LAN ADAPTER
DVI0TX1_P 10 10 DVI0TX1_P J622
11 11 1
*1
A_GND A_GND SYS_ACK-H J605
XH10P-DS9P,2m
TTYCS-1T HDG SENSOR
MONITOR UNIT
NC NC
P (IEC-61162-2)
EC-1010 *2 *6 GND
TX5
RX5-
RX5+
13 13 HDG-B 2
J5
NC NC
VCC 14 14 VCC HDG_C0MMON 3
GND 15 15 GND
EC-1000C
NC 16 16 NC J606
IV-2sq.
*1
-2PL700A
*2
NFKVV-SB0.3
RPU-016
NC 20 20 NC J607
NC 21 21 NC LOG-A 1
24R
24V
TX-
TX+
RX-
RX+
TS13
A_GND 22 22 A_GND LOG-B 2
23 23 NC 3
DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_P
DVI0TXC_N 24 24 DVI0TXC_N J619

ARPA-A 1
MU-231CE(FCR-2837S)
MU-201CE(FCR-2137S)
DSUB9P-DSUB9P COM1
RS232 ARPA-B 2
*2 *6
EC-1020
-L5.0M,5m
NC 1 1 DCD NC 3
B-ADAPTER
TXD 2 2 RXD J620
NOT USED
IV-2sq.
*1
4
PE *1
NC 3 TRK_RD-B 4
IV-8sq.
GND 4 GND 5
J501 XH10P-W-5P-A J502/J522 J501/J521 XH10P-DS-5P,10m CONTROL HEAD +5V 5 J621
KEY_TXD-B 1 1 TD_DN-H TO_UP-H 1 1 TXD+ RSV1_TD-A 1
KEY_TXD-A 2 2 TD_DN-C TO_UP-C 2 2 TXD- RSV1_TD-B 2
KEY_RXD-B 3 3 RD_DN-H RD_UP-H 3 3 RXD+ MOUSE/KEYB GND 3
KEY_RXD-A 4 4 RD_DN-C RD_UP-C 4 4 RXD- KEYBOARD_DATA 1 RSV2_TD-A 4
PWR_SW 5 5 NC PWR_SW 5 5 PWRIN MOUSE_DATA 2 RSV2_TD-B 5
GND 6 6 GND GND 6 6 GND GND 3 GND 6
+12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12VDC +5V_FUSED 4 J611
GND 8 8 GND GND 8 8 GND KEYBOARD_CLOCK 5 AIS_TD-A 1
NC 9 9 NC SYS_FAIL-H 9 NC 9 NC MOUSE_CLOCK 6 AIS_TD-B 2
NC 10 10 NC SYS_FAIL-C 10 NC AIS_RD-A 3
SCALE
DRAWN USB1 AIS_RD-B 4
*2 RCU-016
CONTROL UNIT
操作部
J507/J527 VGA1
DWG.No.
CHECKED
APPROVED
SYS_FAIL-H 1 1 R_VIDEO VCC 1 AIS_GND 5
SYS_FAIL-C 2 2 G_VIDEO D- 2
*1
P
Feb. 27 '07
Feb. 27 '07
RCU-015FEA
RCU-020 OR
CONTROL UNIT
操作部
5 NC ALARM1_1 2
P
7 GND 1 ALARM2_1 4
MASS
VCC
8 GND D- 2 ACK_OUT_0 5
P
C3561-C01-A 9 NC D+ 3 ACK_OUT_1 6
P
T.TAKENO
11 GND OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8
Feb.16'07 R.Esumi
USB3
5
kg
T.YAMASAKI
12 NC EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9
P
P
REF.No.
GND 4
J616(NH)
USB4 RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 MASTER RADAR
VCC 1 OP_HD_IN 2
D- 2 GND 3
D+ 3 OP_BP_IN 4
GND 4 GND 5
OP_TRIG_IN 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_IN 8
03-173-6002-0
J617(NH)
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 SUB DISPLAY1
OP_HD_1 2
GND 3
(FULL-LOG)
NAME
TYPE
名称
OP_BP_1 4
GND 5
OP_TRIG_1 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_1 8
6
J618(NH)
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 SUB DISPLAY2
相互結線図
OP_HD_2 2
GND 3
(SEMI-LOG)
OP_BP_2 4
FCR-2137S/2837S
GND 5
OP_TRIG_2 6
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_2 8
S-2
D
C
B
A
440VAC
注記
100-115/
200-230VAC
1φ,50-60Hz
1φ,50-60Hz
110/115/ *1
RADAR
*2
220/230VAC, DPYC-1.5 RU-3305
1φ,50-60Hz TB901
DPYC-1.5
*1
DPYC-2.5
*1
100VAC,1φ, DPYCY-1.5 *1 1 100VAC-H
トランス
50-60Hz
*1
2 100VAC-C
1
RU-1803 *2
3 NC
PE *5
氷結防止用
空中線部
TRANSFORMER
IV-8sq.
*1
保護ｱｰｽ
FOR DE-ICER *4
STP CABLE(CAT5)
IV-3.5sq.
RSB-096/097
ANTENNA UNIT
2
1
RW-4747
TB1
*3
J613 RW-9600,φ22
6
5
4
3
2
1
TX_HV 1 15/30/40/50m TB801
TB4
TB1 NC 2 チャ BRN 1 TX_HV
03S9778,1.5m
1 H J610 2 NC
CCN-003/004
MOTOR(+) 3 アオ(太) BLU[B] 5 MOTOR(+)
RJ45
6
3
2
1
MOTOR(+) 4 ハイ(太) GRY[B] 6 MOTOR(+)
MOTOR(-) 5 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B] 7 MOTOR(-)
LAN MOTOR(-) 6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8 MOTOR(-)
RXN
RXP
TXN
TXP

RJ45 P5E-4PTX-BL,2m RJ45
PM-31
保護ｱｰｽ
6
*1
PE *5 IV-8sq.
NOTES
アカ(太) 14
整流器
RJ45 GND 12 RED[B] GND
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
TXP 1 J609 TB802
HUB-100
*2: OPTION.
2
5 PR-62 (-)
RECTIFIER (+)
RXP 3 GND GND
3
2
1
RXN 6
SWITCHING HUB
*1
J680
1
MPYC-7
GYRO_R2 GYROCOMPASS
GYRO_R1 2

3
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m RJ45
GYRO_S1
8
6
3
2
1
GYRO_S2 4
GYRO_S3 5
NC
6
RXN
RXP
TXN
TXP
GYRO_T
LAN1
3 PE
2 AC
1 AC
GYRO_FG 7
15-565,1.5m
POWER
LAN2
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m *1
J9
TXP 1 1 TXP J608
2 2 1
TTYCS-4
TXN TXN AD_DATA-H A-D CONVERTER
24R_IN
+24V_IN

3
2
1
J3 03S9657,5m J204 1 1 KEY_TXD-B J601 *1

24R_IN
+24V_IN
EC-1010 *6 GND
LAN ADAPTER TX4
RX4-
RX4+
1 1 2 2 KEY_TXD-A
J9
J4
DVI0TX2_N DVI0TX2_N NC 1
RS-232C CABLE
PE
AC
AC
DVI0TX2_P 2 2 DVI0TX2_P 3 3 KEY_RXD-B RXD 2 PC
POWER
A_GND 3 3 A_GND 4 4 KEY_RXD-A TXD 3
RS-232C
NC NC
NC 5 5 NC PWR_SW_GND 6 6 GND GND 5
-2PL700A
*2
NC 6 6 NC 7 7 +12V NC 6
NC 7 7 NC 8 8 GND NC 7
100-230VAC
3
NC 8 8 NC 9 9 SYS_FAIL-H NC 8
表示部
24R
24V
TX-
TX+
RX-
RX+

DVI0TX1_N 9 9 DVI0TX1_N 10 SYS_FAIL-C NC 9
DVI0TX1_P 10 10 DVI0TX1_P J622
11 11 1
*1
A_GND A_GND SYS_ACK-H J605
XH10P-DS9P,2m
TTYCS-1T HDG SENSOR
MONITOR UNIT
NC NC
*2 *6
NFKVV-SB0.3 TS13 EC-1020
B-ADAPTER
P (IEC-61162-2)
NC 13 13 NC HDG-B 2
VCC 14 14 VCC HDG_GND 3
OR
GND 15 15 GND
EC-1000C
16 16 J606
または
NC NC
RPU-016
HUB-100 *2
NC 20 20 NC J607
21 21 LOG-A 1
SWITCHING HUB
NC NC
J9
TXP 1 A_GND 22 22 A_GND LOG-B 2
2 23 23 NC 3
TXN DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_P

24R_IN
*2
RXP 3 DVI0TXC_N 24 24 DVI0TXC_N J619
+24V_IN
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m
RXN 6 ARPA-A 1
8 DSUB9P-DSUB9P COM1
LAN ADAPTER NC RS232 -L5.0M,5m ARPA-B 2
NC 1 1 DCD
*2 *6
NC 3
EC-1010(No.2)
MU-231CE(FCR-2817/2827)
MU-201CE(FCR-2117/2127)
TXD 2 2 RXD J620

NOT USED
NC 3 TRK_RD-B 4
4
GND 4 GND 5
J501 J502/J522 J501/J521 XH10P-DS-5P,2.3m CONTROL HEAD +5V 5 J621
XH10P-W-5P-A
KEY_TXD-B 1 1 TD_DN-H TO_UP-H 1 1 TXD+ RSV1_TD-A 1
10/20m,φ9
KEY_RXD-B 3 3 RD_DN-H RD_UP-H 3 3 RXD+ MOUSE/KEYB GND 3
+12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12VDC +5V_FUSED 4 J611
NC 10 10 NC SYS_FAIL-C 10 NC AIS_RD-A 3
USB1 AIS_RD-B 4
*2 RCU-016
CONTROL UNIT
操作部
J507/J527 VGA1
SCALE
DRAWN 1 R_VIDEO 1 AIS_GND 5
SYS_FAIL-H 1 VCC
DWG.No.
CHECKED
APPROVED
*1
P
5 NC ALARM1_1 2
RCU-015FEA
RCU-020 OR
CONTROL UNIT
操作部
Jul. 23 '07
Jul. 23 '07

P
8 GND 2 ALARM3_0 5
MASS
D-
P
9 NC D+ 3 ALARM3_1 6
P
C3559-C03- B
T.TAKENO
P
5
kg
T.YAMASAKI
13 H_SYNC 1 GND 10
Jul.24'07 R.Esumi
VCC
P
GND 4
J616(NH)
REF.No.
USB4 RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 MASTER RADAR
VCC 1 OP_HD_IN 2
D- 2 GND 3
D+ 3 OP_BP_IN 4
GND 4 GND 5
OP_TRIG_IN 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_IN 8
03-173-6006-0
J617(NH)
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 SUB DISPLAY1
OP_HD_1 2
GND 3
(FULL-LOG)
OP_BP_1 4
NAME
TYPE
名称
GND 5
OP_TRIG_1 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_1 8
J618(NH)
RW-4864,φ9.5
6
GND 1 SUB DISPLAY2

OP_HD_2 2
(SEMI-LOG)
相互結線図
GND 3
OP_BP_2 4
GND 5
OP_TRIG_2 6
GND 7
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
OP_VIDEO_2 8
S-3
CCN-003/004 (FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827)
D
C
B
A
注記
440VAC
100-115/
200-230VAC
1φ,50-60Hz
1φ,50-60Hz
220VAC,3φ,50Hz
(FOR RSB-098/099)
110/115/ *1
RADAR
*2
220/230VAC, DPYC-1.5
RU-3305
220/440VAC,3φ,60Hz
1φ,50-60Hz
DPYC-1.5
*1
TB901
DPYC-2.5
*1
DPYCY-1.5 *1
1
100VAC,1φ, 1 100VAC-H
トランス
50-60Hz
*1
2 100VAC-C
RU-6522
110VAC,3φ,60Hz RU-5693
440VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-5466-1
RU-1803 *2
3 NC
PE *5
氷結防止用
空中線部
200/380VAC,3φ,50Hz TPYC-2.5
*1
TRANSFORMER
保護ｱｰｽ
FOR DE-ICER *4
IV-8sq.
*1
STP CABLE(CAT5)
IV-3.5sq.
ANTENNA UNIT
2
1
3
2
1
RW-4747
TB1
TB2
UNIT
電源
POWER
YM-L1500
MM-L1500
制御部
PSU-007
*1
K2 XK1 TB3 TB902
3ACVT214029
3ACVT214029
TPYCY-2.5
1 U U 1 1 1 U
6
5
4
3
2
1
RSB-098/099/100/101/102
ANT_ON_N
2 V V 2 2 2 V
TB4
2
SUPPLY +12V 1
3 W W 3 3 3 W
TB1
CCN-003/004
2ABVT1202D-L2000T0
*3
J613

RW-9600,φ22
TX_HV 1 15/30/40/50m TB801
J604
チャ 1
2 GND
TB1 NC 2 BRN TX_HV
03S9778,1.5m 1 H 2
J610 NC
1 ANT_12V_ON
NOTES
MOTOR(+) 3 アオ(太) BLU[B] 5
RJ45
6
3
2
1
MOTOR(+) 4 ハイ(太) GRY[B] 6
保護ｱｰｽ
MOTOR(-) 5 ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) PPL[B] 7
*2: OPTION.
2
LAN MOTOR(-) 6 シロ(太) WHT[B] 8
RXN
RXP
TXN
TXP
RJ45 P5E-4PTX-BL,2m RJ45
PM-51
*1
PE *5 IV-8sq.
6

アカ(太) 14
整流器
RJ45 GND 12 RED[B] GND
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
TXP 1 J609 TB802
HUB-100
5 PR-62 (-)
RECTIFIER (+)
RXP 3 GND GND
3
2
1
RXN 6
SWITCHING HUB
*1
J680
1
MPYC-7
GYRO_R2 GYROCOMPASS
GYRO_R1 2
3
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m RJ45
GYRO_S1
8
6
3
2
1
GYRO_S2 4

GYRO_S3 5
NC
6
RXN
RXP
TXN
TXP
GYRO_T
LAN1
3 PE
2 AC
1 AC

GYRO_FG 7
15-565,1.5m
POWER
LAN2
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m *1
J9
TXP 1 1 TXP J608
2 2 1
TTYCS-4
TXN TXN AD_DATA-H A-D CONVERTER
24R_IN
3 3 2
+24V_IN
RXP RXP AD_DATA-C
3
3
2
1

J3 03S9657,5m J204 1 1 KEY_TXD-B J601 *1
24R_IN
+24V_IN
EC-1010 *6 GND
LAN ADAPTER TX4
RX4-
RX4+
1 1 2 2 KEY_TXD-A
J9
DVI0TX2_N DVI0TX2_N NC 1
RS-232C CABLE
PE
AC
AC
DVI0TX2_P 2 2 DVI0TX2_P 3 3 KEY_RXD-B RXD 2 PC
POWER
A_GND 3 3 A_GND 4 4 KEY_RXD-A TXD 3
RS-232C
NC NC
NC 5 5 NC PWR_SW_GND 6 6 GND GND 5
-2PL700A
*2
NC 6 6 NC 7 7 +12V NC 6
NC 7 7 NC 8 8 GND NC 7
100-230VAC
NC 8 8 NC 9 9 SYS_FAIL-H NC 8
表示部
24R
24V
TX-
TX+
RX-
RX+
DVI0TX1_N 9 9 DVI0TX1_N 10 SYS_FAIL-C NC 9
DVI0TX1_P 10 10 DVI0TX1_P J622 *1
A_GND 11 11 A_GND 1 SYS_ACK-H J605
XH10P-DS9P,2m
TTYCS-1T HDG SENSOR
MONITOR UNIT
NC NC
*2 *6
J4 NFKVV-SB0.3 TS13 EC-1020
B-ADAPTER 13 13 HDG-B 2
P (IEC-61162-2)
NC NC
VCC 14 14 VCC HDG_GND 3
OR
GND 15 15 GND
EC-1000C
16 16 J606
または
NC NC
RPU-016
HUB-100 *2
NC 20 20 NC J607
21 21 LOG-A 1
SWITCHING HUB
NC NC
J9
TXP 1 A_GND 22 22 A_GND LOG-B 2

2 23 23 NC 3
TXN DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_P

24R_IN
4
*2
3 DVI0TXC_N 24 24 DVI0TXC_N J619

+24V_IN
RXP
P5E-4PTX-BL,2m
RXN 6 ARPA-A 1
MU-231CE(FCR-2837S)
MU-201CE(FCR-2137S)
8 DSUB9P-DSUB9P COM1
NC RS232 -L5.0M,5m ARPA-B 2
LAN ADAPTER
NC 1 1 DCD
*2 *6
NC 3
EC-1010(No.2)
TXD 2 2 RXD J620

NOT USED
NC 3 TRK_RD-B 4
GND 4 GND 5
J501 J502/J522 J501/J521 XH10P-DS-5P,2.3m CONTROL HEAD +5V 5 J621
XH10P-W-5P-A 1 1 TXD+ RSV1_TD-A 1
KEY_TXD-B 1 TD_DN-H TO_UP-H 1
10/20m,φ9
SCALE
DRAWN 3 3 RXD+ MOUSE/KEYB GND 3
KEY_RXD-B 3 RD_DN-H RD_UP-H 3
DWG.No.
CHECKED
APPROVED
+12V 7 7 +12V +12V 7 7 +12VDC +5V_FUSED 4 J611
Jul. 23 '07
Jul. 23 '07

10 NC AIS_RD-A 3
MASS
NC 10 NC SYS_FAIL-C 10
USB1 AIS_RD-B 4
*2 RCU-016
CONTROL UNIT
操作部
J507/J527 VGA1
C3561-C02- B SYS_FAIL-H 1 1 R_VIDEO VCC 1 AIS_GND 5
*1
T.TAKENO

5
kg
T.YAMASAKI
SYS_ACK-C 4 4 NC GND 4 ALARM1_0 1

Jul.24'07 R.Esumi
P ALARM SYSTEM
5 NC ALARM1_1 2
RCU-015FEA
RCU-020 OR
CONTROL UNIT
操作部

P
REF.No.
8 GND D- 2 ALARM3_0 5
P
9 NC D+ 3 ALARM3_1 6
P
P
P
GND 4
03-173-6007-0
J616(NH)
USB4
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 MASTER RADAR
VCC 1 OP_HD_IN 2
D- 2 GND 3
D+ 3 OP_BP_IN 4
GND 4 GND 5
NAME
TYPE
名称
OP_TRIG_IN 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_IN 8
J617(NH)
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 SUB DISPLAY1
6
OP_HD_1 2
GND 3
(FULL-LOG)
相互結線図
OP_BP_1 4
GND 5
OP_TRIG_1 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_1 8
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
J618(NH)
RW-4864,φ9.5
GND 1 SUB DISPLAY2
OP_HD_2 2
GND 3
(SEMI-LOG)
OP_BP_2 4
S-4
GND 5
CCN-003/004 (FCR-2137S/2837S)
OP_TRIG_2 6
GND 7
OP_VIDEO_2 8
1 2 4 5 6
S-5
3
スイッチングハブ
SWITCHING HUB
HUB-100
LAN LANアダプタ LAN ADAPTER EC-1010(No.1) LAN LANアダプタ LAN ADAPTER EC-1010(No.2) *2
CONVERTER CONVERTER
RJ45 E1 J1 J3 J5 J7 RJ45 E1 J1 J3 J5 J7
1 TXP RX1+ RX3+ RX5+ RX7+ 1 TXP RX1+ RX3+ RX5+ RX7+
P P P P P P P
2 TXN RX1- RX3- RX5- RX7- 2 TXN RX1- RX3- RX5- RX7-
3 RXP TX1+ TX3+ TX5+ RL2NC 3 RXP TX1+ TX3+ TX5+ RL2NC
A 4 NC TX1- TX3-
P
TX5-
P
RL2C 4 NC
P
TX1- TX3- TX5-
P
RL2C
P P P P
5 NC TX1 TX3 TX5 RL2NO 5 NC TX1 TX3 TX5 RL2NO
P
6 RXN GND GND GND GND 6 RXN GND GND GND GND
7 NC GND GND GND 7 NC GND GND GND
P P
J9 J2 J4 J6 J8 J9 J2 J4 J6 J8
RX2+ RX4+ RX6+ RX8+ RX2+ RX4+ RX6+ RX8+
P P P P P
RX2- RX4- RX6- RX8- RX2- RX4- RX6- RX8-
NFKVV-SB0.3-2PL700A
TX4+ RL1NC RL3NC TX4+ RL1NC RL3NC
*1 P *1 P P
TX4- RL1C RL3C TX4- RL1C RL3C
DPYC-1.5 (+) DPYC-1.5 (+)
24VDC +24V_IN TX4 RL1NO RL3NO 24VDC +24V_IN TX4 RL1NO RL3NO
(-) P (-)
24R_IN GND GND GND GND 24R_IN GND GND GND GND
(+) +24V_IN
NAV EQUIPMENT (No.1) TTYCS-1 *1
ANEMOMETER TTYCS-1 *1
AIS TTYCS-4 *1
TTYCS-1 *1
ECHO SOUNDER TTYCS-1 *1

ANY RADAR ALARM TTYCS-1 *1
TTYCS-1 *1
ROUTE BACKUP TTYCS-4 *1
SPEED PILOT TTYCS-4 *1
WAYPOINT APPROACH TTYCS-1 *1
OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMIT TTYCS-1 *1
DEPTH BELOW LIMIT TTYCS-1 *1

+24V_IN GND GND
24R_IN GND (-) 24R_IN GND
*1 *1
IV-2sq. IV-2sq.
NFKVV-SB0.3-2PL700A
B-ADAPTER
OPERATOR FITNESS
(LANアダプタが1台のとき)
(WHEN A LAN ADAPTER ONLY USED)
LOG/DAX LOG
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*1 TS13
Bアダプタ
J1
DPYC-1.5 (+) +24V
RX+
RX-
TX
GND
(-) 24R B-ADAPTER
J36 J34 J32 J28-31
RX+
EC-1020 *2 ST01+ ST11 ST19 REF+
P
RX- ST01- GND GND A IN
RXRET ST02+ ST12 ST20 SG
P P
TX+ ST02- GND GND REF-
TX- ST03+ ST13 NC REF+
P
RET ST03- GND NC A IN
ST04+ ST14 NC SG
P
ST04- GND NC REF-
C J39 J38 J37 J35 J33
A1OUT S0 ST05+ ST15 NC
A1GND S1 ST05- GND NC
A2OUT S2 ST06+ ST16 NC
P
A2GND S3 ST06- GND NC
LOG+ R1H ST07+ ST17 NC
P P
LOG- R1L ST07- GND NC
FA+ R2 ST08+ ST18 NC
*3 TTYCS-4 *1
TTYCS-1 *1

NAVIGATION SENSOR ALARM TTYCS-1 *1
OPERATOR FITNESS TTYCS-1 *1

TTYCS-1 *1
BUZZER STOP TTYCS-1 *1

P P
FA- NC ST08- GND NC
*1
IV-2sq.
LOG
(200P/NM)
(NORMAL CLOSE)
(NORMAL CLOSE)
(NORMAL CLOSE)
(NORMAL CLOSE)
(OPEN=OPERATOR NOT ACTIVE)
(NORMAL CLOSE)
OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS
ALARM ACK
D
注記
＊２）オプション。 DRAWN TITLE
＊３）NMEAのLOGが使用不可のとき。 Jun. 11 '07 T.YAMASAKI EC-1010/1020
CHECKED 名称
NOTE Jun. 11 '07 T.TAKENO LANアダプタ、B-アダプタ
APPROVED
*1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. Jun.12'07 R.Esumi FCR-2117SER. 相互結線図
*2: OPTION. SCALE MASS NAME
*3: WHEN NMEA LOG DATA IS NOT AVAILABLE. kg LAN ADAPTER, B-ADAPTER
DWG No.
C3559-C02- B INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
S-6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 EC-1010を追加するとき EC-1010 ADDED 2 EC-1020を追加するとき EC-1020 ADDED
LAN LANアダプタ LAN ADAPTER EC-1010(No.1) LAN LANアダプタ LAN ADAPTER EC-1010
CONVERTER CONVERTER
スイッチングハブ RJ45 E1 J1 J3 J5 J7 スイッチングハブ RJ45 E1 J1 J3 J5 J7
SWITCHING HUB P
1 TXP RX1+
P
RX3+
P
RX5+
P
RX7+ SWITCHING HUB P
1 TXP RX1+
P
RX3+
P
RX5+
P
RX7+
HUB-100 2 TXN RX1- RX3- RX5- RX7- HUB-100 2 TXN RX1- RX3- RX5- RX7-
3 RXP TX1+ TX3+ TX5+ RL2NC 3 RXP TX1+ TX3+ TX5+ RL2NC
A 4 NC TX1- TX3-
P
TX5-
P
RL2C 4 NC TX1- TX3-
P
TX5-
P
RL2C
P P P P
5 NC TX1 TX3 TX5 RL2NO 5 NC TX1 TX3 TX5 RL2NO
6 RXN GND GND GND GND 6 RXN GND GND GND GND
P P
J9 J2 J4 J6 J8 J9 J2 J4 J6 J8
RX2+ RX4+ RX6+ RX8+ RX2+ RX4+ RX6+ RX8+
P P P P P P P
RX2- RX4- RX6- RX8- RX2- RX4- RX6- RX8-
TX4+ RL1NC RL3NC TX4+ RL1NC RL3NC
*1 P *1 P
TX4- RL1C RL3C TX4- RL1C RL3C
DPYC-1.5 (+) (+)
24VDC +24V_IN TX4 RL1NO RL3NO 24VDC DPYC-1.5 +24V_IN TX4 RL1NO RL3NO
(-) (-) P
24R_IN GND GND GND GND 24R_IN GND GND GND GND
AIS TTYCS-4 *1
TTYCS-1 *1
ECHO SOUNDER TTYCS-1 *1

TTYCS-1 *1
LOG/DAX LOG TTYCS-1 *1
AIS TTYCS-4 *1
TTYCS-1 *1
TTYCS-1 *1
LOG/DAX LOG TTYCS-1 *1
+24V_IN GND +24V_IN GND
24R_IN GND 24R_IN GND
NFKVV-SB0.3-2PL700A
OPERATOR FITNESS
ANY RADAR ALARM
OPERATOR FITNESS
ECHO SOUNDER
B
HUB-100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*1 TS13
LANアダプタ LAN ADAPTER EC-1010(No.2) Bアダプタ
J1
LAN *2 DPYC-1.5 (+) +24V
RX+
RX-
TX
GND
CONVERTER (-) 24R B-ADAPTER
RJ45 E1 J1 J3 J5 J7 J36 J34 J32 J28-31
1 TXP RX1+ RX3+ RX5+ RX7+ RX+
EC-1020 *2 ST01+ ST11 ST19 REF+
P P P
2 TXN RX1- RX3- RX5- RX7- RX- ST01- GND GND A IN
3 RXP TX1+ TX3+ TX5+ RL2NC RXRET ST02+ ST12 ST20 SG
P P P P
4 NC TX1- TX3- TX5- RL2C TX+ ST02- GND GND REF-
P P
5 NC TX1 TX3 TX5 RL2NO TX- ST03+ ST13 NC REF+
P
6 RXN GND GND GND GND RET ST03- GND NC A IN
7 NC GND GND GND ST04+ ST14 NC SG
P P
8 NC GND GND GND ST04- GND NC REF-
J2 J4 J6 J8 J33
C J9
RX2+ RX4+ RX6+ RX8+
J39
A1OUT
J38
S0
J37
ST05+
J35
ST15 NC
RX2- RX4- RX6- RX8- A1GND S1 ST05- GND NC
TX4+ RL1NC RL3NC A2OUT S2 ST06+ ST16 NC
*1 P P P
TX4- RL1C RL3C A2GND S3 ST06- GND NC
DPYC-1.5 (+) TX4 RL1NO RL3NO
+24V_IN LOG+ R1H ST07+ ST17 NC
(-) P P
24R_IN GND GND GND GND LOG- R1L ST07- GND NC
ROUTE BACKUP TTYCS-4 *1
OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMIT TTYCS-1 *1
+24V_IN GND FA+ R2 ST08+ ST18 NC
LOG TTYCS-4 *1
TTYCS-1 *1

TTYCS-1 *1
OPERATOR FITNESS TTYCS-1 *1

TTYCS-1 *1
TTYCS-1 *1
BUZZER STOP TTYCS-1 *1

P P
24R_IN GND FA- NC ST08- GND NC
*3
(200P/NM)
OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS

(NORMAL CLOSE)
(NORMAL CLOSE)
(NORMAL CLOSE)
NAVIGATION SENSOR ALARM
(NORMAL CLOSE)
(OPEN=OPERATOR NOT ACTIVE)

ANY RADAR ALARM
(NORMAL CLOSE)
ALARM ACK
D
注記
＊２）オプション。 DRAWN TITLE
＊３）NMEAのLOGが使用不可のとき。 Jun. 11 '07 T.YAMASAKI EC-1010/1020 (CCN-003/004)
CHECKED 名称
NOTE Jun. 11 '07 T.TAKENO LANアダプタ、B-アダプタ
APPROVED
*1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. Jun.12'07 R.Esumi FCR-2117SER. 相互結線図
*2: OPTION. SCALE MASS NAME
*3: WHEN NMEA LOG DATA IS NOT AVAILABLE. kg LAN ADAPTER, B-ADAPTER
DWG No.
C3559-C04- B INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
S-7
S-8
S-9
S - 10
S - 11
S - 12
S - 13
S - 14
S - 15
S - 16
S - 17
S - 18
S - 19
S - 20
S - 21
S - 22
S - 23
S - 24
S - 25
S - 26
S - 27

FCR2XX7 Service Manual C

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

FCR2XX7 Service Manual C

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MARINE RADAR/ARPA

・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : JAN . 2009

Function (Italic font: Related page in OM)

Others (Not requested by new standard)

Documents for V06.03 software are;

Name Type Code number Remarks

Parts Name: New IMO modification kit

The kit includes a CD-ROM, manuals, a label, and documents as below.

Parts name Type Code Number

Parts name Type Code Number

How to update software from V05.xx to V06.03

1. Update the software referring to the attachment.

Fig.1 CAT label on EC-1000C

FCR-2xx7 Update Procedure

Unit Type Software Version (previous/current)

Software Update Procedure

1. Copy following data onto a floppy disk or

2. Photograph following settings.

(a) Picture settings

(d) Forwarding distances

Updating Radar Processor Unit, RPU-016

1. Turn off the radar processor unit, RPU-

8. Turn off the unit and on it again.

9. Carry out Factory Test and verify the

Updating ECDIS Processor Unit, EC-1000C

1. Turn off the ECDIS processor unit, EC-

1. Insert the chart radar program CD-ROM

If you have the display right, click No and

6 After changing the settings, take step 4.

Select CHART RADAR and click Next.

Confirm that Password is ecdis, and then

Choose Destination Location

Confirm that Destination Folder is

Tick following boxes.

C-Map ed3 Settings

Tick this box, and then click Next.

Hasp Pin number is 2371.

Then, click Next.

Leave these settings unchanged.

Set Control Head parameters

Default settings are;

This page selects the monitor type.

Monitor Port is set to COM1.

Set IP addresses and parameters

When two chart radars are installed, one is set

When updating the system from V05.xx to

In other cases, tick only Log files.

NOTE: Ticked file is deleted after updating.

InstallShield Wizard Complete

Select Yes, I want to restart computer now,

The system reboots automatically. Wait until

Confirm that the indicated software version is

Restore the backup data. (This step may be

Enter radar parameters.

If the “SHIP.PRM corrupted” message

1) Menu > Initial Settings > Navigation

If the “SHIP.PRM corrupted” message is like

1) Menu > Initial Settings > Navigation

2) Menu > Initial Settings > Optimization

Select Initial Settings > Installation parameters

Verify that the page includes ETA display

ETA display: Type Approved (default)